X

Inspiring Ideas for Modern Home

Want to add something different to your house? The good thing is that mid-century style furniture knows no age and does the job perfectly well. 

You can add some bold patterns to your plain and dull wall or accessorize the cabinets with some contemporary utensils or glazed pottery. Or, you can just add something like a classy mid-century leather sofa that straight away catches anyone’s attention who enters the room. 

Moreover, contemporary furniture like mid-century modern style leather sofas might just transform the look of your living room. And many options are available on the market to choose from. However, if you don’t know much about antique pieces, don’t worry. We have curated a list of recommendations available for you.

Without further ado, let’s dig in!

Top 19 Mid Century Modern Leather Sofas

Mid Century Modern Leather Sofa

1. Wells Leather Sofa

Wells Leather Sofa
This Wells mid-century design sofa looks both modern and rustic, as its cushions are tucked into a slim frame, supported by sturdy iron legs. Its leather is kiln-dried and benchmade using plywood molding or similar techniques to prevent wrapping. And the cushions made from high-resilience foam ensure a relaxing seating or resting experience. 

With an 84"Wx35.5" Dx31"H dimension, this sofa is a perfect fit for any average-sized room. It is tailored with top-stitching, and the armrests are made of French seams, giving it a classy appearance while also ensuring its durability. Besides, the application of waxes and oils during the finishing results in an heirloom patina, which provides the leather with a glowing look. 

It also features FSC certified wood from forests that are managed responsibly to be socially beneficial and environmentally sound. Plus, this mid-century sofa comes in three fabric colors, which are bound to create a timeless look for your room. 

2. Vonanda Faux Leather Sofa Couch

Looking to impress your guests? Then this classy mid-century modern sofa by Vonanda, made of handmade leather, will get the job done for you. 

The company promises timeless comfort through select leather upholstery and wide arms while also creating a casual yet modern vibe. Its sumptuous cushioned soft backrest and seat with high-density foam provide consistent support and relaxed comfort. Hence, it provides ample space for you to call over your friends and enjoy a game of football together!

Apart from being classy-looking, its Eucalyptus and plywood-made frame provides structural stability and durability. The slender metal legs of this sofa adds to its exquisite elegance and are also easy to clean underneath. 

Lastly, you can easily disassemble and transport it through small hallways and doors, which is an added advantage. Overall, this mid-century design modern sofa is well crafted that aligns with your room decor and guarantees matchless comfort to render a stunning look to the room. 

3. POLY & BARK Sorrento 85" Sofa

This mid-century modern style sofa by POLY & BARK is made of semi-aniline or full-aniline dyed Italian tanned leather cushioning. The cognac tan dyed non-pigmented leather highlights the hide's natural beauty. Over time with use, the leather will scuff to develop into a vintage patina, giving it a glossy and classy look.  

Moreover, the leather used for the different parts are unique and vary in color depth. The entire body is supported on a solid wood frame, and cushions are made of high-density foam with polyester filling, which deliver a relaxing sitting experience. Likewise, its legs are made of solid rubberwood with a simple walnut finish for a classy and modern look. 

4. Antone 81'' Square Arm Sofa

Antone 81'' Square Arm Sofa
If you’re searching for a soft, cozy, and welcoming vibe in your room, then this square arm mid-century sofa by Antone may just be the perfect choice. You can spend hours relaxing in front of the TV with your friends or family, thanks to the space on offer.

It’s made from genuine leather with intricate details, meaning the high-quality construction makes it both long-lasting and maintaining them won't be much of an issue. Additionally, the buttoned back cushions, chic tapered legs, and high-quality finishes contribute to the charm. 

Apart from that, its removable cushions make sure you won’t lose anything precious under the sofa. The company provides its customers an option to customize the finishes for the wooden legs, with more than 30 options to choose from. 

5. Ambler 81” Square Arm Sofa

Ambler 81” Square Arm Sofa
Spice up your room with this vibrant-colored square arm sofa by Ambler. This mid-century modern style model aligns well with almost any room with its sleek yet attractive design. It’s available in six colors and with three materials options for tapestry. Not only that, but you can also customize the leg finishing according to your preferences. 

We loved how the velvety cushion makes for a soft, feathery texture. Besides, the clean and simple look with a generous seating space make it an attractive choice for anyone. 

Maintaining a mid-century sofa sometimes feels like a herculean task, as the corners and cushions attract a lot of dust. However, cleaning this couch feels like a breeze, thanks to its removable back and seat cushions. Plus, its square arm design and edgy solid wood legs allow you to play with more geometry in the space. 

6. Ari 56.5" Genuine Leather Square Arm Loveseat

Ari 56.5" Genuine Leather Square Arm Loveseat
This mid-century modern style sofa keeps it classy and straightforward without compromising comfort. It is a perfect piece that stands out within your room and is worth considering if you want a premium-looking yet affordable furniture. Plus, it delivers an opulent look to your living room or office space if used as a central piece. 

Italian-made top-grain leather upholstery is the secret behind its flawless look, and the utmost comfort comes from high-density foam-filled leather cushions. Just picture yourself sitting on a sofa with a glass of champagne in your hand and classic songs being played in the background. Heavenly, right? 

Aside from that, it’s made from kiln-dried hardwood, which provides some much-needed sturdy support and makes it durable in the long run. 

7. Aric 82" Genuine Leather Square Arm Sofa

Aric 82" Genuine Leather Square Arm Sofa

When solid hardwood is combined with top-grain Italian leather, it results in this luxurious leather arm sofa by Aric. This intricately designed furniture adds a stylish look as well as comfort to your living room, thanks to its feather and polyester fiber cushions. 

Furthermore, maintaining it won’t strain your nerves, as you can simply remove the cushions and back seat and use a dry duster to remove the dirt. You don’t have to stress much about the dust deposited on cushions and leather covers either.

The plywood and pine frame provides a sturdy and robust look to this sofa, and the solid wooden leg makes for added durability. Moreover, the webbing suspension ensures that the cushion doesn’t get displaced. Hence, you can now immerse yourself in elegance and comfort without the fear of slipping off the couch. 

Overall, this mid-century design sofa offers comfort and relaxation and creates an elegant look for your living room or office space. 

8. Lancaster Loveseat

Lancaster Loveseat combines a classic-looking handcrafted mid-century sofa with a modern design that brings a sophisticated vibe to your living room without burning a hole in your pocket. Its detailed design and sleek design will make it the showstopper of any room. 

If you are a fan of intricate and small details, the metallic accent of the legs will appeal to you. Available in three color options, it features a button-tufted and single-cushion seat so that you can select one according to your room design. Also, its low-profile multi-density Dacron wrapped foam cushions ensure that you feel comfortable whenever you remain seated. 

This hand-crafted and hand-stitched lawson sofa has the potential to win you over at first sight and is a suitable choice if you’re looking for a mid-century modern sofa. 

9. Signature Design Leather Loveseat

This modern and designer loveseat by Signature design makes your room look stylish and elegant while bringing in comfort. Wrapped in caramel faux leather, it sets the scene for comfortable and easy living. 

Its quality-built cushion is made of high-density foam and polyester upholstery, which adds to the comfort. Beyond that, its metal seat base and faux wood finish account for optimum durability. 

Aside from a 2-over-2 cushion, it features non-reversible back seat cushions, track arms, chic stitching, bolster pillows, and tapered legs, which add to the mid-century flair. A pro-tip: try adding white faux fur on to this sofa for optimum comfort. 

Lastly, disassembling and reassembling this model feels like a walk in the park. Simply attach the legs, and it’s ready to use. 

10. Renae Genuine Leather 89″ Tuxedo Arm Sofa

Renae Genuine Leather 89″ Tuxedo Arm Sofa
Now feel like a Hollywood personality and transform your living or office space with this mid-century modern style tuxedo sofa by Renae. With mesmerizing details and elegant silhouette, this Italian-made furniture looks more exquisite with time. 

The cushions are filled with duck feathers and high-density foam, which ensure you can glide over it for a comfortable experience. Other than that, it boasts a full-aniline or semi-aniline dyed-leather tapestry for a vintage and unique patina, giving your sofa a super glossy look. 

Also, with the availability of several color options and diamond-tufted backdrops, it perfectly delivers the essence of mid-century decor. 

It is available in five color variants so that you can choose a perfect shade for your space. Long story short, the solid construction, top-quality materials, and a refined look merge in this piece to make your room space stand out. 

11. Deirdre Leather Sofa 

Deirdre Leather Sofa

A stylish mid-century sofa in the center of the room always acts as a focal point, whether you’re watching a cool Netflix show, hosting a game night, or dining with your friends. And this Deirdre leather sofa, designed with sleek features, tapered legs, and a high-density cushion, will serve the exact purpose and help you indulge in style and comfort. 

You can keep things classy and simple with this piece. Its genuine leather merges with a solid wood frame to make it fashionable and durable. Additionally, cleaning the sofa also won’t feel like a daunting task when you can just dust the dirt away, thanks to its removable cushions. 

12. Lidia 88'' Genuine Leather Square Arm Sofa

Lidia 88'' Genuine Leather Square Arm Sofa
The mid-century furnishings enthusiasts will love this leather square arm mid-century sofa by Lidia. Beautiful genuine leather combined with clean lines and tapered legs makes this piece a must-have in your rooms. It will add sophistication and elegance to any home design, so it’s up to you if you want a regular product or one that stands-out from others. 

In terms of durability, it features a kiln-dried and solid hardwood frame combined with high-density foam padding that ensures lasting comfort. Also, the mid-century modern style sofa is available in two gorgeous brown shades or a sumptuous gray tone, which perfectly complements the brown walnut legs for an inspired and cohesive design. The Italian-made leather makes it more durable and easy to clean. 

So overall, this timeless piece of furniture is all you need for style and comfort. It's time you get cozy and feel inspired. 

13. Rivet Aiden Mid-Century Modern Tufted Loveseat Sofa (74”)

Rivet Aiden Mid-Century Modern Tufted Loveseat Sofa (74”)
Rivet is an Amazon brand that delivers a mid-century-inspired sleek leather sofa designed to impress. Now you get a combination of comfort along with durability with this beautiful piece of engineering.  

A tufted bench seat cushion, tapered wood legs, softback cushions provide just the right mixture of contemporary edge and comfort. Along with that, a solid hardwood frame supports high-density foam padding for extended durability.  

Like other leather sofas in this extensive list, cleaning this unit is easy due to its removable and reversible back cushion. Its seat cushion is fixed to the base to secure its position and doesn’t slip down. Plus, it comes in a wide selection of colors, so you can select one that fits your room design. 

Lastly, an added advantage of this mid-century modern sofa is that it’s easy to assemble. You require only 15 minutes or less to assemble this piece. 

14. Zinus Juan Mid-Century 65 Inch Armless Sofa

Zinus is committed to developing high-quality, comfortable, and easy-to-assemble love seats and leather sofas that deliver elegance to your living room and fulfill your desire to create a dream house. A person on the search for a mid-century modern sofa will love this product. 

The upholstery is made of durable fabric, whereas its padded and soft velvet back cushions are made of high-density foam, ensuring a comfortable seating experience. Plus, its hardwood frame wrapped in supportive foam cushioning makes it long-lasting and durable. And it comes with a one-year warranty. 

An added advantage of this mid-century sofa is its easy and tool-free assembling. Just follow the instruction manual that comes along, and you can assemble the couch in just 15 minutes without using any tools. Lastly, its removable soft back cushions allow you to clean the unit efficiently within minutes. 

15. Modway Engage ‎EEI-1180-CIT

The mid-century modern sofa by Modway is upholstered in quality polyester fabric and complements well with your room design. It serves as a center of attraction where you can just relax, watch movies and sports, have a conversation, or sip a steaming cup of coffee or tea. 

In terms of construction, it boasts four cherry-colored solid wood legs to deliver a sturdy feel. Along with that, a solid hardwood frame supporting foam back cushion ensures long-lasting durability and added comfort. It always adds a welcome presence in your home. 

Many mid-century sofas available on the market require to call upon a specialist or a professional to assemble, or if you’re able enough, it will take a large chunk of your quality time. However, assembling this piece feels like a breeze, as it takes only 10 minutes to do so and wouldn’t need additional tools.  

16. Nouhaus Module, Sleeper Sofa Bed Couch

With a futon sofa in your room, there is always a struggle to accommodate other furniture or beds there. But, with a Nouhaus Module convertible mid-century sofa, there is no struggle, discomfort, or settling on a design. With several furniture options and designs, it has taken the comfort of mid-century living to a whole new level. By merging a room couch with a proper mattress, it feels good as it looks. 

The mattress is breathable and made of supportive latex, so days of hard crossbars, unforgiving foam, and squeaky springs are long gone. As the piece is “bed at night and sofa at day”, it brings everlasting comfort and functionality into your space. 

Now you can easily impress your guests with this beautiful and elegant piece of furniture. Being a luxury piece, you will get upholstery in high-quality and won’t have to settle for less. It also comes in various fabric colors and designs, you can choose one that suits your vibe best. 

Many convertible couches present complicated setups and hardware, which badly hurts your fingers. With this unit, you can turn your mid-century sofa into a bed in just three steps. One of those steps is just throwing out your velvet cushions. That’s how easy it is. When the product reaches you, attach the legs to make it a sofa and lounge, in style. 

17. Lisson Genuine Leather 85” Square Arms Sofa

Lisson Genuine Leather 85” Square Arms Sofa
In Vintage Brown or Cognac Tan, the square arms sofa by Lisson adds a welcoming vibe to your home. This sofa is so mid-century with a solid wood frame and tapered wooden legs in a gorgeous honey brown shade. You won’t go any wrong with this piece if you’re looking to bring on mid-century styles to the living room. 

With respect to comfort, it doesn’t go any wrong with high-density foam cushions supported by Pirelli webbing. Along with that, a pigmented leather tapestry will soothe your eyes. As time goes on, it won't lose its charm, and the gorgeous vintage tone along with full-grain leather highlights its beauty and continues to do so. 

18. Mary Genuine Leather Reclining 52″ Square Arm Loveseat

Mary Genuine Leather Reclining 52″ Square Arm Loveseat
The stylish and comfortable piece of mid-century modern furnishing is an option to look at. A top-notch grain leather and high-density foam ensure durability as well as comfort. Whether you are trying to have a nap after a hectic day of work or just want to have a bucket of popcorn to watch a cool movie, it’s sure to deliver the intended relaxation. Now push back and relax, as this couch can recline.  

With respect to the design, hand-stitched details deliver an enchanting look, complemented by the tapered legs with a coffee brown finish. Its appealing color easily blends in and adds warmth to your site. 

19. DHP Paxson Convertible Futon Couch Bed

A mid-century convertible couch bed by DHP Paxson boasts a stylish linen upholstery with a low-profile design that makes it ideal for small living spaces. Being a convertible couch with a soft back cushion, it easily and quickly transforms into a bed. Also, its spit-back design provides multiple comfort positions so that you can have a sound sleep there. 

Other than that, its legs are made of solid wood that supports the sofa, and padding underneath it protects your beautiful floor from scratches and scuffs. Its assembly is also pretty simple, which takes 10 minutes. 

How To Select A Mid-Century Modern Style Leather Couch?

The primary characteristics of any mid-century modern sofa are its simplicity, shape, natural finishes, impressive crafting, clean lines, tapered legs, and bold colors. With a comprehensive collection of mid-century leather sofas available on the market, you will definitely get overwhelmed. So, continue reading to know more about looking for while shopping for a mid-60s couch. 

Simple is beautiful and this furniture is a worthy example of that. If you do not want fastidious and vibrant colored furniture, it is the one you need. Clean lines, sleek design is essential here. These couches are full of angles, texture, woods, shape, graphic design, leather, lines, and whites. 

High-level crafting ensures the longevity of your furniture and modern designers are paying utmost importance to the fact. For genuine vibes, we recommend having natural wood finishes amongst which teak is the most popular material to be used in these. 

When buying a sofa, ensure the frame is durable enough and the cushion is comfortable enough. Also, if you have seen a picture of a mid-century room, you might have got an impression of floating pieces. The reason is short and tapered legs. 

Furthermore, many mid-century style couches are easy to clean so you would prefer that. And, top-grain leather upholstery tends to get better with time in many of them, so it would also be a viable choice. 

vintage ambient and sofa

Final Words

Comfortable and appealing, a mid-century modern-style sofa is worthy of investment. So, if you value sleek design elegance and want to create some antique vibes for the living space, you know what to choose. These pieces are available in an offline or online shop at varying prices so that you can purchase from anyone accordingly. 

We hope our extensive list of options gives you some ideas about elements that you could incorporate into home decor. Hope you’ll be able to select an ideal mid-century sofa for your home. We’ll continue to bring you valuable ideas to make your space appealing and glamorous. So, keep an eye on this space. 

Till the next time, goodbye!

Related Articles

20 Super Modern Chester Sofas

17 Best Furniture Stores in Houston

Is it really that difficult to keep your kitchen utensils organized in one place? Well, not if you get your hands on a kitchen microwave shelf. 

Besides helping you store your microwave oven, it can provide ample space to keep other important utensils and appliances. Plus, microwave shelves can add a touch of aesthetic appeal to the décor, which is why they have become a must-have addition in all modern American kitchens. 

Hence, going for such a product would certainly be a wise decision. However, with the availability of many options on the market, choosing the ideal model that is space-efficient and easy to assemble is easier said than done. 

That's why we thought of making your job easier by putting together a list of the top 11 microwave shelves currently available on the market. So, without further ado, let's begin! 

Best Microwave Shelves

Best Microwave Shelves

1. Mind Reader ‎MIC3T-SIL

Mind Reader has been manufacturing sturdy kitchen organization accessories for years, and the ‎MIC3T-SIL 3-Tier Microwave Shelf Counter Unit is yet another great addition to its repertoire. It is packed with practical features that help keep your items organized, leaving you more space in the kitchen. 

Mind Reader Microwave Rack with Storage, Bakers Rack,...
  • Sleek and Modern Design: The chrome plated metal...
  • Maximize Counter Space: With three tiers of storage, this...

Why Did We Like It?

For starters, it sports a sturdy construction. It can withstand the weight of microwaves and other kitchen utensils without breaking a sweat. On top of that, it features rubber feet for a non-slip grip, so rest assured, the chances of this metal shelving breaking down are next to zero. 

Besides microwave ovens, this metal rack is also an ideal choice for storing other appliances such as toaster ovens. Not to mention, it comes in handy as an organizer for pantry and kitchen condiments, accessories, and utensils. It's safe to say that it is a multi-purpose product and can be used anywhere to create more storage and space. 

Additionally, it has a minimalistic design and can easily complement the décor of most kitchens. So, no matter what your kitchen looks like, this item will surely help you to add a touch of class to it.   

What Could've Been Better?

While testing out this product for this review-based guide, we couldn't find any significant drawbacks initially. However, soon we realized that it could fit only small appliances on its shelf. So, if you have an extra-large microwave, this product is not for you. 



Pros

  • Sports a durable construction
  • Has a minimalistic design
  • Creates extra space in kitchens
  • Delivers good value for money




Cons

  • Can fit only small appliances



2. Bestier Kitchen Baker's Rack

Next up, we have the Kitchen Baker's Rack from Bestier, a brand that is dedicated to designing high-quality products that meet our day-to-day needs. Sporting 4 spacious shelves, this product provides ample room for storing a range of kitchen items such as plates, vegetables, and appliances. Read the next few sections to know about it in detail. 

Bestier Kitchen Bakers Rack Microwave Stand Kitchen Cart on...
  • 【Multifunctional Bakers Rack】 This kitchen bakers rack...
  • 【Pull-out Design & Extra S Shaped Side Hooks】This wood...

Why Did We Like It?

To begin with, this wooden rack comes with 3 extra side hooks that make it easy for hanging dry towels, cooking spoons, and other small utensils. With this product, you can store and pick appliances such as microwave ovens and stand mixers more smoothly, thanks to the pull-out design of its top-shelf. 

As far as the build quality is concerned, it is made using a top-quality P2 board, making it sturdy and waterproof. Coupled with this is a solid metal frame that is strong enough to withstand the weight capacity of your kitchen tools. Hence, you can rely on this product for a very long time. 

What's more, it comes with both movable wheels and adjustable feet, so you can assemble it the way you want without a hassle. Most importantly, besides being useful in the kitchen, this product can also be a perfect fit in garages, dorms, apartments, and other areas in need of storage. 

What Could've Been Better?

The installation is a bit tough, so you might need to hire a handyperson to assemble it. Also, the instructions provided in the manual are not clear, which makes the installation even trickier. We tried doing it ourselves, but it took a while to get it right. 



Pros

  • Sports a decent build quality
  • Can be used in other places for storage
  • Easy to store and pick appliances
  • Waterproof




Cons

  • Installation is not easy



3. Tribesigns 5-Tier Kitchen Bakers Rack

Founded in 2011 in China, Tribesign is one of the leading manufacturers of top-grade and eco-friendly furniture. On that note, allow us to introduce you to the 5-Tier Kitchen Bakers Rack from the brand that can add more storage to your kitchen, bathroom, or bedroom. 

Tribesigns 5-Tier Kitchen Bakers Rack with Hutch, Industrial...
  • 【Space Saving & Multifunctional】:This storage shelf has...
  • 【Everything In Its Place】: Come with a total of 3 bottom...

Why Did We Like It?

First and foremost, it is multifunctional and can be used as a kitchen stand, wine board, bathroom cabinet, spice rack, microwave stand, etc. Rest assured, this product is high on utility and can easily harmonize with other furniture in your room. 

Furthermore, this microwave rack sports 2 top shelves and 3 bottom shelves, making it an ideal storage option for eat-in kitchens. It is also suitable for holding ovens, microwaves, and all other kitchenware that you can think of. Needless to say, it'll help keep your kitchen tidy. 

Beyond that, it is super easy to assemble. You won't require any professional to put together this beautiful kitchen shelf, just follow the step-by-step instructions and set it up instantly! Lastly, you'll be glad to know that it is backed by an 18-month warranty, so you don't have to worry about damages for the first 18 months of its purchase. 

What Could've Been Better?

We don't have much to say against this exceptional microwave rack except cry out against its steep price tag. So, if you are on a tight budget, it may not be what you are looking for. Other than that, the product met nearly all our expectations, so we'd recommend it. 



Pros

  • Backed by an 18-month warranty
  • High on utility
  • Easy to assemble
  • Can easily complement other furniture




Cons

  • Tad expensive



4. Pusdon Extendable Microwave Oven Rack

Our next item is the Pusdon Extendable Microwave Oven Rack, which can be adjusted according to your requirements to conveniently store a microwave oven or other appliances and save space. From our experience with this product, we are confident that you'll be delighted with what it has to offer. 

PUSDON Adjustable Carbon Steel Microwave Oven Rack, 2-Tier...
  • Expandable Microwave Rack! The length of this microwave...
  • Easy to Assemble! Pusdon extendable kitchen counter shelf...
 

Why Did We Like It?

The most notable feature of this product is its durable carbon steel construction, which is both anti-rust and heat resistant. Due to its stable build quality, it has a robust load-bearing capacity of up to 55 pounds. So, you can put a variety of items on it such as bottles, microwaves, dishes, condiments, and a lot more. 

It also comes with all the necessary instructions and tools that make the installation a breeze. And unlike ordinary microwave shelf wall mounts, it doesn't require any drilling, all you need to do is place it on a flat surface, and you are good to go. 

Furthermore, we loved its retractable design that offers additional storage space and allows the rack to adapt to the size of nearly all microwaves with ease. So, no matter how big or small your microwave is, it'll fit just fine. 

What Could've Been Better?

First of all, we didn't find any information related to the warranty offered by the manufacturer, which is quite annoying. So, we can't tell for sure if it is secured by a warranty or not. Other than that, we felt it lacked visual appeal. As such, people in search of aesthetically pleasing racks may not choose this one. 



Pros

  • Sports a durable build quality
  • Installation is super easy
  • Offers decent storage space for microwaves of all sizes
  • Priced reasonably




Cons

  • Not visually appealing



5. MaxxCloud Microwave Oven Rack Kitchen Shelf

Anyone searching this list for an affordable yet sturdy microwave shelf can't go wrong by choosing the MaxxCloud Microwave Oven Rack Kitchen Shelf. Sporting an aeronautical aluminum body, this product can truly hold weight up to 80 pounds. Want to know more? Then keep reading. 

MaxxCloud Electric Oven Holders, Microwave Oven Rack Kitchen...
  • Color: Black. Material: Aeronautical Aluminum,...
  • The dimension wall-mounted rack is 23.6'' x 15.5''(60cm x...

Why Did We Like It?

An affordable combination of durability and longevity, this rack shelf has the potential to easily stand the test of time. It comes in two sizes: 23.6'' x 15.5'' and 19.6'' x 15.5'', both can bear weight up to 80 pounds. This means you can keep all your kitchen essentials in one place. 

We were also impressed by the sleek and simple design of this product, which makes it stand out from the other options mentioned on the list. The simplicity of the design further allows users to use it in different spaces such as kitchens, bedrooms, and dorm rooms without looking odd. 

Lastly, we liked that it comes at a budget-friendly price, ensuring it delivers good value for money for the customers. 

What Could've Been Better?

Unfortunately, the installation of this product is not that simple. Why? Well, for starters, it doesn't come with an assembly instruction manual. And on top of that, the seller cannot be contacted for any assistance, we tried calling them several times, but they just didn't take our call. 

Therefore, we suggest hiring a professional to get the installation done. 



Pros

  • Sports a durable construction
  • Boasts a simple yet stylish design
  • Quite spacious
  • Reasonably priced




Cons

  • Doesn’t come with assembly instructions



6. Denkee 5-Tier Kitchen Baker's Rack

Denkee is a renowned home appliance brand dedicated to developing and manufacturing high-quality and premium home essentials. And the 5-Tier Kitchen Baker's Rack from the brand is certainly no different. This product features an adjustable height design and lets you make the most of its storage space to keep your home organized and tidy. 

Why Did We Like It?

First things first, the shelf is easy to install. You can set it up in no time with just a simple wrench. Besides, all the metal storage shelves are sturdy and don't wobble at all, so you don't have to worry about it falling apart after it is assembled. 

In addition, what deserves to be mentioned is its adjustable height design, which enables you to adjust the height of each shelf as per your requirements. This shelf rack can expand your storage space both vertically and horizontally to keep it tidy, neat, and organized. 

As for the build quality, it couldn't be more sturdy. This storage shelf is constructed using dent-resistant carbon steel, which offers superior durability and strength. As a result, it can hold up to 500 pounds of weight, which is undoubtedly a lot! 

Finally, it features 360-degree universal wheels underneath, which makes it pretty convenient to move and easy to position.    

What Could've Been Better?

Honestly, this product exceeded our expectations in pretty much all aspects, and we don't have much to complain about. However, we would have preferred it if it came with small lips around its edges to ensure the items don't get pushed back and fall off. But other than that, it is truly a rack worth paying for. 



Pros

  • Sports a sturdy build quality
  • Easy to install
  • Height can be adjusted as per needs
  • Can be moved around conveniently




Cons

  • Items are prone to falling off



7. Mind Reader 1TCOUMIC-BLK

We'll not be wasting any time introducing you to Mind Reader, as we've already included a quality product from this brand. As far as the 1TCOUMIC-BLK Microwave Oven Rack Shelf is concerned, it can help keep your utensils organized, leaving you enough room in the kitchen. 

Mind Reader Kitchen Storage, Microwave Stand, Shelf...
  • Save counter space: This microwave and toaster oven rack...
  • Sturdy construction: This chrome-plated utility shelf is...

Why Did We Like It?

The minimalistic design of this product is what caught our attention right from the get-go; it ensures it can match most kitchen spaces easily. Plus, with this rack in your kitchen, you can easily keep all the essentials organized vertically, which allows for more room in the kitchen. 

The build quality is sturdy and can easily take the weight of small appliances such as small microwave ovens and toasters. On top of that, it comes with plastic hanging hooks, which you can use to hang lightweight items such as oven mitts. Sounds impressive, doesn't it? Keep reading; there's more to it. 

Since it is made of metal, it's fairly easy to clean; all you need to do is wipe it with a soft cloth, and you are done. Overall, it is one of the top-rated microwave shelves currently available on the market. 

What Could've Been Better?

A few users complained that some of the plastic hooks were missing from the box; instead of 6, they got only 2. So, make sure you check all the parts of this product thoroughly to ensure that all of them are in the box. 



Pros

  • Comes with a sturdy build quality
  • Easy to clean and maintain
  • Lightweight items can be hung using hooks
  • Sports a minimalistic design




Cons

  • Comes with only 2 plastic hooks



8. Lanliebao Stainless Steel Wall Shelf

Our next product is a microwave shelf from the house of Lanliebao, a relatively newer brand. But don't let that fool you into thinking that it is not good; in fact, it is a notch higher than a lot of options on this list. So, let's find out what it brings to the table. 

23 Inch Stainless Steel Wall Shelf Metal Shelving Heavy Duty...
  • Say Yes to A More Practical Kitchen - Get these industrial...
  • Simplify Your Routine - These supreme stainless steel wall...

Why Did We Like It?

This premium stainless wall shelf can be used to store a range of items, which saves space and the time you would spend in finding the items. It can withstand weight up to 120 pounds and can easily hold small things like plates and spoons to heavy kitchen appliances like microwave ovens and toasters. 

Furthermore, it is easy to install, comes with minimal hardware, and can be effortlessly assembled by DIYers, which is an added advantage in our opinion. What's more, it is corrosion-resistant, and hence it can last for years to come without rusting. 

However, the best part about this product is that it sports a universal design, so it can be used anywhere, from kitchens to garages to janitorial rooms, you name it. Additionally, it comes in various sizes, allowing you to pick the one that meets your requirements. 

What Could've Been Better?

While testing out the product, we noticed that the microwave oven didn't sit right due to the large gaps between the bars, which is quite disappointing. But if you can look past this minor flaw, we bet you will be most satisfied with the results. 



Pros

  • Can store a range of kitchen items
  • Easy to install
  • Can be used in different places
  • Corrosion-resistant




Cons

  • Microwave doesn’t sit right



9. Armocity Kitchen Bakers Rack

Now that we are approaching the end of the list, here's another microwave rack from Armocity that you should consider. Featuring 3-tier open storage shelves, this product allows convenient access and extra storage to various items in the kitchen. Now, obviously, there's a lot more to it, so keep reading. 

Bakers Rack for Kitchen with Storage, 4-Tier Microwave Oven...
  • 【Good Choice for Your Kitchen】Armocity microwave stand...
  • 【Kitchen Space Saver】The kitchen rack with 3-tier open...

Why Did We Like It?

Straight off the bat, it comes with 3 open storage shelves, which provides ample storage space for your dishes, spices, utensils, pans, vegetables, and other kitchen items. Coupled with this are 10 durable hooks that can be used to hang gloves and towels, making your kitchen neat and organized. 

Coming to the build, it is durable, having a high-quality wooden construction and a sturdy frame that is meant to provide stability and a long lifespan to this product. So, don't worry, it is a long-term investment that won't need to be replaced anytime soon. 

Users who are not good at pulling off DIYs will love that it is easy to install. Not only is the structure of this product simple, but it comes with a detailed instruction manual to help users install this kitchen organizer in minutes. 

What Could've Been Better?

In all honesty, the packaging choices of this shelf could have been better. When we removed the product from the packaging, it was covered in fiberglass, which was annoying. We had to clean the entire room after installing it. Apart from that, we don't have any gripe against this product. 



Pros

  • Sports a durable build quality
  • Installation is super easy
  • Can be used to store a wide variety of kitchen items
  • Eye-catching




Cons

  • Poor packaging choices by the manufacturer



10. AmGood MWS-1824

If you are searching for a product that looks different from other ordinary kitchen racks and microwave shelves, then you would love this item for sure. Meet the Stainless Steel Microwave Shelf from AmGood, which can hold up to 200 pounds to ensure your microwave stays safe and secure on it. 

AmGood Stainless Steel Microwave Shelf | NSF Certified |...
  • Dimensions: 18 in. Deep x 24 in. Long x 11.5 in. High....
  • Made with 18 gauge 430 rust resistant stainless steel.

Why Did We Like It?

The most advantageous feature of this unit is its build quality. It is made using 18-gauge stainless, which makes it tough and durable. As a result, it can easily support both lightweight and heavy ovens without any difficulty whatsoever. 

Furthermore, it is available in 3 sizes, giving you the option to choose the one that would best suit your requirements. No doubt, it will help you keep your microwave within reach. Another thing that we liked about this product is that it takes up less space than a conventional stand or a microwave cart, which is nothing less than a bonus. 

Even though it is not an adjustable shelf, it can easily withstand up to 200 pounds of weight. So, you can rest easy knowing that your microwave oven will be secure and steady. 

What Could've Been Better?

Unfortunately, this product doesn't offer much in terms of aesthetic appeal. Yes, it does look different than conventional microwave and counter space shelves but fails to add a touch of elegance to the décor. So, this is not for those that want their racks to turn heads. 



Pros

  • Tough and durable
  • Available in different sizes
  • Can hold heavy items
  • Keeps microwave oven within reach




Cons

  • No aesthetic appeal



11. Ideaglass Microwave Oven Stand

This list would have been incomplete without the Ideaglass Microwave Oven Stand. It is a handy kitchen organizer that can help you get double or even triple storage space in your kitchen. So, let's dig a little deeper. 

ideaglass Microwave Oven Stand, Toaster Rack, Spice...
  • Oven Spice Stand: Microwave rack easy to store medium size...
  • Thicken Iron: Made of 3.5mm iron. Strong, maximum load to 40...

Why Did We Like It?

The best part about this product is that it is suitable for any storage, be it a bathroom, kitchen, or study room. Besides, it is easy to assemble, so you can set it up wherever you want in less than a minute for convenient storage. 

Apart from this, it is built durably with multiple layers of protection for a longer lifespan, which is great. Even though it's not the largest in size, it is powerful and can easily withstand the weight of various items such as bottles, condiments, canned foods, and bread makers. 

What's more, it comes with an anti-slip footpad, which prevents it from slipping or scratching the counter space. Overall, it is one of the best-selling microwave shelves out there. 

What Could've Been Better?

The only thing we didn't like about this product is that it doesn't come with an adjustable shelf, which is kind of a bummer if you ask us. But apart from that, we didn't find any downsides to this otherwise exceptional product. 



Pros

  • Sports a durable build quality
  • Has an eye-catching design
  • Can be set up anywhere for storage
  • Reasonably priced




Cons

  • Doesn’t come with an adjustable shelf



 

Microwave Shelves Buying Guide

We are pretty sure that by now you’ve gone through all 11 products, so were you able to make a choice? Well, it’s not that simple. In order to purchase the right microwave shelf, there are a few factors you need to consider. Fret not; we have explained all of them in detail in the following few sections, so keep reading. 

1. Number Of Shelves

Ensure keeping an eye on the number of shelves your product comes with. If you only intend to keep the microwave and nothing else, then you can go ahead and buy a model that offers limited space. However, we would suggest opting for a model that comes with 2-3 shelves at least. 

Trust me; these shelves will come in handy as they can help you manage your kitchen utensils and appliances more efficiently. So, the more the shelves, the better. 

2. Material

Most microwave shelves are made of three materials: wood, metal, and steel. While metal and steel provide durability, wood adds class to your décor. However, the prices vary depending on the material. If you think you can take care of a wooden shelf, go with it. Otherwise, metal and steel are good options as well. 

3. Weight Capacity

While purchasing a shelf, you’ll see different weight capacities mentioned on different models. Usually, they are between 50 pounds and 500 pounds. Needless to say, the more the weight capacity of the model, the heavier items it can hold. So, make a choice depending on your needs. 

However, more often than not, it’s best to go with a model that offers a higher weight capacity instead of a lower one. 

kitchen modern scene icons vector illustration design. Verdict On Microwave Shelves

Verdict On Microwave Shelves

Before we sign off, we'd like to mention our favorites from this list. So, let’s do a recap. 

The Mind Reader is the best choice overall, as it sports a durable construction and offers good value for money. Closely following this model is the Bestier Kitchen Baker's Rack, which is a great option if you are looking for a shelf with a pull-out design and can be used in various other places for storage. 

And if you want a microwave shelf that is easy to assemble and high on utility, we highly suggest going with the Tribesigns 5-Tier Kitchen Bakers Rack

On that note, it is time to call the curtains. Until next time, bye! 

Related Articles 

13 Best Small & Compact Microwave

12 Kitchen Hutch Ideas

11 Ideas for Basement Kitchens and Kitchenettes

49 Exceptional DIY Coffee Bar Ideas for Your Cozy Home

13 Best Small & Compact Microwave

13 Tile Design Ideas For Your Countertop

11 Best Small Crock Pot

19 Smart Kitchen Storage Ideas That Will Impress You

9 Best Microwavable Dishes

A microwave oven is a straightforward appliance: it should heat and cook food without any fuss. To do that, a functioning fan motor is vital.

But what if you're encountering a fan problem?

If your GE microwave fan turns on or keeps running while you open the door, you might have a faulty door switch.

But don't throw your microwave oven out just yet! Learn how to repair a faulty switch and get your microwave working again in this article.

Microwave Fan Turns On When Door Opens [Case Closed!]

Microwave Fan Turns On When Door Opens [Case Closed!]
© Homesthetics - Monica Hewitt
The most common cause of microwave malfunctions involves the interlock switch of the door.

The interlock switch is connected to the door latch to ensure that the microwave oven only works when the door is closed.

When the interlock switch isn't functioning, the microwave doesn't recognize whether the door is open or closed.

This issue is relatively common, often caused by a faulty door switch.

To fix it, you will need to repair or replace the microwave door.

Remember

Unplug your microwave and ensure the capacitor isn't running before attempting to repair your appliance.

Faulty Door Interlock Switch

A microwave door tends to have two or three interlock switches that enable uninterrupted functioning.

A proper door switch activates power to the other microwave components and interrupts power when the door is opened.

The interlock switches are attached to the door latch. Metal prongs connected to the interlock switches detect whether the door is open or closed.

In case of an open door, the prongs are responsible for ensuring the microwave does not turn on. As a result, a faulty door latch can mess up the interlock switches' mechanism.

The primary issue with this kind of malfunction is that the interlock switches remain pressed even when you open the door.

It means that when the door opens, the lamp relay closes to turn on the light AND the fan. Usually, only the light should be triggered.

Warning

A faulty door can result in burn injuries for microwave users and can even affect nearby electronics.

Heat-Sensitive Switches

Some microwaves have switches that are heat-sensitive.

Even trace amounts of heat from your hand or other appliances can trigger the switches.

To prevent this, keep your faulty microwave away from potential heat sources (e.g., stoves, hotdog rollers) and use a cold object to press the buttons.

If this method resolves the problem, then heat may be the cause. Otherwise, it can be a different issue altogether.

How to Fix Your Microwave’s Fan

How to Fix Your Microwave’s Fan

Image Source

A faulty switch is the leading cause of a malfunctioning fan. As such, you will need to fix the microwave door to solve the problem.

To repair the door, you will need to replace the switch.

Refer to your microwave oven's manual to see where each component is.

Clean Your Door Switches

Before you attempt to repair anything in your microwave, make sure to unplug your unit to minimize injuries.

First, you will need to look into your door switches. Check the general condition of the door switches to see if there's any grime, debris, or grease.

Most people don't clean this part of the microwave when it gets dirty.

Combine water and a mild cleaner and sponge the door switch down to clean the switches.

Replace the Door Switch

Replace the Door Switch

Image Source

You can also repair a faulty door by replacing the switch. In some cases, you may have to get multiple switches replaced.

Be careful with the electrical parts and discharge the terminals of the high-voltage capacitor before you begin disassembling.

Take Note:

A microwave can still shock you even if it's unplugged!

Follow this guide if you plan on replacing or fixing your faulty door switch at home:

What You’ll Need

  • Screwdrivers with different bits
  • Replacement switch
  • Extra switches
  • Optional silicone spray

Step-By-Step Guide

  • Remove the cover at the top of the microwave. Don't attempt to open up parts of the door since you don't need access to that area.
  • Disassemble the mounting screws of the control panel and circuit board using the screwdriver. Check the microwave's manual to know which screwdriver to use.
  • Take out the panel covering the control board or the keypad. The circuit board, which controls the microwave, lies behind this panel.
  • Unscrew the screws of the front electric panel to access the switch assembly. You can find the switch assembly between the control panel and the hollow of the microwave.
  • Depending on the model, you might find multiple switches. GE microwaves typically have a monitor switch and two more relay door switches.
  • Carefully remove the switches with black ends from the switch assembly.
  • To find the faulty door switch, test each button by pressing on them.
  • If the button sinks down and gives a click, then it's working. But if the switch remains flat, you'll have to find a replacement.
  • Remove the old switch and install a new one when you've found the faulty part. Identify the exact model, buy, and install it.
  • To install the new switch, attach it to the wire connector and snap it until it fits.
  • Ensure the switch is aligned to the frame as you secure it with screws.
  • Place the control panel back and reassemble the parts back. Simply reverse the process to replace everything.
  • Plug the unit and test whether it is functioning correctly by heating room-temperature water.
  • Open and close the door to check whether the fan and the interior light are functioning correctly.
  • You know you've fixed your microwave when the fan no longer runs while the door is open.
  • If it still turns on even with the door open, there might still be issues with your unit.

Contact a professional or contact customer services if the same issue persists.

How Does a Microwave Fan Work?

Much like other electrical components of a microwave, the fan gets triggered when the door latch connects with the switch.

A faulty door switch can affect the functionality of the fans.

Most microwave models in the market have two fans. There's the vent fan that filters out the steam from the stove of the built-in microwave.

There's also a cooling fan circuit on the right-side panel that regulates the temperature of high-voltage components.

Look for the Fan Motor

You can find the motor below the oven lamp.

Most modern microwaves, like a GE microwave, have three switches.

The primary interlock switch (bottom switch) and the lamp relay on the control board need to be closed for the motor to work.

Microwave Fan Is Running FAQs

  • Below are related questions about malfunctioning microwaves:

  • Why Does My Microwave Fan Turn On by Itself?

    If you notice your microwave automatically running without your intervention, it’s most likely due to the change in temperature.

    Your microwave may have a built-in thermostat that detects temperature changes that can be harmful to your unit.

    It will set off the cooling fan and keep running until your microwave cools.

  • Is it Safe for My Microwave Fan to Turn On when the Door Opens?

    A microwave that’s running when the door is open is a potential health hazard because it emits microwave radiation.

    Exposure to high levels of microwave radiation can cause painful burns.

    However, if only the fan is on, it should be fine, as it’s a different operation with a separate switch.

  • Microwave Fan Turns On When Door Opens Conclusion
    © Homesthetics - Monica Hewitt

    Conclusion

    If your microwave is malfunctioning, it might be a case of faulty switches and latches.

    The switch may be pressed permanently, causing different electrical parts of the unit to turn on automatically.

    Repairing the microwave yourself is doable and convenient! Just be careful when accessing each component, and keep your unit unplugged.

    But if you'd rather have a new microwave, check out this article on what size microwave you need for your kitchen.

    Who doesn’t like a hot plate of food after a hectic day?

    Fortunately, you don’t need to wait for more than a few minutes for hot food with microwaves around. While heating food has become a piece of cake with microwaves, keeping the dinner plates from breaking inside the microwave is a different story altogether. 

    Regular ceramic plates cannot withstand the high temperature inside the microwaves and tend to crack and break more easily. 

    Moreover, you can’t use particular plastic or paper plates as they’ll melt or burn at high temperatures. And that’s where microwave-safe plates enter the picture. With these, you can safely heat food in the microwave without worrying about breaking the plates. 

    But, choosing suitable microwave-safe dishes can be overwhelming. So, we’re here to talk about the best microwavable dishes to help you with your decision. 

    And, without further ado, let’s begin! 

    Best Microwavable Dishes Reviews

    Using a microwave to warming a plate of homemade pilaf for lunch at home. Hot meal

    1. Amazon Basics

    The first product on our list is the dinnerware set from Amazon Basics. It is an 18-piece set that includes microwave-safe dishes and bowls. The modern and elegant design will go beautifully with any dinner table setting and is ideal for a warm and hearty meal with your family during the festive seasons.

    Sale
    Amazon Basics Dinnerware Set, Microwave and Dishwasher Safe,...
    • 18-piece dinnerware set in White Porcelain Coupe provides...
    • AB-grade porcelain combines a lightweight feel with durable...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Never judge a book by its cover. Although the saying is true, we were initially attracted to the elegant and modern design of this white coup-colored set that can go well with any modern dinner table decor. 

    And it is not just about the looks; the dinnerware material is AB-grade porcelain that is perfect for everyday use. The high-grade porcelain dinner plates and bowls are both lightweight and durable. Plus, the dinnerware set contains dinner plates, dessert or salad plates, and bowls that are enough to serve six people, making it ideal for small family gatherings.

    Additionally, the AB-grade porcelain makes the dinnerware set freezer-safe, dishwasher-safe, and microwave-safe. Not to mention how the plates and bowls can easily withstand a temperature as high as 575℉ without getting any cracks. Hence, you need not worry about cracking these plates every time you try to use them for heating the food inside a microwave. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    The only drawback to this dinnerware set is that it has only enough pieces to serve six people. A single set cannot be of any service in large family gatherings. So, if you’re planning to entertain many guests for a lovely evening dinner, you may need pieces from other sets. 



    Pros

    • AB-grade porcelain
    • Lightweight and durable
    • Modern and elegant design
    • Freezer-safe and dishwasher-safe




    Cons

    • Not suitable for big family dinners



    2. DUOLUV

    Next up is the beautiful multicolor rice bowl or soup bowl set from Duoluv, which is entirely eco-friendly. The bowls are made from organic and natural wheat straw fibers and do not contain plastics or other toxic materials, making them a sustainable and fashionable solution. 

    DUOLUV Unbreakable Cereal Bowls - Wheat Straw Fiber...
    • 【Eco-Friendly Wheat Material】Made of natural organic...
    • 【Lightweight & Unbreakable】These cereal bowls designed...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The most impressive feature of the bowls is their durability. That said, they are almost unbreakable, even if you drop them on the ground. And the sturdy dinnerware material makes them microwave and dishwasher-safe. Also, the bright colors of the bowls are beautiful. So, if you have kids at home, they’ll have a fun time eating from these colorful bowls. 

    Furthermore, they are safe for kids as they contain no harmful chemicals or plastic. The organic materials ensure the health of your kids and the entire family. Plus, they are incredibly lightweight, which makes it very easy to handle these bowls for everyday use. 

    What’s more, you can simply use soap and warm water or chuck them inside a dishwasher for a thorough cleaning. Additionally, the bowls are suitable for microwave ovens as they do not become too hot. Moreover, they are deep enough to be used as cereal bowls, rice bowls, or even soup bowls without any spills. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    Although the bowls are microwave-safe, they cannot withstand high temperatures for a long time. You won’t face any problems if you’re trying to quickly heat a bowl of soup. However, these bowls might start to melt inside the microwave in the case of more intense and prolonged heating of food. 



    Pros

    • Lightweight and durable
    • Environment-friendly
    • Dishwasher-safe
    • Multipurpose deep bowls




    Cons

    • Cannot withstand high temperatures



    3. Rapid Microwavable Cookware

    The third product on our list is the microwavable cookware set from Rapid, which makes cooking your favorite bowl of ramen much easier. Indeed, gone are the days when you needed a pan and a stove to cook delicious instant noodles.

    Rapid Ramen Cooker | Microwavable Cookware for Instant Ramen...
    • ONE TOOL TO RULE THEM ALL - You won't need stoves or boilers...
    • EASY PEASY COOKING - Enjoy hassle-free cooking with our...

    Why Did We Like It?

    This microwavable cookware is ideal for cooking ramen if you’re running late and have less time on your hands. Cooking ramen has never been easier — all you need to do is add the ramen with some water and chuck the bowl inside the microwave oven, and you’re done. It is that simple and hassle-free. 

    Also, the dinnerware material makes this bowl a perfect choice for reheating food in the oven. If you’re feeling lazy and not in the mood to cook, you can use this microwavable bowl to reheat the leftover food from last night after taking it out of the freezer. 

    Moreover, cleaning the cookware is super-easy. It is dishwasher-safe, so you can just put it inside the dishwasher if you don’t have the time to scrub it with soap and water. Thus, to sum it up, this product is excellent for microwave use and can save you a lot of time and energy while cooking. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    While the bowl is ideal for quickly whipping up a delicious and warm plate of ramen in the microwave, it is not suitable for long-term uses. So, if you’re thinking of using this bowl for heating food for years to come, think again, as it is not designed for long-term uses. 



    Pros

    • Easy cooking solution
    • Microwave-safe
    • Easy to clean
    • Perfect for reheating food




    Cons

    • Not very durable



    4. Sistema

    Moving on with our list of best microwave-safe plates, we have the microwave collection noodle bowl from Sistema. It is ideal for cooking noodles, pasta, stew, soup, and many more dishes. In other words, this versatile cooking equipment does away with the need for pots, pans, and stove tops. 

    Sistema 1109ZS Microwave Collection Noodle Bowl 1 Count...
    • Noodle Bowl designed to cook pasta, Soup, stew, and more in...
    • Steam release vent on lid allows for splatter free heating

    Why Did We Like It?

    The noodle bowl is entirely safe for use as it is made of 100% virgin plastic-free of phthalate and BPA. Also, the plastic material makes it microwave-safe. So, you need not worry about ingesting harmful chemicals every time you heat or use this bowl for cooking. 

    Another nifty addition is the easy-to-use locking clips that help keep the food fresh and hot. On that note, the product can double up as a lunchbox. Additionally, the high-grade plastic material of the noodle bowl ensures that the cookware stays cool to the touch even after reheating. It also comes with easy-lift tabs to safely open the bowl. 

    Moreover, the noodle bowl has a steam release vent on the lid, which prevents the food from splattering everywhere during heating. Thus, you can rest assured that it won’t leave behind any unwanted spots inside the microwave oven. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    Although the noodle bowl comes with easy-to-use locking clips, it is not exactly leakproof. If you’re using the bowl to store food in the freezer, you won’t face any trouble. But, if you’re planning to carry food in this bowl for traveling, be sure to pack dry food to avoid spills. 



    Pros

    • 100% virgin plastic
    • Easy-to-use locking clips
    • Dishwasher and microwave-safe
    • Steam release vent present




    Cons

    • Not leakproof



    5. Narve Wheat Straw Dinnerware Sets

    The fifth product on our list is the beautiful wheat straw 16-piece dinnerware set from Narve. It is 100% organic and eco-friendly and comes without toxic, harmful substances. In fact, the dinnerware set is BPA-free and contains food-grade PP material to make it increasingly sustainable and safe for use.

    NARVE 32 Piece Wheat Straw Dinnerware Sets | Unbreakable,...
    • Dinnerware Set: Contains 32 pieces of lightweight,...
    • Microwave and Dishwasher Safe: Plates and bowls are...

    Why Did We Like It? 

    The 16-piece dinnerware set has a rich and elegant design that can go well with any modern dinner table setting and tableware. Apart from the stylish design, the set is extremely lightweight, making it ideal for everyday use. 

    Plus, it is completely non-toxic and free of any harmful chemical substances; the wheat straw fiber makes this dinnerware 100% organic and eco-friendly. Furthermore, the material is almost unbreakable, even if you drop the plates. On that note, this durable plastic material makes it a microwave-safe dinnerware set. 

    Additionally, the set comes with 16 pieces of different plates, bowls, and drinking glasses, which you can use on different occasions. So, if you are planning a family gathering or a picnic with your kids, this dinnerware set can be a perfect choice. 

    On top of that, the manufacturer offers a 100% money-back warranty with this product. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    Getting off food stains from this dinnerware set can be a messy ordeal. It is suitable for serving kids’ food, but if you’re planning to serve spaghetti or spicy food on these plates, you’ll have difficulty removing the stains after dinner. That said, it takes up food stains very quickly and turns yellowish after a while. 



    Pros

    • Non-toxic materials
    • Durable and long-lasting
    • Lightweight and elegant design
    • 100% money-back warranty




    Cons

    • Stains easily



    6. Stone Lain Stoneware

    The next product on our list is the dinnerware set from Stone Lain, which comes with a hip and trendy stoneware design. The stoneware material offers an earthy and organic feel to the dinnerware set. The fashionable and cool design of the set makes it an ideal choice to amp up your dinner table decor. 

    Stone Lain Serenity 16-Piece Stoneware Dinnerware, 2-Tone,...
    • 16-Piece Dinnerware Set - Stoneware is hip, cool and trendy....
    • Dinnerware Service For 4 - Includes 4 round dinner plates, 4...

    Why Did We Like It?

    We were majorly attracted to the stoneware material of the dinnerware set. It is unlike any other dinnerware material that we've come across. The stoneware offers an organic look to the set that is both unique and elegant. Furthermore, the color combination of green and cream goes beautifully with the stoneware design of the dinnerware set. 

    In addition to all that, it is perfect for a small family gathering. It comes with four salad plates, four dinner plates, four bowls, and four drinking glasses. Hence, the dinnerware set is ideal for serving four people at a time at any dinner party. 

    Plus, when we talk about the stoneware material, it is not just about its elegant look but also about its high quality. The dinnerware set is made of top-quality stoneware that offers excellent durability to the pieces. And that's why this is one of the best microwave-safe dinnerware sets. It is also dishwasher-safe, so you'll hardly face any trouble cleaning it.  

    What Could've Been Better?

    Although the dinnerware set is quite attractive and microwave-safe, it is not lightweight. It weighs 23 pounds, making it heavier than other microwave-safe dinnerware sets. You need to be very careful while handling it so that you don't drop and break the set owing to its heavy weight. Hence, it is not suitable for everyday use. 



    Pros

    • Cool and trendy design
    • Plates, bowls, and mugs included
    • Organic stoneware material
    • Dishwasher and microwave-safe




    Cons

    • Not very lightweight



    7. Mora Ceramics Microwavable Kitchen Bowl

    The seventh product on the list is the microwavable dessert bowls from Mora Ceramics that come in an attractive vanilla white color. They have a solid pattern that reminds you to hit the pause down on your busy life and have a pleasant and peaceful meal. This bowl set also comes with a lead-free ceramic glaze. 

    Mora Ceramic Small Dessert Bowls - 16oz, Set of 6 -...
    • IT’S TIME TO HIT PAUSE AND EAT: This is more than a bowl....
    • LEAD FREE ALL NATURAL GLAZE: We know that lead is a poison,...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Mora ceramic plates are made from ceramic that comes with 20% stronger Paladin clay that adds to the durability of the oven-safe plates. They have no added colors or other toxic substances, so you need not worry about ingesting any harmful materials while using these bowls. These ceramic dinner plates also come naturally lead-free, ensuring your safety. 

    Additionally, the design of the bowls helps you to save space while storing them in your kitchen cupboard. You won't even need to clear up any extra space. You can just safely tuck them in a corner. The clean and modern design of the ceramic bowl also makes you enjoy your meal a little more. Also, the rounded edges of the bowls make them chip-resistant. 

    Plus, the crystallized scratch-resistant formula makes the bowls ideal for daily use. You also get superb customer service and easy refund and replacement with this product. If you are not happy with the product, you can simply contact the customer service team and apply for a refund or replacement. It is that simple. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    Even though the bowls are microwave-safe, they tend to get a bit too hot if you keep them long inside the microwave oven. They are safe for quick heating. But, if you're planning to use these bowls for prolonged and intense heating, they might crack inside the microwave. So, you have to be extra careful while using these bowls in a microwave oven. 



    Pros

    • Lead-free natural glaze
    • Crystallized scratch-resistant formula
    • 20% stronger paladin clay
    • Easy refund and replacement




    Cons

    • Bowls can get too hot



    8. ZYER Glass Casserole

    As we move on to almost the end of our list, we have the high-quality glass casserole from Zyer that is ideal for preparing microwave food. It is made from tempered glass, which is often considered the best dinnerware material for making hot food inside microwave ovens. So, it can be a great choice if you're looking to buy new oven-safe cookware. 

    ZYER Round Glass Casserole Dish With Glass Lid,Covered Glass...
    • MADE FROM TEMPERED GLASS: This glass casserole dish can...
    • 2 IN 1 DESIGN: The lids as serving dishes too so they will...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The most attractive feature of the glass casserole is that it is non-porous and doesn't attract any food stains or absorb any food odor and flavor. You don't have to worry about the glass casserole turning yellow after a while due to food stains. 

    The non-porous glass material also makes it very easy to clean the casserole. You can simply use some soap and a sponge or just put it in your dishwasher. Furthermore, the glass lid helps avoid splattering the food while cooking. It also helps to keep the food fresh and store it safely in the freezer. 

    Plus, it is an all-purpose glass casserole that can be used to cook delicious chicken stews to mouthwatering baked potatoes. It has the perfect size to whip up a sumptuous meal for your family without any hassle. Additionally, the glass casserole is a space saver. You can stack your dinner plates and bowl over the flat surface of its glass lid. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    The major drawback of this microwavable casserole is the substandard quality of the glass material. It is not made from food-grade tempered glass, which naturally questions the durability and safety of the product for preparing food inside the microwave oven. So, you might notice cracks and breaks on the glass casserole owing to its poor quality. 



    Pros

    • Clear round glass casserole
    • Comes with a glass lid
    • Non-porous
    • All-purpose cookware




    Cons

    • Substandard glass quality



    9. Homienly Wheat Straw Dinnerware Set

    Finally, the last product on our list is the wheat straw dinnerware set from Homienly that comes with 20 pieces of unbreakable microwave-safe plates, bowls, and cups. The set is reusable and 100% BPA-free. It is non-toxic, odorless, and environment-friendly. So, it can be a healthy alternative to regular ceramic plates and dinnerware sets. 

    Wheat Straw Dinnerware Sets, 20 PCS Dishes Dinnerware Set...
    • PREMIUM MATERIALS, HEALTHY LIVING: Enjoy our premium wheat...
    • 20PIECES & 4 COLORS: This dinnerware set(service for 4)...

    Why Did We Like It?

    The dinnerware set is reusable and made from sanitary wheat straw fiber, making it completely eco-friendly. The synthetic structure of the wheat straw is highly durable, which makes the dinnerware set literally unbreakable. So, rest assured, it won't break that easily if you drop it like a regular porcelain dinner plate. 

    Furthermore, the 20-piece dinnerware set is ideal for hosting a large dinner party. It is available in four different colors, adding to its attractive factor. Also, the modern style and design of the set help it go with any tableware decor. 

    And most importantly, it is extremely lightweight and safe for microwave ovens and dishwashers. It can withstand a temperature of 248℉ for five minutes inside the microwave. Additionally, you can use it safely in the dishwasher for two whole hours. It is also more than adequate for dinner parties, picnics, and even camping trips. 

    What Could've Been Better?

    The only thing that irked us a bit about the product was the size of the bowls and cups that came with the dinnerware set. When you purchase a dinnerware set, you expect cereal bowls. But, these bowls were more like dessert bowls or soup bowls at best. And, the cups were in no way like regular coffee mugs. They were much smaller, which can be an inconvenience. 



    Pros

    • 100% natural material
    • Unbreakable structure
    • Dishwasher and microwave-safe
    • Multiple uses




    Cons

    • Bowls and cups are pretty small



    Microwavable Dishes Buying Guide

    There are a number of factors at play when we talk about selecting the best microwavable dinnerware set. You can't just randomly choose a dinnerware set based on a whim. It can be a pretty time-consuming task. 

    So, to make your job easier, we have discussed some of the key features that you can consider before making the final purchase. Let's take a look! 

    1. Material 

    You get a lot of options here - stoneware, porcelain, microwave-safe plastic, wheat straw, and even-tempered glass. These materials can be perfect for cooking and heating food in the microwave. 

    Stoneware dinnerware sets are pretty tough and durable. In comparison, wheat straw dinnerware sets are 100% organic and natural without harmful toxic substances. So, it comes down to your preferences. 

    2. Utility 

    Well, if you're buying microwavable dishes, utility is a significant factor to consider. You can't use porcelain or stoneware dinner sets for cooking purposes. They can only be used for heating and serving food. 

    However, glass casseroles or wheat straw bowls can be used for whipping up quick ramen or stew. So, it is best to decide whether you want cookware or a dinnerware set before selecting and purchasing the product. 

    3. Design 

    When it comes to selecting the right microwave-safe dinnerware set, design plays a major role. You want the dinnerware set to go with your dinner table setting. 

    Beige or white-colored porcelain dinnerware sets are always a safe option. They come in a modern and elegant design that usually goes with any dining room décor. So, try to choose a dinnerware set whose design will go well with your existing tableware.

    Using the Microwavable Dishes to heat food

    Verdict

    Choosing a suitable dinnerware set that won’t break inside your microwave oven can make you waste hours on pointless window shopping. Anyhow, we hope our article has helped you gain a better perspective regarding the best microwavable dishes that are trending in the market today.

    If you ask us about our favorites, we’ll point you straight toward the Amazon Basics and the DUOLUV dinnerware sets. They are attractive, durable, and won’t crack inside the microwave oven. So, go ahead with our top picks to prepare and serve a fresh and hot oven-cooked meal today. 

    But, you can always roll up your sleeves and do some more research before choosing your favorite microwavable dinnerware set.

    And on that note, we’ll be signing off. Let us know about your favorite microwavable dinnerware sets. Take care, and we’ll see you next time! 

    Related Articles

    20 Types of Nuts

    11 Best Microwave Shelves

    13 Best Small & Compact Microwave

    9 Food Safe Wood Finish

    6 Copper Chef vs. Red Copper

    Best Chef Knife Bags Under the Microscope

    12 Kitchen Hutch Ideas That You Actually Want

    11 Ideas for Basement Kitchens and Kitchenettes

    49 Exceptional DIY Coffee Bar Ideas for Your Cozy Home

    13 Tile Design Ideas For Your Countertop

    11 Best Small Crock Pot

    19 Smart Kitchen Storage Ideas That Will Impress You

    9 Best Vacuum Sealer Bag

    Buying the perfect cookware set can often be quite tricky as there are so many options out there on the market.

    However, in this article, we have focused only on Mauviel and All-Clad. Both these brands produce some of the top-notch cookware on the market. Mauviel is a premium French cookware brand, whereas All-Clad is the biggest cookware producer in the US.

    Apart from this one fundamental difference, there are several others that you need to be aware of before making your buying decision. Both Mauviel and All-Clad are very premium brands, so you must know all the nitty-gritty before you think of investing in one.

    We are pretty confident that this informational guide will make it a lot easier for you.

    So, without wasting any further time, let us dive right into it!

    Mauviel vs. All-Clad | All You Need to Know

    Close up photo of cookware set on wooden kitchen counter

    Mauviel Cookware

    Mauviel is one of the best brands that manufactures copper cookware. It was founded by a French artisan, Charles Mauviel, in 1830. Famous chefs from all over the world strongly recommend this brand of cookware, and since it is French, it is highly classy as well.

    Not only are Mauviel products beautiful, but they are handmade too. So, when you are buying Mauviel cookware, you are buying a piece of art, in a way.

    Some of the famous Mauviel products are M'Heritage, M'Minis, M'Tradition, and M'Passion.

    Advantages Of Using Mauviel Cookware

    In this section, we will look at two of the biggest advantages that Mauviel cookware offers.

    1. Made Of Copper

    The biggest advantage of using cookware by Mauviel is that they are made of copper. Copper conducts electricity and heat better, and therefore, it becomes the number one choice for chefs and cooking enthusiasts.

    Copper heats up and cools down very quickly but it does not have the ability to retain heat, unlike stainless steel or iron. Hence, giving you the power to control the temperature. However, copper is very useful while cooking on one-pans as they require heat changes very quickly.

    Overall copper is a very good conductor of heat, but it is also a very malleable material, which is why you need to take extra care of it.

    1. Super Elegant

    Besides being very productive, Mauviel's products are also famous for their elegance; they are like showpieces for your kitchen. However, keep in mind that the exterior of these cookware demands regular polishing to maintain the shine.

    M'Heritage is Mauviel's most popular series of copper collections. Note that Mauviel M'Heritage cookware is not totally made of copper. The exterior is made of copper, whereas the cooking surface and the handles are made of stainless steel.

    As you know, copper is a highly reactive material that is why the cooking surface is made of stainless steel.

    All-Clad Cookware

    All-Clad is a famous American brand of cookware that was founded by metallurgist John Ullam. It specializes in producing stainless steel cookware.

    Moreover, it is not like most American brands that get their products manufactured in China; instead, it produces all its products right here in the United States.

    It does not matter if you are a newbie or a full-time chef; All-Clad ensures that all your cooking needs are met. Some of its famous products include Copper Core, D3, and D5. All these cookware sets are made of highly durable stainless steel.

    If you do not want stainless steel, we recommend you check out their C4 Copper collection. They feature a copper exterior and a steel handle; the combination of durability and heat conduction takes your cooking experience to the next level.

    Advantages Of Using All-Clad Cookware

    Here, we discuss two of the most significant advantages that All-Clad Cookware has to offer.

    1. Stainless Steel Makes Them Highly Durable

    All-Clad cookware is made of stainless steel, which makes them highly durable. But, do keep in mind that the core is either made up of aluminum or copper because stainless steel is not a good conductor of heat. All-Clad ensures that the exterior is made of stainless steel to offer durability, whereas the interior is made of a layer of either aluminum or copper.

    Another advantage of stainless steel is that it is non-reactive, which is why you can cook acidic food on it like tomatoes. Unlike copper, the little fragments of metal do not stick to your food.

    Furthermore, stainless steel does not require high maintenance or regular polishing to prevent rusting. It also does not require extensive cleaning; just water and dish soap do the job.

    1. Ability To Switch

    One of the biggest advantages of using All-Clad cookware is its ability to switch from stove to oven. A few recipes require this kind of treatment, and All-Clad makes sure that this happens without any problem. You can easily use them with a temperature up to 600 degrees Fahrenheit.

    Similarities Between Mauviel and All-Clad

    Even though both these brands are a lot different from each other, they have certain similarities. In this section, we are going to take a look at the top three similarities between these products.

    1. Warranty

    Both these brands offer a limited lifetime warranty on all their products. This warranty safeguards you from any fault on the manufacturer's end.

    1. Durability

    Both Mauviel and All-Clad offer extremely high-quality material for their products that ensure they last a very long time. This makes it very easy for us to handle them on a day-to-day basis.

    Mauviel and All-Clad are famous for copper material and stainless material, respectively, that are bound to last you for a lifetime. Products of these brands are often passed onto the next generation in families.

    1. Cleaning

    Even though both Mauviel and All-Clad promise to be dishwasher safe, we strongly recommend that you wash them with your hands to avoid scratching or causing any harm. Dishwashers usually generate a lot of heat which may tarnish your cookware.

    Comparison

    Below we have compared some of the key features of Mauviel and All-Clad cookware. This will give you comprehensive knowledge of both brands.

    1. Design

    Mauviel and All-Clad are poles apart when it comes to design. The most noticeable part is the exterior; All-Clad flaunts brush steel or polished exterior; on the other hand, Mauviel's exterior is made of copper.

    The stainless steel used in manufacturing All-Clad cookware is eye-catching and sophisticated, making it perfect for most kitchens. Mauvile's cookware looks more like a showpiece as the eye-catching copper takes its visual appeal to the next level. However, they may not match well with a conventional kitchen.

    The Mauviel M'Tradition lineup presents some of the most prepossessing cookware with a special kind of hammered finish, whereas all cookware by All-Clad features smooth finishes and not any hammered finish.

    However, the popular D3 collection by All-Clad offers flared edges to secure dip-free pouring. The mini D3 design is perfect for apartment kitchens. Besides maximizing space, it helps in the organization of the kitchen as well.

    Mauviel does not offer flared pouring rims in any product. Flared rims are prone to spills, but they do a fantastic job in transferring food to the plate. They also provide the option to choose from a wide variety of handles like bronze, iron, and steel, whereas in All-Clad products, handle options are limited to stainless steel only.

    While some prefer the bright stainless steel look of All-Clad, others may prefer the hammered copper polish of Mauviel cookware more.

    Overall, it does not matter which brand you choose as both of them are capable of offering functional yet prepossessing designs.

    1. Price

    Both Mauviel and All-Clad are premium cookware brands. So, do not expect budget-friendly options from them. You do not buy cookware every month so consider it as a long-term investment. The cookware that these brands provide are some of the best in the business, and they will last you a lifetime.

    One of the main reasons both these brands are so expensive is their production houses in the United States and France. Labour is not cheap in these countries, unlike China, and also the materials used for production are of top-notch quality, so you pay a premium price.

    Normally, Mauviel cookware costs more than All-Clad's, but it mostly boils down to the model that you are comparing.

    1. Frying Pan Shape

    The pan shape affects the cooking a lot, in fact the shape of a pan decides the cooking surface area, ease of use, and liquid evaporation. As far as Mauviel is considered, it looks a lot like a conventional french skillet. The cooking surface area is 7.25 inches wide, but it does not come with a pouring lip.

    Coming to the pan shape of All-Clad, it is one of the best. The lip of the pan is rounded, which lets you pour pan juices quite easily. Furthermore, the cooking area is 7 inches wide, which allows you to cook big amounts of food.

    1. Weight And Thickness

    The thickness of cookware mostly depends on the number of layers it comes with. Mauviel uses only two layers, one is of stainless steel, and the other one is of copper, whereas All-Clad uses several layers of 3 layers of metal.

    Mauviel frying pans weigh around 1851 g and are between 2.40mm and 2.45 mm thick. Mauviel frying pans are slightly heavier than All-Clad because of the copper build quality. Copper ensures that your food is less prone to steaming.

    On the other hand, All-Clad frying pans weigh just around 1253 grams and are thick by 1.66mm. It features three layers of metal which include aluminum, stainless steel, and copper and is relatively thinner than Mauviel, which means it heats up pretty quickly. All-Clad pans are great for making sauces.

    1. Cleaning

    Cleaning is an important factor while choosing the perfect cookware for your kitchen. However, most premium cookware sets are not dishwasher safe, so, we strongly recommend washing the cookware with your hands.

    Since Mauviel is made of copper, it is not at all dishwasher safe. The copper polish is bound to become dull with the passage of time. To bring back the mirror-like finish, you need to polish it on a regular basis. All in all, Mauviel cookware requires high maintenance.

    All-Clad cookware is dishwasher safe, and the stainless steel does not lose its gloss. However, we recommend you wash it with your hands since it may get scratches in the dishwasher.

    Mauviel vs. All-Clad: Top Cookware Sets Compared

    In this section, we have compared some of the best models of both Mauviel and All-Chad. We strongly advise you to read this part thoroughly to have a better understanding.

    1. M'Cook 5-Ply vs. D3

    The M'Cook by Mauviel features a 5-ply construction. More the layers, the better it is for increased warp resistance and efficient heat distribution.

    The All-Clad D3 does not fall behind either; in fact, it is one of the best stainless steel cookware available on the market. It features a 3-ply construction,  consisting of a layer of aluminum which is sandwiched among layers of stainless steel.

    The bonding and cladding technology of this cookware ups the game by providing better heat distribution. The heat flows evenly throughout the cooking surface, which eliminates the chances of the bottom portion getting deformed.

    Both models feature drip-free rims to keep your sides clean. The handles are made of stainless steel, which makes them extremely durable. Talking about the D3 model by All-Clad, it can stand a temperature of up to 600 degrees Fahrenheit whereas M'Cook By Mauviel can withstand temperatures up to 680 degrees Fahrenheit.

    We have decided to go with Mauviel's M'cook as it sports a superior built quality and can withstand higher temperatures in the oven.

    1. M'Heritage Copper Vs. Copper Core

    These two models are for people who take a keen interest in design and are also more than willing to pay for it. Mauviel's M'Heritage and All-Clad's Copper Core are two of the most expensive sets of cookware on the market. Both M'Heritage and Copper Core offer a lifetime warranty.

    Both Mauviel and All-Clad took different ways to make use of copper in their cookware. The M'Heritage copper features a 2-ply construction that includes 10% stainless steel on the interior surface and 90% copper on the exterior.

    All-Clad decided to do things a little differently by sandwiching a layer of copper between stainless steel and aluminum.

    The copper line gives it a very modern look, but Mauviel wins the race when it comes to looks. Both these models are oven-safe. However, the copper body of Mauviel only lets it work on induction cooktops.

    We have decided to go with All-Clad's Copper Core because it works on all stove tops.

    1. M'Cook 10-Piece Vs. D5 10-Piece

    Both these cookware sets deliver superb performance and are two of the most popular cookware sets available on the market.

    Mauviel's M'Cook has a slight edge over All-Clad D5 as it can withstand temperature up to 680 degrees Fahrenheit, whereas D5 can stand up to 600 degrees Fahrenheit.

    Both cookware sets feature drip-free pouring rims and are suitable for all cooktops. However, the difference lies in the contents of each set. Mauviel is kind enough to include a non-stick pan which comes in really handy when cooking fishes or eggs.

    All in all, both cookware sets do a decent job. We have decided to go with Mauviel's M'Cook as they provide a non-stick pan with its set.

    The Winner

    Both Mauviel and All-Clad offer some of the best cookware sets in the whole world. So, choosing a single brand is really quite a task. Both these brands belong to the premium category, and hence they offer exceptional design and quality. If you purchase either of them, you have already made a good choice.

    However, the perfect brand totally depends on the budget, the cooking style, and the design expectations. If you prefer the look of copper and want your frying pans to be able to heat up and cool down quickly, we suggest going with Mauviel.

    If you are more into conventional-looking cookware sets that require very little maintenance and last a lifetime, go with All-Clad.

    Our group of experts has used both these brands for a few days, and according to them, All-Clad beats Mauviel cookware. The reasons are pretty clear and simple. Firstly, All-Clad cookware is way more durable than Mauviel cookware; the stainless steel does not disappoint one bit. If you can maintain it properly, it will serve you a lifetime without any doubt.

    Even though Mauviel's products look elegant, our experts did not like that these cookware sets need to be maintained daily. You need to polish them almost every day to keep their shine intact and most home cooks do not have the time to do all that.

    Furthermore, All-Clad is the world's leading brand in producing stainless steel cookware sets. While All-Clad's products are expensive, they are also very cost-effective. So, we recommend you buy All-Clad cookware sets.

    Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

    Below are some of the frequently asked questions regarding Mauviel and All-Clad that needed answering. We suggest you go through these questions and answers to further clarify all the doubts.

    1. Are both these cookware oven-safe?

    Yes, both these brands are oven-safe. Most All-Clad products can withstand temperatures up to 600 degrees Fahrenheit, whereas Mauviel products can withstand temperatures up to 680 degrees Fahrenheit.

    1. Should you use copper for cooking?

    Copper is known as one of the best conductive metals on the face of the Earth. They require a very short time to heat up, and the heat distribution is very even. However, keep in mind that they react with food that has a high acidic concentration.

    1. Does the thickness of the copper pan affect cooking?

    Yes, the thickness of the pan does affect cooking; in fact, the thicker your copper pan is, the better it is. For best results, a copper pan should be at least 2 mm thick. We do not recommend thin copper pans as they may heat up quickly but will leave spots. Thicker copper pans tend to distribute heat in an even manner.

    Another advantage of using thick copper pans is that they have good thermal capacity. Thicker copper pans take time to heat up, but they have the ability to store more heat than thinner copper pans.

    1. Why are Mauviel cookware sets so expensive?

    There are several reasons why Mauviel cookware sets are so expensive. Firstly, they are manufactured in France instead of China; the manufacturers ensure that the highest production standards are maintained.

    And moreover, Mauviel cookware sets are like pieces of art; the sheer beauty of these products will take your breath away. Mauviel values tradition and heritage, which is apparent in the craftsmanship of its M'Heritage cookware sets.

    1. Why are All-Clad cookware sets so expensive?

    All-Clad is one of the leading manufacturers of cookware sets in The United States. They are popular for their clean stainless-steel aesthetic. The Copper Core line up of this brand features a five-ply construction.

    Coming to the cooking surface, it is made of 18/10 stainless steel. The exterior is made of 18/0 stainless steel, whereas the core is made of aluminum with copper sandwiched in between. All these factors make All-Clad cookware set one of the most expensive cookware sets in the world.

    1. What factors determine the price of cookware sets?

    You must know by now that not all cookware sets are priced evenly. Some are affordable, whereas some belong to the premium segment. There are certain factors that determine the prices of brands. They are:

    • Construction quality

    The construction quality of cookware sets hugely impacts the prices. In general, multi-clad cookware is priced higher since multiple layers of metal are involved in the construction.

    • Material used

    Cookware sets made of expensive materials such as copper and stainless steel tend to be more expensive than cookware sets made of economical materials.

    • Brand value

    The brand's goodwill plays its part in determining the price of a product; it is no different when it comes to cookware. Brands like Mauviel and All-Clad have a long history and tradition of serving top-notch cookware. As a result, they come at a premium price.

    • Country of manufacture

    Brands that are manufactured in Europe and The United States are more expensive because the cost of labor in these countries is higher than in China. And, also the materials used in these countries are of better quality.

    1. Where can you buy them?

    You can buy both brands of cookware sets from their respective websites. They are also available on e-commerce stores such as Amazon, Williams Sonoma, Wayfair, and Macy's.

    1. What is the process of cleaning a Mauviel pan?

    Cleaning a Mauviel pan is very simple; you have to soak it in soapy water for at least 15 minutes and then use a sponge to rub it. Keep doing it until the copper pan becomes shiny. We strongly advise you against using a dishwasher as Mauviel products are not dishwasher safe.

    Close up photo of cookware set on wooden kitchen counter

    Conclusion

    There you have it! That was all you needed to know about Mauvielvs. All-Clad. Both these brands offer some of the best cookware sets in the world.

    However, do note that being more expensive does not mean better quality. You need to take into account other factors before making the buying decision, such as the construction quality and durability.

    We hope this guide has given you some valuable information regarding Mauviel and All-Clad cookware. For further queries or feedback, kindly leave a comment down below.

    With that, we wish to take your leave. Until next time!

    Related Articles

    9 Food Safe Wood Finish

    6 Copper Chef vs. Red Copper

    How to Build a Hidden Cabinet Knife Drawer Safe For Children

    2 Wusthof Classic vs. Gourmet [All You Need to Know & Winner]

    Have you ever been hit with a puff of nostalgia, to have a traditional fireplace in your house for you to warm up against the cracking wood and crackling fire as the cold, hard, winter wind blows against the windows and creates a low, resonating, whistling hum throughout the night?

    Many of us indeed do. But, what can one really do? Building a traditional brick and mortar hearth isn’t easy anymore. You need to break down a section of the wall, create a hollow area in it, prepare a cavity that is robust enough to withstand the high temperatures and not buckle under the pressure. Such major refacing and customization also takes a lot of money, and only threatens the structural integrity of your wall.

    Malm Fireplace 101

    What is a Malm Fireplace?

    Malm has known this wish of yours since the 1960s and continues to provide easily installable fireplaces that require minimal changes to the look and feel of your house, all that while adding a unique element to its decor with the futuristic yet vintage looking beautiful fireplaces. What’s more, these fireplaces never need to touch the ground. They are suspended in the air with the long chimney nozzle acting as a harness and a pillar for them.

    via pinterest

    These vintage appearing, freestanding and floating hearths have their birthplace near the wine country of California, another place that brings to your home an extra slice of elegance and beauty, with the delicious wine coming in long nozzled wine bottles. Malm has been carefully designing and manufacturing its fireplaces in Sonoma County since the past fifty-seven years.

    Like Harley Davidson and Triumph build their motorcycles with an extra care for the design, and melt both tradition and modernism for perfect balance, Malm too crafts the fireplaces with an outlook bent on impressing every eye that beholds the hearths. The designers behind the fireplaces are inspired by the appeal of postmodernism and offer the hearths in a range of colors like clay, camel, ash, almond, terracotta, slate gray, black, blue, forest green and white. They also have specialty finishes, from stainless steel to porcelain, brass, and nickel to matte black, glass and copper plating.

    Malm not only has a variety of models, it also takes orders from customers for customized fireplaces that are designed uniquely for the one ordering. And these designs come in an assortment of sizes, from standard to large units. The designers encourage customers to sketch or create designs the customers feel are appealing and suit their decor, or work with Malm’s designers to create something really exotic. All in all, Malm has designed over three hundred and fifty such unique fireplaces for both personal and office use, wowing customers all along.

    But, aesthetics is not the only element of focus for the company. Quality control is rigorously regulated. Substandard materials are a clear no. After all, any compromise in quality can result in hazardous accidents.

    Quality

    Malm fireplaces are of high quality and high minded design, but what also makes them stand out and in demand is the fact that they are extremely efficient and compatible with the rapidly fluctuating lifestyle of the modern world. It is true that people simply do not have the same amount of time to invest in preparing a fireplace as they did before. You could blame it on the rise of social media, or the longer work hours, or the clear inability to do beyond one absolutely must.

    Malm knows this. It is a wholesome investment of your time and energy to heat up a traditional brick fireplace. It does take many hours to heat it up sufficiently enough to warm your house and even then a lot of heat is wasted with the downside of the heat radius not being as far reaching as one would wish.

    A Malm fireplace has a very high rate of heating, and it radiates the heat in equal measure around it without wasting any energy. Moreover, you can have a clear look at the fire from any angle, helping you regulate it when needed and also giving you a view you desire.

    via pinterest

    The Timeless Designs

    Apart from creating custom models commissioned by aficionados who want a fireplace that’s entirely unique, Malm does offer a variety of exquisite designs with their own special upsides. The Carousel, The Spin-A-Fire, The Fire-Drum, Zircon and the Lancer are the main options, with several sub variants available in both firebrand and gas options.

    This freestanding fireplace comes in two models. One is the standard and long used wood burning option, and the other is the more efficient gas burning option.

    The Wood Burning Carousel Fireplace is mighty in both its design and its performance. This wood burner has a patent that makes it extra special. The internal design of the fireplace provides an almost complete burn while keeping the ash pollution to a bare minimum. It is a model that is touted to be one of the finest works of Malm and brings a sense of pride to the owner of it. The Wood Burning Carousel is available in porcelain colors, satin and matte, and in stainless steel and solid brass.

    This model is substituted by its gas-burning relative. The Gas Carousel hadn’t come into being for twenty-eight years after the vintage Wood Burning Carousel was crafted. A gas burning fireplace saves you the hassle of buying wood for the hearth. And even though it has a fundamental difference from its cousin in terms of basic functionality, it does not compromise on both design and quality. It has more varieties of color than the wood burning carousel, with up to ten decorative options that are painted upon satin brass or porcelain.

    Moreover, it comes with a remote control system for ignition and can be installed anywhere in the room, either against a wall or in a corner or freestanding in the center of the hall. And it does not need to keep a big distance from combustible materials either, with only a 6’’ clearance required.

    via pinterest

    The Spin-A-Fire

    The Spin-A-Fire wood burning model is as appealing in its look as the firebrand that burns within in. It comes in both indoor and outside air models, and need to have a clearance of 24” from combustible walls. It comes in a couple of varieties. A plated variety needs a 6” all-fuel chimney while a porcelain and black variety needs an 8” all-fuel chimney, both measurements when attached to the top of the hood.

    Efficient in its burning and long lasting in its sheen, the Spin-A-Fire is available in brass and nickel as well. The Spin-A-Fire, like the Carousel, is available in two variants: firebrand and gas. Both firebrand and gas variants are not free-standing models.

    via pinterest

    The Fire-Drum

    The Fire-Drum model is a beauty to behold. Malm’s very seventies looking model has a twenty-eight inch interior diameter to its drum-like huge opening area. It is lined with refractory brick to help you have combustibles at a closer distance of 8” without increasing the risk of fire hazard. Every Fire-Drum piece comes with a fire screen and it is featured in brass, copper and nickel plating with porcelain and matte black color options. The piping section has two pipes of the same color as the drum and comes with a recommended grate.

    The Fire-Drum comes in a few models. Fire-Drum 3 is the basic model while the Fire-Drum 2 is more aesthetic in its appeal. The Fire-Drum 2 has a close wall clearance and is constructed using heavy gauge steel. Both models are not difficult to assemble.

    The Fire-Drum 2 and 3 come in gas variants too, with the G suffixed beside the numbers on catalogs. The gas variants are cleaner, more efficient and far more convenient to use than the firebrand variants. They are also more stylish and have artificial logs that resemble real wood embers glowing in the fire to dissuade you from feeling the lack of a real wood burning aesthetic. These logs, made out of ceramic, are so realistic that they give off the look of coal and embers.

    The gas variants are available in matte black, and all porcelain colors and a fire screen is included with both. The interior diameter and the viewing opening are same as the firebrand variants.

    The metal hood of the fireplace radiates more heat, and it has a safety pilot system. You can use either LP gas or natural gas for burning the fire, and the fire can be regulated with a thermally actuated damper. The wall clearance is just 3” and the diameter of the heat radiance is large.

    via pinterest

    Zircon

    The Zircon model comes in four options. The Zircon 30”, the Zircon 34”, the Zircon 38” and the Zircon 34” Gas.

    The Zircon 30” variant has a conical shape to it and brings much-needed warmth to your house. Like the Fire-Drum model, it is available in all then porcelain colors as well as the standard matte black one. It has a lift-off screen and two sections of pipe, along with four refractory bags from Malm.

    The Zircon 34” variant is larger than the Zircon 30” but offers the same features as its smaller cousin and is available in all colors, unlike the largest of the three, the Zircon 38” which can only be bought in the standard matte black color.

    via pinterest

    The Lancer

    The Malm Lancer is the cutest model of all, and has a cone shape that looks elegant in any of its porcelain colors.

    via pinterest

    Custom Designs

    As mentioned before, Malm does provide its customers with the option of custom designing their fireplace, including completely glass panels that through their clarity provide an unhindered view of the fire. The finishing of these custom designs have oil finishing options too, apart from the standard matte, porcelain, stainless and bronze finishing. These customisations can be as high as thirty-six feet and have bases as wide as hundred square feet. All custom designs are not tough to assemble and are easy to ship.

    Legacy Of The Fireplace

    According to Donna Gunther, who is the founder and owner of a Los Angeles based design company named Surfing Cowboys, the Malm fireplace could not have reached its popularity if not for the coincidental rise of prefab housing mass production. Commercial fireplaces were not a thing, and once they did become popular in the eye of the public, newer design elements and color schemes were introduced to complement and play along with the pop-like vibrancy of interior decoration that boomed throughout the 60s to the 80s.

    The colors, at first expanded upon to create a variety and invite more buyers, have formed an identity of their own, standing out in-house decor amongst furniture pieces. While the fireplaces are available in a large palette, some customers like to go for even zanier and rarer color schemes and choose to repaint the fireplaces, even though they run the risk of weathering and cracking up. It is recommended to look for the colors more than doing it yourself.

    via pinterest

    How To Install

    Even though on purchase you receive a detailed booklet telling you everything about each model, from the dos and don’ts to the how-to section, it is always recommended to install the fireplace with the help of a professional fireplace installer. Malm and companies of its ilk do provide provide installation options.

    If you live in an apartment or housing area, you will need to check for permissions before you go ahead and purchase a fireplace that looks prettiest to you. Some places do not give permissions to install fireplaces and it might make you come under legal fire later on if you do so.

    The Malm fireplace perfectly combines funk and vintage hues for your house and is, by all means, the ideal housewarming gift for someone you love.

    In the age of central heating systems and growing adverse temperatures, traditional fireplaces simply have nowhere to call home, except for where they have been created long ago. A Malm fireplace, in both its firebrand and gas versions, is the perfect reintroduction of the fireplace tradition.

    What do you think?

    via Pinterest

    via suburbanpop.com

    via Pinterest

    via houzz

    via ohsolovelyvintage.blogspot.com

    via insideout.com.au

    Related Articles

    6 Best Wood Stove Fans | Buyer’s Guide

    19 Types of Fireplaces for Your Home

    To Mount or Not to Mount a TV Over The Fireplace – Pros & Cons

    Backyard Landscaping Design Ideas-Amazing Near Swimming Pool Fireplaces

    Backyard Landscaping Ideas - Exterior Fireplaces Meant to Enhance Your Living Quality

    10 Best Gas Logs Reviewed

    9 Best Pull-Down TV Mounts to Use

    A cordless drill is undoubtedly one of the most important tools in a DIYer’s arsenal. As such, it becomes crucial to choose a top-quality model. 

    Over the years, cordless drills have become significantly popular because of their versatility and high efficiency. Meaning, most DIYers prefer using them to conventional corded models. However, choosing a suitable unit that is durable and compactly designed is not all that simple. 

    There are quite a few essential things to consider, and with the availability of numerous options on the market, the selection process can get a tad complicated. So, to help you in the quest of purchasing a quality cordless drill, we have compared two exceptional models from two best-selling brands on the market: Makita and Dewalt. 

    These two brands have established solid goodwill with their wide range of power tools; hence, they are the top choice for DIYers. Without any further ado, let’s find out which one is better. 

    Makita vs Dewalt Drill

    Makita vs Dewalt Drill

    Before diving into the differences, let us take a brief look at the history of both brands so that we can understand how they have attained popularity. 

    Brand History

    Makita

    Makita FD09R1 12V max CXT® Lithium-Ion Cordless 3/8"...
    • Variable 2-speed design (0-450 & 0-1, 700 RPM) covers a wide...
    • Makita-built motor delivers 250 in. Lbs. Of max torque

    Matika is a very popular Japanese power tool brand that has been operating since 1915. It was founded by Mosaburo Makita in Nagoya City in Japan. 

    During that time, it specialized in the manufacture and repair of motors. However, as time passed, it started taking an interest in other areas and designed its first power tool in 1958, a portable electric planer. 

    Soon after that, it started producing other power tools such as circular saws, groove cutters, and electric drills. Finally, in 1978, it released its first cordless drill, which was considered one of the best in the early 80s. 

    Then, by 1985, it set its foot in the US by opening an assembly and manufacturing plant in Georgia. And as of 2022, Makita has its manufacturing hubs in over 50 countries all across the globe. 

    Its high-quality products and top-notch after-sales service have made it one of the leading brands in the power tool industry. This is why to compare the best models we have included a drill from this brand.     

    Dewalt

    DEWALT 20V Max Cordless Drill/Driver Kit, 2 Batteries and...
    • Compact, lightweight design fits into tight areas
    • High performance motor delivers 300 unit watts out (UWO) of...

    As far as Dewalt is concerned, it was founded in 1924 in the US by Raymond Dewalt. 

    The first product from the brand was a saw called wonder worker, which could be configured in 9 ways. Apart from this, the brand also dealt with the manufacture of jointers and mortisers. 

    In 1992, a series of portable power tools were launched by the brand with the aim to target professional woodworkers and residential contractors. And after 2 years, they introduced cordless tools, which included the two most powerful models at that time. 

    Naturally, the 5 3/8” cordless saw and the 14.4-volt cordless drill/driver were extremely popular. 

    Fast forward to 2000, it bought two companies, the Emglo Compressor Company and the Momentum Laser to further increase production. Unsurprisingly, in 2001, it became one of the best-selling brands of power tools and other accessories. 

    Since then, it has embarked on a new journey by introducing its first lithium-ion tools while the brushless motor was added to the lineup later in 2013. 

    Different Types of Drills

    These are the most common types of drills available on the market. 

    1. Drill Press

    A drill press falls under the most powerful category of drills. It is stationary and used to make numerous holes in one go. 

    The biggest advantage of using this drill is that it can create accurate holes, making it suitable for several projects. So, you will find that it is mainly used in factories and workshops. 

    1. Hammer Drill

    This kind of drill functions quite like a jackhammer. It utilizes punch motions in order to drill through tougher materials, like metal, concrete, or stone, which a conventional drill can’t get through. 

    1. Drill Drivers

    As far as drill drivers are concerned, they are the most commonly used ones, and they are highly versatile in their operation. Not only can they drill holes, but they also work as a driver to loosen and tighten screws. 

    These drills are ideal for being used at homes for a wide range of purposes, including setting up furniture and drilling walls. With drill drivers, you can easily change the screwdrivers and the drill bits as per the requirements of the material you are working on. 

    Makita XFD131 vs Dewalt DCD777C2

    In this section, we will review and compare both models to find out which one performs better and which brand has more credibility. We decided to choose these two models because they are considered highly functional and versatile, and appropriate for renovating homes. 

    So, without wasting any more time, let’s jump right in!

    Makita XFD131

    Makita XFD131 18V LXT® Lithium-Ion Brushless Cordless 1/2"...
    • Mechanical 2-speed transmission (0-500 and 0-1,900 RPM) for...
    • BL Brushless motor delivers 440 in.lbs. of Max Torque
     

    Accurate, versatile, and equipped with a slew of important features, the Makita XFD061 is an affordable option suitable for nailing DIY projects easily. Boasting a top-grade brushless motor, this model is perfect for those looking for a drill with a flawless power-to-weight ratio. So, let’s dig a little deeper. 

    Key Features

    • Speed: 1,550 RPM 
    • Weighs 3.8 pounds
    • Extreme protection technology
    • Built-in LED lights
    • Metal gears and gear housing
    • Brushless motor

    Why Did We Like It?

    According to us, the main highlight of this product is its Extreme Protection Technology. This helps the product resist dust and water when used in tough job site conditions, thereby ensuring its longevity. 

    It weighs under 4 pounds and is one of the lightest models on the market; hence, you can use it for extended periods without any hand fatigue. Not to mention its soft rubberized grip handle, which further adds to the comfort and ergonomics of using this unit.

    Apart from this, it features a 2-speed transmission, allowing you to use it for a wide variety of applications. Coupled with this is a 530-inch-pound of maximum torque, ensuring that it offers up to 50% more speed and power and work per charge.

    As far as the battery is concerned, it is highly efficient and comes with overload protection, which protects the battery from overloading and overheating. It comes with built-in LED lights with afterglow for illuminating the job site when there is no other form of lighting available. Lastly, it is backed by a 3-year warranty. 

    What We Didn’t Like About It

    During our usage period, we found out that the battery takes an hour to charge, which is a little longer than other options in this price range. We were also a bit disappointed that it comes with a bag and not a hard case. Apart from these two issues, the product works perfectly.



    Pros

    • Compactly designed and lightweight
    • Backed by a 3-year warranty
    • Highly efficient, yet quiet
    • Features an affordable price tag
    • Long-lasting battery life
    • It comes with a battery level indicator
    • Dust and water-resistant
    • Comfortable to hold
    • It can be used for a wide variety of applications




    Cons

    • Doesn’t come with a bag instead of a hard case
    • Takes an hour to charge



    Dewalt DCD777C2

    Now, we will be taking a look at the Dewalt DCD777C2. This brand is one of the most popular brands of power tools globally; hence it doesn’t need any sort of introduction. As far as this product is considered, it is a true testament to the brand’s quality. It features a lightweight and compact design and is suitable for working in tight areas for extended periods. 

    DEWALT 20V MAX Cordless Drill/Driver Kit with Battery and...
    • DEWALT drill with brushless motor delivers more run time...
    • This power drill is compact (7.52" front to back)....

    Key Features

    • Weighs 2.6 pounds
    • Measures 12.5” x 3.75” x 9.81”
    • Torque: 500-inch pound
    • Speed: 1,750 RPM

    Why Did We Like It?

    We were quite impressed with the various practical features of this product. It sports a brushless motor, for starters, which means you can expect it to offer a longer run time than those with conventional motors. It weighs under 3 pounds and is lightweight, so you can use this model for working in tight corners for extended periods hassle-free. 

    What’s more, it features an ergonomic grip handle, which is comfortable to hold and offers optimal tool control and ideal balance. Hence, you can use it for longer hours at a stretch without experiencing any hand fatigue. Like the Matika XFD061, this one, too, comes with built-in LED lights, which come in handy while working in lower light conditions.

    As far as the power is concerned, it is equipped with a robust motor that can deliver up to 340 watts out. This ensures that it can easily complete a wide range of applications without breaking a sweat. Finally, it comes at an affordable price, which ensures that it delivers excellent value for money. 

    What We Didn’t Like About It

    While testing this product, we noticed that it drains the battery comparatively quicker than the Makita model. Also, it doesn’t feature a battery-level indicator, which is again disappointing. But, other than that, we were mostly satisfied with its results.



    Pros

    • Backed by a 3-year warranty
    • Lightweight
    • Sports an ergonomic construction
    • It comes with an affordable price tag
    • Supports fast charging
    • Powered by a robust motor




    Cons

    • Doesn’t come with a battery level indicator
    • Consumes battery quickly



    How To Choose A Cordless Drill?

    While purchasing a power drill, you need to keep a few important factors in mind so that you can choose the right model. In this section, we will be taking a look at these features in detail. 

    1. Speed

    Speed, measured in RPM, is one of the most important factors that you should consider while buying a cordless drill. Less speed is required for drilling holes into softer surfaces and for driving screws, whereas high speed is required for drilling holes into tougher surfaces.

    If you are a professional woodworker, you would want to choose a model that features a 2-speed switch and a trigger with changeable speed control. This would allow you to tweak the speed from 0 RPM to the full range as per your needs. 

    1. Power

    As far as the power is concerned, it is measured in torque. It is nothing but the force that makes the drill rotate. Hence, the higher the torque, the faster the rotation. On that note, we recommend going with a higher torque setting if you have tougher materials for drilling through, like bricks. 

    On the other hand, if you have delicate materials to drill through, choosing a lower torque setting would be more appropriate. It would minimize the amount of damage done on the surface.   

    1. Battery

    Another crucial aspect that should be kept in consideration is the battery of the drill. In this day and age, most cordless drills feature nickel-metal-hydride batteries, also known as NiMH batteries. They are small in size but last longer than the traditional Nicad batteries. 

    NiMH batteries are also known for being less hazardous at the time of disposal than the Nicad variant, as they don’t feature the highly toxic cadmium. Both Makita and Dewalt drills come with NiMH batteries, and they have set the trend for other manufacturers to adopt this technology as well. 

    1. Handles

    When buying a drill, you should always go with a model that comes with a ruggedly built and easy-to-hold T-handle. Before the invention of cordless drills, most drills would have pistol grips, which were not that comfortable to use. 

    A T-handle, on the other hand, provides optimal balance and prevents hand slippage from the drill. Plus, they are popular for reaching tight corners, as your hand is in the center, thereby not creating an obstruction. 

    However, when it comes to driving large screws and heavy-duty drilling, a pistol grip would be more appropriate, as it allows you to apply more pressure.    

    Tips To Drill Safely

    Without a doubt, cordless drills help accomplish projects smoothly and efficiently, but if you are not careful enough and don’t take the required safety measures, accidents can happen. Here, we shall be looking at a few essential tips that you can follow to drill safely. 

    1. Wear Eye Protection And Safety Clothing

    You must always wear eye protection and safety clothing while drilling. Ensure that you are not wearing heavy jewelry or baggy clothes, as they could come in contact with the drill when you lean over, thereby leading to accidents. And don’t forget to wear safety glasses or goggles to ensure that your eye is protected from flying debris. 

    1. Ear Protection Is A Must

    If you are a professional woodworker who has to drill daily, then you should probably wear ear protection. An electric drill works at 90 dB, which is sufficient for causing hearing damage. When it comes to cordless drills, wearing ear protection is not mandatory as they are generally very quiet. 

    1. Wear Masks

    Don’t forget to wear masks, as they are crucial for protecting your lungs. While drilling, you are exposed to high amounts of crystalline silica, which ends up causing respiratory diseases like silicosis. Wearing a dust mask prevents your mouth and nose from getting in contact with the dust, thereby minimizing the chances of catching respiratory diseases.

    Having said that, if you work for prolonged periods, then we would suggest using a respirator, as it would provide the ultimate protection against various dust-related diseases.  

    1. Select The Correct Drill Bit

    In order to drill safely, you must be well acquainted with the process of drill operation. Using a bit that is made of the wrong material can seriously damage the surface you are drilling. If you are drilling a wooden surface, a general-purpose bit would be appropriate. 

    Similarly, if you are drilling materials made of concrete, brick, or stone, then using a masonry bit would be the way to go. For drilling surfaces like glass, porcelain, or glazed tiles, you would have to choose a diamond or carbide-tipped drill. 

    Therefore, you should have in-depth knowledge of the various types of drill bits available on the market and the materials they drill.   

    1. Pilot Holes

    Making pilot holes are essential for getting better results. It prevents the drill bit from slipping off the surfaces and thereby minimizes the chances of damage to the surface. 

    1. Apply Steady Pressure

    While drilling, you must ensure that the drill is stable and then push it slowly into the surface. However, if you need to apply excessive pressure, that means you have chosen the wrong bit for drilling the hole.  

    1. Prevent Overheating

    Drilling causes a certain amount of heat due to friction, but you must ensure that it must not get your drill overheated. To avoid overheating your drill, start with a lower speed and then gradually increase it. While drilling harder materials, ensure that you use low speed and keep pausing from time to time to allow it to cool down.

    Tips For Maintaining Cordless Drills

    Here are a few cordless drills maintenance tips that you can follow to ensure that it lasts for a very long time.  

    1. Consider Using Sharp Bits

    Try using sharp bits whenever possible, as it drills through the surface of the material easier and faster. Plus, it doesn’t put much strain on the drill as well. 

    1. Store Your Drill In A Dry Place

    You must ensure that your drill doesn’t come in contact with water, as it can easily rust the motor and the chucks. So, you should always keep your drills in a cool and dry place, like a shelf, where it is safe from moisture. 

    1. Clean Your Drill After Using It For Prolonged Periods

    Make a habit of cleaning your drill from time to time in order to avoid clogging. 

    1. Let It Cool Down

    When you are drilling holes through tougher surfaces, make sure that you take small breaks in between to avoid overheating the drill.  

    1. Never Keep It On The Ground

    You should refrain from keeping your drill on the ground while working on a site project; otherwise, grass, sand, or dirt may enter it, thereby damaging the internal parts. Plus, we strongly recommend reading the instruction manual that comes along with the drill, as it will help you gain clear insights on the maintenance of your product.  

    Makita vs Dewalt Drill

  • Does the DCD777C2 from Dewalt come with driver inserts or drill bits?

    No, they don’t. Driver insert and drill bits for this model are sold separately; hence we suggest buying a separate screwdriving set and drill bit sets for meeting your requirements.

  • Does the battery of Makita XFD061 drain when not used for prolonged periods?

    No, the batteries don’t drain when not used for prolonged periods, as they are made of lithium-ion. These types of batteries are popular for holding charge longer than older cell technologies. According to some users, they were able to use the drill right away after storing it for months.

  • Can the Makita XFD061 be used with other Makita used?

    Yes, it can be used with other 18 V Makita batteries.

  • Top view of electric screwdriver on white background. orange screwdriver or drill in a black container lies on the floor. Tool for tightening screws. screw gun. Verdict: Makita vs Dewalt Drill - The Winner

    Verdict: Makita vs Dewalt Drill - The Winner

    With that, we have come to the end of our informative guide. Both the Dewalt DCD777C2 and the Makita XFD131 are exceptional cordless drill drivers, especially because of their high performance, ease of use, and affordable price range. 

    Either one would be an ideal choice for those who want to renovate their homes. However, after reviewing and comparing both models in detail, we have decided to go with the Dewalt DCD777C2. It is more compactly sized and lightweight than the Makita, without compromising on performance. 

    Furthermore, the DCD777C2 features two batteries, which means you don’t have to wait too long for it to charge. Considering all these facts, we have named Dewalt DCD777C2 the winner, even though it was a very close call. 

    So, that’s all for now. Hope to see you soon. 

    Related Articles

    Cobalt vs. Titanium Drill Bits

    10 Best Floor Drill Presses

    11 Best Budget Drill Press

    13 Best Drill Press Vises

    13 Best Drill Press to Roll

    11 Best Cordless Drill Under 100

    Thinking about Christmas this early in the year might seem over the top and useless but we cannot help ourselves but dream about the glorious magic this holiday conveys.Family gathering around the fireplace, drinking hot coco and sharing stories, the delicious smell of home made cookies and the beuatiful delicacy of the Christmas tree colorful decorated and nestling over an abundance of gifts. Joyfulness, happiness, lots of smiles, these are what describe the winter season best .So, with this magical spirit in mind, we cannot stop thinking about our next crafting project meant to complete this picture and we are talking here about creative DIY Christmas cards projects and ideas, all lovely, imaginative and beautiful in their own manner. It is a wonderful thing to be able to personalize your gifts for your loved ones, to leave your mark on them and make them unique, one of a kind, special. We have collected over 90 DIY Christmas card ideas from where you can surge inspiration. Find guidance in the links featured under each craft or simply use the suggestions to create your own take on the project. Make card crafting a family event and teach your little toddler how to make special diy Christmas cards for friends and family. Enjoy!

    Creative DIY Christmas Cards

    1. cardboard paper and button snowman Christmas card

    via  tallwavehightide

    ake Your Own Creative DIY Christmas Cards This Winter

    A red ribbon can look anything look more festive, don't your agree?

    2. wildlife inspired Christmas card

    via  designbolts

    ake Your Own Creative DIY Christmas Cards This Winter

    Notice how the envelope matches the card's design.

    3. Christmas tree card made from rope

    via  fynesdesigns

    make Your Own Creative DIY Christmas Cards This Winter

    You can transform a store bought card.

    4. the classical Santa diy card

    via  dpinewss

    make Your Own Creative DIY Christmas Cards This Winter

    5. elegant gold and white design

    via  christmas2014

    make Your Own Creative DIY Christmas Cards This Winter

    Use washi tape for a fast completion of the craft.

    6. fun joyful reindeer card

    via pinterest

    make Your Own Creative DIY Christmas Cards This Winter

    You can paint the head using your thumb.

    7. merry Christmas tags for special gifts

    via  handmade4art

    make Your Own Creative DIY Christmas Cards This Winter

    8. simple red and white stitched Christmas tree card

    via  ideas.sewandso

    w

    9. a three Christmas tree card design

    via studiocalico

    a

    10. gold and pink DIY 3D Christmas cards

    via  blog.bog-ide.dk

    b

    11. old paper recycled into a simple card

    via  myshabbysoul

    BIGLIETTI AUGURI 027ridT

    12. colorful stockings made from felt attached to Christmas cards

    via fionacarter

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (29)

    13. the hues of Christmas in one diy package

    via northshorestamper

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (2)

    14. a happy happy snowman invites you to be merry

    via  stampingwithloll

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (3)

    15. cute penguins decorating diy Christmas cards

    via  mollymoocrafts

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (4)

    Another wonderfully cute craft that can be made by your little ones as well.

    16. a mix of joyful Christmas stickers

    via joyfulcreationswithkim

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (5)

    17. a glue gun and some glitter will do the trick

    via  frommycraftroom

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (6)

    18. red green and white Christmas ornament card

    via chicaandjo

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (7)

    19. decorating with 3d paper Christmas globes

    via creativityprompt

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (8)

    20. learn to fold paper into a Christmas tree

    via hative

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (9)

    21. simple colorful card message

    via beanbugcrafts

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (10)

    22. an encrypted Christmas card

    via etsy

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (11)

    This diy card should be designed with a specific person in mind.

    via Etsy

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (12)

    24. modern Christmas card

    via  zazzle

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (13)

    You can use a red sticker and cut the signs from it, then attach a blank cardboard paper behind.

    25. cute elegant Christmas card idea

    via  behance

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (14)

    26. a Christmas card that doubles as a 3d puzzle

    via behance

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (15)

    27. folded Christmas card that can be displayed

    via behance

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (16)

    28. complex 2-piece Christmas card

    via behance

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (17)

    29. buone feste kirigami card

    via behance

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (18)

    The art of kirigami might seem complicated at  first glance but you will come to love it.

    30. overlapping materials and patterns

    via jillibeansoup

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (19)

    31. colorful globes and trees attached to a simple white Christmas card

    via hgtv

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (20)

    32. cut little own painting idea for a diy Christmas card

    via notonthehighstreet

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (21)

    You can also use a sticker for the owl and just draw the branch. Use your fingerprint for the leaves.

    33. ho ho ho Santa Christmas card

    via ashbeedesign

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (22)

    34. using scrap materials to sew a tree

    via ashbeedesign

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (25)

    35. cute minimal design using buttons

    via notonthehighstreet

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (26)

    A minimal design will appear to be so funny and cute.

    36. a button green olive Christmas tree card

    via noelle-paperandice

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (27)

    37. red and green Christmas stockings card

    via  stampingwitherica

    29-creative christmas card homesthetics (28)

    38. Christmas cheer in red and green

    via jillsink.typepad

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (8)

    39. invite Rudolf on your card

    via consumercrafts

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (1)

    Find a reindeer shape online and trace it on the cardboard before cutting.

    40. simple sewing projects

    via chezlarsson.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (22)

    Choose the most colorful season appropriate ribbons.

    41. a complex colorful tree card

    via scraptime.ca

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (21)

    42. beautiful reindeer head card using felt

    via whatscrafting.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (20)

    We love the simplicity of this design.

    43. a red and white bow seems festive

    via stetlerarts.blogspot.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (19)

    44. glitter and sparkle for an appropriate occasion

    via styleathome.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (18)

    45. text cuts and buttons in a creative composition

    via scrapperia.blogspot.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (17)

    46. sew your own reindeer

    via cfabbridesigns.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (16)

    47. cute stitched gift cards for Christmas

    via aspoonfulofsugardesigns.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (15)

    48. the simplest and most elegant designs of all

    via frolic-blog.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (14)

    49. a gingerbread house Christmas card

    via onecharmingparty.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (13)

    This craft looks so delicious you might be tempted to eat the candy yourself.

    50. lovely paper craft

    via marthastewart.com

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (12)

    51. the spirit of winter in a pair of gloves

    via Family Fun

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (11)

    52. the cheerful Christmas motifs

    via Etsy

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (10)

    53. recycle buttons and straws

    via  acreativemint.typepad

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (9)

    54. scribble a merry Christmas theme

    via Etsy

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (8)

    55. delicate creative Christmas cards

    via afieldjournal.blogspot

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (7)

    56. cardboard and simple paper stacked snowflake

    via twopeasinabucket

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (6)

    57. elegant classical Christmas card decor

    via pinterest

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (5)

    58. white paper and cardboard

    via cherry-blossom-world.blogspot

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (4)

    59. kirigami scribbled Christmas trees

    via f4fabulousblog

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (3)

    60. delicate snowflake decoration

    via splitcoaststampers

    creative christmas cards diy homesthetics (2)

    61. snow globes for the merriest wishes

    via mayholicraft

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (5)

    62. creating volumetric scenes using paper

    via craftsunleashed

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (7)

    63. an embossed Christmas tree

    via nicole-samuels

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (18)

    64. cute fun elf legs

    via fiskars

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (20)

    65. buttons transform into Christmas globes

    via purplehouseblog

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (12)

    66. cute double sided geometric Christmas cards

    via howaboutorange

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (14)

    67. felt can be stitched into a globe

    via silvialagataconbotas

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (9)

    68. using pre-cut shapes to form a Christmas trees

    via craftsunleashed

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (10)

    69. stack paper cuts to form tiny presents on a card

    via wehearthome

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (11)

    70. have fun cutting colorful felt

    via northstory

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (13)

    71. keep things simple

    via thebottomsupblog

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (15)

    72. finger painting reindeer seems like fun

    via gemmagarner

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (16)

    73. exercise your handwriting skills

    via mintedstrawberry

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (19)

    74. be original and creative

    via hideousdreadfulstinky

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (21)

    75. white on white with a touch of gold

    via oubly

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (22)

    76. why not have an owl Christmas card

    via 365daysofcrafts

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (1)

    77. tiny cute penguin creative Christmas card

    via mayholicraft

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (3)

    Mimic the design or use a transparent sheet of paper to copy it.

    78. make  a penguin stamp and get crafting

    via pleasenotepaper

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (4)

    79. use a sponge creatively

    via instructables

    Make Your Own Creative Christmas Cards This Winter-homestheitcs.net (6)

    80. lovely Christmas hues display

    via  Etsy

    Christmas-Holiday-Cards

    81. a family photo can suffice

    via decoratingaddict

    blogger-image--1666736022

    82. keep things simple and cute

    via Etsy

    Button-Snowman-Card

    83. you can create even complex designs

    via Etsy

    Christmas-Cards-with-Flowers

    Stacking up different textured paper bits is the key here.

    84. hang a musical glittery globe

    via  meowchie.snydle

    Christmas-Card-with-Musical-Ornaments

    85. stack up some gifts

    via stampingwithloll

    Christmas-Packages

    86. glittery starry Christmas wishes

    via stamp-a-latte

    Christmas-Star-Cards

    87. green trees and cardboard look Christmasy enough

    via curbly

    Christmas-Tree-Craft-Cards

    88. use text cuts to form a Christmas tree

    via  grannemedselma

    Christmas-Tree-from-Old-Books

    89. cute paper shapes organized in the form of a tree

    via  hative

    Creative-Homemade-Christmas-Cards

    90. over the top Christmas card

    via  flickr

    Cute-Christmas-Cards

    91. the cutest snowman card

    via  mollymoocrafts

    DIY-Lovely-Christmas-Cards

    So lovely and simple to make.

    92. elegant Christmas in shades of blue and ivory

    via  bloglovin

    Many-More-Christmas-Cards

    93. fold book pages into trees

    via Etsy

    Old-Book-Christmas-Cards

    94. stitching and pearls can decorate a tree

    via  flickr

    Pearl-Christmas-Cards

    95. a special girlish creative  diy Christmas card design

    via buzzfeed

    Ribbon-Cards

    96. exercise your drawing skills with creative diy Christmas cards

    via  jofirthyoung

    Simple-Homemade-Christmas-Cards

    97. creative diy Christmas cards with elegant minimal cuts

    via  Etsy

    Tag-Christmas-Cards

    In the end, we would love to hear your opinion on the above creative diy Christmas cards presented as well as your favorite choice. Leave your valuable feedback in the comment section below.

    Related Articles

    14 Awe-Inspiring Ceramic Christmas Decorations

    19 Christmas Tree Paper Decorations for a Delicate Look

    14 Best Christmas Tree Lights to Consider This Year

    Learn How to Store Icicle Lights After Christmas

    17 Burlap Ribbon & Wreath Options

    The most staggering DIY projects in the world have to do with wood regardless of its shape; whether we talk about diy wooden pallet projects, diy driftwood crafts or various reclaimed wood projects the texture of the material simply beautifies the scene through coziness and warmth. Magical DIY Tree Stumps are breathtakingly beautiful as well, surprising with sturdy volumes organized by texture, tree stump DIY projects can easily become the focal point in your decor as with little to no effort you can use them as side tables and coffee tables.

    Through mass and volume the coziness warmth of the wooden texture is able to disrupt simple minimalist design lines in a subtle manner complementing the spatiality without changing the ambient. The most common use for tree stumps in diy projects are side tables and coffee table, these requiring the least processing power to materialize. Cast a glance at the gallery showcased below and pick your favorite craft to start.

    DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas

    #1 Simple Vase on Tree Stump Side Table

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (18)

    Source

    #2 Whitened Tree Stump Exuding a Positive Vibe

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (17)

    Source

    #3 Sculpted Tree Stump Carrying Knowledge

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (16)

     

    #4 White Wooden Stump On Wheels In Scandinavian Interior Design Carrying Candles

     Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (15)

    #5 Massive Wooden Slices Used as a Coffee Table in Scandinavian Interior Design

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (14)

     

    #6 Wood Slice Acting as a Pedestal for Sculptural Items Into a Perfect Spatiality

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (13)

    Source

    #7 Eclectic Design Sensitized By Wooden Textures

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (12)

    Source

    #8 Simple Tree Stump With Simple Transparent Varnish

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (11)

    Source

    #9 Side Table Hairpin Legs Carrying a Wooden Stump

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (10)

    Source

    #10 Cozy Interior Design With White Wooden Stumps as Coffee Tables

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (9)

    Source

    #11 Organicity and Density Captured in Tree Stumps

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (8)

    Source

    #12 Ombre Stump Side Table

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (7)

    Source

    #13 Coffee Table and Glossy Finish on Wood Stump Stools

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (6)

    Source

    #14 Complete Your Reading Nook With a Beautiful Side Table

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (5)

    Source

    #15 Golden Tree Stumps Becoming Focal Points and Doubling as Coffee Tables and Stools

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (1)

    Source

    #16 Colorful Hairpin Legs and a Thin Slice of Wood

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (4)

    Source

    #17 Wire-frame Chair Subdued To The Mass, Volume and Texture of The Wood Stump

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (3)

    Source

    #18 Organic Vibe Neutralized Through Paint

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (2)

     

    #19 Birch Tree Stump Side Table Pack

    Magical DIY Tree Stump Table Ideas That Will Transform Your World homesthetics wood diy projects (1)

     

    Wooden DIY projects are carrying a great responsibility and tremendous potential and we are sure that the crafts showcased above have highlighted this properly. We would love to hear your opinion in the comment section below on how do you use wooden elements in your décor.

    43 Ingeniously Creative DIY End Table For Your Home

    39 Spectacular Tree Logs Ideas for Cozy Households

    3D printing pens, also known as 3Doodlers, extrude heated plastic filaments to create three-dimensional objects, allowing users to draw and build in mid-air. Commonly used in fields like art, design, and education, they are ideal for creating intricate models, prototypes, and artistic projects. These pens feature adjustable temperature settings, speed controls, and ergonomic designs, making them versatile tools for professionals and hobbyists. In this guide we explore the top 3D pens, highlighting their unique capabilities and ideal use cases for unleashing creativity in three dimensions.

    1. MYNT3D Super 3D Pen

    The MYNT3D Super 3D Pen is designed to elevate ordinary artworks into 3D creations with its user-friendly and ergonomic design.

    Standout Features:

    • Stepless speed slider
    • Three ABS filament choices
    • Replaceable nozzle design

    This pen's step-less speed slider allows precise control over the material flow, making it perfect for intricate designs. The sealed ultrasonic nozzle prevents clogging, ensuring durability. The pack includes a touch pen, USB cord, AC adapter, repair tools, and a manual, providing everything needed to start working immediately.

    After using the 3D pen for a month, we noticed that it heats up when used for an extended period, making it challenging to work with. It has to be left to cool down before proceeding.

    1. MYNT3D Professional Printing 3D Pen

    The MYNT3D Professional Printing 3D Pen features advanced functions like an adjustable feed and large OLED display for temperature tracking, enhancing the creation of three-dimensional objects.

    Standout Features:

    • Three rolls of ABS filament
    • Adjustable temperature from 230 to 240 degrees Celsius
    • Large OLED display

    This pen offers adjustable speed and flow control, enabling fine-tuned settings for effortless drawing. The pack includes three ABS plastic filaments, an adapter, a touch pen, and a one-year limited warranty. It's also portable, and connectable to a power bank for outdoor use.

    We had some queries about using the product and tried contacting customer service to get our issues resolved. But we were still waiting for someone to answer our phone on multiple occasions when we tried reaching out.

    1. SCRIB3D P1 3D Printing Pen

    The SCRIB3D P1 3D Printing Pen, suitable for both beginners and professionals, comes as a ready-to-use kit.

    Standout Features:

    • Stepless speed slider
    • Ceramic nozzle
    • Auto switch-off

    This kit includes three PLA plastic colors, an instruction manual, a power adapter, and a stencil guide. It features stepless speed and temperature control, ensuring optimal performance. The pen's auto-sleep feature prevents overheating, making it safe for extended use.

    When you switch on the 3D pen to start drawing, you may have to wait for a while as it takes time to warm up.

    1. 3Doodler Start+ Essentials (2024) 3D Pen

    The 3Doodler Start+ Essentials (2024) 3D Pen is ideal for kids, with no hot parts and a cool nib, promoting safe and creative play.

    Standout Features:

    • Detailed activity guide
    • Child-friendly plastic
    • No wires

    This pen promotes STEM learning, with safe, child-friendly plastic and a safe-to-touch nozzle. It's portable, charging in 30 minutes, and comes with an activity guide and stencils to inspire creativity.

    We noticed discrepancies in the extrusion speed, which led to occasional clogging. Clean the nib with a cloth if clogging occurs.

    1. 3Doodler Create+ 3D Printing Pen

    The 3Doodler Create+ 3D Printing Pen offers versatility with a range of colors and a booklet of templates, making it ideal for personalized art projects.

    Standout Features:

    • Extra templates
    • 15 colored plastic filaments
    • Activity guide book

    This pen supports ABS, PLA, and flexy plastic, and features a dual drive for speed control. The plastic hardens instantly, making it easy to work with 3D structures.

    While the 3D pen works well, it is relatively expensive, and we recommend it for professional use.

    1. SCRIB3D Advanced 3D Printing Pen

    The SCRIB3D Advanced 3D Printing Pen offers a sleek design and multiple speed options, making it beginner-friendly.

    Standout Features:

    • One-year guarantee
    • Two colors of 15 meters each
    • Free stencil guide

    This pen features an LCD display with speed, temperature, and flow controls. It's designed for easy use, with a clear manual and safe operation.

    The 3D pen tends to heat up and dribble sometimes. Hence, letting your kids use it alone can be dangerous.

    1. MYNT3D Basic 3D Pen

    The MYNT3D Basic 3D Pen is a simple, user-friendly option for hobbyists and DIY enthusiasts.

    Standout Features:

    • ABS and PLA compatible
    • Sealed nozzle
    • Detailed user manual

    This pen offers essential features for 3D creation, with speed options for intricate designs. It includes a power cable, ABS filament, and a stand, ready to use with a USB AC adapter.

    The 3D pen has a unique USB cable that is not easily replaceable. Handle the cable with care to avoid needing a replacement.

    1. MYNT3D Junior2 3D Pen

    The MYNT3D Junior2 3D Pen is designed for kids, featuring a cool body and good grip for safe use.

    Standout Features:

    • Ergonomic design
    • Battery-powered and rechargeable
    • Low-temperature nozzle

    This pen is safe for kids, with a low-temperature nozzle and ergonomic design. It's battery-powered, with a sealed nozzle and user guide for easy use.

    This 3D pen does not work with PLA and ABS filaments. It only supports PCL plastic filaments, which limits compatibility.

    Are 3D printing pens useful?

    Yes, 3D printing pens are useful in modeling, prototyping, and crafting because they can create detailed and intricate designs, repair or modify existing 3D prints, and facilitate freehand drawing in three dimensions thanks to their adjustable temperature and speed controls.

    What can I build with a 3D pen?

    With a 3D pen, you can build models, sculptures, jewelry, architectural prototypes, educational tools, and artistic creations. The versatility of 3D pens allows for both simple and complex designs.

    Does a 3D pen stick to glass?

    Yes, 3D pen filament can stick to glass surfaces. However, it's recommended to use a release agent or tape to ensure easy removal of the finished product.

    Are 3D pens eco-friendly?

    3D pens can be eco-friendly if they use PLA filament, which is biodegradable and made from renewable resources like corn starch or sugarcane. However, the eco-friendliness depends on the type of filament used.

    What surface is best for 3D pens?

    The best surface for 3D pens is a non-stick, heat-resistant mat or a piece of parchment paper. These surfaces prevent the filament from sticking permanently and allow for easy removal of the finished product.

    Does a 3D pen melt plastic?

    Yes, a 3D pen melts plastic filament (such as PLA or ABS) to allow for drawing in three dimensions. The filament is heated inside the pen and extruded as a semi-liquid, which solidifies quickly to form 3D structures.

    Paper recycling is the easiest form of recycling and thanks to its texture, sensibility and unicity, paper is one of the most graphic materials in upcycling as well. Whether you stack piles for recycling or upcycled paper in little projects, you should never simply throw them away to a regular bin. Be the change that you want to see in the world and start by recycling a few piece of paper, you will feel better and you will certainly do the world a tremendous favor regardless of the quantity recycled or upcycled. Further on to encourage the small movement that we are trying to trigger we will showcase more than 30 DIY paper art designs that will enhance your decor with ease if materialized. These are of course just the tip of the iceberg and you should use them as a starting point in your endeavors.

    Below we will link a few other interesting paper art articles that we think you'll find interesting, throw a look and let us know what do you think.

    #1 Old Books Transformed Into Sculptural DIY Paper Art

    #1 Old Books Transformed Into Sculptural DIY Paper Art

    30 Insanely Beautiful Examples of DIY Paper Art That Will Enhance Your Decor homesthetics decor (1)

     

    30 Insanely Beautiful Examples of DIY Paper Art That Will Enhance Your Decor homesthetics decor (4)

    #2 Colorize Your Home With Beautiful Paper Lanterns

    #2 Colorize Your Home With Beautiful Paper Lanterns

    #3 Add a Sculptural Geometric Piece on Your Blank Walls

    #3 Add a Sculptural Geometric Piece on Your Blank Walls

    #4 Make a Paper Garland

    #4 Make a Paper Garland

    #5 Simple Colorful Hearts Hanged on a String Can Change Everything

    #5 Simple Colorful Hearts Hanged on a String Can Change Everything

    #6 Origami Paper Composition Can Send Very Powerful Messages

    #6 Origami Paper Composition Can Send Very Powerful Messages

    #7 Light Meets and Enhances Paper Composition

    #7 Light Meets and Enhances Paper Composition

    #8 Origami Star Patterned Sheet of Paper

    #8 Origami Star Patterned Sheet of Paper

    #9 Kirigami Display of Skill Showcased in a Wave

    #9 Kirigami Display of Skill Showcased in a Wave

    #10 Drop of Color on a Gray Mass

    #10 Drop of Color on a Gray Mass

    #11 Extraordinary Origami Piece Composed Out of Hundreds of Pieces

    #11 Extraordinary Origami Piece Composed Out of Hundreds of Pieces

    #12 Colorful Heart & Letters Realized Through The Quilling Paper Technique

    #12 Colorful Heart & Letters Realized Through The Quilling Paper Technique

    30 Insanely Beautiful Examples of DIY Paper Art That Will Enhance Your Decor homesthetics decor (16)

    #13 Graphic Geometric Christmas Tree

    #13 Graphic Geometric Christmas Tree

    #14 Colorful Origami Lucky Paper Stars Composition

    #14 Colorful Origami Lucky Paper Stars Composition

    #15 Simple Purple Paper Butterflies Wall Art

    #15 Simple Purple Paper Butterflies Wall Art

    30 Insanely Beautiful Examples of DIY Paper Art That Will Enhance Your Decor homesthetics decor (15)

    30 Insanely Beautiful Examples of DIY Paper Art That Will Enhance Your Decor

    30 Insanely Beautiful Examples of DIY Paper Art That Will Enhance Your Decor

    #16 Flower Composition in Classic Interior Design

    #16 Flower Composition in Classic Interior Design

    #17 Geometric Colorful Ensemble

    #17 Geometric Colorful Ensemble

    30 Insanely Beautiful Examples of DIY Paper Art That Will Enhance Your Decor

    30 Insanely Beautiful Examples of DIY Paper Art That Will Enhance Your Decor

    #18 Extraordinary Colorful Origami Curtain

    #18 Extraordinary Colorful Origami Curtain

    #19 Colorful Kirigami Koi Wall Art

     

    #19 Colorful Kirigami Koi Wall Art

    #20 Breathtaking Vintage Composition Showcasing Paper Flowers

    #20 Breathtaking Vintage Composition Showcasing Paper Flowers

    #21 Paper Medallions and Flowers in Superb Composition

    #21 Paper Medallions and Flowers in Superb Composition

     

    When we see glamorous interior designs in the magazines, we all take a deep breath and wish we had them in our homes. If you are considering the idea to decorate one room in the house in a more luxurious style, we suggest you to go for the bedroom design.

    These Luxurious Bedrooms You Would Wish To Sleep In will charm you with their elegance, comfort and style. They will give you a pampering feeling, and you will feel like you are on seventh heaven. Scroll down through the photos below and lose yourselves in a daydream!

    Source

    Whenever you are staying in a hotel, probably you are wishing to stay in the deluxe suit, so why don't you bring it into your home? These bedrooms require a spacious room because there are so many things that could be incorporated here to achieve the dramatic look. The king-sized bedroom is a must, and the satin bedding too!

    Source

    As you can notice from the photos so far, the luxurious bedrooms feature a big, glamorous chandelier which adds up to the luxurious feel. The lighting fixtures can make or break an interior, so choose yours carefully.

    The neutral colors can help you make an enjoyable ambiance, and this is the key to the good-looking hotel rooms. They will help you to create a bright and cozy environment which you will enjoy for sure!

    Source

    Elevating your bed on a platform is another luxurious feature which will make you feel like you are climbing the throne when you go to bed.

    Cushions, curtains and carpets are essential for the luxurious bedrooms, so don't keep them off the whole picture when you are decorating these lovely bedrooms.

    If you are a lover of the bold and dark colors, then go for them because they will help you create a stunning bedroom with dramatic effects. Lighting plays a crucial role here, so pick it smart!

    Source

    The purple color is considered to be a royal color, so you are going to notice a lot of luxurious purple bedrooms. If it's your favorite color feel free to add it in your bedroom area, but remember not to overdo it.

    Source

    Lots of spacious and luxurious bedrooms have separate seating areas for enjoying their morning coffee, reading their favorite book before going to sleep or have intimate chats with their significant other. If the space allows you, add two armchairs and a coffee table, get your bedroom on a higher level!

    Source

    Aren't these bedrooms simply stunning? In which one would you like to sleep and relax in your home? Pick your favorite and recreate the astonishing designs!

    Related Articles

    12 Ways To Put Your Bedroom Corner Space To Good Use

    29 Brilliant Easy-to-Build DIY Platform Bed

    21 Mindbogglingly Beautiful Fairy Tale Bedrooms for Kids

    21 Super Small Nightstands Ready to Fit in Petite Bedrooms

    37 Simply Spectacular Tree Bed Designs to Pursue

    Recycled Pallet Bed Frames – DIY Pallet Collection

    15 Creative Small Beds Ideas For Small Spaces

    30 Small Bedroom Interior Designs Created to Enlargen Your Space

    37 Smart DIY Hanging Bed Tutorials and Ideas to Do

    Bedroom Christmas Lights Ideas For A Cozy Atmosphere

    32 Dreamy Bedroom Designs For Your Little Princess

    100 Inexpensive DIY Headboard Ideas for Your Bedroom Design

    47 Stylish Floating Bed Design Ideas

    53 Incredible Hanging Beds to Float in Peace

    33 Epic Navy Blue Bedroom Design Ideas to Inspire You

    6 Best Vacuum Cleaners for Mattress  

    33 Simply Brilliant Cheap DIY Nightstand Ideas

    Nothing beats a good, fresh meal with a cold brew after a hard day’s work. 

    Except, of course, a good fresh meal during work. That’s the best of both worlds. 

    Most construction workers, in the limited lunch-time they get, have to resort to soggy, damp and stale pre-packed meals in paper wraps (if you like dirt and dust with your meal) or to Burger King drive-throughs, which proves to be expensive and time-consuming. 

    A solution to this problem would be to get yourself a cooler which would keep your food fresh, cool and tasty. But which one? 

    To answer that, we’ve compiled a list of the 7 best lunch boxes and coolers for construction workers. 

    Best Lunch Boxes And Coolers For Construction Workers

    Best Lunch Boxes And Coolers For Construction Workers

    1. Klein Tools 17-Quart Tradesman Pro

    Klein Tools 55600 Work Cooler, 17-Quart Lunch Box Holds 18...
    • Lunch box keeps cool up to 30 hours; main compartment has a...
    • Cooler supports up to 300 pounds (136.1 kg); not only does...

    The first item on our list is the Klein Tools 17-Quart Tradesman Pro. Klein, a manufacturer of quality work tools, offers this model in 9-quart hard cooler and 12-quart soft cooler variants as well. It comes with a shoulder strap, 300-pound capacity, a provision for holding bottles and tools and a convenient lid. 

    Experience

    In our experience, the Klein Tradesman Pro is a great cooler for carrying your meal to the site. The build quality is excellent and we found it to double up as a stool without any worries. 

    On the inside, it has a lining of foam which keeps food cool for up to 12 hours without any hassle. 

    It comes with a nylon strap for easy carrying. In our experience, we found the strap to be sufficient for carrying up to 150 pounds, if you plan to carry more than that, it might break. 

    We did appreciate the provision for tools, bottles, etc. on the lid, which opens to 180 degrees (or can stay put at 90 degrees, if you so wish). 



    Pros

    • Excellent build quality means it doubles up as a stool
    • Keeps food cool effectively for long periods
    • Has a provision for tools, bottles, medicines, phones, etc.  
    • Convenient lid




    Cons

      • Nylon strap, while a useful feature, is prone to breaking if you plan to carry large loads
      • Chinese manufacturing might put some off



    1. Igloo 14.8 Quart Playmate Cooler

    Sale
    Igloo The Boss Playmate Cooler, Black/Grey, 14 Qt
    • 1 selling Cooler in its category
    • Patented tent shaped locking lid helps prevent spills

    The Playmate Cooler is Igloo’s offering to the fiercely competitive lunch cooler market. It comes in only one 14.8-quart size. It features a patented tent-shape, a lid that swings open either side and a comfortable grip molded onto the carry handle.

     Experience

    In our experience, we found that the Igloo playmate cooler reminded us of lunchboxes of yore with its tent-shape and dual-tone exterior, giving it a distinct identity.

    The funky design, finished with a texture, houses a lunch box large enough to carry most of the items you’ll be taking to work, such as your food, phones, bottles, etc. and we found that it keeps them reasonably cool as well.

    The Playmate’s pièce de résistance, it’s lid that opens either, is incredibly convenient; that means you don’t have to reach over or change sides every time you open it. However, we’re not so sure about the locking mechanism, which seemed a little flimsy to us.



    Pros

    • Convenient lid that opens either side
    • Funky styling and textured build are attractive
    • Tent-shaped box is easy to carry with molded grip




    Cons

      • Locking mechanism is flimsy at best
      • No crevices or provisions for storing other items
      • Could leak when tipped on its side



    1. IceMule Coolers Pro Coolers

    ICEMULE Classic Medium Collapsible Sling Strap Cooler –...
    • RUGGED AND VERSATILE – From our proprietary MuleSkin...
    • 24+ HOURS OF COOLING – Ultra-tough Muleskin Exterior and...

    The IceMule Pro Cooler is different to the other coolers we’ve mentioned so far as it is a soft cooler, as opposed to a hard cooler. A soft cooler’s construction resembles a fabric whereas a hard cooler is made of a solid material like plastic.

    Coming to the cooler itself, the IceMule is the jack of all trades and has a ton of features, read on to know what how experience was.

    Experience

    In our experience, the IceMule Cooler is a BMW if the other coolers are Corollas.

    It comes packed with a ton of features, such as a TriFold seal for cooling, MuleSkinEV layers for twice the thickness of other soft coolers, AirValve for bleeding the air out of the layers of insulation and reinforced back straps, as this is a backpack-cum-cooler.

    It has a 21-quart capacity, which is truly massive, but despite that, the IceMule remains relatively light and is very portable.



    Pros

    • Twice as thick as other soft coolers
    • AirValve for bleeding the air out
    • Incredibly portable 
    • Massive 21-quart capacity
    • TriFold seal for supreme cooling
    • Waterproof




    Cons

      • Inner lining is prone to tearing after repeated use
      • Stitching could’ve been better



    1. Stanley 7QT Heritage Cooler

    Stanley 7QT Heritage Cooler with Classic 1.1QT Vacuum...
    • Vacuum bottle keeps liquids hot for up to 40 hours, cold for...
    • Locking handle holds bottle in place

    The 7QT Heritage Cooler is reputed company Stanley’s rather nostalgic offering to the cooler lunch box market. It is a hard cooler and comes with a 1.1-quart thermos (which locks into place on the handle). It is a petite, portable offering for those looking to transport food and drink only.

    Experience

    In our experience, the Stanley proved to be a great choice for those looking to carry naught but their food and drink to the construction site.

    It’s USP is its steel thermos which conveniently locks into place within the carry handle. We found it perfectly adequate for keeping items cold or hot (as the case may be) throughout the day, irrespective of weather conditions.

    The cooler itself comes with thicker insulation than its rivals, is compartmentalized on the inside and its lid doubles up as a tray, making eating and drinking from it easy. Plus, the build quality is excellent, just as expected from Stanley.

    The small capacity may put some off, but considering the objective the 7QT seeks to achieve, we can forgive it.



    Pros

    • Thermos included and locks into place
    • Compartmentalized cooler for keeping food items separate
    • Thick insulation for long-lasting cooling 
    • >Lid doubles up as a tray
    • Excellent fit and finish




    Cons

      • Small capacity might be a deal-breaker for some
      • No extra features other than the thermos; very spartan



    1. Carhartt Gear Deluxe Lunch Cooler

    Sale
    Carhartt Camping Cooler, Worksite Lunchbox, Soft Shell Lunch...
    • Built for the Outdoors: Tough and durable, the Carhartt...
    • Compact & Portable: Perfect for outdoor adventures, this...

    The Carhartt cooler, more specifically, the Carhartt 358100B, is an excellent choice for those looking for a durable soft cooler which looks attractive as well. You have a choice of three colors, namely, brown, camo and black, making this cooler more stylish than the others.

    Experience

    In our experience, the Carhartt proved to be an excellent soft cooler for those who find a hard cooler too cumbersome. It stays true to the Carhartt color schemes and looks beautiful, especially in Camo.

    It is made of Polyester and is compartmentalized to keep food items separate. It is also waterproof and easily repelled water during our testing.
    The top contains pockets which are excellent for holding water bottles. The insulation on the inside is adequate and keeps food items cold for long hours.

    It comes with a nice carry-strap and we have no complaints from it.



    Pros

    • Attractive color options to make it stand out
    • Adequate insulation 
    • Compartmentalized storage area 
    • Waterproof 
    • Carry-strap works well 




    Cons

      • Insulation could’ve been thicker for peace of mind
      • Some may not prefer the strap over a handle



    Healthy Lunch box with grain bread and green vegetable and fruit juice bottle on wooden background ,Healthy eating clean food habits for diet concept , top view and overhead shot

    How to Keep your Lunch Cool on Hot Days

    Keeping your lunch cool and fresh is essential to having a delicious meal, but it has some health benefits as well. Preventing excessive heating of your meal will prevent bacterial growth, so it’s important to keep it frosty. Here are some tips to do exactly that:

    1. Put your cooler in the fridge

    Let your cooler chill in the fridge while you enjoy your well-earned time off as this will prevent excess heat from accumulating in the cooler. While a cooler’s job may be to keep food and drinks cool, why not cut it some slack, right?

    1. Put your bottle in the freezer

    After putting your cooler in the fridge, put your bottle in the freezer. The principal remains the same, we want to prevent excess heating of your drink as much as possible and for as long as possible. It will also help in cooling the inside of your cooler.

    1. Use stainless steel

    Stainless steel is great for carrying your meals and we recommend buying stainless steel containers only as they cool down very quickly in fridges and freezers and are not prone to rusting, making them a healthy option.

    1. Use an ice-pack

    Using an ice-pack will go a long way in keeping your food, even inside your cooler. It is recommended to use one at the very least but the more you use, the better. They will keep your food cooler, fresher and just as tasty!

    Healthy Lunch box with grain bread and green vegetable and fruit juice bottle on wooden background ,Healthy eating clean food habits for diet concept, top view and overhead shot

    Lunch Boxes And Coolers Conclusion

    It’s very important to keep your food cool during those hot, sweaty days to preserve taste and freshness and also to prevent bacteria buildup. A cooler goes a long way towards keeping your food cool and all of the items listed here are great buys. 

    Happy eating! 

    Related Articles

    3 Best Stanley Lunch Boxes

    6 Best Yeti Lunch Boxes for a Great Meal

    9 Best Soaps and Cleaners for Construction Workers

    13 Best Work T-Shirt

    16 Best Torpedo Levels

    A passionate gardener’s OCD is triggered in an instant when they find out that their tree branches are out of shape.

    Pruning trees is quite a satisfying DIY task we enjoy during the weekends, but it can be stressful if we don’t have the right equipment. So, what makes it so hard to choose the right pole saw to get the job done without any hassle?

    Undoubtedly, the disastrous combination of a wide variety of products to choose from and very little information about what makes an ideal pole saw. Ultimately, we end up going for the cheapest ones without knowing what we’re buying.

    But don’t worry, we’ve handpicked the top 10 longest and best pole saws for tree pruning to help you make a smart purchase. Also, we have included a buyer’s guide in the end, to help you acknowledge the anatomy of the longest pole saw, so don’t forget to check that out.

    So, with that being said, let’s get to the list of products!

    Longest Pole Saws for Tree Pruning

    1. Sun Joe SWJ802E Multi-Angle Pole Saw

    Sun Joe is an internationally renowned brand that specializes in manufacturing trailblazing equipment at a meager price. We’ve recently tested its all-new SWJ802E model, one of their best-selling longest pole saws in the market. As expected, this product left a considerably good impression on the grounds of user convenience and flexibility.

    The product had initially surprised us with its immense flexibility, which helped it earn a thumbs up from us. To be more precise, this model comes with an adjustable head that can be bent into 3 angles - 0 degrees, 15 degrees, and 30 degrees. This feature makes it possible to reach unconventional areas with ease and make the cuts in numerous positions.

    Now, although it’s an electrically powered device, it was surprising to find that the model doesn’t come with any tangling wires. Instead, the cables are configured inside the frame preventing us from the stress of handling the wirings while using the saw. Furthermore, it offers a flexible pole that can be extended up to 9.4 inches, adding one more star in terms of user convenience.

    Noteworthy to mention, the SWJ802E model is exceptionally lightweight for a motor-operated saw machine, as it weighs only 7.9 pounds. Thanks to that, our arms weren’t fatigued at all after using the saw for a considerably long time. We’re also satisfied with its low noise levels, which altogether provided us with a satisfying user experience. We would rate it 5 stars.

    In spite of its high user convenience features, the manufacturers failed to facilitate a considerably long power cord with this model. Due to this, the electric socket has to be incredibly near to the workstation. Otherwise, this wouldn’t work. Furthermore, it’s a bummer to know that the model requires regular oil refills.

    1. Worx WG309 2-in-1 Pole Saw

    Although Worx isn’t one of the biggest power tool brands in the market, it’s an appropriate option to consider if you’re a beginner with a low budget and zero experience. The most prominent example here is the Worx WG309; a multifunctional pole saw that left us in awe with its advanced features.

    To begin with, this model offers an extended 10” bar, which can be wielded very quickly to the saw. This extended stick makes pruning the high branches of trees a lot more comfortable and enjoyable. Also, we have to mention how this model is built with sturdy plastic and metal, which combine to enhance its durability by a fair deal.

    Now coming to its USP of multifunctionality, you can easily use it as a pole saw by attaching the stick, which helps in cutting the hard-to-reach tree branches with ease. Also, you can remove the stick and use the chainsaw to trim the small branches precisely.

    Also, when it comes to cutting efficiency, we found the WG309 to be more effective than its competitor, the SWJ802E unit. We’re saying this because the model comes with an advanced 8-amp motor that provides higher power to get the job done quicker. Furthermore, the manufacturers have raised the bar higher for user comfort with a rotatable handle, making it easier to auto-lubricate the device.

    While testing the model, we found the top of this product to be a little heavier than the bottom. This uneven distribution of weight makes it a little uncomfortable to carry around for a longer time. It is probably the only advantage the SWJ802E has over the WG309 unit, as it’s quite lightweight.

    1. Black & Decker LPP120 Pole Saw

    If you’re even a bit experienced at shopping for power tools, you’re probably familiar with the goodwill of Black & Decker. This brand has set the standards a lot higher for innovations with its all-new LPP120 pole saw. This product features, without an argument, one of the longest-lasting batteries we’ve come across.

    This model strives for user comfort and portability, to begin with. Most of the pole saws, for instance, the JW280E unit, limit usability to a certain extent with their short power cords. On that note, this model exterminates this issue with its cordless feature, enabling it to be used without being dependent on any external power source.

    As this brings us to its battery life, we have to mention that its 20V MAX Lithium-ion battery has impressed us with its extended coverage. To be more precise, its battery is capable of lasting 5x times longer than the regular NiCad batteries, giving it an instant advantage over most of the other products in the market. This model can also make up to 100 cuts in a single charge, which makes it pretty user-friendly and convenient as a pole saw.

    Coming to its efficiency, this cordless pole saw offers us a decently long reach of 14 ft, which seems sufficient for tree pruning most high branches. Also, the chainsaw can cut as deep as 6” when it comes to softwood, which speaks for the power of its motor.

    This model is quite efficient at cutting through softwood; however, unfortunately, that’s it. The saw isn’t even half as useful when it comes to cutting through hardwood, which means that it can’t be used for heavy-duty cutting tasks. Nonetheless, it still makes a decent piece of personal equipment.

    1. Oregon PS250-E6 Pole Saw

    Oregon is best known as the manufacturers of high-end and powerful tools and is mostly recommended by professionals. We had the opportunity to test its PS250-E6 model personally, and we must say, it has changed the way we used to view pole saws. It’s one of the most potent pole saws you can find if you’re willing to go a little above your medium budget.

    There’s a common saying among professionals that the cordless pole saws aren’t nearly as powerful as the corded saws. However, the PS250-E6 model seems to cut through this stereotype with its impressive chainsawing power with ease (no pun intended). To be precise, these cordless pole saws boast enough power to slice through 8-inch trunks like butter, despite being cordless.

    Honestly, this model comes packed with so much power that it may seem overkill for typical yard jobs. That’s why we’d strictly recommend this model if you’re trying to enter into professional woodcutting or gardening. Now, this model also beats the Black & Decker model with its extended 15 ft long reach, making it even more favorable for heavy-duty work.

    Also, we have to compliment the manufacturers for coming up with such a unique design to make it easier to carry around. The thing is, the product weighs approximately 13.5 lbs., which is a little heavy for a pole saw. However, the Mid-mount motor helps distribute the overall weight of the product evenly, making it a lot easier to carry and use for a long time.

    Although there’s not enough scope to complain about this rather splendid pole saw, we’re not entirely satisfied with its noise levels. It can get deafeningly loud at times, for which we’d recommend the users to wear noise-cancellation headphones for safety.

    1. MAXTRA Cordless Gas Pole Saw

    Moving away from an electric saw a bit, we’d like to introduce you to one of the highest-rated gas powered saws in the market. The MAXTRA 2-stroke gas pole saw appears to be specially built for handling heavy-duty cutting tasks. If you’re all about power and efficiency, you have to check out its beast of a 42.7 cc motor!

    The main feature that makes pruning trees more comfortable is the ability to make necessary adjustments in the chain tensioning. The MAXTRA product supports this feature precisely, making the chainsaw a lot smoother and easier to work with. Furthermore, we’ve found a small air filter at one end of the model, which helps in extending the longevity of the product by a great deal.

    We have to say, It’s indeed a smart way of protecting the engine from overheating and similar issues. Furthermore, this model comes with an extended 10-inch pruning bar, which helps us trim hard to reach overhead branches with precision. We’re also quite impressed with the chain brake on the bar, which can save the user from numerous accidents other than keeping the fuel tank full.

    However, it doesn’t end there, as the manufacturers seem to take user safety to a new level with a broad set of additional accessories. For starters, the tool kit comes handy at fixing the minor engine errors/malfunctions. Which otherwise (if overlooked) can damage the model in the long run. Furthermore, the chain cover and shoulder strap also make it a lot safer for us to use these cordless pole saws.

    There’s a significant problem with this model- it’s nearly impossible to use it for a longer time. To begin with, this product is too heavy to be a handheld saw. Also, its noise levels are intolerable; however, the manufacturers provide free mufflers to protect our ears while using this device.

    1. TrimmerPlus TPP720 Pole Saw

    If you’re looking for moderately efficient pole saws for small personal jobs at a meager price tag, try the TrimmerPlus TPP720 model. This product beautifully bridges the gap amidst semi-professional pole saws and DIY personal equipment without breaking the bank. We strictly recommend this product to beginners, considering how easy to use it is.

    This one is an appropriate handheld manual pole saw that fits your budget and provides sufficient power to get your DIY tasks done. As this product is gas-powered, it doesn’t require any electrical power source to run, giving it a higher advantage in terms of portability. Moreover, we don’t seem to have any complaints about its efficiency either, as it provides sufficient power for a product at this reasonable price tag.

    Furthermore, we’ve found that this model comes with an impressive long reach of 12 ft., which makes it simply appropriate for small-end jobs. It also has a maximum cutting depth of 4 inches and can cut through softwood with precision. Although, what we’ve liked more is that the chainsaw also supports non-factory parts, especially manual poles, which can be useful at extending its reach by a fair deal.

    Last but not least, we have to mention how ultralight this product is for a pole saw. While most of the products on our list weigh an average of 10 lbs, this model weighs around 7.1 lbs. without fuel. It also features an ergonomic grip and design, making it 2x times more manageable for us to use this product for a long time.

    One can say that the USP of this product is that it provides sufficient power needed for DIY personal jobs, and we’d even agree to some extent. But in the long run, the product falls short in terms of consistent performance. We can’t guarantee that it can last for years to come, because it’s incredibly low-priced. Also, it delivers very little power if compared with our other recommendations.

    1. Jameson LS-6PKG-6 Pole Saw

    Jameson Tools is a brand that doesn’t need an introduction when we’re speaking of top-end equipment that makes our lives easier. Speaking of such innovations, we’ve recently tested its newest pole saw range, the LS-6PKG-6 unit. We’re quite impressed with its double-pulley feature, which makes tree pruning easier than it has ever been.

    If you’re into authentic vintage-designed equipment, the LS-6PKG-6 model is something you must have in your storeroom/garage. We can say that it’s highly durable because this model is built with sturdy wooden material. However, on the downside, some may assume that this wooden-built material would appear to be a little heavier than other plastic models.

    However, it isn’t true as the product features a center of gravity right below the middle point, which makes it easier to carry around and use. This model further takes the cake with its double-pulley system that gives us complete control of the device while pruning trees. We’ve found this model to be quite suitable for heavy-duty jobs, and recommend it for professional use.

    The secret behind it is its 16-inch sharp saw blade, which slices through the hardest of woods with precision. Here’s a little trivia- the blade design is inspired by the infamous marine predator, aka Barracuda fish. Furthermore, the product also comes with three 6’ poles that enable the saw to reach up to a maximum height of 18 ft., if assembled.

    Although the design is pretty stylish, it isn’t very convenient to work with. The manufacturers could have done a better job of designing the grip. And that’s because we were struggling to have proper stability while gripping the bottom, which isn’t a satisfying user experience.

    1. Silky HAYAUCHI 177-02-41 Pole Saw

    Silky Saws is often recognized as a “classic innovator” amongst professionals, as they offer the best-looking industrial models for heavy-duty jobs. The HAYAUCHI 177-02-41 model outshines every other product in the market when it comes to pole reach. Nonetheless, this model still has a lot more to offer in terms of cutting efficiency.

    There are a lot more new features that this model brings to the table. For instance, it features sturdy aluminum poles that offer higher durability while giving us complete control of the blade. Also, noteworthy to mention, this beats the LS-6PKG-6 model in terms of pole reach, as it comes with a maximum range of 26 ft. With this much height, the model enables us to prune the toughest of trees in a jiffy.

    Furthermore, the 177-02-41 also provides the user convenience that the LS-6PKG-6 had failed to address. In other words, the bottom of its pole comes with a rubberized grip and advanced end-shock absorbing technology. This makes the model a lot more ergonomic and makes it very comfortable to work with. Furthermore, the saw blade features a groundbreaking RETSUME technology that helps us cut through hardwood with precision.

    Despite such advanced features, this machine is quite compact and weighs as little as 7.35 pounds (including the blade cover), making it easier to store. Also, although we were a bit skeptical about its stability due to its high reach, this product appears as highly stable at its maximum height.

    To be honest, there’s nothing to complain about the 177-02-41 model when it comes to overall performance and durability. Nonetheless, this product appears to be a little pricey in comparison with other products on our list. It would’ve been better if the manufacturers could lower the price tag a bit so that more people can afford it.

    1. Milliard 6-16 ft Extendable Pole Saw

    Milliard Tools Co. is always one step ahead of the game and has established a name for itself with its groundbreaking products. We’ve recently tested its 6-16 ft extendable pole saw, and we’re quite satisfied with its flexibility and user comfort. Under a considerable price tag, this doesn’t seem quite bad for a medium-duty tool.

    This pole saw, without a doubt, takes the cake when it comes to looks. This model is built with fiberglass material with a glossy grey finish, making it very pleasing aesthetically. Furthermore, the fiberglass also makes sure that the product will last for years to come and make medium-duty easier. On top of that, the pole body allows it to be extended up to a maximum height of 16 ft, giving us a decent reach.

    Coming to its cutting efficiency, the model features a 14-inch long pole blade with 1.2 mm thickness. Fun fact- the saw blade is built with premium carbon SK5 steel, and it is sharpened on three different sides, which makes it very slick and razor-sharp. Furthermore, the unit also comes with advanced cutting teeth, which helps in achieving a greater grip while cutting the branches.

    We’re also quite impressed with how the blade offers a cutting depth of 1.25 inches, without going anywhere close beyond its limits. So, if you have plans to cut some thick branches, this product can get the job done with precision.

    It’s quite unfortunate how this product struggles with stability. It isn’t honestly the most extended pole saw we’ve come across till now; we’ve tested longer pole saws that have offered higher stability. On the other hand, this product appears to be highly unstable when it is extended fully.

    1. Fiskars 12 ft. Power-Lever Extended Tree Pruner

    The ultimate product on our list, the Fiskars Power-lever tree pole pruner, defines simplicity and convenience at its best. Fiskars is primarily known for its simplistic and flexible designs, and its 12 ft tree pole pruner carries forward this legacy with some cutting-edge features. Most importantly, its advanced Power-lever technology is something to look out for!

    Where should we begin? It’s an ideal pole saw when it comes to trimming small branches and pruning hardwood with precision. We were quite amazed by its power-lever feature, a unique technology that doubles the power of cutting that any normal tree pole pruner provides in the market. This way, the job gets done a lot quicker and easier.

    It also offers a maximum reach of 12 ft, making it easier to prune the overhead branches. Although it isn’t the longest pole saw we’ve featured in our list, it’s still satisfactory enough to finish medium-duty jobs. Furthermore, Fiskers offers high-quality steel that is guaranteed to remain unaffected by rust and corrosion for a lifetime. It’s a 15-inch long pole and is coated with a low-friction finish that makes it quicker to cut through hardwood.

    The 12 ft pole is adequately locked with a quick-release thumb lock that offers higher stability while working. Also, after the job is done, one simple press of thumb can release the establishment as well. Last but not least, the pole is built with premium fiberglass material that assures us high durability.

    It’s not the most advanced product, as the manufacturers maintain strict adherence to simplicity and convenience. So, even if it may be ideal for beginners and DIY enthusiasts, it may not be the best option for regular professionals. Also, this model offers a maximum cutting depth of 1.5 inches, which is too little for heavy-duty use.

    Longest Pole Saw Buyers Guide

    Trust us, being introduced to the best pole saws doesn’t make you an expert at choosing the best one instantly. It’s like being told to choose between a V12 and a V16 engine when you don’t even know what horsepower stands for.

    But, don’t worry; we’re here with the nitty-gritty of pole saws that you should keep in mind while buying one in our extended buyers’ guide. We’ll begin with the types of saws and further explore the key factors to double-check while buying a pole saw.

    Types of Pole Saws

    Mainly, you’ll find four types of pole saws in the market, such as-

    • Corded electric pole saws- These are an ideal for the homeowners, as they are incredibly lightweight, low-priced and run on electricity
    • Cordless electric pole saws- These serve the same purpose as the corded electric ones, except for offering higher portability and user convenience
    • Gas-fueled pole saws- These are more appropriate for the professionals, as these are very powerful and can be used anywhere without being dependent on a power source
    • Manual pole saws- These are very basic in terms of specifications, and are suitable for pruning and trimming gardens

    Now, coming to the key features, you have to keep these following factors in mind while buying a pole saw!

    Cutting depth

    First and foremost, a saw that doesn’t offer you a satisfying cutting thickness has ultimately zero value in terms of usability. If you’re a professional, you should aim for the models that provide a minimum depth of 5 inches. Otherwise, if you’re a regular homeowner, 1.5-2 inches will do. 

    Maximum reach

    The key benefit of using a pole saw is that it can reach heights that you cannot usually. On that note, always make sure that you’re buying a model that offers a minimum height of 14 ft. Otherwise, it wouldn’t be of much use to you.

    Weight 

    Remember that you have to hold these products upwards for a long time while working. In this situation, it is wise to opt for a lightweight pole saw, which otherwise will leave your arms fatigued after a harsh pruning session. Plus, a lightweight model also helps in maintaining higher stability, which is fundamental while using a pole saw.

    Our Verdict on Longest Pole Saws

    Pole saws aren’t as simple as they were 7-8 years ago; technology has evolved rapidly, and so has this piece of equipment.

    There are specs you’ve never heard of before, and it’s better to be guided by an expert opinion while buying a pole saw. On that note, we hope that our extensive guide has been of help to you. Now, let’s run a final highlight of our top picks.

    If you’re prioritizing pole length the most, we’d recommend you to buy the Silky 177-02-41 model that offers an impressive reach of 26 ft. If you’re looking for a lightweight model, the Sun Joe SWJ802E unit weighs as less as 7.9 pounds. If you want a pole saw with the most profound cutting thickness, the Oregon PS250-E6 model can cut through 8 inches with precision, cutting thick branches comfortably has never been easier.

    With that being said, we take your leave for now. But, we’ll be back soon with more exciting product recommendations to make your lives easier.

    Till then, stay connected!

    Related Articles

    Simply the Best Stained Glass Ring Saws

    49 FREE DIY Router Table Plans For an Epic Home Workshop

    10 Best Shop Vacs For Dust Collection

    13 Best Loppers

    13 Best Lawn Aerators

    Who Makes The Best Lawn Mower Engine Today?

    9 Best Ratchet Pruner

    11 Best Table Saw

    7 Best Cabinet Table Saws

    9 Best Band Saw

    7 Best 12-inch Miter Saw

    13 Best Contractor Table Saws

    Best 20″ Chainsaw

    6 Sabre Saw Vs. Jigsaw

    9 Best Manual Pole Saw

    Radial Arm Saw vs Miter Saw

    ROCKWELL VersaCut RK3440K Mini Circular Saw

    Leaf blowers are hardly the most complicated appliances, but do you have a clear idea about the speed rating or type of blower you want?

    Well, there are certain factors to consider while buying a lightweight leaf blower, which also ensures high efficiency and desirable results. That's why to make things easier on your part, we went on a spree and tested multiple models from different brands.

    It was only after a lot of groundwork and research that we ended up with 13 lightest weight leaf blowers for home use. Also, to ensure fair ranking, we individually checked the functions and features of each item, thereby bringing only the best onboard.

    Without further ado, let's get down to business.

    Lightest Leaf Blower

    Salesman is Showing New Leaf Blower to Clients

    1. Husqvarna 350BT Lightweight Leaf Blower

    Reigning in position number one, the Husqvarna 350BT is designed to make life easier with its compact design and convenient operations. If you've been using this brand, then you already know that it has a longstanding reputation for making high quality and efficient yard tools. And on that end, our top model is another superb addition, worth every penny.

    Husqvarna 350BT Gas Leaf Blower, 50.2-cc 2.1-HP 2-Cycle...
    • Husqvarna 350BT Gas Backpack Leaf Blower combines a high...
    • Powerful Clearing Performance: 2-cycle, 50.2-cc, 2.1-HP...

    Why Did We Like It?

    To begin with, the 350BT cordless leaf blower allows you to choose the style and features that best fit the job. Therefore, we recommend this appliance to landowners who have a considerably large outdoor space to look after.

    We are impressed with the application of x-torq engine technology in this unit that reduces harmful emissions by up to 75% and increases fuel efficiency. Also, since it's not dependent on electricity, users can freely move around in the yard without tripping over an extension cord.

    Besides, this handheld unit, unlike wired models, can easily access hard to reach places like gutters and rooftops. Apart from that, we like the ergonomic design of this lightweight leaf blower that minimizes stress on the arms and hands. Long story short, this product features anti-vibration dampeners that absorb the vibration and reduce arm fatigue.

    All in all, the 350BT is quite the show stopper and is excellent for stress-free yardwork.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Well, we hardly have any complaints about the performance and design of our first pick, but the only catch is the hefty price tag of this unit. Therefore, if you have the budget, you'll undoubtedly appreciate the product as the price issue aside, this lightweight leaf blower can truly work wonders.



    Pros

    • Cordless electric mower for improved mobility
    • Reduces harmful emissions by 75%
    • Anti-vibration dampeners minimize stress on arms
    • Ideal for large yards




    Cons

    • Item is quite expensive



    1. Makita DUB182Z Mini Leaf-Blower

    Our second product from the house of Makita has everything you would want in a lightweight unit and some more. That said, with this item, the brand has also made its mark in the yard maintenance department, and we recommend using it if you're looking for something easy to use.

    Makita DUB182Z 18V LXT® Lithium-Ion Cordless Blower, Tool...
    • Variable speed (0-18,000 RPM) for optimum speed control
    • Up to 12 minutes of continuous operation from a single...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Not all of us need a commercial-grade lightweight leaf blower for basic yardwork, so if you want an affordable unit for a small lawn, the DUB182Z will surely impress.

    First off, this mini model packs a lot of power despite having a compact size and it is capable of producing a maximum air velocity of 179 MPH. Now, that's a remarkable number on such a low-price unit and more than sufficient for average-sized homes.

    We especially like the variable 3-speed motor that allows you to customize settings and work at a comfortable pace. Even though it is not as powerful as our top model, the adjustable speed feature enables you to clear out outdoor spaces quickly and easily.

    Other than that, we like the anti-static design of this appliance that prevents any buildup of static electricity. However, what we like the most about this product is that it weighs only 3.9lbs, meaning you can swish this around as much as you like without tiring your arms.

    What Could've Been Better?

    In spite of so many positives, this mini device couldn't bag the first spot, mainly for its limited capacity. If large, overgrown trees surround your property, then this lightweight leaf blower will most likely fall short. Therefore, we suggest buying it only if you're looking for an economical blower for low-density leaf removal projects.



    Pros

    • Budget-friendly, mini leaf blower
    • Comes with 3 adjustable speed settings
    • Design prevents buildup of static electricity
    • Produces maximum air velocity of 179 MPH




    Cons

    • Not meant for heavy-duty applications



    1. Toro 51585 Lightweight Leaf Blower

    The Toro 51585 Leaf Blower is a sleek, well-made unit that will amaze homeowners with its high functionality and smooth operation. So, if you're expecting a high accumulation of leaves on the premises come fall, we recommend investing in this reliable machine that can clear off any yard in a jiffy.

    Why Did We Like It?

    Buying a low-priced appliance makes sense only when you don't have to compromise too much on quality. And, when it comes to this Toro item, we are absolutely stoked with its features, capacity, and reasonable price tag.

    For starters, it weighs a manageable 4.6lbs and sports a durable built, ideal for heavy-duty cleaning jobs. Even though it is a corded unit, we like the easy maneuverability it provides with the help of the long nozzle.

    Other than that, we like the 2 adjustable air speed controls, conveniently located on the handle, allowing on-demand access every time. Furthermore, the dual settings are especially useful as the low-speed mode offers greater control in tight areas, while the high-speed mode wraps up the job with increased power.

    Lastly, if you need a high capacity model for clearing leaves and debris from driveways, sidewalks, and yards, consider this option for optimum performance.

    What Could've Been Better?

    We are impressed with the overall functioning of this leaf blower and couldn't find many flaws with its design, either. However, it does not work very well on wet leaves as it lacks the required capacity to clear them. Nevertheless, it's still a viable option, especially if you're on a tight budget.



    Pros

    • Boasts a maximum speed velocity of 160 MPH
    • Features 2 adjustable speed settings
    • Compact and easy to use corded unit
    • Value for money model




    Cons

    • Struggles with wet leaves



    1. BLACK+DECKER LSW221

    If you think that we've run out of cordless options, we'd like to introduce the BLACK + DECKER LSW221 battery operated leaf blower to surprise you as your fourth candidate. However, in addition to the wireless operation, this model is chock full of features and ensures high efficiency and desirable outcome, regardless of the application.

    Sale
    BLACK+DECKER Cordless Leaf Blower with Battery and Charger...
    • Up to 130 MPH sweeping easily clears debris from hard...
    • Lightweight design of just 3.7 lbs.

    Why Did We Like It? 

    First and foremost, we like the neat and no-frills design of this leaf blower that enables easy operability across the yard, porch, or driveway. The lack of extraneous detail also contributes to the low weight of the unit and helps reduce arm fatigue.

    What we like best is its low-noise functioning that allows you to engage in long cleaning sessions without inviting annoyed glances from neighbors. So if things get notably worse after a full-blown storm, you can rely on this lightweight tool to deal with the maintenance job, quietly and efficiently.

    Furthermore, we are impressed with its 130 MPH speed capacity, which is enough to sweep away leaves, grass clippings, and debris from sidewalks, lawns, garages, and other hard surfaces. However, what we like best about this machine is its battery system, which can be used interchangeably with other devices from the brand. 

    Moreover, the batteries can preserve charge for up to 18 months, so you can keep it idle a whole season and still work with a full charge later. 

    What Could've Been Better? 

    We are, for most parts, satisfied with the performance of this battery-operated unit, but then again, there's a reason it's called a sweeper and not a leaf blower. The only concern is the capacity of this unit, which is nowhere close to a gas or electricity-powered model. Nevertheless, it still is a decent option for mid-sized properties that require limited cleaning. 



    Pros

    • Sleek lightweight leaf blower
    • Enables noiseless operation
    • Interchangeable batteries; can be used with other tools from the brand
    • Batteries hold charge for up to 18 months




    Cons

    • Limited capacity model



    1. WORX WG545.4 Cordless Hi-Capacity Blower

    The WORX Hi-Capacity Blower is one of the most versatile items on our list that has us thrilled with its phenomenal capacity and suite of innovative attachments. Therefore, if you're looking for a cordless leaf blower that can access the most to hard-to-reach places without the need to move a single thing, get cracking with this one.

    Worx WG545.4 20V Power Share AIR 4.0Ah Cordless Leaf Blower...
    • cordless convenience to quickly clean up your deck,...
    • clears hard to reach places, ideal for hard surfaces

    Why Did We Like It? 

    Our fifth pick is a 3-in-1 model that serves as a sweeper, blower, and cleaner, streamlining multiple jobs around the house. Obviously, we're very impressed with the 8 unique parts that can be fitted to the machine for a range of blowing and vacuum functions. 

    That being said, the device comes with a rechargeable 20V lithium battery and accessories, including two tubes, extended hose, dust nozzle, detail brush, dust brush, and a wide nozzle. Besides, you also get a deflator attachment that can be used to deflate rafts, pool toys & mattresses.

    What we like best is that you can use this dependable machine for cleaning applications both inside and outside the home. Meaning, its 120 MPH capacity is sufficient not only to blow leaves and twigs off the yard but is also good enough to clean furniture and windows. Furthermore, this lightweight leaf blower is perfect for blowing off debris collected in your workshop, shed, or garage. 

    What Could've Been Better? 

    We love this light-duty gadget for its superior range of functions and that too at an affordable price point. However, we would've liked it better if the battery capacity on this was slightly better since some jobs demand a longer runtime. Regardless, it's a great little machine to have around at home for dealing with regular chores. 



    Pros

    • Works as a blower, sweeper, and cleaner
    • Deflator attachment can be used to deflate mattresses and rafts
    • Blows off debris accumulated in the garage and shed
    • Suitable for cleaning dust on windows and furniture




    Cons

    • Battery capacity not enough for some applications



    1. Greenworks 40V Variable Speed Cordless Blower

    Greenworks has truly set the standard for high efficiency and performance with their 40V Variable Speed cordless leaf blower. Homeowners looking to fix their outdoor spaces quickly will love this smart-looking device that can deal with leaves in a snap. Long story short, our sixth entry is designed to impress from the get-go with its superior functionality and features.

    Sale
    Greenworks 40V Leaf Blower/Sweeper, 150 MPH, Lightweight,...
    • 40V SWEEPER: Perfect for clearing leaves and debris off hard...
    • 150 MPH / 135 CFM: Delivering powerful performance with a...

    Why Did We Like It? 

    To begin with, this model from Greenworks is best suited for small to mid-sized projects around the yard, driveway, or rooftop. As busy homeowners, we understand the need for high-performance tools that can wrap up the job effortlessly. That's why we recommend this wireless device as it does not require you to pull cords to begin function.

    The quick electric start makes things much easier, while the seamless battery operation eliminates the hassle of gas refill and risk of spillage. Furthermore, with this machine, you no longer have to worry about being labeled as the annoying neighbor as it packs a lot of power without emitting ear-numbing noises.  

    Apart from that, we love how low maintenance this model is, demanding just the bare minimum - battery recharging and safe storage. And that's all it takes to keep this robust and reliable yard tool going; sweeping and gathering leaves and debris in a blink.     

    What Could've Been Better? 

    The primary drawback of this Greenworks unit is that the included battery is not powerful enough. Meaning, while using it in the highest speed setting, you'll get only 14 minutes of runtime per full charge. To get more out of this product, you can buy an aftermarket 40-volt battery for further extending uninterrupted operation.



    Pros

    • Highly productive device for small to medium size projects
    • Features an instant electric start button
    • Quiet and smooth battery-operated function
    • Low maintenance model




    Cons

    • Runs for only 14 minutes with a full charge



    1. EGO Power+ Cordless Electric Blower

    We're halfway through our recommendations, and now is a good time to introduce the Ego Power+ Electric Blower. On that note, we're very impressed with this ergonomically designed model, engineered to provide unmatched user comfort and experience with excellent functionality. So if you expect your unit to work like a charm with minimum effort, we suggest investing this option.

    EGO Power+ LB4800 480 CFM 3-Speed Turbo 56-Volt Lithium-Ion...
    • Turbine fan engineering delivers up to 480 CFM
    • High efficiency brushless motor

    Why Did We Like It? 

    Let's just begin by saying that this cordless leaf blower looks like something straight out of science fiction movie. And that's not something you get to say often about a leaf blower. However, we're not all caught up with looks as we find this unit exceptionally powerful owing to its turbine fan-enabled technology. 

    To explain further, this electric rechargeable blower can give fierce competition to gas-fueled contenders as it surpasses the later in performance while also ensuring user comfort. Furthermore, this handheld beast can take care of any unwanted leaf accumulation on the property without the clamor, chaos, or vapor.

    But the best part about it is the 3 variable speed setting, providing convenience and customization as per the situation demands. Depending on the setting, you can get a good 1 hour of runtime wherein the built-in brushless motor generates enough power to get the job done.  

    Lastly, we're impressed with its reduced structure and climate-safe construction that further adds to the overall level of efficiency. 

    What Could've Been Better? 

    We've no complaints regarding the design or capacity of this model as it has delivered amazingly on both departments. However, we would not recommend this model for considerably bigger properties since it lacks that kind of horsepower. Nevertheless, it's a remarkable product and does an excellent job of clearing away buildups.



    Pros

    • Well designed model for higher user comfort
    • Performance comparable to premium gas-powered units
    • Comes with 3 velocity settings
    • Brushless motor technology yields high performance




    Cons

    • Inadequate for bigger properties



    1. K I M O. Cordless Leaf Blower

    For our eighth slot, we've picked this handy, cordless leaf blower from the house of KIMO. that facilitates seamless one-handed operability and provides multiple convenient features. It has been carefully engineered for enabling users to carry it anywhere effortlessly without tiring out the arms. So if you're looking for something compact and dependable, invest in this one. 

    K I M O. Cordless Leaf Blower Vacuum Combo 4 in 1, 3 Nozzles...
    • 🍃【𝟒-𝐢𝐧-𝟏 𝐁𝐥𝐨𝐰𝐞𝐫,...
    • 🍃【𝟑 𝐍𝐨𝐳𝐳𝐥𝐞𝐬 𝐟𝐨𝐫...

    Why Did We Like It?  

    First off, this eye-catching green unit from KIMO. also doubles as a vacuum cleaner with a highly effective suction mechanism. But since it's primarily a leaf blower, we would like to highlight it's impressive power capacity, sufficient to blow off wet leaves, little rocks, and even snow on your car.

    Therefore, you can use this model round the year and not just for clearing leaves during fall. Apart from that, we like the 4.0 Ah battery, ensuring an uninterrupted blower application for up to 30 minutes. And honestly, that's a serious flex as most other battery-operated units at this price range works for less than 20 minutes on a single charge.

    Furthermore, this portable option can be quickly converted into a vacuum device without changing any parts. So if you need to clean up pet hair, biscuit crumbs, and dust on the window, the suction feature can take care of it all. Also, this model comes included with reusable collection bags for convenient disposal after cleaning. 

    What Could've Been Better? 

    We are delighted with the 2-in-1 blower and vacuuming functions of this small yet powerful unit. However, this product is a little too expensive compared to other portable models on the market. Therefore, we recommend buying this only if you don't find a cheaper and equally efficient cordless alternative.



    Pros

    • Model doubles as a vacuum cleaner
    • 4.0 Ah battery ensures extended run time
    • Can be used to clear minor snow accumulation
    • Capable of blowing off wet leaves and little rocks




    Cons

    • Model is too expensive



    1. DEWALT DCBL720P1 XR Brushless Blower

    The Dewalt Brushless Blower is built like a tank and yet loses no marks when it comes to portability. Obviously, this product is from a reputable brand that manufactures some of the best power tools in the market. And we're pleased to say that this sturdy appliance has checked more than a few boxes. 

    DEWALT 20V MAX* XR Blower, Brushless, 5-Ah Battery...
    • Battery operated leaf blower gets up to 400 CFM of air...
    • High-efficiency brushless motor maximizing run time and...

    Why Did We Like It? 

    Like all Dewalt products, the DCBL720P1 also comes in the iconic yellow, and black get up. But the most discernible feature is the axial fan design on the rear end of the blower that significantly contributes to the overall performance of the unit. 

    So if you have some heavy-duty leaf clearing to do, you'll appreciate its highest capacity of 400 CFM of air volume at 90 MPH. And since the unit runs on a 5.0Ah lithium-ion battery, you can expect high air output combined with extended runtime. 

    Furthermore, we're very impressed with the ergonomic design of this model that's built to maximize productivity and reduce stress on the arms. Besides, this portable gadget ensures high functionality and seamless operation without having to deal with fumes and mechanical noises.   

    Also, unlike a lot of other battery-operated models, this product comes included with the charger so you can use it straight out from the box. 

    What Could've Been Better? 

    We wouldn't have complained so much about the price if this model had more features apart from the basic functions. That being said, it's a costly item that sure packs a lot of power and delivers superbly well. But if you're not in a mood to splurge on leaf blowers, this may not work.



    Pros

    • Generates 400 CFM of air volume at 90 MPH
    • Powered with a 5.0Ah battery
    • Provides an extended runtime
    • Product comes included with the battery




    Cons

    • Model is too costly



    1. Greenworks PRO 80V Cordless Blower

    We may seem a little partial to Greenworks products, but a list of lightweight leaf blowers would be incomplete without the PRO 80V model. That being the case, our tenth pick is a powerhouse, ensuring top-notch performance right from the beginning. Therefore, regardless of the situation, you can expect this beast to deliver and amaze. 

    Greenworks 80V (125 MPH / 500 CFM / 75+ Compatible Tools)...
    • 80V BLOWER: Perfect for cleaning leaves and debris off hard...
    • 500 CFM / 125 MPH: Delivers powerful performance....

    Why Did We Like It? 

    Greenworks has been making a lot of waves recently with this 80V cordless leaf blower, designed to yield excellent performance regardless of the speed setting. This commercial-grade power tool is ideal for homes with large outdoor spaces, as it can tackle the most demanding jobs across variable terrain. 

    Moreover, we're very impressed with its superior air output fuelled by 80V 2Ah Lithium-Ion battery. Besides, when it comes to runtime, the PRO has bowled us over with 70 minutes of uninterrupted operation while on the lowest speed settings. Also, with a full charge, you can use it on medium and high-speed modes, which runs for 28 and 12 minutes respectively.

    Apart from the 3 variable speed options, we like the cushioned overmold grip that provides comfortable and secure hold while sweeping across the yard. And since it's rated at only 60 dB, you can confidently use it in neighborhoods and corporate parks with noise ordinances. 

    What Could've Been Better? 

    Despite being conveniently portable, this unit is quite a handful, with the battery sticking out from the rear. We would've liked it better if the tool came with a storage accessory like a hook or a strap. Therefore, we recommend buying this tool only if you've sufficient storage space to keep the appliance readily accessible.



    Pros

    • 3 variable speed settings; high, medium and low
    • Cushioned overmold grip maximizes comfort
    • Suitable for large outdoor spaces
    • Commercial grade model meant for heavy-duty application




    Cons

    • No accessory for storing



    1. Bosch ALB 36 LI Cordless Leaf Blower

    The Bosch ALB 36 LI Cordless Leaf Blower provides maximum mobility, allowing you to access hard to reach places in a snap. However, we don't get convinced by just looking at the brand name, but when we tested all the functions, we were impressed with its high capacity and intuitive controls.

    Bosch Cordless Leaf Blower ALB 36 LI (Without Battery, air...
    • Cordless freedom, no longer confined to the limitations of a...
    • Variable speeds of 170 - 250 km/hr. Note: Battery and...

    Why Did We Like It? 

    First things first, this slender appliance is fuelled by a 36V 2.6Ah battery, providing maximum power with less weight. To further add to the convenience, the AL 3620 charger that comes with the model features three indicative lights to signal whether the unit is charging, charged, or exhausted. 

    Furthermore, the appliance comes equipped with an intelligent Syneon chip that controls the current and voltage equation to prevent overheating, thereby increasing lifetime. Also, to streamline the clearing process, the ALB features a bent-tube nozzle to facilitate the best angle for blowing, without having to stoop.  

    Other than that, the device features a red button that allows you to take the tube apart from the main body, enabling secure storage. Whereas the minimalist controls on the unit make it user-friendly even for the least tech-savvy of all. All in all, it's an excellent acquisition that can be used for multiple garden cleaning jobs.   

    What Could've Been Better? 

    We are pleased with the easy operability of this appliance and like the add-on features incorporated into the model. Our only gripe is the runtime on this cordless leaf blower, which is far from the best. That being said, if you can overlook this hassle, it's still a reliable tool for yard maintenance. 



    Pros

    • Syneon chip technology prevents overheating
    • Equipped with a bent tube nozzle for a better angle
    • User-friendly and intuitive controls
    • Red button takes apart the unit for convenient storage




    Cons

    • Model has an unsatisfactory runtime



    1. Makita DUB183Z 18V LXT Lithium-Ion Cordless Blower

    The DUB183Z is a compact, low noise leaf blower that runs on Makita's standard 18V batteries. So if you're looking for something handy to clean the garden or sweep the workshop after finishing a job, we recommend using this tool for efficient and desirable results. Also, since it's pretty easy to use as well, you'll like to keep this for home use.

    Makita DUB183Z 18V LXT® Lithium-Ion Cordless Floor Blower,...
    • Up to 18 minutes of continuous operation at high speed using...
    • Variable speed (0-18,000 RPM) for optimum air volume control...

    Why Did We Like It? 

    The first thing you'll notice about our 12th guy is the compact proportions that allow convenient operation and storage. The controls are minimal, including a black variable speed trigger that you've to press for the desired velocity. Also, there's a thumbwheel located behind the trigger that offers access to 3 air volume settings: low, mid, and high.

    Long story short, when you move this thumbwheel, the motor inside runs faster and generates more power for better cleaning. Apart from that, we like the long blower nozzle with a flat end, enabling comfortable use while standing upright. Furthermore, the comfortable, rubberized soft grip adds to the easy operability of the appliance by ensuring maximum control. 

    Even when used in the highest air volume setting, this model works almost soundlessly. Therefore, you can confidently use it even if you live in the quietest of all neighborhoods as it does the job without causing a din. 

    What Could've Been Better? 

    Since this model comes without the batteries, you have to spend more on buying the brand's 18V batteries. This is an additional cost you could've otherwise avoided, but then if you use other power tools from Makita, investing in this model makes sense as you can use the batteries interchangeably.



    Pros

    • Convenient and intuitive controls
    • Soft rubberized grip for a comfortable experience
    • Flat end nozzle enables seamless functionality while standing upright
    • Quiet operation even on the highest setting




    Cons

    • Batteries need to bought separately



    1. Avid Power Cordless Leaf Blower

    Now that we've reached the end of our list, we would like to finish off with this high-performing model from the house of Avid Powers. It is easily one of the most budget-friendly options available in the market and yet offers all the power and versatility you need for light-duty yard cleaning chores.

    AVID POWER Leaf Blower, 20V Cordless Leaf Blower with 2.0Ah...
    • 【Meet Your Needs】Lightweight Cordless leaf blower easily...
    • 【High Performance】Up to 140 MPH/155 CFM; No-load speed:...

    Why Did We Like It? 

    This might be the last item on our list, but that's not a comment on its quality or features. That said, we're impressed with this highly portable cordless blower that can successfully sweep away leaves, sticks, and debris even from hard surfaces like driveways, garages, decks, and porches. 

    Furthermore, we like the rubberized blower handle that facilitates one-handed operation while the lock-on button ensures less fatigue while in use.

    Also, this leaf blower runs on a 20V battery that generates a maximum motor speed of 12500 RPM. Given the price, that's quite decent, as the motor is capable of producing air velocity of up to 130 MPH, which is much higher compared to other budget options. 

    Apart from these specs, we like that the battery features a real-time indicator to point out present capacity. Also, it comes with a USB port for charging cellphones. These are add-on features that we very much appreciate as they increase the value for money appeal.  

    What Could've Been Better? 

    Given the price and capacity of this product, obviously we do not expect anything above and beyond basic functions. Nevertheless, we would've preferred if it provided a longer runtime, which is sometimes necessary even for light-duty yardwork. Other than that, it's a great model if you need something functional within a low budget.



    Pros

    • Generates air velocity of up to 130 MPH
    • Battery features a USB for charging phones
    • Battery comes with a real-time charge indicator
    • Rubberized grip enables one-handed operation




    Cons

    • Not the best runtime



     

    Lightest Leaf Blower Buyer's Guide

    Knowing the 13 lightest weight leaf blowers is hardly too much information.

    Nevertheless, we don't want to leave you all confused and worked up with all this detail. That's why to help you figure out which one of these options will work best, we put together this comprehensive guide. Also, we want you to make an informed decision while investing in a model, so you don't get stuck with a machine that's not much use. 

    We have carefully listed the various factors you need to consider when buying a portable leaf blower. Read on to know more…

    1. Type of Leaf Blower

    Usually, you get to choose between cordless battery-operated options or wired electric or gas-powered models. Ideally, to ensure convenience and mobility, we recommend using cordless options. However, not all cordless leaf blowers can deliver the same air volume capacity as gas-fuelled ones. Therefore, check the specs before picking either of the two alternatives.

    1. Battery Voltage

    If you decide on buying a battery-operated, cordless leaf blower, check the voltage offered by the model. That being said, you can expect better performance from appliances with a higher battery voltage rating. This includes options like 20V or 40V battery system enabled leaf blowers. You can also find options with 80V ratings, which are considerably more expensive than the standard 20V models.

    1. Airflow and Speed

    The primary mechanism of a leaf blower depends on how much air can be produced and at what speed. That's why it's imperative to verify the airflow and speed rating of a model before buying one. The numbers, in this case, are critical as they give you a fair idea of the clearing capacity of a machine.

    The airflow generated by a leaf blower is measured in CFM (cubic ft/min), and the higher you go, the more efficient it gets. Similarly, options with higher airspeed can do the job better as well.

    1. Size and Weight

    Obviously, all the 13 items on our list are portable and lightweight leaf blowers, meaning you can comfortably maneuver them across the lawn, driveway, garage, or porch. However, while buying a leaf blower, make sure that the selected model has some measures or technology to reduce stress on the arms. You should also weigh in the ergonomics of the model so that you can use the machine comfortably with easy access to the controls.

    1. Additional Features

    Some models come with rubberized grips for a secure hold and one-handed operability while others come with angled nozzles, allowing users to stand upright. While these are not must-have features, we recommend looking for them as they can provide comfortable user experience and improve overall efficiency of the model by streamlining yardwork.

    Verdict

    Nobody likes to spend hours in their yard, cleaning out leaves and debris, so if you have the right appliance, you get to accomplish the job much quicker. Therefore, you can now quit laboring and confidently choose the best lightweight leaf blower from our all-star collection and keep your outdoor space spic and span.

    On that note, we have come to the end of this comprehensive review and guide about leaf blowers. And we hope you were able to select a suitable option that'll best meet your needs from our itemized reviews.

    However, before we leave, let's head for a quick recap. The Husqvarna 350BT Lightweight Leaf Blower is the best overall, while the WORX WG545.4 Cordless Hi-Capacity Blower is the most versatile. Apart from that, the Toro 51585 Lightweight Leaf Blower is the best budget buy, and the DEWALT DCBL720P1 XR Brushless Blower is the most eco-friendly option.

    Let us know in the comments section below if you agree with our verdict.

    Till next time!

    Related Articles

    8 Best Blowers For Drying Cars This Year

    10 Most Powerful Leaf Blowers to Consider 

    13 Best Leaf Mulchers & Shredder

    Echo PB 580T Review | Is this the one?

    When it comes to expressing your creativity freely, opting for a subject such as canvas painting ideas seems like a viable option. Art in its many forms has a great ability which can be easily underestimated. It can get under your skin without you even noticing it, becoming an essential part of our beings and daily life.

    Every single DIY project you start has the potential to become a work of art if enough dedication spirit and love are given. Painting in general has been proven to exude calming effects, thus providing a wonderful method of relieving daily stress and disconnecting from the outside world.

    As a beginner in the canvas painting world, one must accept from the very start that a set of basic rules apply here as in any other domain in order to obtain the desired end results. So today we'll be starting with a set of basic rules revolving around Canvas Painting Ideas and the right choices you should take to start on the right track for your easy canvas painting projects.

    Before you start, the bests oil or acrylic paints for canvas painting, best acrylic palettes, best overall acrylic paints, best budget acrylic paints, best acrylic paint brushes or the best paper products for acrylic, Homesthetics is here to help!

    Without further ado, let's get started!

    Basics of Canvas Painting Ideas And Projects

    Learn The Basics of Canvas Painting Ideas And Projects homesthetics (2)

    The Basics of Canvas Painting

    The very first and basic mistake everyone makes at the beginning of this art is the rush of jumping into the painting act itself without the right preparations for the working environment and materials used. As I am sure many of you have done in the past, I was used to buying a pre-stretched canvas or canvas board from a library and starting the piece right away, on the black slate, which I have found out can be a huge mistake from my part

    One of the fundamental techniques used in painting is covering the white canvas with a solid paint color called a "toned ground" or "colored ground"

    The reasons behind this choice are numerous. A toned ground will provide a background for your work of art which will result in a more professional-looking piece, giving you more speed and efficiency in the painting process . There are two methods of applying the colored ground to your canvas. The first one is opaque and the second is a transparent stain, an Imprimatura. We recommend you to start with the opaque finish and work from there on. As for the colors themselves, it all depends on your choice of subject and the results you are looking for. Earth colors such as umber or yellow ochre are the best choices for landscapes and for the beginner level. Yellow ochre might seem like a bold first choice but can provide a balanced background on which you can build on the different acrylic layers that will compose your work. If you are still not sure of this choice, you can add some Titanium white to the mixture to tone it down.

    What is the best paint to use on a canvas?

    As we are working our way up from the beginner level, we recommend you to start with basic Acrylic paint. "Acrylic paint is a fast-drying paint containing pigment suspension in acrylic polymer emulsion. Acrylic paints are water-soluble, but become water-resistant when dry. Depending on how much the paint is diluted with water, or modified with acrylic gels, media, or pastes, the finished acrylic painting can resemble a watercolor or an oil painting, or have its own unique characteristics not attainable with other media."

    As Acrylic is based on adding, you can count on the colored ground you have added to your canvas to do the work for you. It will temper the hues and help you observe the true tones of the paint you add in comparison to a blank white canvas which will play tricks on your eye.

    How much do I dilute my acrylics?

    A percentage of 40-50% water is accepted from most manufacturers. More than this you will be diluting some of the acrylic adhesive qualities, which are essential in order for the paint to really attach to the canvas and on each added layer. After gaining some experience with basic Acrylics you can opt for other paint sets which come already diluted from fabric and provide a consistent layer.

    Learn The Basics of Canvas Painting Ideas And Projects homesthetics (2)

    This amazing piece by Michael Shapcott used different techniques of applying the paint layers, resulting in a rich explosion of tones and creativity. We can all agree this level is very difficult to reach, but we can aspire to greatness.

    Further on we'll explore some of the different techniques you can choose in your Canvas Painting Ideas Projects.

    The classical paint brush

    Learn The Basics of Canvas Painting Ideas And Projects homesthetics (3)

    Learn The Basics of Canvas Painting Ideas And Projects homesthetics (2)

    1. Start by learning how to paint a simple flower

     

    Learn The Basics of Canvas Painting Ideas And Projects homesthetics (20)

    Source

    2. Advance and learn to mix up tones and create transitions

    Learn The Basics of Canvas Painting Ideas And Projects homesthtics

    Tutorial here

    3. Use basic colors at the beginning

    3.USE BASIC COLORS AT THE BEGINNING

    pink and black simple basic canvas painting combination

    red and black simple basic canvas painting combination

    Learn The Basics of Canvas Painting Ideas And Projects homesthetics (3)

    Image source

    Mixing things up and combining the technique of classical painting with a brush with ordinary objects to create texture

    4. Bubble wrap and paint

    4. BUBBLE WRAP AND PAINT
    Source

    5. Create a pattern by using tape

    5. CREATE A PATTERN BY USING TAPE

    Source

    6. Decide on your limits and go for a dual-tone artwork

    6. DECIDE ON YOUR LIMITS AND GO FOR A DUAL TONE PAINTING

    Source

    7. Design a pattern using tape and start dotting

    7. DESIGN A PATTERN USING TAPE AND START DOTTING

    Source

    8. Pop colors in a pallet knife technique art

    8. POP COLORS IN A PALLET KNIFE TECHNIQUE ART

    Source

    9. Create wall art using a stencil

    9. CREATE WALL ART USING A STENCIL

    10. A bright-colored ground and some sparkle

    10. A BRIGHT COLORED GROUND AND SOME SPARKLE

    Source

    11. Combine fun tones and play with shapes

    11. COMBINE FUN TONES AND PLAY WITH SHAPES

    Source

    12.  You can add newspaper to your canvas for a textured background

    12.  YOU CAN ADD NEWSPAPER TO YOUR CANVAS FOR A TEXTURED BACKGROUND

    13. Or keep a neutral color pallet and exercise on detailing

    13. OR KEEP A NEUTRAL COLOR PALLET AND EXERCISE ON DETAILING

    Source

    14. Spray painting is also a choice

    14. SPRAY-PAINTING IS ALSO A CHOICE

    Source

    15. A splash of color

    15. A SPLASH OF COLOR

    Source

    16. A deep blue ground and a delicate intricate paint pen insertion

    16. A DEEP BLUE GROUND AND A DELICATE INTRICATE PAINT PEN INSERTION

    Source

    17. Stardust canvas painting idea

    17. STARDUST CANVAS PAINTING IDEA 

    Source

    18. White on grey seems so delicate

    18. WHITE ON GREY SEEMS SO DELICATE

    Source

    19. An example of an easy canvas painting project

    19. AN EXAMPLE OF AN EASY CANVAS PAINTING PROJECT

    Source

    20. Choose simple designs as a beginner

    20. CHOOSE SIMPLE DESIGNS AS A BEGINNER

    Source

    21. A mixture of a chevron background obtained with the use if tape and a central brush painted heart

    21. A MIXTURE OF A CHEVRON BACKGROUND OBTAINED WITH THE USE IF TAPE AND A CENTRAL BRUSH PAINTED HEART

     

    22. Cool canvas painting ideas projects using tape

    22. COOL CANVAS PAINTING IDEAS PROJECTS USING TAPE

    Source

    23. Mix paint tones using a piece of cardboard and create a wave effect

    23. MIX PAINT TONES USING A PIECE OF CARDBOARD AND CREATE A WAVE EFFECT

    Source

    24. Take things a little bit further and transform your work of art into a light design piece

    24. TAKE THINGS A LITTLE BIT FURTHER AND TRANSFORM YOUR WORK OF ART INTO A LIGHT DESIGN PIECE

    Source

    25. An elaborated piece combining a series of techniques

    25. AN ELABORATED PIECE COMBINING A SERIES OF TECHNIQUES

    Source

    So what is your take on these easy canvas painting ideas? Is it something you would dare to try on? We would very much like it if you would share your ideas and personal canvas painting ideas and projects in the comment section below.

    Related Articles

    3 Canvas Painting Ideas You Should Definitely Take On

    Get Your Hands Dirty With DIY Painting Crafts And Ideas

    Expand Your Knowledge With Watercolor Painting Ideas

    19 Fun And Easy Painting Ideas For Kids

    19 Incredibly Beautiful Watercolor Painting Ideas

    19 Easy Canvas Painting Ideas To Take On

    20 Oil And Acrylic Painting Ideas For Enthusiastic Beginners

    Add Color To Your Home With 15 Beautiful Canvas Painting Ideas

    15 Do-It-Yourself Pottery Painting Ideas You Can Actually Use

    Delight Your Senses With Canvas Painting Ideas For Beginners

    Top 31 Amazing DIY Paintings For Your Blank Walls

    Best Acrylic Paint Brushes for Artists & Students Reviewed

    Drawing, painting, sketching have been proven to have an immense beneficial effect on the human psychic and body alike. They spark creativity, engage imagination, provide a calm, a repetitive technique that establishes rules, lines and patterns, an oasis of relaxation and control in a chaotic world.

    Getting started with a new painting requires a few preliminary steps you ought to take: finding theproper paints, the desired work surface according to your wishes and deciding on the design path you are going to take. Today we will journey through the land of acrylic painting and we will Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners.

    Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects

    Source

    We will start our journey by exploring a few techniques involving applying paint, mixing the right colors and tones, layering and many more creative procedures that lead to the perfect acrylic painting.

     types of brushes acrylic painting techniques for beginners

    Learn Techniques on How to Apply Acrylic Paint

    The basic materials- an acrylic brush, a piece of paper and acrylic paint are the essential elements that can be mixed to create an unbelievable painting. Let's go over a few techniques that will provide a variety of styles of creating your desired creation.

    1. Dry brushing

    Acrylic paints come in very strong pigmented tones and unless diluted by water, the tones you will obtain on canvas or paper will be rather strong. When using the dry brushing technique, the effect will be one of uneven brush. You could use water to smooth the edges and soften the touches but if you are looking for texture and direction, choose this simple basic technique.

    1. DRY BRUSHING Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (6)

    2. adding water

    Acrylic paint can be used in a similar manner to watercolor when enough water is added to the mixture and offers a translucent coat to the used paper. Take into account though that unlike watercolors which can be diluted again on paper after having dried, acrylics dry and set on the paper or canvas forever, mistakes cannot be erased, tones cannot be changed.

    1. DRY BRUSHING Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    3. stippling

    This techniques consists of applying layers of various tiny paint dots to create  depth in an imagery as well as texture. Imagine creating an autumn forest out of an array of lovely coppery tones using this technique.

     

    1. STIPPLING Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    Source

    4. Flicking

    Take a rather large brush, get it fairly wet and flick paint onto your surface. This is how the lovely splattery effect creations are made, adding texture and somehow delicacy to your painting. You can even use this technique to ensemble an abstract piece in an array of complementary tones.

    1. FLICKING Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    5. Dabbing

    Dabbing involves applying paint by using a corner of a sponge or a piece o paper towel. It is often used to add accents and movement in cinematic creations.

    1. dABBING Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    6. Detailing

    When trying to detail an eye or the strands of a feather a very small delicate brush should be used. White acrylic is preferred to add light and reflections to the creation, as well as pure black and grays for shadowing. Delicacy and patience are essentials for perfect results.

    1. detailing Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    Source

    7. using a palette knife

    If you have always wondered what the exact role of a palette knife was, you will now know that it is commonly used to apply thick layers of paint and create texture and volume. It is a very easy technique, accessible to everyone and can result in very artistic creations. The difficulty lies in having the patience of allowing the first layer to dry before using the palette knife to add more paint, in order to avoid scrapping involuntarily your base, palette knife painting is a patience game and a pure form of art.

    1. palette knife Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    Basic techniques for building a painting

    Every art creation requires time, dedication and commitment. Acrylic painting is no different and requires a mixture of techniques and layers to obtain that complex intricate final effect. Mastering all of them takes time but each one will add a new depth to your art piece.

    The under-painting technique

    No matter what you might think, every painting starts with a sketch of the final image, you must trace some boundaries that will help you in your painting process. It is common to use a color in contrast with the ones you will actually use for the piece. In the end you can opt to cover the lines up and mask any trace of the sketch or to make use of it and actually emphasize it, it is only up to you and your style.

    Artists use the under-painting techniques regardless of expression, from abstract art to detailed portraits. Needless to say that there are artists that do not use it but for beginners is extraordinarily useful and encourages creativity and productivity at the same time.

    THE UNDER-PAINTING TECHNIQUE

    Glazing

    You can incorporate a matte medium into your paint and apply the paint in thin multiple layers in order to obtain the desired tones.

    glazing Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    Source 

    Layering

    Layering is the simple technique of starting the painting with big portions of uni colors and adding more and more layers of paint and increasing the detail level. Similar to oil painting, the layering technique requires patience and waiting for each layer to dry out before applying a new one in order to preserve the purity of the colors.

    layering Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    Source

    Paint in blocks of color

    If you are a beginner acrylic painter, you should start by mastering the technique of painting in blocks of colors. Sketching the basic shape will come in handy. Use distinct shapes associated with different tones and try to stay inside the traced contour.

    paint in blocks Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners

    Source

    How to color mix

    There is no big secret behind mixing acrylic colors: you simply use a palette knife to mix the desired hues, acrylic paint makes it that simple!

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (4)

    Only partially mix colors

    For a complex painting effect involving more than one tone of acrylic paint, use the palette knife to partially mix the colors desired, then apply them using a rather dry brush to avoid mixing the tones.

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects (10)

    Use a family of tones

    You can choose the primary tone you are going to use throughout the design and use white to obtain various tones that will come in handy when trying to add depth, details, texture and shadows. Preparing your acrylics before starting the process is a great idea but keep in mind to not mix large portions at once, they will only dry out before you manage to apply them.

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (5)

    Acrylic Painting Ideas for Beginners

    Now that we have browsed through a series of acrylic painting techniques, enjoy the beautiful collection that follows featuring simple and creative acrylic creations

    CREATIVE ACRYLIC CREATION GALLERY

    Source

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (3)

    Source

    CREATIVE ACRYLIC CREATION GALLERY

    Source

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (5)

    Source

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (6)

    Source

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (7)

    Source

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (1)

    Source

    Learn The Basic Acrylic Painting Techniques for Beginners- Ideas and Projects-homesthetics (1)

    Source

    If you are wondering what are the best paper products for acrylic painting you can find them here; on Homesthetics we have also reviewed the best paints for canvas painting over here in an attempt to aid art enthusiasts around the world.

    What is your take on acrylic painting? We would love to see your artwork so feel free to share your creations with the rest of the DIY community in the comment section below.

    Read More on Acrylic Painting

    5 of The Best Paint for Canvas Today

    Painting Surfaces For Acrylics | Acrylic Prepping 101

    Painting on Paper with Acrylics & 5 Paper-Like Surfaces to Consider

    Acrylic Pour Painting [All You Need To Know]

    20 Oil And Acrylic Painting Ideas For Enthusiastic Beginners

    22+ Delicate Beautiful Acrylic Painting Ideas To Try

    Learn How to Use Acrylic Paint as Fabric Paint Right Now

    Learn How to Thicken Acrylic Paint Correctly Right Now

    Learn How to Clean Acrylic Paint Brushes Brilliantly

    Learn How to Make Acrylic Paint in Your Studio

    Learn How To Get Dried Acrylic Paint Out Of Brushes Successfully

    Acrylic Painting Materials That You Really Need In The Studio

    Learn How To Make An Acrylic Painting Waterproof Right Now

    Acrylic Paint Thinner 101 | How to Thin Your Acrylic Paints Correctly

    Best Cheap Acrylic Paints – Strength and Weakness of Brands Compared

    8 Best Palettes For Acrylic Paint & How to Choose What You Need

    Best Canvas for Acrylic Painting | Student & Artist Grade

    13 Best Acrylic Paints for Beginners & Professionals Reviewed

    10 Best Paper for Acrylic Paint 

    103 Best Acrylic Painting Ideas [Reviewed]

    Best Acrylic Paint Brushes for Artists & Students Reviewed

    Happy painting!

    Today you will learn to create something extraordinary, something that can change the way you envision and materialize designs in a great manner. Today you are going to learn how to transfer pictures onto wood with wax paper. Through a simple, fast, and inexpensive procedure you can materialize absolutely any wooden surface with absolutely any image or text that you can think of. The possibilities are endless and the results are staggering, a vintage-like feel will be embedded now into the item in an extraordinarily beautiful manner.

    You will only need wax paper and a printer for this tutorial and, as printers are all around the world, all you have to do is to find some wax paper at a local shop and you are good to go.

    It is worth mentioning that the printer should be inkjet, not laser.

    If you are using a Silhouette Cameo for the transfer we have featured in an article on Homesthetics the Best Heat Transfer Vinyl [HTV] Options right here!

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (4)

    Take the roll of wax paper and cut just a few sheets of a standard paper size for the printer. In most cases A4 will do but if you need a bigger surface try A3 or A2 .

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (5)

    Pick your lovely subject, a smooth, preferably a light coloured piece of wood. It is worth trying on multiple pieces before you go ahead and try on the one that you want to imprint. Find a decent resolution for the image you are going to print. If you have found just a small size online you can check the whole web for other size of the picture with tineye.com, a reverse image search engine. Pick the best resolution in the results for print.

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (2)

    Once you have the image ready it is time to reverse it. Just flip it horizontally through any photo program you have on your computer. You will probably find a few web based programs as well to help you with it.

    Now simply put the cropped piece of waxer paper into the printer and click paint.

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (7)

    Keep in mind that waxed paper is quite thin and it may require a normal A4 as support. If you manage to print on it without support be careful to gently guide it as it comes out of the printer to avoid rolling accidents or jamming the printer. The ink must remain intact.

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (8)

    It is time. Position the image exactly where you need it on the wood and make sure that the wood is unfinished, if the surface is glossy it won`t work. Try it out on a piece of salvaged wood, a bench or vegetable box for example.

    Once you position the image you can`t relocate it so make sure you know where it will go. You can even draw some guiding lines to aid you.

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (9)

    Hold the piece of wax steady and tight on the wood and slowly, carefully swipe the edge of a credit card or something similar across the image; in this manner you will push the ink from the wax paper onto the wood which will absorb it.

    Push hard enough on the wax paper to make sure you get results yet not so hard that you rip the waxed paper. If you consider yourself skillful or experienced with the process you can gently lift the paper to see if it works well.

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (10)

    If everything worked well you are probably speechless now, glancing on the beautified piece of wood. Congratulations.

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (11)

    More examples materialized with the same process :

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (1)

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (6)

    After the ink is all dried out you can now finish the surface to enhance the item`s life span. The tear and wear will look great on the vintage piece too but it is your call entirely. Any sealer will do the trick so do not waste money on special items. Needless to say, extraordinary photographies can be transferred for the ultimate gift. Everything can now become wall art. Keep that in mind.

    Learn How To Transfer Pictures onto Wood with Wax Paper For The Ultimate Gift homesthetics tutorials (12)

    What do you think about this technique? We find it extremely creative, it changed the way we see certain items now and it opens up limitless possibilities.

    Christmas festivities involve decorating and lighting up your home inside and out. But how should you store the lights for next year after Christmas? 

    Icicle lights are an indispensable part of Christmas décor all over the world. They are used for lighting up the interiors as well as exteriors. And with a dash of creativity, these lights add an excellent and almost surreal look and feel to any home. 

    Icicle lights look stunning but can be problematic to store once the holiday is over and routine life resumes. They are not the sturdiest lights, and if not stored safely, they might get damaged.

    The most common problem that icicle lights pose is tangling up in a bunch of frustrating knots. So, how do you store icicle lights in a tangle-free, safe, and convenient manner? 

    Read on to learn the three best products that will help you store icicle lights after Christmas! 

    Listed below are the best options for icicle light storage containers from our list:

    • Adams Christmas Light and Cord Wind Ups. Adams Christmas Light and Cord Wind-Ups are polypropylene wind-ups that efficiently keep lights, extension cords, and garlands organized and tangle-free; they prove to be compact in storage bins and extend the durability of icicle lights.
    • Trademark Home Extension Cord or Christmas Light Reels with Bag. Trademark Home Extension Cord or Christmas Light Reels with Bag ensure a convenient, durable storage solution for Christmas lights and extension cords.
    • Elf Stor Light Storage Bag with Steel Reels. Elf Stor Light Storage Bag with Steel Reels, designed with high-quality welded steel, allows for safe, clean, and organized storage of about 200-foot strings of icicle lights with their user-friendly design and smooth finish.

    1. Adams Christmas Light and Cord Wind Ups

    Adams, USA offers wind-ups made from polypropylene that allow you to keep your lights, extension cords, and garlands organized and tangle-free.

    These wind-ups from Adams are not only a thing of beauty but are very efficient for storing icicle light strands. Using them will save significant space in your storage bins and maintain the useful life of the somewhat delicate icicle lights.

    The wind-ups from Adams feature a simple design that can be effective for storing bulky strands including bulb covers and wire gauges. To make the most of this useful tool, you can wrap two to three icicle light strands on a single wind-up.  If the lights exceed the handles on either side, it is not a concern. Essentially, Adams wind-ups serve as an upgrade for anybody who has been accustomed to wrapping an icicle light strand around cardboard and using tape to secure it.

    Adams offers wind-ups in a festive green color in two variants – a 2-piece pack and a 4-piece pack. The 4-piece pack can hold up to 100 feet of light strands. The 2-piece pack weighs 3.52 ounces and measures 16.5 x 3.9 x 1 inch. The durable handle allows for easy winding and storage. Adams wind-ups are an excellent option to store icicle lights after Christmas.

    1. Trademark Home Extension Cord or Christmas Light Reels with Bag

    Trademark Home Collection offers the String & Store Christmas Light Reels, which is a set of four durable plastic reels in a zippered storage bag. Each of the four reels can hold two 100 mini-light strands or one 150-icicle light strand. You can use the reel to store extension cords also; making this set a must-have for storing all your Christmas lights.

    The set includes reels in a subtle green color, and the bag comes in a festive red color. The packaged product weighs 2.5 pounds and measures 10.2 x 9.2 x 9.2 inches. The storage reels have a sturdy build and will help you store your lights conveniently for the next couple of years at least.

    To use this product optimally and enhance the storage space, wrap the light strand on the reel so that the wire rests on the spool without the light bulbs sticking up. This will also make taking the lights out much more comfortable and tangle-free when you have to use them next year.

    1. Elf Stor Light Storage Bag with Steel Reels

    The Elf Stor Christmas Light Storage Reels and Bag come with two sturdy reels made from high-quality welded steel. Each reel measures approximately 11.75 inches in diameter and 5.75 inches high. The bag has durable green nylon handles, allowing you to maneuver and transport stored lights easily.

    The bag and reels collapse and will enable you to store them without using much space when not in use. The packaged product weighs about four pounds and measures 12 x 12 x 12 inches.

    Each of the storage reels has a reinforced seem and can hold up to two 100-foot strings of icicle lights. The Elf Stor Storage Bag provides a practical, convenient, and easy way to store your lights and keep them safe, clean, and organized through many Christmases.

    The reels feature a user-friendly design that includes space in the center that functions as an axle and allows you to wind or unwind the lights quickly and seamlessly. Also, the reels have a smooth finish, and there is no way your icicle lights will snag or get stuck while winding or unwinding.

    Useful Tips for Using Icicle Lights

    There is much more to icicle lights than just storing them efficiently. Here are some valuable tips to guide you through the entire process of using, saving, and reusing icicle lights:

    Check the Power Source and Test the Lights – The power source for indoor lights can be a regular outlet, but for outdoor lights, it should be from a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter [GFCI] outlet. You should also test your lights and check that the entire strand is working before putting it up.

    Exercise Caution during Installation and Removal of Lights – Use a sturdy ladder, get help from a friend or family member, and do not keep the lights connected to a power source while installing or removing them.

    Managing Wires and Extension Cords – Whether indoor or outdoor, keep extension cords and wires along the walls and use the correct length to avoid anybody tripping over them carelessly. If you cannot keep it along the wall and it must go through a central space, consider taping it to the floor. In the case of exterior lighting, check that the extension cord is rated for outdoor use.

    Use a Light Timer – Conserve electricity by using a light timer to ensure that the lights are not on the entire night. A light timer can be set to turn on the lights after the sun goes down and to turn off at midnight.

    Indoor vs. Outdoor Lights – In the case of exterior lighting, more caution is advisable. You should check that the lights are water-resistant and have a tag marked Underwriters Lab (UL), which proves that the light meets national industry standards with the American National Standards Institute. The lights should be rated for outdoor use.

    Before The Lights Go Out

    The three storage products reviewed in this list, and the five essential tips for using icicle lights are sure to give you all the information you need to make Christmas décor safe and convenient.

    Knowing how to manage the installation, usage, removal, and storage of icicle lights before the festive spirit kicks in will prevent any accident or hindrance.

    Do you love to paint, but end up with hard bristles every time after the job is done? Well, you need not worry anymore! 

    Cleaning the paintbrush is a crucial part of the painting process, and often one is too tired to do it immediately. This leads to hardened brushes, which then become difficult to clean. Now, we believe that the bristles need some love and maintenance so that you can work with them for years to come. 

    Having said that, we decided to create this guide to help you understand how to soften a hard paintbrush. 

    Now, remember that it is easier to clean this product while the paint is wet rather than when it has completely dried up. But you can still transform and make the bristles more pliable with the right method. 

    Read on to learn all about it! 

    Material Needed For The Process

    Renovation. Brush with orange paint

    There are some materials that are key to cleaning bristles, and you need to have them in place before beginning the process. Most of these are already available at home, so you would not need to spend anything extra on buying them separately. 

    1. Water

    You will need hot water for this purpose and we will suggest keeping a bottle or a container of hot water next to you before beginning. Also, you may need to reheat the water at different stages before use. So, it is best if the bottle or the container is microwave-safe or can be put on a stove directly. 

    1. Glass Jar

    A glass jar will help in swirling the brush, and it can be replaced by anything with corners to keep wiping the bristles while swirling. 

    1. Soap

    Soap is an essential part of the process, so make sure you keep it in handy. Use whatever is in the kitchen; there is no need to spend extra on it. 

    1. Brush Comb

    A brush comb will further aid the process, so keep one with you. You could also use old toothbrushes if you do not find a comb. 

    1. Vinegar Or Fabric Softener

    Purchase a good fabric softener if you do not already own one. If you do not want to spend anything extra on it, you can replace it with vinegar too. 

    1. Paint Thinner

    This has to be bought separately, and we would suggest that you wait and see if it is needed. If the brush is completely hard and has been left like that for a long time, you will probably be needing a thinner. In such a case, get one beforehand so that you do not have to pause in between. 

    Steps To Soften A Hard Paint Brush

    In this section, we talk about softening a hard brush. The entire process has been divided into steps for your benefit, and we will recommend going step-wise to see the best results. 

    Step 1| Using Hot Water

    First of all, you are required to put the brush bristles in warm water, and you could add a little amount of soap to it. The aim here is to liquify some amount of the hardened paint slowly. If you see that none of it is melting, then increase the temperature of the water and bring it to a point where you can just touch it without getting burnt.

    This should be able to melt some parts of the paint and loosen the bristles a little. You can also try using some coconut oil if the water does not work at this stage. 

    If you have some coconut oil lying in your house, heat it and apply it to the bristles. This could help in loosening the bristles and ensuring that some of the paint is released. However, do not worry in case there is no oil, as the next steps will take care of the paint. 

    Step 2| Application Of Soap

    The previous step should make bristles slightly more pliable to get it ready for the next step. Here you will need a lot of dish soap, which should get in between the bristles and lather well. 

    Now, it is expected that most of this soap will roll off the surface, but if you keep adding more, it will eventually get into the bristles. Once that happens, the bristles should start loosening up a bit and If nothing happens, proceed to the next step and see if that helps. 

    Step 3| Swirling The Brush

    This is a fun step, especially if you love playing with colors. So, take a glass jar or any container that you deem fit and fill it up with soapy water. The container might get some paint stains, so try not to use a decorative item for this. 

    Once the warm soapy water is inside the jar, fill it up with more dish soap. Now pour water till the water level submerges the brush bristles completely, and then start swirling with it inside. The sides of your jar will help in getting some of the paint out. 

    Swirl till you see the color of the water changing. This is not only satisfying to look at, but you will be able to see the color actually coming out. 

    Step 4| Rinsing With Water

    Once you have swirled enough, it is time to wash the bristles again. The vigorous swirling should help in making the brush more pliable. Use warm water and soap to wash the bristles now. Here we would recommend not settling for cold water as it will not help in removing paint completely. It is mandatory that you heat the water before using it. 

    Are you still not seeing any results? Do not worry, as the next step will take care of it. 

    Step 5| Lathering With Fabric Softener

    If you have reached this step, you must be looking to remove more paint or make the brush more pliable. For this, it is time to use a more concentrated solution - a fabric softener. If you do not have it at home, you can replace it with vinegar too. It will get the job done, considering the acidic content in it. 

    Step 6| Removing Excess Paint With A Comb

    A brush comb can come in handy at this stage, and you can get a cheap one from an online store in case you do not already have one. This could prevent you from having to scrub the bristles with soap, vinegar, and water repeatedly as the brush will fasten up this process. 

    It will also ensure that the soap or softener gets deep into the bristles and help in making them pliable. Think of very tangled hair and how conditioner helps in loosening it up. Yes, this one works in a very similar way, but you will have to put in more pressure and effort in this case. 

    We will recommend that you begin with combing the softener through the bristles slowly. Add extra softener after you have started combing to ensure that it gets between the bristles. 

    Step 7| Rinsing

    Once you have applied the softener well, rinse it with warm water and check the progress. If you see improvement, then you can keep repeating the above steps of applying vinegar or softener, soap, and water. This should clean the entire brush in some time, and you would not need to apply the next steps. 

    However, if the brush is still hard and unwilling to bend even a little, move on to the next step. 

    Step 8| Application Of Paint Thinner

    Fabric softeners are supposed to work really well in general, but they may fail in case of resistant paint. If you do not want to repeat the previous steps and are seeing no improvement, then it is time to move to something even stronger. Here, we are going to introduce paint thinners, which are highly caustic and are available in concentrated form.

    Now before you start using it, remember that you have to be very careful with this stuff, and it is best to take all kinds of safety measures beforehand. Wear a mask, goggles, and gloves to prevent the thinner from getting anywhere near your eyes, mouth, or hands. This can cause serious damage, and we will recommend not proceeding without these measures. 

    Having said that, once you have the safety gear in place, you can put some of the thinner or mineral spirits into a bowl or container made of glass. Pour till you have enough liquid to cover the bristles completely. 

    Now dip the bristles and let them stay for around 10 minutes before checking again. If you see a slight progress, keep it that way for some time, and you can go up to 1 hour if necessary. Keep swirling once in a while but ensure that the liquid does not splash. 

    Step 9| Rinsing Again

    After the bristles have been soaked for enough time, remove them from the liquid and rinse them again in warm water. This is where you need to check for progress, and you will see it. The bristles should have been softened by now, and there will be a major change from before. 

    Step 10| Repeating Fabric Softener

    If the bristles are still hard in some places, add some more fabric softener to them. It is best if you create a diluted solution and then dip the brush in. Keep it for half an hour to 60 minutes, and then rinse it well. Your brush should be in better condition now. 

    Additional Tips To Help In The Process

    There is more than one way to remove paint, and in this section, we will discuss a few more. If you are wondering how to go about it, we will suggest that you first try out with materials that are already available at home. If the paint does not go, then purchase a thinner, spirit, or softener. 

    1. Using A Moisturizer

    Moisturizer or baby lotion can provide a solution to make the bristles pliable, and you can try it out before purchasing a paint thinner. This will be available in your houses but ensure that the formula is not greasy. If it becomes greasy, then the functionality of the brushes may be affected at a later phase when you use them. 

    To go forward with this, you will need a little amount of baby lotion or moisturizer and you need to apply it to the bristles. Ensure that the bristles are completely coated with it and keep massaging till it reaches the ferrule. If you do this in the right way, you should be seeing results within 2 minutes. 

    Once the paint comes off, you can wipe the bristles with a napkin. This will remove any excess amount of grease too. Just keep moving the napkin in a circular motion from the bottom to the tip of your bristles. Apply some amount of pressure but ensure that the bristles are not being pulled. 

    1. Different Paint Types

    So, there are different types of paint, and each will require a different method to remove them after hardening on bristles. If you have used lacquer, then you will find lacquer thinners in the market that will help in the liquefaction process. 

    On the other hand, water-based paint is the easiest to remove and will only require soap and water. In case you need a stronger substance, fabric softeners should work well, and you would also probably have them in the house already. 

    Next, for oil-based paint, you can try using mineral spirits and a brush comb. While if you have used shellac primers, then you will need denatured alcohol to clean it off. 

    To know more about the type of paint you are using, read the back of its tin. The type of base will be mentioned, and the manufacturers also write about how to remove it. You can buy a cleaning solution accordingly, and that should do the job. 

    1. White Spirits

    White or mineral spirits are often available, and they are commonly known as brush cleaners. These have a lower content of toxic elements like sulfur and VOCs, and the odor will not bother you anymore. Yes, they are more expensive than paint thinners but are more effective too. 

    To use this, you will have to pour some of it in a glass jar and then dip the bristles in. Ensure that it does not touch the ferrule and keep it that way. You can cover the top with a plastic bag so that no fumes are released into the air. 

    Then keep it in any external environment like your yard, garage, or shed. Let it sit for a day or 2, and then remove the plastic to see the progress. The paint should come off the bristles and fall into this solution. 

    Move the brush around to dislodge any remaining paint bits before putting it in another container filled with spirits. The previous one should already have a lot of paint in it, and this one will take care of any remaining bits. Keep it overnight, and the entire amount of paint should be removed by the next morning. Lastly, rinse it in hot water, and you will have soft bristles again. 

    While you are at it, remember to keep the container away from kids and pets. You can hang it or keep it at a height where they cannot reach. This is because any form of consumption of the fluid could be fatal.

    Builder's hand is holding paint brush, isolated over blue background.

    Final Words

    We hope that you feel a lot more confident now that you know how to get brushes back to their original form. This will help you take care of any other hardened ones in the future, and you can be confident about not having to throw them out.

    Also, it is best if you immediately clean brushes after the painting process before they harden completely. This will make your job easier as the paint will come off fast. Plus, this increases the durability of the unit and will ensure that the bristles stay soft and in place for years. 

    What’s more, you do not have to purchase a new brush for every project, saving a lot of money. With this, we will say our goodbyes, and we hope you have a fun time painting. 

    Take care! 

    Related Articles

    5 Best Sprayers For Plasti Dip

    9 Best Pump Sprayers For Staining Fence

    10 Best Wood Wax

    9 Best Concrete Stains to Consider

    11 Best Paint For Concrete Walls In Basement

    13 Best Paint for Furniture | Reviews & Buyer’s Guide

    10 Highest CFM Air Compressors  

    9 Best 6-Gallon Air Compressors for Your Home & Garage

    13 Best Paints for Bathroom Ceilings

    2 Luminess Silk Reviews [All You Need to Know]

    HVLP vs. LVLP [All You Need to Know & Winner]

    Alcohol Ink Art Tutorial [Alcohol Inks 101]

    9 Best HVLP Spray Guns [Review & Buyer’s Guide]

    6 Best One Coat Paint and Primer

    7 Best Primers to Cover Dark Paint

    Best Exterior Primer Paints

    7 Best Exterior Primer For Peeling Paint

    6 Best Paint Primer For Rusted Metal

    9 Best Stains For Cedar

    7 Best Cold Galvanizing Paints

    11 Best Paint Scrapers to Rock

    How to Remove Spray Paint from Concrete

    7 Best Primers For Covering Red Paint

    11 Best Paint Roller To Hide Imperfections Tested

    9 Best Paints For Closets 

    How To Paint Trim Near Carpet

    Ever wondered how people have gorgeous plastic bags with eccentric designs or how brands print their names and logos on plastic bags? Allow us to tell you!

    Printing on plastic bags has become popular now, more than ever. Those of you who have reusable plastic bags should consider adding a creative touch to them to make them stand out.

    If you have a small business or are trying to build a brand, printing on plastic bags will help spread the word! Now, the question is, how do you get this to happen? Don’t worry, we have got you covered.

    Without further ado, let’s talk about all the deets.

    How To Print On Plastic Bags

    Color ink tank or large printer machine in factory for printing business.

    Selecting A Method

    The first thing to consider before moving on to the printing is what method would be appropriate, based on the reason for printing.

    Printing for long-run productions where there are many bags requires an economical and time-efficient method. The most common commercial method of printing is called flexography.

    However, if you are looking to print one bag as a hobby or a manageable amount of bags for your small business, opt for screen printing as it is more suitable for short runs.

    1. Flexography

    Flexography is quite common among people printing large quantities of bags for commercial purposes. It takes lesser time and is cost-efficient since the printing is done on a large scale.

    In this method, a design is impressed on a printing cylinder, and an uncut roll of plastic passes between rollers that have an adhesive.

    The design is then imprinted as the material passes. Once it has been fully imprinted and dried, the plastic goes through the rollers again so that it is separated to create freshly designed individual plastic bags.

    This type of printing method is also widely applied to create many labels and plastic coverings of day to day products. It allows the usage of multiple colors as opposed to screen printing.

    1. Screen Printing

    For shorter runs of plastic bag printing, screen printing is the ideal choice. It can also be done at home and does not need heavy-duty equipment.

    The only issue with this process is that it is a little labor-intensive but it is worth the effort. In screen printing, individual plastic bags are printed as opposed to uncut plastic rolls in flexography. And usually, one color is used for the design.

    To screen print on a plastic bag, the bag has to be placed on a flat surface. It is crucial to ensure that the bag is stable and secure.

    Next, a metal screen is lowered onto the bag, and the ink is applied by dragging a squeegee along the length of the screen. Once the design is printed, it is placed on a surface to dry.

    The great thing about this method is that it can be done at home. So, if you are looking to advertise your brand on bags or try it as a hobby, it is unnecessary to start doing this on a commercial scale.

      • Screen Printing At Home

    To do this at home, the same method mentioned previously can be followed. Since that was a commercial process, you might have to use additional material for smoother printing.

    You will need an emulsion liquid mixed with a sensitizer to soak the design in, and cardboard papers to separate the bag’s two sides so the ink doesn’t get transferred.

    While spreading the ink with a squeegee, do not apply force, and don’t worry if the design does not print right. It’s absolutely fine to repeat the spreading process till it is printed clearly.

    To dry the bag, it can be placed on a flat surface and left to dry, or a blow dryer can be used as well.

      • Plastic or Paper Bags

    Paper bags are reusable and are also a great alternative to plastic bags, but it might not be cost-efficient for people who are starting a new business.

    Reusable plastic bags are a cheaper alternative not just to produce, but they can also be bought at lower rates. Plus, a lot of reusable plastic bags are usually lying around the house that can be easily used.

    Additionally, plastic bags have a certain uniformity in terms of material. They will not be adversely affected with ink, while paper bags tend to get rigid after the ink dries.

    1. Heat Press

    Apart from flexography and screen printing, a heat press can be used on plastic bags with thicker material, which allows them to tolerate a certain amount of heat.

    A heat press is a machine where the design is printed onto the material using heat and pressure. Although it is commonly used on fabrics, plastic bags are also being printed on using this method.

    Using a heat press is reasonably straightforward, but there are a few points to keep in mind while choosing to use a heat press machine.

      • Choosing The Right Bag

    Since a heat press uses high temperature and pressure to apply the design, it is crucial to pick the right kind of plastic bag.

    Polythene bags will not be able to withstand the heat and will instantly melt. So, it is advised not to use those if a heat press is your preferred method of printing.

    Instead, use polypropylene bags for the heat press method as the material is thicker and more heat-resistant. Long story short, there is a lower risk of these bags melting in the process.

      • Choosing The Right Temperature

    Now that it has been established that polypropylene bags are a better option, let’s talk about the temperature of the machine. These bags may be heat-resistant, but there is still a need to be careful while putting them under the machine.

    It is advisable to start the process at a lower temperature and then gradually increase it if the design is not printed correctly.

      • Choosing The Right Machine

    Printing using a heat press requires a lot of control and accuracy. And, to tie in all the points above, the right machine has to be used. If you plan on doing this at home, make sure that the machine used gives enough flexibility to alter the temperature based on the requirement.

    Additionally, the pressure aspect is also vital in this method. Whichever machine you opt for has to allow adequate pressure to be applied. And, the plates have to be flat to avoid creasing the bag.

    White plastic envelope packaging mockup

    Final Words

    With multiple methods to choose from, it may seem challenging to understand and grasp all the processes entirely, but it gets easier once you select one and start.

    While printing on plastic comes with its own set of complications, it is not as difficult as it seems initially. Once anyone gets the hang of it, it opens up doors to more experimentation and creativity.

    Moreover, it is a great way to use those reusable plastic bags that are sitting and collecting dust at home.

    We hope that this guide we have created gives you a better idea about the printing process and methods. Feel free to reach out if you still have any doubts.

    See you next time!

    Related Articles

    How To Effectively Separate Colors For Screen Printing

    13 Best Printer For Screen Printing Transparencies [Buyer’s Guide]

    11 Best ID Card Printers  

    11 Best Button Maker Machine 

    Is your heat press machine all grimy and sticky after recent applications? It's time to clean up that mess before it interferes with your designs.

    If you're running a graphic merchandise shop, you'll need to keep the machine clean at all costs. Any residue stuck on the platens could harm your work as it tends to superimpose itself on subsequent applications.

    While it's unnecessary to clean the heat press every time you imprint garments, mugs, tiles, etc., we recommend performing a weekly cleanse without fail. The best part is that it takes very little time, and you can do it using tools available at home.

    However, not everyone is aware of the process. So, if you're looking to learn how to clean your heat press machine, here's a step-by-step guide.

    Let's begin.

    Cleaning A Heat Press Machine 

    Items Required For The Task

    Cleaning a heat press requires very few items, and usually, they are all available at home. Following are the things you'll be needing for the job.

      1. A clean piece of cloth
      2. Non-abrasive cleaner (liquid hand wash or dish soap)
      3. Abrasive cleaner
      4. Heat-proof hand gear
      5. Towel
      6. Bucket or container

    Steps To Clean Teflon-Coated Machines

    Follow these instructions for cleaning heat press machines with a Teflon or non-stick coating.

    Step 1

    First things first, unplug the heat press from the electrical power source and let it cool down if it was used recently. This is a cautionary measure, and you should follow it without fail to avoid accidents and injuries.

    Step 2

    Take a bucket or a sterile container to mix some liquid cleaner with warm water. You don't want to over-dilute the solution as that will produce little to no results. In this case, you'll have to use a non-abrasive cleaner, and as such, a liquid hand wash or dish soap should work fine.

    Step 3

    Once your cleaning solution is prepared, dip a clean, dry piece of cloth in it and use it to wipe across the press platens.

    Important note: Do not at any point in time apply an abrasive liquid cleaner to your non-stick or Teflon-coated heat press. This can severely damage the unit and negatively impact its functionality.

    Alternative Method

    If the above process failed to provide desirable results, and it could not clear away all the residue, follow the steps explained below.

    Step 1

    Plug the heat press back into the outlet and this time, let it heat up for a few minutes.

    Step 2

    This bit is important for your safety, so do not skip it. Wear a heat-proof hand protection gear and carefully wipe off the residue using the same soapy water solution. In case there are some leftovers after the first cleaning, this application will deal with it.

    Step 3

    Once you're done, turn off the machine and let it cool.

    Step 4

    After the heat press reaches room temperature, use a piece of soft cloth to rinse the platens with cool water. This will take care of any soap residue lingering on the surface.

    Step 5

    Follow up by wiping other parts of the heat press to get rid of any fingerprints or dust.

    Step 6

    Finally, dry the machine with a clean towel and use it for the next applications.

    Steps To Clean Machines Without Teflon Coating

    Obviously, not all heat press units have platens with non-stick coating. But, don't worry, we have covered that too. Follow these steps to clean a heat press without Teflon coating.

    Step 1

    Start by disconnecting the heat press from the electrical outlet and let it cool down to room temperature.

    Step 2

    Unlike models with non-stick coating, here, you'll have to use an abrasive cleaning product that will successfully remove all residue from the platens. The cleaner essentially works like mild sandpaper and gently scrapes off the residue.

    There are several such products available on the market, but if you want some suggestions, we recommend Comet, Ajax, or GoJo. This application requires some elbow grease, so be prepared to scrub the heat press with a soapy solution containing water and any of these products.

    Step 3

    After the scrubbing session, plug in the heat press and let it heat up. Wear the heat-proof hand gear and carefully scrape off the remaining residue on the platens. Doing so will help you eliminate any bits and pieces left after the previous step.

    Step 4

    Turn off the machine after getting rid of all accumulations and allow it to cool down. Use a clean, soft piece of cloth dipped in cool water to wipe the platens. This will get rid of soap particles stuck on the surface.

    Step 5

    Follow up by wiping down other parts of the heat press with a damp cloth. This will remove any fingerprints or dust gathered over time.

    Step 6

    Lastly, use a towel to dry the heat press machine.

    Final Words

    That's all from us!

    Now that you know how to clean a heat press machine, we hope you'll be able to keep it in pristine and good working condition throughout. However, before you get to work, here's a piece of advice.

    Make sure that the soap solution or water does not come in contact with internal electronic parts. Otherwise, it can lead to serious damage and might even put your machine out of use. Also, wear the right safety gear while cleaning the machine as you don't want to risk an injury. On that note, we'd like to take your leave.

    Till next time!

    Today we continue our DIY backyard furniture projects with one that will fit the great farmhouse bench we have proposed you. We will offer you a set of guidelines that will teach you How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in Beer/Wine Coolers perfect for the warm seasons spent outside in the garden. We have often encountered this amazing project on our daily searches for appealing creative ideas for you to get inspired from and we have decided that there is no better time than spring to try out this inspired DIY project. Take it step by step follow the instructions below and prepare your backyard for the party season.

    Required Materials

    Wood-$75 from local lumber yard

    Wood glue- $5 from Home Depot

    Wood filler- $7.50 from Home Depot

    Wood screws (1-1/4″)- $10

    Wood screws (2-1/2″)- $10

    Sandpaper (110 grit)- $8 from Home Depot

    Two plastic planter boxes- $24 from Home Depot or Amazon

    Required Tools

    • Sander
    • Kreg Jig
    • Square
    • Clamps
    • Electric Screwdriver
    • 1/8” counter bore drill bit
    • 1-1/2″ hole saw bit
    • T-square (or a ruler)
    • Pencil

    Total Cost: $139.50

    Dimensions for cutting the wood pieces

    2 – 6X2 @ 5′ 9-1/4″ (top long board)
    3 – 8X2 @ 1′ 9″ (top side and middle board)
    12 – 2X4 @ 1′ 11-3/4″ (top center board)
    4 – 2X4 @ 2′ 5-1/4″ (legs)
    2 – 1X4 @ 5′ 2-1/4″ (outer long skirt)
    2 – 1X4 @ 5′ 6-1/4″ (inside long skirt)
    2 – 1X4 @ 2′ 5″ (short skirt)
    4 – 1X4 @ 2′ 3-1/2″ (cross beam)
    4 – 1X4 @ 2′ 1-1/4″ (box supports)
    4 – 1X6 @ 1′ 11-3/4″ (long box side)
    4 – 1X6 @ 8-3/4″ (short box side)
    10 – 1X2 @ 7-1/4″ (bottom box)

    The design has been created and sketched out in SolidWorks and as coolers planter boxes have been used, allowing the melted water to drain perfectly.
    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (24)

    This option was the easiest solution, cheap enough so you can change it anytime you want to or in the case the planter breaks during winter season due to temperature changes.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (30)

    Follow these instructions step by step:

    Acquiring the wood is the first logical step you have to take. If you do not have the skill or tools to cut the pieces yourself you can ask for the wood to be cut at the exact dimensions you require for a small fee, which makes to entire process easier.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (31)

    Sanding is the next step you are required to take.

    Using the Kreg Jig  put pocket holes in both ends of eight of the top center boards (2X4 @ 1′ 11-3/4″), the other four will be used for the lid and do not require these holes. Use this website to walk you through the set up and how to use it.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (32)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (33)

    Take all the top board and arrange them on the floor with the pocket holes facing up and insert the planter boxes in their corresponding place upside down. Make sure there is enough space to be able to remove the boxes from their place.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (34)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (35)

    Apply the wood glue you have chosen to the end of the Kreg Jigged top center boards. Unite the top center boards to the middle boards through the pocket holes using the 2-1/2″ wood screws.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (36)

    Repeat the process for the two side boards attaching them to the center boards. Use the Kreg Jig  to make holes down the top long boards. Draw with a pencil the  points where the side and middle boards unite with the long board (two spots at each junction were pocket holes will be made). Make six pocket holes on every top long board.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (2)

    Apply wood glue then unite the long side board through the pocket holes using 2-1/2″ screws.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (3)

    The flower boxes need a wooden box to hole them in place. Screw together the sides of the boxes and add glue between the uniting surfaces. Be careful to align everything just right before using the 1-1/4″ screws to attach them.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (4)

    Use a pencil and counter bore bit, mark off and counter bore five even spaced holes on both long sides of the box.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (5)

    Place the box inside its support and take the box supports  (1X4 @ 2′ 1-1/4″) and set them up against the wooden box so it is flush on both ends and also siting on the flat surface (the same as the plastic pb).

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (6)

    Use 1-1/4″ screws to attach the box support boards to the wooden box and add wood glue.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (7)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (8)

    The most difficult part is to attach two of the cross beam boards to the box assemblies before assembling the table skirt. Measure and make the centers of both the cross beam board and the short box side of the wooden box. Use a T-square to make nice straight lines at the proper lengths.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (9)
    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (10)

    Use a clamp to hold it in place and add wood glue before clamping.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (12)

    Unite the cross beam board to the wooden box using eight 1-1/4″ screws. Place the box assemblies and table skirt boards on top of the facedown table top. Mark out the placement of the needed pocket holes to attach the skirt to the table top. Use the Kreg Jig to make the pocket holes at the drawn marks.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (13)How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (14)

    Wood glue the table skirts and unite them to the table top through the pocket holes.

    Next pull up the box assemblies, add wood glue on the areas that make contact with the table top and placethem back down. To unite the cross beams to the table skirt drill two counter bored holes at each junction. Use1-1/4″ screws to unite all eight junctions together.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (15)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (16)
    Make sure you line up the legs (2×4 @ 2′ 5-1/4″) and the outer long skirt (1X4 @ 5′ 2-1/4″). Attach the outer long skirt by first applying wood glue to the backside and screwing it together through the inside using 1-1/4″ wood screws.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (17)

    To attach the legs raise the table onto sawhorses and add wood glue and use 4  1-1/4″ wood screws in each corner, using a clamp to hold things together.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (18)

    You can now turn your table and set it onto your legs. Cover the remaining holes with wood filler. The final step in this section is to sand the table in order to prepare it for the finish.

    The final part of the construction step is designing the two lids which were made from two of the center boards attached together in 4 sport through  pocket holes with 2-1/2″ wood screws and wood glue.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (19)

    To lit them up easier cut a hole through them by using a 1-1/2″ hole saw bit.

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (22)

    Part II: Staining and obtaining the finished product

    Required materials:

    1. Benite wood conditioner (1 quart)- $16.75 from Dalys
    2. Wood stain (1 pint, Dalys’ 45 cherry)- $10.45 from Dalys
    3. SeaFin Teak Oil (1 gallon)- $53.95 from Dalys
    4. 3M Final Stripping Pads-$2.41 from Dalys
    5. 110 grit sand paper
    6. Sponge brushes-About $3
    7. Rags/ old t-shirts-Free
    8. Disposable cup

     Tools needed:

    • Electric sander
    • Total finishing Cost: $86.50
    • Total Overall Cost: $226

    Instructions:

    Use a clean sponge to apply Benite wood conditioner on each corner of the surfaces which will protect your table from outdoor weather. Remember to wipe out the excess and let the conditioner dry out for 24 hours.

    For the rest of the the wood conditioner and staining process see the following link: Farmhouse Table

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (23)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (20)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (25)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (27)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (28)

    How To Build A DIY Patio Table With Built-in BeerWine Coolers-homesthetics (1)

    We hope you will find this creative process interesting and appealing and we would love to see your own DIY projects as well. Feel free to share your thoughts and opinions in the comment section below.

    Source & Courtesy of domesticated-engineer

    Related Articles

    10 Best Small Patio Tables With Umbrella Hole

    43 Super Cool Bar Top Ideas to Realize

    43 Ingeniously Creative DIY End Table For Your Home

    53 100% FREE DIY Farmhouse Table Plans for Your Rustic Dinning Room

    11 Best Outdoor Patio Coolers

    Igloo Iceless Thermoelectric Cooler Review

    But by the end of the process, the time invested is always worth it.

    Well, almost always.

    There are times when the painting does not turn out as desired and that can lead to disappointments. Of course, a big part of it depends on the artist’s skills and expertise but there are other contributing factors which help them deliver wonderful results.

    In order to accomplish incredible body-painting art similar to those of professionals, there are a few things you need to carefully take into consideration. Most importantly, there are methods, which we will discuss in a moment, that are the key essentials to great artwork.

    And in today’s article, we are going to show you some of these factors which will help you become a better body-painter.

    Learn How to Body Paint

    Paint Materials for Body Painting

    Some years ago, body-painting consumed a lot of time and energy due to the lack of proper materials. Luckily, we are in an era where body-painting is made easy because of the development of advanced tools and options.

    Following are a few materials that help speed up the painting process and make the art more vibrant.

    Airbrush makeup is one method that’s expensive, yet succeeds in speed, quality, and safety.

    If you’re looking for paints that last longer and won’t crack easily, you can rely on this option.

    Artists working with an airbrush find the process to be faster than working with traditional palettes. The difference lies in the type of paint and the process itself.

    While traditional cake paints come in a pan, airbrush makeup comes with a compressor which uses air to spray the paint, hence, making the process faster. If you want to take on this profession, you would want to choose this because it will take lesser time to finish a single project.

    The only disadvantage is that these are comparably more expensive than regular paints. Also, they require long training and a lot of skills before producing precise body paintings.

    Before buying, make sure to look for brands which is specialized in producing makeup airbrushes because that’s how you’re guaranteed to get the best.

    The Airbrush Grade Prosthetic Cosmetic, known as AGPC, is one of the best paint options for body-painting. It falls within the airbrush makeup category, yet it has amazing features worth mentioning.

    If safety is the first priority to you, then you would consider going for this as it does not cause irritation or allergies. Not only that but it also stays on the skin for a long period of time until you wash it with water and soap, where it will come off easily.

    The makeup will last for two days maximum without breakage, making it suitable for big occasions.

    For the removing process, all you need to do is apply powder (preferably talc) and then wipe it off with a damp cloth or sponge.

    Since this is a professional grade airbrush, the price is very expensive. We do not suggest this option if you are a beginner. But if you have had enough experience in the field of body-painting, you might want to use this for your best projects.

    Ordering in bulk will save you some money, although it is still costlier than most body paints. Within these containers, you’ll get a range of high-quality colors.

    Best Airbrush for Body Painting

    Next up is the textile acrylics.

    One of the things we love about textile acrylics is that they are non-toxic and are free from chemical additives, ensuring safety to use on skin for a very long period.

    These paints are designed to be used on fabric with the help of an airbrush.  Besides being non-toxic, another reason we chose these for body-painting is because of the flexibility.

    Since these paints are meant for fabrics, they hold very high flexibility, which means they stick on to the skin without peeling off easily, even when having to move a lot.

    The second best thing about these paints is that they are very affordable and are very easy to use or remove.

    They also maintain a high level of versatility. The first one you already know is that they can be used for body-painting as well as for airbrushing on fabric. Secondly, they are also suitable for using with paintbrushes.

    When using this paint, be sure to work in thin coats until you’ve got a full coverage because using thick layers in one go can cause the paint to crack.

    Another alternative to traditional paints is a marker which is safe for kids.

    Safe and non-toxic markers are specifically meant for kids, who always end up with paints on themselves. Therefore, they are perfect for body-painting because the color stays on the skin until it is washed away.

    However, using a marker to paint the whole body will take almost the same amount of time as using paint cakes, or even longer. That is why we would recommend using wide-tipped markers for the purpose of body-painting. The tips can range from 8-12mm wide.

    The one thing that makes these markers superior to other paints is that the color won’t peel off and contains high flexibility. However, it can fade once it gets in touch with water, sweat or any moisture.

    Last on the list is the liquid latex which is very popular as a medium for creating special effects in the world of makeup. It used to come in classic skin color.

    Today, there are multiple other colors available for artists to choose from.

    The original idea is to create a quick clothing option but somehow, it has found its way to body-painting, where its utility is much more applicable. Working with liquid latex creates a lesser mess if compared to other body paints. Moreover, it sets quickly, given that it lasts very long.

    However, liquid latex by itself does not complete body-painting. Instead, it acts as a base for colors to rest upon. With this base, multiple textures can be achieved - and that’s what makes this additive essential for professional body-paintings.

    And the best thing about this medium is that you can use any paint on it once it’s primed with skin-colored foundation.

    Crucial Steps to Take for Face & Body Painting

    Now that we’ve seen some of the best paint options for body-painting, it’s time to take a look at these three important steps for successfully accomplishing a beautiful work of art.

    • Preparing the skin

    This is the first step to take when using any kind of paints. While some may think that this step is not truly necessary, it does, however, offer a lot of benefits.

    Why prepare the skin?

    The first thing you should know is that our bodies secrete oils. The presence of these oils makes it hard for the paint to stick on the skin as they repel it.

    Not only do they resist water-based paints but oils are responsible for accumulating dust on the skin and increasing the chance of bacterial infections, especially when you have to put on the paints for a long period of time.

    Therefore, to prevent these potential problems, we suggest taking a bath./shower before the painting process to clear up all the existing dirty oils from the skin.

    You will also see that the paintings come out more beautifully on clean skin.

    The importance of setting spray

    Once you become acquainted with the art, you’ll slowly realize the significance of different body-painting tools.

    Take the setting spray for example.

    The purpose of this item is to hold the paints in place by providing a stable base for them to sit on.

    Moreover, the spray protects your skin from having direct contact with paints that can cause skin irritation and other allergic reactions.

    Let us now take a look at the step where the painting process actually begins.

    Planning the painting

    It is important that you first plan out how the painting will look like on your body.

    While the design looks good on paper, it might not actually be the same when it actually touches the skin.

    Planning beforehand allows the rest of the painting process to flow with a lesser chance of errors.

    A simple way to properly plan your painting is by drawing outlines with water-based paints on the body first. Even if you make mistakes then, it’ll be easier to wash it off.

    Brushes for Body Painting

    Brushes are important no matter which types of paints you’re using. There will always be minor details which need the touch of a brush.

    Keep in mind that certain brushes work better for certain purposes. For instance, synthetic brushes are a great option for water-based paints as they are more flexible when they’re wet.

    On the other hand, natural brushes tend to lose their grip on water if they are used extensively.

    Great-Quality Sponges

    The purpose of a sponge is to blend the paint and spreading it evenly across the surface.

    But not just any sponge will do. Some sponges with inferior quality with loose pores can release a lot of water that can mess up the paints. We would recommend going for the best quality with tighter pores.

    You can accomplish a lot more with a good sponge. For instance, it will speed up the painting process and give you better blending results.

    The size of the sponge will be according to your preferences. However, we would suggest going for a medium-sized one that’s about 3 or 4 inches for proper dabbing.

    When working on smaller areas, have a set of tiny sponges ready with you.

    Set the paint with a setting spray

    We have talked about the importance of setting spray as a base and a barrier to the preparation stage. Now, we will see why it’s needed for the finishing part.

    As the name suggests, setting spray is used to set the paints so that they stay longer on the skin.

    When the painting is done, spray a little amount of it throughout the body and give it some time to set before touching the paint.

    What it also does is prevent the colors from washing off when sweating, giving the overall painting an even and beautiful finishing.

    If you are preparing for an all-day occasion, we highly suggest using a setting spray as it will make the paints stay in place for long hours.

    Test the paints

    This is where “prevention is better than cure” applies well.

    It is always safe to first test the paint in a small area of your body and wait for a few minutes to see whether your skin shows any kind of reaction or not because there are skin types which are very sensitive to paints.

    If it’s your first time getting body painted or if you’re just trying out new paints, then you should consider taking this precaution.

    Do not risk going for paints that cause even the slightest itch on your skin because that will only create bigger problems, and you would have to see a dermatologist afterward.

    The same thing applies when using latex as well.

    • Removing paints

    Different paints require different methods of removing. We will show you how some paints can be removed efficiently when it’s done.

    For water-based paints

    Removing water-based paints is pretty simple but there are things you need to look out for.

    Washing with water alone can increase the chance of infections later, especially if you used cheaper paints. So we suggest using soap too to make sure your skin remains clean and healthy. Also, avoid using wipes for removing paints.

    For oil-based paints

    Cleaning oil-based paints require you to put in some effort because using only soap and water will take a long time.

    Instead, there are solutions to help speed up the cleaning process. Some samples are body cleansers and baby oil. Using these with your scrub will help clean up all the oil on your body. Finish up with a warm bath afterward.

    Makeup removers also make a great solution for washing tough oil paints off your body.

    The last important step which you need to take is to moisturize the skin after cleaning so that rashes won’t develop.

    If you are the one who’s getting body paint, make sure to ask the painter about how the cleaning process should be. It is always safe to ask them because some oil paints are different from the other.

    How to Get Your Body Painted

    If you have never experienced body-painting before and want to try it for the first time, check out some of these things which you may want to know beforehand.

    • Look for an expert

    Getting your whole body painted sounds like fun. But the not-so-fun part about it is if the body starts to show signs of allergy or irritation.

    In order to prevent such cases from happening, look for painters who are experts in this field. You can also ask for recommendations from people who have tried body-painting before.

    It is important that you feel relaxed during the process. Make sure to find one whom you feel comfortable with, especially those of the same gender in case you feel nervous about exposing your body to someone.

    • Shaving

    This is is a very vital part of skin preparation. Some paints do not stick well when there’s a lot of hair on the surface.

    However, the big problem lies in the paint-removal part. If there is hair, the paints won’t come off easily. It can even get painful when removing it with force because paints, especially latex and airbrush acrylics, get very sticky on hair.

    So the first thing you need to do is make sure whether shaving or waxing is better. Consult with the painter beforehand.

    • Select the design

    Make an appointment with the painter to select a design.

    Do this as soon as you have decided to get a body painting so you won’t rush the process later on and be satisfied with the long-hours work.

    After selecting the design, we would recommend sketching it roughly before proceeding to the actual painting.

    • Fill up your tummy first

    As we have mentioned, painting a whole body can take long hours. So, it is always better to first fill your stomach with food that will satisfy your hunger for a long period of time. Besides food, also make sure to hit the bathroom before the process begins.

    Doing this will allow the work to freely flow without any interruption in between.

    • Have a room ready

    You probably will not want to work in an area where there’s a lot of activities going on. First of all, there is a tendency that your work will get interrupted, and secondly, you might not feel comfortable exposing your body when there are too many people around.

    In order to avoid these situations, getting a separate room will be a very good idea.

    Clothing

    Remember to only wear loose-fitting clothes when the painting session is done. This will prevent the colors from smudging of fading away.

    Family in white shirts covered with different paints stands outside in the evening

    How to enhance your body-painting skills

    Body-painting is an activity which anyone can do for fun at any time. But for those who are willing to master this art, it requires practice and consistency.

    Give yourself some time to practice on a regular basis because through practice, skills are also acquired. As you improve, so will your skills and knowledge. However, what truly matters is your passion towards the art.

    And that’s it for today’s post! Thank you for your time!

    Related Articles

    9 Best White Face Paint For Cosplay, Clowns & Halloween

    8 Best Face Paint For Kids 

    6 Best Body Paint | Top Brands Compared

    5 Epic Face Painting Supplies That Will Improve Your Designs

    6 Best Body Paint For Cosplay 

    11 Best Face Paints  Reviewed | Top Brands Compared

    5 Best Airbrush for Body Painting  

    16 Brilliant Face Painting Techniques to Feed Your Imagination

    11 Best Face Painting Kits 

    13 Best Spray Paints For Metal

    7 Best Airbrush for Miniatures & Models

    How to Make Resin Jewelry 101 

    11 Best Epoxy Resin For Crafts

    9 Best LVLP Spray Guns 

    5 Best Epoxy Resin for Tumblers

    9 Best Exterior Wood Stains Today 

    9 Best Varnishes for Wood

    10 Best Clear Coat for Kitchen Cabinets [Buyer’s Guide]

    The delicious roasted smell of fresh coffee in the morning is what gets most of us though the day. But what if you could use this incredible brew to create works of art? We are talking today about using coffee in painting techniques as the primary solution instead of the classical acrylic, oil, watercolor or tempera paint. You can use the solution following the same basic principles used in watercolor painting, a resourceful medium able to create texture, shadows, gradients and depth. Lets set The Basic Coffee Painting Techniques For Beginners.

    Basic Coffee Painting Techniques For Beginners

    Learn The Basic Coffee Painting Techniques For Beginners - Ideas And Projects-homesthetics (5)

    Source

    Basic materials required for a coffee painting

        • Instant coffee
        • Water
        • Watercolor paper
        • A set of brushes
        • Paper scotch
        • A color palette for mixing

    Techniques and tips to watercolor are used in coffee paintings

    USING TREATED PAPER

    Treated paper such as waxed paper will modify the behavior of the coffee mixture and offer a new set of textures and possibilities at a slower drying pace.

    CREATING GRADIENTS

    Gradients are easy to obtain and, similar to water-coloring, you can use a wet surface technique which is easy to control or the dry paper technique which will require more attention from your part.

    THE BLEED EFFECT

    Allow the coffee mixture to drip on your design and create vintage looking backgrounds.

    THE BLOOM EFFECT

    Use coffee of different intensities and allow the drops to mix in an incredible bloom effect.

    ABSTRACT PAINTING

    Splashes, flicks of the brush will create very modern, abstract creations that can beautifully contrast with a classical in between the lines creation.

    ADDING DETAILS WITH A NON-WATERPROOF PEN

    Finish off a piece by adding contrast with a non-waterproof pen and add a touch of water in the end for an interesting unique appeal.

    1. Start by arranging your working space

    Set all of your required instruments and materials on the working space and at your disposal. You can use instant coffee to create different intensities for your solution and add more water until you reach the optimum medium. Acquire a variety of brushes varying from the classical flat brush you are going to use to cover large surfaces faster to delicate slim pointy bushes for inserting precise details. Have a pencil and an eraser near for sketching your future creation and a role of scotch tape to secure the watercolor thick absorbent paper to prevent it from wrinkling.

    1. START BY ARRANGING YOUR WORKING SPACE

    2. Take a glass of clean water and a flat brush

    You can take any size of paper, depending on what you are about to create, a glass of fresh clean water and a rather large flat brush. Set your working area somewhere in the sun for faster drying or if you must work indoors use a blow-drier to speed up the process. Coffee painting, similar to watercolor painting is all about adding more and more wet layers and having the patience to allow each layer to dry and the color to set.
    2. TAKE A GLASS OF CLEAN WATER AND A FLAT BRUSH

    3. Prepare the paper and fix it to your working ground

    Take the piece of paper and secure it in place with scotch tape. Then take the flat brush and water and fill the paper until it is glistening. This technique is called the wet surface watercolor wash and can be used for coffee painting as well. You could start with a coffee layer applied uniformly to use as your background and construct your design from there on.

    3. PREPARE THE PAPER AND FIX IT TO YOUR WORKING GROUND

    4.  Use clean water to create splashes on your colored ground

    After having applied the first coffee layer as a background you can create texture by applying water drops and splashes. The clean water will dilute the coffee and push it to the corners of the created shapes. The same principle can be applied to coffee drops used for accents.
    4. USE CLEAN WATER TO CREATE SPLASHES ON YOUR COLORED GROUND

    6. Create a basic raw sketch

    You can start the hole process by sketching your future design before fixing the paper or you can improvise and get creative step by step. We have sketched a basic undetailed scene on which he have added several layers of coffee mixture and water.
    6. CREATE A BASIC RAW SKETCH

    7. Add colorful accents to make everything stand out

    We have added turquoise watercolor accents that complement the hues of the coffee mixture. We have used masking fluid to preserve certain areas clean and white.We we are not interested in preserving a clean contour of the drawing ad allowed the solution to float over edges and merge but, as a beginner, you should master the technique of coloring in between the lines before trying more liberal approaches. One great advantage of using coffee mixtures is the fact that you can always correct mistakes with more clean water and a piece of paper tissue.
    7. ADD COLORFUL ACCENTS TO MAKE EVERYTHING STAND OUT

     Coffee Painting Ideas And Projects

    Now that we have gone through the rather simple process of coffee painting, delight your senses and allow yourself to get inspired by a few wonderful professional coffee painting creations.

    Create urban landscapes using coffee

    CREATE URBAN LANDSCAPES USING COFFEE

    A delicate fairy scenery

    A DELICATE FEERIC SCENERY

     

    A surreal coffee portrait created on a vintage piece of paper

    A SURREAL COFFEE PORTRAIT CREATED ON A VINTAGE PIECE OF PAPER

     

    Reviving the natural from a cup of coffee

    REVIVING THE NATURAL FROM A CUP OF COFFEE

     

    Leaving your fingerprint with a twist

    LEAVING YOUR FINGERPRINT WITH A TWIST

     

    A superb representation of a romantic city

    A SUPERB REPRESENTATION OF A ROMANTIC CITY

     

    The geek in you brought to life in coffee

    THE GEEK IN YOU BROUGHT TO LIFE IN COFFEE

     

    With one swift motion you can bring things to life

    WITH ONE SWIFT MOTION YOU CAN BRING THINGS TO LIFE

     

    Beautiful depiction of textures and depth

    BEAUTIFUL DEPICTION OF TEXTURES AND DEPTH

     

    What do you think about the creative idea of using coffee to paint? Is it something you have tried or would dare try? We would love to hear your opinion on this topic in the comment section below.

    Related Articles

    Best Watercolor Paper | Top Brands Reviewed + Plein Air 

    Cold Press vs. Hot Press vs. Rough Watercolor Paper Compared

    Best Watercolor Painting Books Everywhere | Beginner to Expert Grade

    9 Best Water Brushes for Beginners, Professionals & Calligraphy

    10 Best Watercolor Palettes for Beginners & Professionals Everywhere

    13 Best Watercolor Pencils and Water Soluble Art Supplies Today

    15 Best Watercolor Paints | Students & Artist Grades

    12 Must-Know Watercolor Tips for Beginners & Pros Everywhere

    Why and How to Use Watercolor Mediums to Enhance Your Painting Game

    Learn How to Use Watercolor on Wood | Professional Tips & Tricks

    13 Best Watercolor Sketchbook for Creatives Everywhere

    11 Best Watercolor Brushes for Beginners & Professionals Reviewed

    15 Must-Have Watercolor Supplies for Beginners & Artists Everywhere

    Stretching Watercolor Paper & How To Keep Watercolor Paper From Warping

    Learn How to Paint Watercolor on Canvas Easily & Successfully

    16 Must-Know Painting En Plein Air With Watercolors Tips & Tricks

    Learn The Basic Watercolor Painting Techniques For Beginners - Ideas And Projects

    Expand Your Knowledge With Watercolor Painting Ideas

    19 Incredibly Beautiful Watercolor Painting Ideas

    SaleBestseller No. 1
    Paint Brushes Set of 24 Pieces Wooden Handles Brushes with...
    • DESIGNS FOR PERFECT PAINTING: Total 24 pieces different...
    • EASY TO ORGANIZE AND CARRY: Free canvas brush case to...

    The LeafGuard gutter system has been highly appreciated by customers from far and wide. But will it be the ideal one for you?

    To answer this, there are quite a few things that need to be discussed. Thanks to the advanced design and make of the product, it has a lot of features that are worth the discussion. However, this makes it an expensive choice too.

    In this article, we shall look at all the product’s facets, which includes a few of its disadvantages too, though those are not dealbreakers. After all, which product doesn’t have any negatives? In fact, we feel the host of benefits make up for the faults and would not fail to impress you.

    So, without any more delay, let’s go ahead..

    LeafGuard Review

    LeafGuard Review

    Why Buy This Product?

    Detail of new modern house cottage corner with stucco walls decorated with natural stones, brown shingled roof and rain gutter pipe system on blue sky copy space background. Real estate concept. LeafGuard Review

    If you didn’t know, LeafGuard is a subsidiary of Englert, Inc, a popular brand since 1966 that’s especially known for its on-site custom fit varieties. So, when you opt for this one, you can’t deny that you are getting a tried and tested brand.

    This one-piece gutter and gutter guard combination is just one of the great products of the brand. Now, let us look at some of its positive features in detail…

    1. Long Lasting Performance

    Well, durability is perhaps the most important criterion when it comes to gutter systems. Removal of almost all maintenance hassles will be something that anyone will prefer, even if it requires spending more.

    Thanks to the 20% thicker aluminum metal than most other products, this is exactly what you get with the LeafGuard gutter system. Also, the system is installed with non-corrosive hangers onto the fascia board, which prevents damage to your roofing materials.

    As for the covering, a patented ScratchGuard finish paint ensures that the product doesn't crack, peel or chip. This eco-friendly paint also has built-in dirt retention ability.

    At this point, you may be wondering that it’s heavy on the pocket. The thing is, it’s true that you might have to spend more. But installing standard, affordable gutters is sure to require a whole lot of maintenance sooner than you’d like. These include repairing foundational and landscaping damages, fixing leaks between seams or damages to the roof.

    If you think all this sounds exaggerating, then you should think of the higher cost as an investment. Also, if you know anyone who has used the product, ask for their feedback. They will likely be singing praises for the product! In fact, LeafGuard has been a hugely popular choice for many customers who have used the product for more than a decade.

    Single-Piece Gutter System

    1. Single-Piece Gutter System

    In most of the currently available gutter cleaning systems, you will have a separate guard attached to your already existing gutter. However, unlike that usual design, LeafGuard provides you with a complete gutter cleaning system. What you get is a one-piece product that is a combination of a gutter and a guard.

    Although you might think that it is no big deal, it does make a lot of difference. An addition to your gutter would mean risking gaps or leaks. So, what happens is that your ultimate purpose of installing a gutter is not served. A one-piece system perpetually rules out any such possibility.

    Besides, if you go for one of those additional gutter guards, the designs might require adherence to the roof by use of screws or nails. This may void your roof warranty in some cases.

    Most of such guards are also quite bulky and give rise to issues in matching with the existing gutters. After this, it is needless to say that by getting an efficient gutter system like LeafGuard, you can do away with all such headaches.

    1. Protection From Clogging

    Clogging is something most customers are concerned about, while deciding which gutter would be suitable for them. Indeed, this is a point worth the concern and tells a lot about how a gutter system performs.

    For LeafGuard systems, you will be surprised to know that there is not much to worry about. After you order one for your home, the design is customized on site. You get a shape that is specialized to ensure that there is no clogging. The result? Your gutter will have no pine and fir needles, leaves, or other debris stuck inside it.

    Using the simple yet powerful principle of liquid adhesion, the system allows rainwater to move down and around a curved hood to finally drop into the gutter.

    This also deflects the leaves and other debris to prevent any clog. Note that it is capable of handling 32 inches of rain within an hour which is largely above the average rainfall in an area.

    Sometimes, this also not might not seem enough to you. If you stay in one of those areas which experience much heavier rainfall, the concern is natural. But with the lifetime clog-free guarantee included in the limited warranty, be rest assured that such a problem can be solved as well!

    1. Warranty

    Though mScratany customers often tend to take it casually, the warranty of any product is another crucial point to check before you go on to buy it. Some feel that with a superior quality product, the warranty is not much of an important factor.

    But the truth is, even then it does matter. After all you can never tell when you would need some adjustment or cleaning, can you?

    LeafGuard also fares quite well in terms of its warranty terms. You get a limited lifetime warranty that includes free repair and replacement of any part along with a repaint guarantee. So in the chance of any debris build up or faded paint, which is rare, the installation contractor will do it for free.

    This warranty lasts throughout the life of the property and is also transferable from one owner to the next. In case of the latter, the warranty is valid for a period of 50 years. That’s quite a long time, isn’t it?

    1. Installation Service and Customization

    A home-safety product may be capable of delivering a great performance, but for that the installation must be done in the right way.

    LeafGuard’s team of professional installers ensure the product is installed to suit the exact specifications of your home. Hence, you don’t need to worry about any misfit or mismatch with the design.

    Most customers are more than satisfied with the installation procedure, and have said that the team works in a very timely manner. They have also appreciated how the professional cooperated with them and were very cordial and understanding. As for the duration, your gutter system will be installed within one day, which means there is no hassle of follow-up sessions either.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Although this gutter system is one of the finest products you will come across, it does have a few negatives. But none of them are major faults. One would be of icicles accumulating in the gutter. We noticed that whenever the climate turned cold, the LeafGuard system causes ice buildup to occur, and ultimately creates a shelf of icicles.

    Often, you can’t figure out the size of the icicles, since quite a lot of variables act during every snowfall. These might damage your gutters and even the roof. A solution for this would be to find a suitable gutter heater but that can be expensive.

    Also, for homes having a roof valley, the water may form streams to travel down the valley at a faster velocity towards the gutter. It can also be more than an inch deep and might cause to overshoot the gutter. To prevent this, you can install special accessories such as a bigger mesh, grates or diverters.



    Pros

    • On-site customization as per home specifications
    • 20 percent thicker aluminum material
    • Prevents damage to roofing materials
    • ScratchGuard Patented paint finish
    • Prevents clogging through liquid adhesion




    Cons

    • Icicles may accumulate in the gutter
    • May overshoot with high velocity-water flow



    Rusty Metal Steel Grating on Street. LeafGuard Buyer’s Guide

    LeafGuard Buyer’s Guide

    Gutters can be called the first line of defence when it comes to dealing with rainwater. They help in diverting water away from your home, thereby protecting your cement foundations, landscaping and preventing erosion.

    Besides, they also collect a lot of other stuff that happens to be on the roof including dirt, leaves, twigs and even asphalt shingles. They are hence quite essential for any home and are something you shouldn’t neglect at all. As such, purchase of a LeafGuard, or for that matter any other gutter system, should not be carried out hastily. Here are some points that you need to consider:

    1. Costs

    It is the attention to detail, professional installation procedure and the customization that make the product a bit more expensive than other systems. You should be aware of this from beforehand and as such contact the company a free estimate of the cost. It will be useful for you since they will break it down for a better perspective.

    1. Your Needs

    You must know what you need before you move on to the process of purchase. This will help you to be sure about whether you are headed in the right direction. After all, choosing the right product for the issue you are facing is important.

    If you are having to clean gutters by climbing ladders or are facing water leakages, this LeafGuard system will be fit for you. There are also other LeafGuard products you can go for according to your priorities.

    Close-up of corner of new wooden warm ecological cottage house roof covered with snow with steel gutter rain system. Professional construction and drainage pipes installation and connection concept. LeafGuard Verdict

    LeafGuard Verdict

    With this, we come to the end of our discussion. Despite having a few flaws, the LeafGuard gutter cleaning system is an ideal buy for getting rid of maintenance hassles and ensuring longevity. You can also completely forget about the gutter-cleaning ordeal!

    Besides, you get effective customization facilities and quality installation services provided by the company. In short, with this product installed at your home, you can become entirely worry-free with respect to the gutter!

    So, go ahead and try the product. And do let us know about your experience in the comments section below.

    Till we meet again!

    Related Articles

    23 Hip Roof Types & Styles for Your Future Home

    Learn About the 20 Most Popular Roof Types for Your Future Home

    What is the Mansard Roof, Advantages and Disadvantages Sheltered

    6 Eco-Friendly Roofing Materials and Why You Need Them

    13 Best Roofing Nailers

    How To Clean Gutter Guards Efficiently

    Shur Flo Gutter

    EasyOn Gutter Guard Review 101

    5 Best Foam Gutter Guard

    10 Best Solar Gutter Lights

    Do Sheds Need Gutters?

    23 Extraordinary Beautiful Ways to Repurpose Rain Gutters in Your Household

    In the building process of home, most of us envision its looks, the overall design, the charming living room, bedrooms and the rustic backyard. No one argues that those are the truly relevant ones but one should never overlook the  the apparently unimportant, secondary spaces. Your living quality can be improved big time by the size of the storage space, the height of the basement, the space in the garage, and last but certainly, not least the laundry room. After all, this is where you do the work. Why not make it much easier by putting some thought into these space? A well designed room can mean less time spent doing your chores, it can mean easier tasks, especially if you have a big family.

    Today we are going to take a look at a few examples of laundry cabinets that will hopefully give you an insight on how to organize the space available.

    “Benjamin Moore CC-690 Piedmont Gray”.

    via Cranberry Hill Kitchens

    The secret to having a comfortable living environment is in the details. The way the door shuts without making a big noise and how smoothly it rolls on the rail, the depth of the sink or how reachable are the shelves. If these functional aspects have been taken care of, you can start thinking about the looks. When it comes to doing the laundry, one could argue that a front loading washing machine is more suitable for a cramped room as it allows you to build o folding space on top. The two pictures below will show you the difference.

    Source Unknown

    Source Unknown

    Wall mounted cabinets are the best way to install storage space in the vertical plane. Keep in mind that humidity is an important factor in laundry rooms and ensuring ventilation in the room itself and cabinets alike is an important matter.

    via houzz

    Going for a combination of cabinets, baskets and clothes hangers is perhaps the best choice. Cabinets are great for keeping the looks nice and tidy and dust free but stuff is easier to reach when there's no door to open. The composition also looks more diverse. The colors are a pretty important aspect as well. You might think that "it's just a laundry room, it doesn't need to look fancy". And you might be right. But I believe washing, folding and ironing might be done with a little more pleasure when done in a welcoming and good looking room.

    via twelveonmain.com

    via wallsunderconstruction.blogspot.com

    via decorpad.com

    Think of this space as a multipurpose room. You do the washing, drying and ironing but is that all? Could you use this space for anything else to make it more efficient? Of course you can. It can be a great storage space for extra clothes and shoes and all those things that you almost never use. And, if you have a baby, it can become the best and most fitted space in the house for changing the diapers. Moreover, you could also make use of the utility sink for washing your pets; you are the only one who knows what you're greatest needs are so use your imagination.

    via Jane Walters

    via  Albert David Design

    via countryliving.com

    via newtoncustominteriors.com

    via doordiy.wordpress.com

    via thehappyhousie.com

    via Bradshaw Designs

    via thatflippingcouple.com

    via dryaway.net

    via blog.jennasuedesign.com

    via homedepot.ca

    via Laundry Room Reveal

    via Laundry / Craft Room – Hunt & Host

    via Pretty Handy Girl

    via whatsurhomestory.com

    via cravingsomecreativity.com

    via prettypracticalhome.com

    via inspirationformoms

    via suburbanbitches.com

    via  diybeautify.com

    via restorationredoux.com

    via startathomedecor.com

    via maisondepax.com

    via paperdaisydesign.com

    via apartmenttherapy.com

    via bloglovin.com

    via theprojectgirl.com

    via studio-mcgee.com

    Source Unknown

    via Rautmann Custom Homes

    via Pinterest

    Laundry cabinets, laundry cabinets ideas everywhere.

    They`re relevant, they are able to make our lives a whole of a lot easier through simple, practical means, these spaces are able to declutter our homes. How`s your laundry room? We would love to hear from you !

     

     

    The Lasko High Velocity Floor fan is space-saving and versatile. It can be mounted on a wall as well as placed on the floor for use. The fan has a durable construction, powerful air circulation, and adjustable speed settings. 

    Lasko High Velocity Floor Fan

    Silver metal ventilation fan on wooden floor at home. Lasko High Velocity Floor Fan.

    If you are looking for a practical-sized high velocity fan that is convenient to move around the house, then Lasko might fit the bill.

    It is a portable and handy fan with multiple nifty features. On top of having a rugged metal body and blades, the fan is highly user-friendly. And the best part is, you won’t have to burn a hole in your pocket while buying it. 

    Want to know more about Lasko High Velocity Floor Fan? Keep reading to find out!

    Key Features

    1. Steel Construction

    To begin with, Lasko has a durable tubular steel construction, which gives it an edge over other plastic options on the market. Its stainless steel body makes it rugged and minimizes the chances of rusting.

    Additionally, this fan is an ultimate space saver with a width of 7 inches and a height of 20 inches. Simply put, it is roughly the size of a standard wood cabinet, so you can replace your old fan with Lasko if your house looks too cluttered.

    2. Metal Fan Blades

    Another feature that makes the Lasko High Velocity fan durable is its metal fan blades. Unlike other cheaper plastic options, Lasko is safer and doesn’t pose the risk of blades breaking off over time.

    The metal fan blades also have a better shape that cuts the air more efficiently to deliver maximum air movement.

    3. Direct Air Flow

    Having spoken of blades, let’s now discuss the air flow provided by the Lasko fan. It has a pivoting head that lets you direct the air flow wherever you want. So, instead of waiting for the fan to cool the entire room, you can simply pivot its blower to the spot you are sitting in. 

    4. Adjustable Speed

    If you live in a place where the weather fluctuates too much, Lasko’s adjustable speed settings may save the day for you. When the sun is too bright outside, use the fan at its maximum speed and keep the heat at bay. But if only a few days are left before the fall season and a little breeze is all that you need, adjust the fan speed to low and enjoy. 

    However, note that the noise produced by the fan also changes with the speed settings. While it will create a pleasant environment in your room, it may also cause a little disturbance with its whirring.

    5. QuickMount® System

    Isn’t it restricting when you can either get the fan fitted on your wall or place it on the floor? But with Lasko, you won’t have to choose. 

    The fan has a QuickMount® System, which lets it convert from a wall fan to a floor fan in a jiffy. It saves the hassle of gathering all your tools and permanently installing the fan on the wall. What’s more, it also gives you the option to take it off the floor when the room feels too cluttered.

    6. Blue Plug™

    Another impressive quality of the Lasko High Velocity fan is that while delivering top-notch quality, it doesn’t cut corners on safety. It is equipped with patented, 3-prong ground safety plugs. This means, despite its steel body, the fan runs no risk of giving you an electric shock.

    7. Built-in Carry Handle

    Lastly, Lasko comes with a built-in carry handle which makes transporting it hassle-free. You can easily move it from one room to another or even take it out on your deck. Simply prop out the handle to carry it and prop it back in when done.

    What Makes the Lasko Fans Standout?

    The following features make the Lasko fan stand out from others:

    • QuickMount® system
    • Ultra safe Blue Plug™
    • Pivoted air circulation

    What We Like

    Here are a few qualities that give the Lasko High Velocity fan an edge over other options on the market:

    1. Durability

    The Lasko fan is a good investment owing to its durable tubular steel construction. Its robust build ensures that it stays in your house or office for a long time. And the best part is its steel body won’t rust, or the polish won’t peel off over time, maintaining the ambiance of your room.

    2. Air Flow

    As discussed earlier, the Lasko fan provides direct air flow, which makes it a fantastic option in peak summers and amid heat waves. Additionally, its pivots let you adjust the blower head in the preferred direction, giving you instant relief from the heat. 

    Standing true to its name, Lasko delivers maximum air movement and high velocity air, which makes it ideal for large spaces like garages, workshops, basements, etc. 

    3. Versatility

    Lasko is versatile because you can easily convert it from a floor fan to a wall one. This makes it unique because not many fans offer such convertibility. It comes with a QuickMount® bracket which can easily be fitted on the wall to mount the fan.

    4. Ease Of Use

    Another key feature that we liked is you don’t have to be a tech-guru to use the Lasko High Velocity fan. It comes with user-friendly manual control located on the front of the fan so that you can adjust the setting even if the fan is mounted on a wall. The fan has a dial to toggle between the speed settings and tweak the air flow as required.

    5. Portability

    The Lasko fan is space-saving and portable, so you won’t have to buy one for every room separately. It is a practical option if you live alone or have a small family, as you can move it to different rooms. Furthermore, the fan is lightweight and has a built-in carry handle, making it easier to transport. 

    6. No-Tools Assembly

    Lastly, the Lasko fan has a simple no-tools assembly. So, except for mounting a bracket on a wall, you won’t need any equipment or handymen skills to install it.  

    What We Don’t Like

    While the Lasko fan had an array of impressive qualities, it also had a few features that could be improved. Take a look:

    1. Fan Control

    Although Lasko offers a user-friendly dial to adjust speed, it doesn’t have a remote control. Therefore, every time you feel like increasing or decreasing the speed of the fan, you’ll have to get up and manually do it. That’s why we thought having a remote control could have been more convenient.

    2. Sound 

    The major downside of installing a fan is that it always generates noise because of its motor. Lasko also makes a whirring noise when in use.

    However, the sound isn’t that disturbing when the fan is on low or medium speed. It’s just the high-speed setting that makes the most noise, and you might find it distracting. 

    3. Color Options

    Another thing is that the fan comes in just two color options, and you can choose between metallic and black. While it's not exactly a con, we would have appreciated more color options to suit different aesthetics and ambiance.

    Value For Money

    The Lasko High Velocity fan packs a powerful punch with its durability and versatility. Considering all its features, we can safely say that the product has a good value for money. While some might find it a little pricier, we’d like to reassure you that it is worth every dime. That’s because it will last longer than other cheap options on the market.

    Lasko High Velocity Floor Fan Buying Guide

    It goes without saying that a little research is required while buying a fan for your home or working space. Here we will briefly talk about general features that you should look out for when shopping for a new fan:

    1. Construction

    First and foremost, check the construction of the fan. See if it has a metal build or is made of plastic. Preferably, opt for a fan with steel construction and blades as it would be durable and won’t break after some time. Some blades can be really fragile and crack while in use, posing a risk of injury to the user.

    2. Air Flow

    Keep a rough idea in your mind of the area of the room where you want to install the fan. All fans aren’t powerful enough to cool large spaces like garages and the basement. So, if you just want a fan for your kitchen or bathroom, a small one would be enough. But if you want to mount it in your workshop, then a high velocity fan like Lasko would be a better choice.

    3. Speed Settings

    Moving on, pay attention to the speed settings of the fan you are purchasing. The more speed levels, the merrier, as you will have better control over the temperature of your room. While most fans offer three basic settings - slow, medium, and fast, some offer 5. So, choose according to your budget and convenience.

    4. Portability

    Size and portability matter a lot if you are opting for a floor fan, as you might need to change its position frequently. However, it doesn’t matter much if you just want a wall mount fan. But our suggestion is that a convertible fan offers more options of placement and ease of use.

    5. Value For Money

    Lastly, we suggest buying a durable fan even if you have to shell out extra cash, as that would be more cost-effective in the long run. So, don’t stay limited to cheaper models and compare the features of the fan to its cost. Chances are, you’ll find a practical option.

    Lasko High Velocity Floor Fan Final Verdict

    Lasko High Velocity Floor Fan Final Verdict

    The Lasko High Velocity fan is loaded with all the excellent features that one may need. It is robustly built, delivers maximum air movement, and comes with a built-in carry handle.

    Lasko’s QuickMount® System lets you install it on a wall or use it on the floor, and the patented Blue Plug™ keeps you safe from electric shocks. Overall, it is a reasonably-priced fan, made to last long in your home.

    Related Articles

    Lasko 2554 vs. 2551 vs. 2511

    6 Best Wood Stove Fans

    19 Best Pedestal Fans 

    Whether you are experiencing a meltdown in the summer heat or just feeling really hot in the room, you can always do better with tower fans.

    Tower fans are one of the few devices that can make the sweltering heat bearable by helping the users in combating the rising temperature. Tower fans are responsible for circulating air around the room while filling it with a cool pleasant breeze to make the long summer days bearable.

    In the world of air conditioners and superior technology, tower fans steal the show with their cost-effective performance. In comparison to other cooling devices, tower fans consume much less energy.

    This article takes a detailed look at three of Lasko's best tower fans– The Lasko 2554, 2551, and 2511. Although the three models have more similarities, the differences do play a critical role in the performance of each model. Although very few, differences in the fans’ features leave a considerable impact on their overall performance and appearance.

    Since you are now aware of the basic functions of a tower fan, here are some of the differences found in the Lasko models.

    Lasko 2554 Vs 2551 Vs 2511 | Tower Fans Compared

    1. Air Ionizer

    2554 and 2551

    People living indoors often complain of bad odors and lack of fresh air. The air ionizer deals with this issue by blasting millions of negatively-charged ions in the air. The ions are supposed to recreate the smell and feeling of being outdoors.

    Both the 2554 and 2551 have an ionizer in their ranks, helping the tower fans in adding a sense of fresh air inside the home.

    2511

    Lasko Oscillating Tower Fan with Remote Control, 3 Quiet...
    • WHISPER QUIET SPEEDS: Enjoy whisper-quiet speeds with this...
    • WIDESPREAD OSCILLATION: The oscillating fan with remote...

    The 2511, however, is not built with an air ionizer. The absence of the air ionizer does not make the 2511 a bad model, as it is not designed to give the user the experience of the freshness outdoors.

    Conclusion

    The lack of an air ionizer in the 2511 makes the other two models a clear favorite with respect to the purification of air. The absence of an ionizer is not a deal-breaker but it is a significant aspect worth paying attention to when choosing an air ionizer.

    2. Three Super-Quiet Speeds Settings

    2554 Vs 2551 Vs 2511

    Like most fans, tower fans also come with different speed settings that are able to produce stronger or weaker gusts of cool air.

    The three models mentioned in this review are equipped with different speed settings that enable the user to combat the scorching heat.

    Another quality of these speed settings is that regardless of which one the user activates, the unit does not produce much sound.

    Even the high-speed setting produces a noise level of under 50 decibels. Customers often complain of fans that produce a sound louder than TV or Computer. Thankfully, none of the three Lesko models do this.

    3. Height

    2554 and 2551

    Tower fans are designed to be thin and tall resembling a tower. Since users want to place their fans and air conditioners higher, the height of the tower fans provides the luxury of altitude.

    The height allows the cold air to replace the floating warm air, changing the temperature indoors. The 2554 and 2551 models are 42-inch taller, whereas the 2511 model is 36-inches tall. Theoretically, a 42-inch model is bound to provide more cooling than a 36-inch model.

    2511

    Although the model is shorter than the other two, the difference is not significant. A height of 36-inch is still decent enough to provide cooling in an entire room.

    Conclusion

    In reality, the difference of 6 inches does not make a difference to the performance of the models. When choosing a tower fan, ensure that the model blends into your home’s interior perfectly.

    4. Aesthetics

    2554

    Lasko Wind Curve Oscillating Tower Fan, Fresh Air Ionizer,...
    • 【POWER YOU CAN FEEL】The 42" Lasko Wind Curve Tower Fan...
    • 【ICONIC BLADELESS DESIGN】With a category defining, slim,...

    One significant difference between the three models is the appearance. While all the fans serve the same purpose in more or less the same manner, the difference makes them recognizable.

    The Lasko 2554 comes with a woodgrain design that surrounds the vents of the model responsible for delivering cooling blasts of wind.

    Although the design is beautiful, it fails to blend in well with the interior designs of many homes.

    2551

    Lasko Oscillating Tower Fan with Remote, Quiet Floor Fans...
    • POWERFUL COOLING: Experience exceptional airflow with the...
    • SLEEK DESIGN: The sleek design of this standing fan for...

    The Lasko 2551 is built similarly to the 2554. However, it is made of plastic with a silver coating of paint. In comparison to the 2554, this design is more neutral and does not contradict the colors and schemes of many living rooms.

    However, many experts and homeowners consider the design to be rather boring.

    2511

    The Lasko 2511 is another model that is made of pure plastic. However, the vents are made of silver and the body surrounding the vents is coated black. The design that incorporates shades of silver and black is rather neutral; however, it also adds a dimension of style that fits perfectly with many homes. The design has a futuristic look to it that many homeowners wish to achieve.

    Conclusion

    Keeping all the designs in perspective there is no clear way to determine which model is the best. There are no set criteria or standards to match the designs of the model; therefore, you can choose a design that suits your needs the best.

    5. Remote Control   

    Tower fans are futuristic versions of the traditional pedestal and wall-mounted fans. However, one feature that you will not find in the classic fans is the lack of control from a distance. The absence of a remote control can make using traditional fans rather annoying.

    In comparison to their traditional counterparts, the Lasko models have the luxury of remote controls in their armory. You can use the models without having to touch the machine. The control over the speed makes the experience of using the Lasko tower fans a convenient one. The fans also come with additional storage space where the user can keep the remote control away from toddlers and pets.

    Lasko 2554 Vs 2551 Vs 2511 Conclusion

    Tower fans are great for keeping the inside of our homes cool during the hot summer months. As discussed earlier, the three models have more in common than in contrast. The only significant aspect that affects the performance of the fans is the air ionizer which is not available in the 35-inch 2511 model.

    The one area that the Lasko models reign supreme is the modern design of the fans which blends perfectly with almost any design and color scheme.

    Therefore, these Lasko fans work brilliantly in ensuring that the summer heat stays away from your home. Regardless of which model you choose, you will not end up regretting it.    

    Related Articles

    12 Best Window Fans on the Market

    6 Best Wood Stove Fans

    19 Best Pedestal Fans

    6 Best Micathermic Heaters

    13 Best Pool Heaters

    Best Portable Air Conditioner and Heater Combos of 2023

    Out of the many options of Kreg jigs, which one is right for you?

    The pocket hole jig by Kreg Tools is massively popular for its reliability. After all, if you are building a wooden project, you will need a tool that keeps both the material and the machine in place. 

    If you are not familiar with jigs, they are essentially a device with an open frame or plate which holds wood or other materials in place. But, that's not the only function; jigs also provide direction for operating and cutting objects.

    Kreg jigs are one of the most trusted brands when it comes to pocket hole jigs. Today, we will look at the differences between two of the most popular jigs Kreg K4 and K5. Let's attempt to find if one is better than the other.

    So without further ado, let's get to know about each brand:

    Kreg K4 vs K5 Compared 

    Kreg Brand 

    Kreg is a well-known brand in the woodworking industry and has built a well-grounded reputation for itself for the past 30 years. They are the front runners in America for providing quality tools and equipment and solutions for joining, cutting, clamping, routing, and hardware installation. 

    When it comes to pocket hole jigs and other tools like clamps and cutting tools, they have top-notch accessories that are used all over the world. There is a story about the conception of this company - it all started with one kitchen cabinet which was built in 1989. This was when Craig Sommerfeld, the founder of Kreg, was busy working on a personal project.

    The First Kreg Jig

    Craig had developed a U-shaped jig (single-hole) to hide kitchen cabinet holes, which he built for Kathie Sommerfeld. Soon after that, they saw the potential of this invention and began selling this new jig in stores.

    The immensely positive response of customers to this product led to the foundation of the company "Kreg Tool." Craig and his son Todd would work to create patented products that became a massive success over the years. 

    Expansion Into A Company

    In the early 90s, Craig first patented the Kreg Jig and shifted work from the basement, expanding the company in Huxley, Iowa. Over the years, Kreg Tools made new and improved models like the K2000 jig, which was a game-changer in the industry. 

    This model was different because it was made from injection-molded plastic instead of metal, making it a low-cost and durable option for woodworkers. Since then, Kreg products have been used by woodworkers of all skill levels globally. The tools are widely available in stores across the USA, UK, Canada, and Australia.

    Now that we know how this brand started let's find out more about the jigs they make and about jigs in general.

    What Are Jigs?

    A jig is essentially a device that is used to hold and support a workpiece. It is also used to navigate other tools to perform specific functions. Mainly, jigs come in handy to provide accuracy in cuts along with the ability to repeat an action many times over. This is especially useful when there is a need to create consistent and even-sized wood panels. 

    Often used in tapping, drilling, and reaming work, they are quite light, making them easy to use. Usually, jigs will not be attached to a machine table unless you have a larger project to finish. Also, gauge blocks are not required for these jigs. 

    Essentially, woodworkers use these accessories to ensure the material is stable and positioned correctly before cutting any pieces. Without appropriate tools like jigs, a material might move from the position, making wrong cuts due to insufficient support. 

    Also, there isn't one design that is the best when it comes to jigs. You can find various designs and features for all types of users. 

    Moreover, jigs are usually more complex in design than fixtures that merely keep wood in place without guiding any direction of movement. However, jigs cost more than fixtures due to their longer manufacturing process. 

    Types Of Jigs

    There are numerous jigs available on the market, depending on your purpose. Some of the common ones are -

      • Plate jig
      • Template jig
      • Ring jig
      • Diameter jig
      • Angle plate jig
      • Pocket hole jig

    Kreg Jigs

    Kreg makes a variety of jigs for all purposes. They come up with various models to help DIYers and professionals with the right tools they need. The earliest jig they patented was the K3 model, which had many new features making them easy to use. 

    The Kreg pocket hole jig 520 pro model is the latest design in a long list of accessories and jigs. This newer model is much more versatile and is designed to build any kind of configuration with ease.

    Kreg K4 And K5 

    Kreg products are known for their high quality and user-friendly build. And, if we talk about overall features, both provide intuitive and sturdy abilities which come integrated into both K4 and K5 models. 

    The primary thing which differs is how you apply it with its individual machining functions for specific uses. But one thing is clear, some types of fabricators and woodworkers would benefit more from one model than the other.

    In this section, we will take a comprehensive look into both Kreg K4 and K5 jigs, so you have a better idea of individual features. We recommend taking a look at the overview so that you can figure out if either one matches your requirements. 

    About Kreg K4

    Kreg K4 is built with the primary purpose of drilling pocket holes with unmatched precision and reliability. You may think that such a high-quality product would not be the best for students or novices. Actually, we'd be glad to tell you - this is absolutely not true. 

    In fact, it is quite commendable that woodworkers of all experience levels can use a product as sophisticated as this. That is why it should come as no surprise that this model contains many design elements that make operating the jig effortless.

    K4 Uses

    Kreg K4 can handle smaller materials or pieces of wood and guide them for precise and even cuts every single time. This prominent feature makes it one of the most capable and dependable jig options in its price range. Since the model is originally designed specifically for cutting and shaping smaller materials, you'll find many uses for this jig for regular wood jobs. 

    Whether you are making kitchen or tool cabinets, rolling storage crates, garden or balcony benches, work desk, small sliding wardrobe, the K4 won't disappoint. The jig can be adjusted according to the material thickness, enabling you to experiment with the settings and finding a comfortable fit for your projects.

    K4 Benefits 

    Apart from that, this K4 jig also has a fast clamping system that makes sure the device is secure while cutting or shaping materials. Furthermore, this model is 100% compatible with other Kreg accessories and attachments, making work more straightforward, so you don't have to worry before buying. 

    In other words, you can easily expand the abilities of this jig by adding more valuable accessories from the same brand.

    Not only that, the Kreg K4 model has an integrated drill guide that helps with making the same types of cuts repeatedly. If you have no use for this feature, you can easily remove the accessory for additional mobility and experiment with lengths and styles of cuts. 

    But if you choose to use the 3-hole drill guide, you'll find it is one of the best of its kind for precise incisions. 

    Overall, the K4 is a superb option for people who are getting started and interested in DIY projects in and around the house. This device makes it easy to make home improvements without hiring expensive professionals and also to hone your skills as a woodworker.

    Even though the K4 is not the most recent model by Kreg Tools, this jig variant is still relevant today for various building purposes.

    About Kreg K5

    Now, coming to Kreg K5 - we can call it an upgraded version of the previous models, including the K4 jig. They have substantially increased the range and power of this jig which helps improve its functionality. Professional woodworkers will find many uses for this model because it has many new beneficial integrations which will come in handy for various projects.

    K5 Uses

    One of the most distinctive features of the Kreg K5 is its front-mounted handle, making it easier to draw different angles. This makes it more versatile and gives the most accurate cuts making it a favorite option among seasoned woodworkers. Apart from that, the K5 also has a unique in-built clamping system which is absent in the previous model. 

    This clamping mechanism is much sturdier than a separate clamp which might move upon manual pressure. But, that is not the case with this clamp; it has a better design that holds the material in place with zero movements. The advantage of this clamp is that it is more ergonomically designed and isn't too expensive either. 

    Another good thing about this mechanism is that it contains a ratcheting function so you can independently move around the jig as per your requirement.

    K5 Benefits

    The Kreg K4 did not provide an additional wing for measurement and support, but the K5 comes with an onboard storage wing. This improvement/addition makes it easier for users to access tools and keep away all of the required accessories without needing extra attachments. Another thing to note is the size; the Kreg K5 is visibly larger than K4 and other models, which must be considered. 

    If you are used to carrying equipment around, then there is a chance that you might not prefer the K5 because of its limited portability. On the other hand, consider if you are going to build larger pieces of wooden furniture like outdoor garden dining tables or wall-length bookshelves. If yes, there isn't a better option than Kreg K5. 

    We say this because K5 is designed to support larger pieces of wood, and working with K5 will help you tremendously with cutting larger panels. Another new feature of the K5 is the new swiveling dust extraction system which allows for more movement of the dust vacuum pipes. 

    This extra maneuverability may not seem like much, but it can prevent your pipes from tearing in case they are bent in the wrong direction. You can't find the same benefit in the Kreg K4, which has a locked dust extraction that does not allow any movement.

    Lastly, K5 also comes with a small block that can be used to adjust thickness for cutting and incisions. It is portable, so you can move it around to conduct repairs and building work.

    Who Can Use Kreg K4 and Kreg K5?

    K4 and K5 indeed have similar features and provide almost the same functions for woodworking. But there are a few things that users might want to know about before purchasing. 

    Both of these models can be used by professional woodworkers as well as people who are developing carpentry as a hobby or part-time work. However, each model gives different benefits for contrasting uses, and people might find one more suitable for specific tasks.

    Who Can Use K4?

    When it comes to the K4 model, this model was heavily designed for beginners and DIYers to make their tasks seem less daunting. The evidence for this can be found in its easy-to-use interface, which doesn't require prior experience or reading of extensive manuals. Even a novice can complete tasks like pocket joinery without the help of a professional. 

    If you are looking to work with a straightforward machine that assists you well in all basic woodworking tasks, K4 might be the perfect design. It has intuitive features like a sturdy toggle clamp along with regular add ons like drill bits. 

    Who Can Use K5?

    What's different about the Kreg K5 is that it was built with a specific purpose in mind. The makers wanted to create a product that would excel at enhanced pocket joinery machining, which professional carpenters can make the best use of. It is easy to see that K5 is the more sophisticated and upgraded jig option when you compare them next to each other. 

    The thing is, K5 provides many features which are not found in K4 and older models, so it becomes a good choice for specific reasons. One of the things you might like to note is the swiveling dust collector, which is exclusively available in the K5 model. 

    So, if you are someone who cannot do without vacuuming large piles of dust while working, you definitely need to opt for K5. Also, the swivel is not available in K4; instead, the dust collector stays fixed in one place. 

    In short, if we have to summarize who can make the best use of K5 - they make a perfect choice for a professional fabrication worker. We say this because even though many design elements overlap with K4, the K5 model is superior and better suited for bigger builds.

    Kreg K4 and Kreg K5 Compared 

    Now that we have seen Kreg K4 and K5 individually with their features, let's find out how they compare to each other. In this section, we will highlight the features of both models and see them one at a time to understand which one stands out. 

    The primary purpose of this comparison is to explore all the details within both jigs and assist you in making an informed decision before purchasing.

    Similarities

    Both Kreg K4 and K5 have a 3-hole drill guide included. This features various settings for the width of materials which can be found on the main base of both jigs. In both devices, the main base has a clamping recess which allows you to clamp the tools to your workstation. Both of them also have dust collectors, but the design is vastly different.

    Feature Comparison Between Kreg K4 And K5

    1. Clamping System

    Let's start with the K4 clamping system. The K4 features a large clamping mechanism, and the main purpose for this aspect is to secure any materials or tools you are working with. This feature makes sure that the wood you need to cut is firmly in place so that the cuts are even and error-free. 

    Also, it's easy to secure to the workbench, so that is one less thing to worry about. 

    But let's compare K4 to the clamping system of K5. Unlike K4, which has a separate clamp that needs to be adjusted, the K5 has an in-built clamping system which is far more superior. 

    Attaching the tool and material to the table or workstation is pretty easy and cost-effective in the long run. We say it is cost-effective because of two reasons. The first being its sturdy nature which does not rust or spoil, thus lasting for years to come. Secondly, there is no need to purchase any extra accessories or attachments to fix the jib to your workstation.

    Which one is superior? - Kreg K5 

    1. Collection Of Dust

    Any woodwork requires a lot of drilling, and creating pocket holes using jigs involves even more drilling leaving large quantities of sand dust. Ideally, you will need a jig system that can efficiently remove most of the dust as you work. 

    K4 and K5 both have a dust port which allows for seamless collection of dust, saving your surroundings from sawing and cutting messes. However, one of the drawbacks of K4 is that it does not come with a method of integrated dust collection features. 

    There is a port that you can attach to the shop vac and remove the dust, but it does not have much movability. This can result in dust falling to the ground if not used correctly and then sweeping it off, making it time-consuming. If you think this will be too much of a hassle, maybe you should steer clear of the K4 and check out the Kreg K5 instead.

    K5 has a swiveling dust collector that can be attached to the vacuum to remove dust simultaneously while cutting materials. Since it moves from side to side, the added movement gives the hose/pipe more leeway to move around. This feature makes it easier to attach the shop vac and protects the hose from tearing overuse. 

    So, even though both the jigs come with a dust collection feature, the K5 is definitely one step ahead.

    Which one is superior? - Kreg K5

    1. Portability

    The K5 is physically larger in size and slightly heavier than the K4 model. The weight might not seem much at first, but it might get tedious when you need to carry it from one workplace to the other. Most users prefer to own a tool that fits in the truck and can be driven around to different locations. 

    This is all the more important for professionals who need to carry their gear to a client's house. We think that both are well designed to carry and can easily be placed at the back of your truck. But, if we compare the two, the K4 model is lighter and gives better portability.

    Which one is superior? - Kreg K4

    1. Storage

    When it comes to K5, this pocket hole jig is clearly superior because it fulfills all the needs of a jig while providing a storage area. The design has support extension wings on two sides which are absent in the K4 model. 

    The second benefit of these wings is that they double up to make storage containers. This makes the woodworker's packing and storing job much easier, and there isn't any need to find a separate container to keep the jig in. 

    Which one is superior? - Kreg K5 

    1. Other Features

    In the K5 master system, there is a recess that makes a place for the clamping tool to fit. The tool can be secured to your work table, and this is the same for both K4 and K5. However, the difference in the K5 jig is that it has a front mounting clamping system that includes an ergonomically designed handle. 

    To use this, you have to apply a little pressure and move the handle downwards, away from the jib and the table. This is an update to the older model and allows for a firm grip of the material, which does not move while cutting. 

    Functional Differences Between Kreg K4 And Kreg K5

    1. Usage

    Kreg K4 is designed keeping in mind newer woodworkers, so they are pretty easy to use and don't need elaborate instructions. Since it is made for beginners and DIYers, the parts aren't too complex either. On the other hand, if we compare this to the Kreg K5, it is pretty clear that this model is more advanced than the K4. 

    There is nothing surprising about this because most companies like to release new and improved models from time to time. In the same way, you can consider the K5 as a better and improved version of K4 and other previous models. 

    However, there is one specific function for which K5 is designed. Kreg K5 is pretty much the best jig when it comes to enhanced pocket joinery machining. So, if this purpose is essential for your builds, it doesn't get much better than K5.

    1. Clamp And Dust Collector

    Kreg K5 has a new feature that was not previously available with the K4 model. It has a swiveling dust collector port to allow the user to attach pipes for efficiently removing dust while working. Since this dust port can swivel, it gives a wider range of movement. They don't provide any other kit for dust collecting, so you'll have to purchase that separately. 

    K4 does not have this feature, but it does come with a toggle clamp. This toggle clamp is pretty durable and can be used to secure wood components in position securely. The clamp provided with the K4 model can hold thicker materials firmly and are overall reliable.

    1. Project Size

    Those of you who are going to build elaborate wooden pieces, the Kreg K5 would be preferable. The overall features of K5 are more than enough to support large-scale projects and fulfill all the needs for evenly cutting larger wood panels. 

    However, for smaller projects like wooden tables, kitchen cabinets, garden benches, crates, small dining tables, the Kreg K4 model would be good enough. 

    1. Price

    If we compare the price, the K5 is priced a bit higher compared to the K4. However, if you think about it, K5 significantly improves almost all the aspects of the previous models. It even comes with extra features providing much more versatility than the K4. This is why it also costs more than other models, including the K4. 

    The Major Differences - Summary

    • Forward Facing Clamp Lever in K5 allows for smoother operation 
    • Storage Wings in K5 help with storage
    • In-built clamp In K5 makes for easier and faster woodworking

    Our Verdict - Is There A Winner?

    Without a doubt, the better jig is the Kreg K5. It has more features than the previous models and was a pleasant improvement to the K4. 

    Not that K4 is a subpar product. In fact, K4 has plenty of valuable features, which make it a great product to start woodwork for newbies. Besides, not everyone needs an overly powerful and advanced system, especially not those invested in house repairs and DIY. 

    Which One Should You Buy?

    Making a selection of the best model will depend on your needs and purpose. Although one model is far better than the other in some ways, it might not be the right choice for you. 

    If you are a woodworker or love to DIY for home improvement, the K4 would be enough to take care of all your needs. The older but functional model would be a reliable choice for repairs and building smaller objects in your garage or backyard. 

    Since the K4 is priced on the lower end, you can keep that in mind if you are working within a budget. The best part is when selecting this option; you are not compromising on quality; thus, you get a low-cost yet good-quality product.

    Alternatively, if you are a professional material fabricator or woodworker, you might need a robust system that can last many hours of heavy work. If that is the case, then the K5 would be better suited to your work since you might need to use it for long hours. 

    Final Words 

    So, here was our comprehensive comparison between two of Kreg jigs - the K4 and the K5.

    We hope the information in this guide helps you to make the best decision based on your woodworking needs. As we already mentioned, we did find that Kreg K5 was the better choice out of the two. 

    However, your work experience, the scale of work, and the frequency of work will decide which model you finally purchase. 

    All you need to know about K4 and K5 jigs are listed in this article. So, feel free to come back if you want to check on some info again. If you already have either of these jigs, do you agree with our comparison? Tell us about your experiences in the comments below.

    That's it for today. Bye-bye folks!

    Related Articles

    11 Best Kreg Jig Pocket Hole Alternatives To Consider

    11 Best Dowel Jigs

    11 Best Magnetic Bit Holder

    Cobalt vs. Titanium Drill Bits

    13 Best Screwdriver Sets on the Market Today

    11 Best Tap And Die Set on the Market Today

    13 Best Tile Saws Reviewed

    11 Best Wood Chisels to Enjoy Today

    13 Best Electric Hand Planers

    11 Best Sliding Compound Miter Saws

    Kobalt vs. Husky vs. Craftsman | Husky Tools Reviews

    13 Best Jigsaws 

    13 Best Bench Vise 

    Forstner Bit vs. Spade Bit

    19 Different Types Of Hand Planes & How To Use Them

    7 Best Alternatives for Kreg Jig Pocket Hole Screws

    According to DIYers, a pocket hole jig is an essential component in their toolbox. In fact, most people don't leave for work without carrying one.

    When it comes to choosing a suitable pocket hole jig, the first brand that comes to mind is the Kreg Jig. Believe it or not, it has made woodworking a lot easier and the best part is that even first-timers can build projects without learning any special skills. 

    However, its high prices have got many DIYers looking for alternatives. So, in this article, we have compiled a list of the 11 best alternatives to the Kreg Jig. These options are just as good and some of them may even surprise you with their performance.  

    Without further ado, let's jump right in. 

    Kreg Jig Pocket Hole Alternatives

     

    Woodworking entrepreneurs are using a drill through the wood holes to assemble and build wooden tables for customers.

    1. General Tools ‎850 Pocket Hole Jig

    General Tools is one of the world's leading manufacturers of high-quality and innovative precision tools. And the 850 Pocket Hole Jig from the brand is certainly no exception. Backed by a lifetime warranty, this product offers everything that you would need to successfully complete all your woodworking projects. 

    General Tools Woodworking Pocket Hole Jig Kit - All-In-One...
    • POCKET HOLE SET: Our easy-to-use tool creates corner and...
    • ANGLED DRILL GUIDE: The drilling kit includes a pocket hole...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Coming from a brand with over 100 years of experience, this unit left us impressed with its accurate output. You can use it for a wide variety of applications, such as nailing screws in tight spaces, constructing face frame cabinets, and more. 

    Weighing just under 2 pounds, it is highly portable and you can even mount it on a bench, thanks to its high-quality camping system. Plus, it is super easy to use, which makes it the perfect companion for both professionals and DIYers alike. 

    Apart from this, it is compliant with the FSC standard, meaning it is made of ethically sourced wood. It is also backed by a lifetime warranty from the manufacturer, so the brand has got you covered and helps solve any defects. 

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    We believe that it can be a good alternative to the Kreg Jig in most respects. However, while testing it, we noticed that the height of the holes could not be adjusted according to the thickness of the material, which was slightly disappointing.



    Pros

    • Lifetime warranty
    • Versatile
    • Lightweight
    • Easy to use




    Cons

    • Height of the holes cannot be adjusted



    1. Milescraft 1325

    Founded in 2002, Milescraft is one brand that consistently delivers innovative and user-friendly products that stand out on the market. Understandably, the 1325 pocket jig is an alternative you wouldn't want to miss out on, mainly because of its four-board thickness setting. 

    Sale
    Milescraft 1325 Pocket Jig 200 - Complete Double/Twin Pocket...
    • Spring-loaded sled adjust button allows the jig to be set to...
    • Built-in imperial & metric scales allow you to easily...

    Why Did We Like It?

    We were thoroughly impressed with what this product offers. For starters, we loved the built-in metric and imperial scales that let you track the thickness of the workpiece. Speaking of thickness, it comes with 4 different board thickness settings ranging between 1/2" and 1-1/2", making your work a lot easier.

    Furthermore, the hardened steel creates a dense tolerance between the drill bit and the bushing. This allows you to make a precise and clean pocket hole while also minimizing tear-out. Also, the 3/8" stop collar sports a split design that prevents the set screw from slipping when secured.

    We love its heavy-duty plastic storage case, allowing you to keep all the important components in an organized manner. What’s more, the price is affordable, and it is backed by a 3-year warranty, which makes it worth the investment.  

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    Without a doubt, this product is an affordable alternative to the Kreg Jig. It supports light-duty work and is a suitable choice for occasional DIYers and beginners. So, it may not be the best option for those who are looking to use it professionally or for large-scale tasks. 



    Pros

    • 3-year warranty
    • Accurate and clean pocket holes
    • Easy to use
    • Great value for money




    Cons

    • Not suitable for professional use



    1. MulWark Premium Pocket Hole Jig System Kit

    Our next recommendation is yet another quality addition from the house of MulWark, a brand that is committed to delivering affordable and durable DIY tools. On that note, allow us to introduce you to the Premium Pocket Hole Jig System Kit, an all-in-one set and a robust alternative to the Kreg Jig. 

    MulWark Mini Wood Pocket Hole Jig Kit - Two Pocket Screw Jig...
    • ♦ Complete Pocket Hole Kit: Our pocket hole jig Includes...
    • ♦ Effortless Assembly:Mulwark pocket hole jig kit provides...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Right from the get-go, its premium-quality construction caught our eye; made using re-sulphurized hardened steel, this product is one of the most durable options on our list. Also, it comes with a magnetic spot that enables you to easily adjust the position of the jig. 

    Moving on, you can easily measure the thickness of your workpiece and place the jig accordingly, thanks to its adjustable thickness settings. In addition, the guide hole is positioned at 15 degrees, thereby reducing the size of the pocket hole for efficient output.

    That’s not all and you will find that it has a lifetime warranty, which shows that the manufacturers have faith in their products. Overall, this set is everything you need to get started with your very first pocket hole assignment.  

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    We didn't come across any significant drawbacks while testing this product. But, we feel that the instructions could have been a lot better; it was unclear, and the booklet was quite small, which could be an issue for first-timers. Other than that, it works perfectly. 



    Pros

    • Lifetime warranty
    • Durable
    • Thickness of the wood can be measured
    • Hassle-free experience




    Cons

    • Complicated instructions



    1. Wolfcraft 3751405

    For over 70 years, Wolfcraft has dedicated itself to designing high-quality products that users can rely on for a long time. And the latest 3751405 model is a true testament to the brand's quality and reliability. Moreover, it features extremely durable and lightweight construction, making it a tough competitor to Kreg Jig’s products.

    Sale
    Richelieu R88708 Professional Doweling Kit
    • Produces uniform hole spacing to create professional corner,...
    • Works with materials from 1/2 in to 1-1/4 in thick

    Why Did We Like It?

    In our opinion, the main USP of this product has got to be its 9-hole guide, which saves you from the hassle of marking and measuring holes. Additionally, each guide has a bushing made of hardened steel, delivering much-needed durability. 

    Now, its unique clamp system deserves mention, as it lets you join boards for simultaneous drilling. What’s more, it features a doweling jig made of cast aluminum which is perfect for creating edge-to-corner, edge-to-edge, and T-joints. 

    Impressive, right? Well, there's more and we were delighted to find that it works perfectly with materials having thickness between 1/2" and 1-1/4". Plus, with the brand's limited lifetime warranty and affordable price tag, you can rest assured that it promises to be a valuable investment. 

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    For the most part, it does a pretty decent job. Having said that, the guide bushings are a bit oversized, which prevents them from delivering accurate results. This was quite disappointing given all the exceptional features this unit comes with.  



    Pros

    • Affordable
    • Limited lifetime warranty
    • Durable and long-lasting
    • Ideal for thick materials




    Cons

    • Oversized guide bushings



    1. Massca Aluminum Pocket Hole Jig System Set

    Next up, we have another outstanding alternative to the Kreg Jig from Massca, a brand that manufactures top-quality products and is popular among DIYers. Hence, it should come as no surprise that the Aluminum Pocket Hole Jig System Set is one of our top recommendations.

    Massca Pocket Hole Jig Kit M1 - Adjustable & Easy to Use...
    • Advanced Hole Precision – Create perfect woodworking...
    • Adjustable Depth Setting – Each pocket hole jig kit...

    Why Did We Like It?

    To begin with, we really liked that every jig sports a depth knob, which helps in adjusting to the wood's thickness to avoid splinters and damage. Plus, its top-notch hole precision lets you repair wood joints and create accurate woodworking holes with ease.  

    As far as the build quality is concerned, it is made of heavy-duty aluminum, which offers a sturdy and reliable support base while working. We also found that it comes with a lot of carpentry accessories, including drill bits, screws, and a stop collar to assist with your DIY project. 

    On top of that, the built-in dust collector does a great job in collecting all the dust particles and debris, hence keeping the workspace clean. Naturally, it is one of the highest-rated options on the market. 

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    Despite testing it rigorously for hours, we couldn't find any significant flaws with this product. But, it is not for those who are on a humble budget, as it is one of the most expensive alternatives to the Kreg jig. That being said, the quality of this model totally justifies its price tag.  



    Pros

    • Versatile
    • Durable
    • Efficient dust cleaning
    • Top-notch precision




    Cons

    • Tad bit expensive



    1. VINWOX Pocket Hole Jig System

    We are halfway through with our recommendations, and here is a product from VINWOX that you can't ignore. Featuring sturdy steel drill guides, the pocket hole jig system allows you to achieve optimal accuracy by laying down ideal pocket holes for clean wood joints.

    VINWOX Pocket Hole Jig System – Adjustable Woodworking...
    • ✅Pocket hole jig kit creates pocket holes at variable...
    • ✅Hardened steel drill guides achieve maximum precision for...

    Why Did We Like It?

    To be honest, the VINWOX Pocket Hole Jig System is not just any other conventional jig system. And the main reason behind this is the fact that it can create pocket holes at various center distances for a wide range of materials. In addition, the super sturdy drill guides further deliver clean pocket holes.

    Now, it is made of sleek and highly-durable anodized aluminum, which helps it stand the test of time. Added to that, consumers will find a ton of woodworking accessories in the kit, including bezels, wrenches, drills, and screws for a hassle-free DIY experience.

    Moreover it is priced quite reasonably, and can handle large-scale projects quite conveniently. So, it’s safe to say that it is one of the best Kreg Jig alternatives that any DIYer can hope to get their hands on. 

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    It is a noteworthy alternative to the Kreg jig, mainly because of its durable aluminum body and its compatibility with materials of varying thickness. Having said that, the markings on the bushing are all backwards, which may confuse first-time users. 



    Pros

    • Affordable
    • Sleek
    • Durable
    • Accessories included
    • Lays down clean looking pocket holes




    Cons

    • Markings on the bushing are backward



    1. Armor Tool APJ1400

    Armor Tool doesn't need any introduction as it is a trustworthy brand in the DIYer community. On that note, we bring you one of its finest innovations, the APJ1400 Auto-Jig Pocket Hole System. It is a must-have for all DIYers and woodworkers looking to create clean pocket holes. 

    ARMOR TOOL Auto-Jig Pocket Hole Jig System - Starter Pack -...
    • REVOLUTIONIZE YOUR JOINERY - Say goodbye to manual...
    • EFFORTLESS CLAMPING - The Auto-Adjust clamp adapts to...

    Why Did We Like It?

    It is safe to say that this model is one of the top performers in all aspects. Its self-adjusting feature makes it suitable for heavy-duty projects while the auto-adjust clamp enables you to secure woods of various thicknesses. No wonder, it acts as a suitable replacement to the Kreg jig.

    Another thing that we really liked was its color-coded screw system, which makes it super convenient to match the size of the screw to the dimensions of the pocket hole. Plus, it is rust-resistant, thereby ensuring a longer tool life.

    It also comes with a detailed instruction manual, so that you can easily mount it on any worktable. Moreover, its built-in dust collection does a pretty decent job in keeping the workstation clean. 

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    Despite being a premium-quality product, it has a couple of downsides. Firstly, the holes tend to clog which makes it challenging to get the desired output. It also features an expensive price tag, which could be beyond the buying capacity of most DIYers.



    Pros

    • Suitable for heavy-duty use
    • Rust-resistant screw system
    • Suitable for working on woods of varying thickness
    • Comes with detailed instructions




    Cons

    • Expensive



    1. Rockler Universal Drawer Slide Jig

    The Rockler Universal Drawer Slide Jig has been designed for a spectacular performance. Whether you are an occasional DIYer or a seasoned pro, this product may help you achieve the desired results. Featuring a sturdy locking wedge, it is the ideal option for inserting various drawer slides. 

    Rockler Universal Drawer Slide Jig - Cabinet Hardware Jig...
    • Universal Rockler Drawer Slide Jig: Install drawer slides...
    • Works For Most Drawer Slides: The Rockler cabinet hardware...

    Why Did We Like It?

    With the right balance of smoothness and precision, it is one of the top alternatives to the Kreg Jig. It features a sturdy locking wedge to securely hold the slide in place to prevent slippage. In addition, you can clamp the jig further for more stability. 

    Now, for any jigs, drawer installation is a major headache, but this product handles it with ingenuity. It can easily accommodate drawer side heights up to 1-3/4," and the adjustable index foot enables top-notch accuracy. 

    Also, it doesn't matter if you are a first-timer or a professional because using this jig is super easy. Not to mention, all its outstanding features are coupled with an affordable price tag, making this product one of the best options on the market. 

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    The performance of this product is undoubtedly flawless, but unfortunately, the same cannot be said when it comes to the build quality. It was made of flimsy material, therefore it was not at all sturdy. Other than that, it works perfectly. 



    Pros

    • Affordable
    • Delivers precise results
    • Easy to use
    • An ideal choice for first-timers




    Cons

    • Poor build quality



    1. WEN WA1527

    Now that we are nearing the end of our list, here's another product that you should seriously consider. It’s time now to introduce you to the WA1527 Metal Pocket Hole Jig Kit from WEN. This product is one of the most durable alternatives to the Kreg Jig as it’s made using heavy-duty anodized aluminum. 

    WEN Pocket Hole Jig Kit, Metal, Step Drill Bit, Self-Tapping...
    • Drill quick and accurate pocket hole joints; perfect for...
    • Adjustable toggle clamp accepts a range of thicknesses,...

    Why Did We Like It?

    According to us, one of the key highlights of this product is its adjustable toggle clamps which are capable of accommodating woods of varying thickness. Plus, the hardened steel drill lets you drill precise and clean pocket holes, making it a suitable choice for woodworkers and carpenters alike.  

    Furthermore, it is built using top-grade anodized steel, which ensures durability and long tool life. But despite its incredible durability, it weighs just under 5 pounds and you can easily carry it from one jobsite to another. 

    We also liked that it contains 100 screws of sizes between 1" and 2", ensuring that you never run out of screws while working. Moreover, the mounting holes help you place it on a benchtop very easily and you can use its L-base to drill holes in tight corners. 

    Lastly, like most WEN products, this pocket hole jig is also backed by a 2-year warranty.

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    This product is undoubtedly an outstanding choice for professionals as well as DIYers because of its clean results and durable build quality. But, we noticed that its instructions are unclear and difficult to read. Meaning first-timers and occasional DIYers may view this as a significant drawback.  



    Pros

    • 2-year warranty
    • Versatile
    • Highly durable construction
    • Portable




    Cons

    • Difficult to understand the instructions



    1. T&A Jig Joinery Kit

    The T&A Jig Joinery Kit deserves a spot on this list mainly because of its multipurpose nature. Featuring 3 different drill bits, it lets you nail a wide variety of DIY as well as commercial projects with ease. But there's a lot more to this product, so keep reading.

    Wood Woodwork Guides Joint Angle Tool Carpentry Locator -...
    • MULTIPURPOSEThe mini pocket fixture is very suitable for DIY...
    • DOUBLE POCKET Dual Pocket 15癉rill Angle, 2-way hole, can...

    Why Did We Like It?

    To begin with, we were impressed by its versatility and affordable pricing but that doesn’t mean it compromises on performance. You can use it for constructing a wide range of things, including dressing and train tables. 

    Featuring dual pockets at an angle of 15 degrees, this product allows you to make accurate screw connections to increase work efficiency. Furthermore, its knife head enhances the overall performance, thanks to its 3 drill sizes, meaning it is suitable for working on any wooden surface.

    Moving on, its metal construction offers durability, and you can work for extended periods without any difficulty. On top of that, it contains multiple stoppers and sleeves for a smooth experience, so that you can handle various projects. 

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    We found a couple of drawbacks while testing it. Firstly, it tends to jump around, and you will have to clamp it down. What’s more, the drill bits that came along were not to our liking as they were slightly shorter. 



    Pros

    • Affordable
    • Durable
    • Effortless working experience
    • Versatile




    Cons

    • Short drill bits



    1. Big Horn 12600

    Frankly speaking, this list would have been incomplete without this product from Big Horn, a popular brand that sells and manufactures top-grade hand tools and accessories. Added to that, the 12600 pocket jig is an option that can give tough competition to the Kreg JIG.

    Big Horn 12600 Adjustable Pocket Hole Jig
    • Ideal wood joining jig kit to create flush, corner, and...
    • Manufactured from aluminum for durability and rigidity,...

    Why Did We Like It?

    This brand is merely 20 years old, but we have to admit that the Big Horn 12600 exceeds our expectations. It is everything that consumers would need to drill clean pocket holes with ease.  

    The adjustable drill guides help control the angle of the drill while the stop collar does a pretty decent job managing the depth. Unsurprisingly, it is a go-to option for professional woodworkers. 

    Apart from this, it is made from premium-quality materials, delivering a highly durable and sturdy design. Speaking of design, the yellow and black color combination makes it trendy and eye-catching. 

    Other than that, it weighs well under 2 pounds, making it extremely lightweight and highly portable. Needless to say, consumers will have a great time working with it. 

     

    What Could've Been Better?

    Firstly, it doesn't come with a carrying case, which is quite disappointing as a case allows you to store all its important accessories. Also, it is only adjustable up to 3" which is a letdown. Apart from that it is a top-notch alternative available at a reasonable price.  



    Pros

    • Durable
    • Portable
    • Eye-catching color
    • Clean and precise results




    Cons

    • No carrying case



    Professional precision drilling tool, furniture jig, hinge drill, Forstner drill.

    Kreg Jig Alternatives Buyer's Guide

    So, were you able to make a choice after going through all our recommendations? Even if you weren’t there’s no reason to worry because knowing just the product names isn’t enough when looking for the best Kreg Jig alternative. 

    In fact, there are several other factors that you need to keep in mind to make the purchase. For this reason, we have discussed all the essential points in detail, in this buyer's guide section, to help you make an informed decision. 

    We strongly recommend reading till the end; otherwise, you might miss out on a thing or two.  

    1. Durability

    Durability is one of the most important factors that you must consider while buying the best Kreg Jig alternative. As such, we strongly recommend going with a model that features a metal construction as it provides durability, thereby increasing the tool-life. 

    Also, choosing a durable jig becomes all the more important if you intend to use it professionally. 

    1. Adjustable Settings

    The product should have adjustable settings, meaning the size and the angles should be changeable as per your convenience. That said, models that are slightly expensive usually come with all the relevant features and adhere to materials of varying thickness without requiring additional effort. 

    1. Accessories

    Most jigs come with accessories such as screws, bits, clamps, etc., to enhance your working experience in this day and age. However, not all of them are important. Ensure that you go through the instruction manual properly, as it will provide a clear idea of the accessories that you actually need. 

    1. Intended Use

    You should be honest about how you are going to use the product. Opting for expensive models may not be the best idea if you intend to use it for light-duty tasks and occasional DIY projects. Having said that, you still need to ensure that the product is durable and long-lasting.

    Another thing to consider is the thickness of the materials that you want to drill using the jig pocket hole. Your unit would turn out useless if it failed to expand while fitting different materials. 

    1. Warranty

    Since pocket jigs require a substantial amount of investment, it is always best to go with a model that is backed by a warranty. Usually, the top brands offer a warranty of several years, but you should always check that yourself before buying. 

    Screwing a self-tapping screw into a metal fastening hole on a wood strip using a screwdriver, the work of a carpenter.

     Verdict

    Hopefully, this review-based guide will help you choose the right alternative to the Kreg Jig. Before wrapping up, we would like to let you in on our favorites from this list.

    The overall best on this list is the General Tools ‎850 Pocket Hole Jig because it is very easy to use and is backed by a lifetime warranty. Apart from that, the Milescraft 1325 is easy to use and helps create precise pocket holes. 

    But, if you are looking for a pocket jig that will last a long time, we certainly recommend going with the MulWark Premium Pocket Hole Jig System Kit. So, that's all for now but we will be back with more exciting product reviews. 

    See ya soon! 

    Related Articles

    11 Best Magnetic Bit Holder

    Cobalt vs. Titanium Drill Bits [Differences & Winner]

    13 Best Screwdriver Sets on the Market Today

    11 Best Tap And Die Set on the Market Today | Buyer’s Guide

    13 Best Tile Saws Reviewed | Buyer’s Guide

    11 Best Wood Chisels to Enjoy Today | Buyer’s Guide

    13 Best Electric Hand Planers  Reviewed | Buyer’s Guide

    11 Best Sliding Compound Miter Saws

    Kobalt vs. Husky vs. Craftsman | Husky Tools Reviews

    13 Best Jigsaws 

    13 Best Bench Vise 

    Forstner Bit vs. Spade Bit [All You Need to Know & Winner]

    19 Different Types Of Hand Planes & How To Use Them

    11 Best Dowel Jigs

    As far as toilets are concerned, you can never go wrong with Kohler. But is its latest Santa Rosa series worth the hype? Let’s find out!

    With its comfortable, one-piece design and modern features, the Kohler Santa Rosa Toilet range has taken the market by storm and has become a favorite among buyers. In addition, its water-saving technology, sturdy construction, and variegated color options make it even more appealing.

    If you are wondering whether this toilet will be the best fit for your space, go through our detailed review to know the answer. To make things simpler, we’ve summarized its pros and cons and included a buyer’s guide.

    So, without further ado, let’s begin!

    Kohler Santa Rosa Toilet Review

    Interior of clean modern bathroom

    With its solid market reputation and unrivaled ergonomics, Kohler is one of the leading toilet manufacturers. If you are looking for a highly efficient toilet with a durable frame, then the Santa Rosa Toilet range from the brand will be your best bet.

    In this section, we’ll discuss all the reasons you should consider buying this product. Let’s get started!

    1. Advanced Flushing System

    Kohler Santa Rosa Toilets uses AquaPiston Technology that releases water from the canister in a powerful stream with each push of the button. As a result, water flows downwards at a swift pace and cleans the entire bowl in one go.

    Replacing the outdated flapper design that leads to clogs, we have the 360-degree valve that allows the water to shoot out from all directions. This will clean the bowl completely, leaving no residue behind.

    With this toilet, you can put your plunger aside, as the chances of clogging or leakage are minimized.

    1. Ergonomically Designed

    While looking for new toilets, people often forget to take ergonomics into account, prioritizing low water consumption and a powerful flushing system instead. Although these features are essential, the ergonomics of the product also adds tremendous value to it.

    Unlike traditional toilets with a height of 15 inches, Kohler goes not one but two steps further and has a 17-inch height. It is therefore ideal for taller people who are tired of uncomfortably bending their knees or people with back problems.

    In addition, the elongated bowl is comfortable while being compact and can fit into small bathroom spaces with ease. Besides, all toilets from this range are ADA-compliant and can be installed in homes, offices, and public places for people with mobility issues.

    1. One-Piece Toilet

    Single-piece toilets are sleek and simplistic, adding a very contemporary look to the bathroom. Besides, they are pretty easy to install, even for an amateur. In addition, there are no hidden nooks or crevices where dust might accumulate, and a simple wipe down will keep it clean.

    Also, since it’s a one-piece system, the tank and bowl are fused, minimizing the chances of any seal leak or breakage. This adds to the durability of the unit and saves you from frequent repairs in the future.

    1. Water-Conservation Technology

    If mounting electricity bills are a concern in your household, then the Kohler Santa Rosa range will prove to be a massive boon. Traditional toilets consume a lot of water, with some models guzzling 4 gallons per flush. However, Kohler focuses on designing sustainable toilet models that aim at water conservation.

    The Santa Rosa belongs to a group of high-efficiency toilets and consumes merely 1.6 gallons of water per flush. However, this doesn’t mean that the bowl won’t be adequately cleaned. The advanced flushing technology ensures that all the debris is thoroughly removed while keeping the water consumption minimal.

    Lastly, we’d like to point out that this toilet is EPA WaterSense certified, making you eligible for tax rebates on water bills. Although the gallons of water used per year depend from user to user, on average, the toilet saves over 16 gallons of water annually.

    1. Sturdy Construction

    Another prominent aspect of this toilet is its durable construction. Made of vitreous china, it can withstand regular wear and tear and is not susceptible to cracks or stains. It comes with proper mounting holes that firmly ground the unit to prevent wobbling.

    Moreover, the neat, well-rounded corners enhance the overall appearance of the toilet. And the flushing lever on the side with a chrome finish seamlessly blends with other bathroom fixtures.

    1. Additional Features

    Certain additional features add to the overall efficiency of the model. Let’s see what they are.

      • Large Surface Area

    A large surface area is desirable as it doesn’t let waste stick to the bowl. In addition, the water level remains sufficiently high, thus preventing odors from lingering around the bowl.

      • Glazed Trapway

    The toilet features a glazed trapway with a diameter of 2 ⅛-inches. As a result, water flow is efficiently streamlined and exerts sufficient pressure for the waste to go down with ease.

    Moreover, since the surface is glazed, there is a remarkable reduction in friction, and water can pass through smoothly and in full force without getting absorbed into the ceramic surface.

      • Quiet-Close Feature

    Some models in this range have a quiet-close feature that allows you to shut the toilet seat without disturbing anyone in the house.

      • Color Options

    If you are bored of the standard white color, then we’ve good news for you. Kohler Santa Rosa comes with different and attractive color options - from stylish black to subtle beige options.

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Now that we have spoken at length about the functionality and efficiency of Kohler Santa Rosa, it’s time to highlight some of its drawbacks. To begin with, the interconnected tank and bowl make the product heavier in comparison to two-piece sets. Besides, you’ll have to replace the entire toilet set in case of damage to the parts.

    Moreover, even though the flushing system is quite powerful, you might need to flush the toilet more than once to completely eliminate solid waste and tissue paper. This usually happens when the tank is not filled to its full capacity. So, allow the tank to fill to the brim before flushing.

    We’d also like to point out that the range doesn’t produce low-noise toilets. Although the flush is quieter compared to traditional toilet models, it is not soundless by any means.

    Lastly, even though the 17-inch height is quite an advantage for taller people, it might be difficult for children to hop over the toilet seat.



    Pros

    • Ergonomically designed, ADA-compliant toilet
    • EPA certified, water-saving technology
    • One-piece set facilitates easy installation
    • Different color options
    • Sturdy, vitreous china construction prevents cracking




    Cons

    • Toilet set needs to be replaced if one part is damaged
    • Seating height is inconvenient for people with short stature



    Kohler Santa Rosa Buyer’s Guide

    Buying toilets is not as easy as it seems. There are a few factors that you must consider. To simplify things for you, we’ve curated this buyer’s guide. Keep on reading to know more.

    1. Bowl Shape

    Usually, toilets come in three shapes: elongated, square, and round.

    Round toilets are smaller and can easily fit into narrow spaces. Elongated models are relatively bigger and more comfortable. You’ll also find pretty stylish square bowls.

    You can choose any of the shapes, depending on the availability of space and your preference.

    1. Water Consumption

    While purchasing new toilets, people often look for models that minimize water wastage. The Federal Standard is 1.6 gallons per flush, and models that abide by this limit are classified as High-Efficiency Toilets (HET).

    In addition, the WaterSense certification can also vouch for the sustainability of the product.

    1. Flush Efficiency

    A powerful flush system ensures rigorous cleaning and keeps the bowl in top-notch condition. Some models come with a large surface area and a glazed trapway that allows water to accelerate downwards in full force.

    It is essential to pick a flushing system that prevents clogs, efficiently flushes down waste, and uses less water.

    1. Appearance

    Homeowners often look for a suitable toilet set that blends with their bathroom decor. While the standard white color has been around for ages, today, you also get several color options - from beige to black.

    So, if you wish to add a spark of color to the bathroom, you wouldn’t have to look very far.

    Conclusion

    That’s all, folks!

    With its sleek design, sturdy construction, and powerful flushing technology, Kohler Santa Rosa has become one of the leading toilets on the market.

    There are multiple color options available, but they are more expensive than the standard white variant. So, if you don’t mind shelling out a few extra dollars, you can get a stylish toilet set for the bathroom.

    Equipped with contemporary features and a scratch-proof design, this model will last for years to come. What’s more, if you are a DIY enthusiast, the installation will be a breeze, and if not, you can always hire a plumber.

    Do let us know what you think in the comments below. Until next time, take care!

    Related Articles

    9 Best American Standard Toilet Right Now

    8 Best Bidet Toilet Combos Right Now

    13 Best Soft Close Toilet Seats

    13 Best Toilet Seats

    7 Best [Macerating] Upflush Toilets

    11 Best Composting Toilet

    7 Best Toto Toilets 

    13 Best Septic Tank Treatments

    7 Best Dual Flush Toilet [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    Is Kohler A Good Brand?

    How to Use a Sauna Right

    Toto Neorest NX1, 550H & 700H [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    Convenient Height Toilet Review [All You Need to Know]

    11 Best Toilet Flappers [Buyer’s Guide]

    5 Best Gerber Toilets Reviewed [All You Need to Know]

    11 Best Toilet Clog Remover [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    7 Best Toilet Auger

    "Give us the tools, and we will finish the job."

    Winston Churchill was likely not talking about Husky Tools when he said that, but it holds. You see, if you have a set of Husky tools at your disposal, finishing the job will become that much easier.

    We have been fans of the Husky brand ever since we used its tools for the first time over a decade ago. And to this day, we have always used Husky tools without any significant complaints.

    So, we decided to curate this guide and tell you why Husky is such an exceptional brand. We've carefully handpicked nine of the best Husky tools you will find out there. Some more information about the brand follows this.

    Without further ado, here it goes...

    Best Husky Tools

    set of torx and hexagon keys on wooden board. Best Husky Tools 

    You will be pleased to know that we have used each of these products extensively to gain un unbiased understanding of their pros and cons. The recommendations have been ranked based on two factors primarily - value for money and ease of use.

    So, let’s get straight to the reviews now...

    1. H268MTS Mechanics Tool Set

    The numero uno spot on our list goes to one of the most comprehensive tool sets Husky has to offer - the H268MTS. This mechanics' tool set has a whopping 268 pieces and comes at a fairly reasonable price point - talk about getting the most bang for your buck!

    Husky Mechanics Tool Set (268-piece)
    • Brand New in box. The product ships with all relevant...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Straight off the bat, we were highly impressed by the overall positive customer reviews for this tool set. When it was delivered to our doorstep, we knew exactly why our peers liked it so much. It undoubtedly is one of the most versatile and complete sets you can find out there today.

    The set includes 168 sockets, 30 wrenches, 67 accessories, and 3 ratchets. Furthermore, there is an equal distribution of metric and SAE tools. Whether you measure in inches or millimeters, it has enough tools for you to get the job done.

    We are always very pleased with a product that offers sheer value for money. So, it should be no surprise that this toolset took the coveted top spot on our list. It comes at an affordable price, and a lifetime warranty also backs it. Overall, it's safe to say that Husky hit the bull's eye with this set.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Although there is a lot to praise about this exceptional Husky tool set for mechanics, we found its case to be a bit of a problem. It is not as sturdy as we expected, and the drawers don't always latch close. So, it may not be best to carry all the tools around, and you may have to purchase a more durable case.



    Pros

    • 268 pieces for all kinds of tasks
    • Equal distribution of metric and SAE tools
    • Backed by a lifetime warranty
    • Affordable price




    Cons

    • The case is not very durable



    1. Rolling Tool Tote Bag with Telescoping Handle

    Taking the third spot on this list is a Husky product that doesn't strictly qualify as a tool; instead, it's more a means of carrying your tools from one place to another. The Rolling Tote Bag with Telescopic Handle is the best tool bag you will find on the market.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    First and foremost, let's take a moment to appreciate the durability of this bag from Husky's reputed brand. Thanks to the 600 Denier water-resistant material that it's made from, you won't have to worry about replacing it anytime soon.

    What makes it even better is its impressive capacity of 80 pounds. Honestly, given its compact size, we were not expecting that. After all, it measures only 14 inches long, 9 inches wide, and 13 inches high.

    Husky left no stone unturned to make sure that users derive the most value from this bag. The thoughtful inclusion of a plate-reinforced telescoping handle allows you to stack additional baggage and lug it.

    Moving on to its ergonomic design, you won't run out of space because it comes equipped with 13 storage pockets. Long story short, it can comfortably accommodate most of the standard tools you'd need to use.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Despite having an array of nifty features, we couldn't help but notice a flaw in this bag. The wheels on its base are tucked behind a bit of plastic molding, which won't allow you to roll it up stairs or rocky terrain. So, you'd have to carry it in those cases.



    Pros

    • Backed by a 3-year limited warranty
    • Six internal and seven external storage pockets
    • Plate-reinforced telescoping handle
    • Made from water-resistant materials




    Cons

    • Plastic molding behind the wheels



    1. Stubby Wrench and Socket Set

    Now that the coveted top three spots on this list are taken care of, let's talk about another top-notch wrench and socket set. If the first two recommendations on this list were too much or too little for your liking, this one is in the middle ground with 46 pieces. Read on to know all the deets.

    Husky Stubby Wrench and Socket Set (46-Piece)-H46PCSTS
    • SAE AND METRIC: There are 23 Standard American an 23 Metric...
    • ORGANIZATION: An included carrying case has molded sections...

    Why Did We Like It?

    First things first, we were quite impressed with the positive customer reviews for this set. And when we got it and used it a couple of times, we knew why it was so popular among users. It is perfect for small repair jobs that keep cropping up in and around the house.

    The set includes a screwdriver with 20 replaceable bits and a ratchet set with 22 replaceable sockets. That's not all; you also get one extra driving head. What's more? You get it all in a sturdy plastic carrying case, so you need not worry about losing any of the pieces.

    Having said that, it's not just the number of pieces that's impressive. This set takes your convenience to a whole new level with its ratchet extending from 5 to 7 inches. If you want, you may even attach it to a pegboard using the mounting brackets on the handle.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Honestly, there's nothing wrong with this set when it comes to its performance. But we think it is somewhat overpriced for the utility it offers because it can only be used for very trivial day-to-day tasks that pop up once in a while. So, we would have preferred it to be a bit more affordable.



    Pros

    • Equal distribution of SAE and metric units
    • Carrying case with molded sections for each piece
    • Dual drive ratchet and stubby adjustable wrench
    • Easy to hold handles




    Cons

    • A tad bit expensive



    1. 1006 High-Leverage Pliers Set

    We are halfway through with our set of Husky tool recommendations, and it is time to introduce the 1006 3-piece high-leverage pliers set. You don't need to be an expert at using tools to know how useful a good set of pliers can be. And this set does not fail to impress, read on to know how...

    Sale
    Husky 3-piece High-leverage Pliers Set
    • 7 INCH DIAGONAL PLIERS: These are primarily for cutting...
    • 8 INCH LONG NOSE PLIERS: These are ideal for grabbing,...

    Why Did We Like It?

    Before we talk about anything else, we must tell you about the unparalleled durability of these pliers. Made from a heat-treated steel alloy, they can easily resist corrosion and impacts. Furthermore, thanks to the heat treatment, the cutting edges remain sharp for longer.

    But that's not the only thing about its build that you will appreciate. The handles have a rubberized overmold that enables you to always keep a firm grip, even when you're working in slippery conditions. No wonder it comes with a lifetime warranty!

    Now, coming to the three pliers - you get a 7-inch diagonal plier, an 8-inch long nose plier, and a 9-inch linesman plier. The diagonal plier is perfect for cutting thick-gauge wire. The long nose plier works well to grab, cut, twist, loop, or thread wires in tight spaces. And the linesman plier is ideal for crimping, pulling, and cutting wires through conduits.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Although these pliers work well, we would've liked them more if they were a tad less heavy. Don't get us wrong; it's not like you can't use them at all, but they take a toll on your forearms when you have to use them for a long time. But then again, that's not a dealbreaker.



    Pros

    • Backed by a lifetime warranty
    • Made from heat-treated alloy steel
    • Rubberized overmold on handles
    • High-leverage design delivers more cutting power




    Cons

    • A tad bit heavy



    1. 14-in-1 Painter's Tool

    The next recommendation we have for you is a lot different from everything you've seen on this list. Instead of having a set of multiple tools, how about getting one that can be used for several purposes? That's precisely what you get with this 14-in-1 painter's tool from Husky.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    If you're a painter who is tired of carrying the toolbox for every job, Husky has the perfect solution for you with its 14-in-1 tool. What makes it even more impressive is its extremely affordable price range. Let's just say that you'll rarely find a better deal than this!

    It works as a spreader, a chisel, a crack opener, a paint can opener, a nail puller, a hammer end, and a bottle opener. And that's not all; it's also a concave scraper, a convex scraper, a roller cleaner, a ¼" nut wrench, a ⅜" nut wrench, an 8-10 slotted screw bit, and a Philips NO 2 bit.

    Thanks to its heavy-duty steel construction, you need not worry about its longevity at all. But if you need reassurance, Husky backs this tool with its unmatched lifetime warranty.

    What Could've Been Better?

    Honestly, we have used it for over six months, and we didn't find any flaws. Perhaps the only thing that can be improved is its availability. Right now, it is available only in these states - Alaska, Guam, Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the Virgin Islands.



    Pros

    • Very affordable
    • Made of heavy-duty steel
    • Highly versatile
    • An impressive lifetime warranty backs it




    Cons

    • Available only in five states



    1. 28CW002NC Wrench Set

    For the penultimate spot on this list of Husky tools, we have picked the 28CW002NC wrench set. You get all the standard wrenches in both Metric and SAE sizes. So, you can tackle all the tasks in your home or garage - from tightening a nut on your bike to doing repair work under the kitchen sink.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    Husky rarely fails to impress when it comes to its tool sets, and this one is no exception. It is touted as an all-in-one set, and after using it extensively for over six months, we agree. You get 28 pieces in this set, including 14 Metric and 14 SAE sizes.

    Furthermore, the stainless steel construction of each tool ensures unmatched longevity. Add to that the chrome finish, and you've got tools that are resistant to corrosion and can be cleaned easily. No wonder it is backed by the brand's popular lifetime warranty!

    But that's not all; the 15-degree offset design gives you enhanced leverage when using these tools in tight spaces. So, you need not worry about getting into awkward positions or putting too much stress on your wrist to tackle seemingly tricky tasks.

    Last but not least, we are fans of the labeled sections and mounting brackets on the carrying case. But the carrying case isn't perfect; read on to know more about that.

    What Could've Been Better?

    We like that the carrying case is divided into two separate sections for Metric and SAE tools. However, the design itself of the case needs improvement as we couldn't stop a couple of tools from falling out. It's not a dealbreaker, but something Husky should surely look into.



    Pros

    • 15-degree offset design provides better leverage
    • 12-point box end
    • Chrome finish for corrosion-resistance
    • Backed by a lifetime warranty




    Cons

    • Carrying case design needs improvement



    1. Rolling Tool Tote With Bonus Bags

    We're down to the final product on this comprehensive list. Honestly, it didn't feel right to include just one tool bag, so we found another one for you. Unlike its counterpart, this rolling tote bag comes with a couple of bonus bags. So, if you own a comprehensive set like our topmost recommendation, this bag will be perfect for you.

    No products found.

    Why Did We Like It?

    If the rolling bag we included in the top three recommendations on this list wasn't enough to carry all the tools you have, this might do the trick. You essentially get three bags - an 18-inch length main bag with two bonus bags of 16-inch and 14-inch lengths.

    Combining all three bags, you get a whopping 35 storage compartments - 12 inside and 23 outside pockets. So, it is safe to say that you won't have to leave any essential tools behind when you're traveling for a repair job.

    Moving on to the bags themselves, they are made from a highly durable and water-resistant 600 denier material that will last for a long time to come. Also, the heavy-duty telescoping handle is sturdy enough for you to stack the bonus bags on top of the main bag and lug all three.

    What Could've Been Better?

    As good as this rolling tote bag combo is, it is not perfect. The three bags weigh over 40 pounds combined, and that's without any tools in them. And to make matters worse, the bottom bag (with the telescoping handle) has tiny wheels that won't be able to take all that weight on uneven terrain.



    Pros

    • A 3-year limited warranty backs it
    • 600 denier water-resistant material
    • Heavy-duty telescoping handle
    • Two bonus bags included




    Cons

    • A tad heavy
    • Small wheels on the bottom bag



    Everything You Need To Know About Husky Tools

    Now that you know about 9 of the best tools Husky has to offer, let's take some time to understand what the brand is all about. With a history of nearly a hundred years, it should be no surprise that Husky has evolved into a household name in America.

    The brand likes to claim that it is "the toughest name in tools!" From our all-star selection of products, it is safe to say that it backs up that claim quite well. Husky tools stand out from their competing brands by focusing on three things more than everything else - functional design, high quality, and durability.

    What makes it even better is its commitment to continuous innovation and its unmatched lifetime warranty. So, if you put all of that together, you can see why Husky is a brand you can trust with your eyes closed.

    But if you're still not convinced, how about we pit Husky against two other popular brands for a comparative analysis?

    Husky Vs Kobalt

    First up, entering the ring is Kobalt - another brand with immense popularity. Kobalt is a sister concern of Lowes, while Home Depot owns husky.

    Although Kobalt was launched in 1998, it has managed to make a strong name for itself in the power tools and hand tools industries. But of course, Husky has the upper hand, thanks to its experience.

    Kobalt's idea was to allow Lowes to compete with large tools production companies like Sears and Home Depot. It seems like Kobalt is heading in the right direction, but Husky is a better, more reliable brand when it comes to tools.

    Husky Vs Craftsman

    Kobalt's relative lack of experience led to its knockout, but the next contender is only three years shy of Husky's impressive history. Craftsman is as popular as Husky across American homes, so this promises to be a much more interesting comparison.

    Looking at the range of products, it is impossible to say which of these two brands has the upper hand. They both deal with a wide range of power tools, hand tools, accessories, essentials, etc.

    Moreover, in terms of warranty and brand value, you'll find that the vast majority of homeowners can't choose between the two brands. Long story short, Husky and Craftsman are head-to-head, and you won't regret getting a tool that bears the name of either of these two brands.

    Flat Lay metal wrenches of various sizes are in the tool box, top view. Husky Tools Verdict

    Husky Tools Verdict

    That's all from us, folks!

    For non-mechanics out there, having the perfect tool set handy may not seem like a big deal every day. It can be a major blessing in disguise when there is a sudden need for some repair work to be done.

    And when it comes to professionals who earn their livelihood with the help of various tools, the perfect tool set is an absolute necessity. So, the importance of a good and reliable tool set cannot be overstated.

    On that note, we hope that you found this guide helpful. And if you've never used a Husky tool before, you should give it a try. Based on our experience with the brand's products, we're confident that you won't be disappointed.

    Let us know what you think about the Husky brand in the comments section below. We'll see you soon with more interesting guides.

    Till next time!

    Related Articles

    Tekton Tools Review | Craftsman vs Husky vs Tekton vs Gearwrench

    10 Best Torque Wrench Brand

    10 Best Air Compressors For Impact Wrenches

    11 Best Torque Wrenches

    11 Best Impact Socket Sets

    11 Best Kreg Jig Pocket Hole Alternatives

    People say that the heart of a house is the kitchen, where the family comes together for meals. 

    Hence, the kitchen design should be cozy and perfectly spaced for everybody to fit in well. If you are looking at a kitchen remodel project, then there are several factors that should be considered beforehand. 

    They include storage, appliances, and their placements, swing direction of the door, backsplash, and counter space, to name a few. In this guide, we will tell you all about the kitchen renovation dos, and don'ts so that you can create a beautiful and functional kitchen space. 

    And here it goes! 

    Kitchen Renovation Dos

    Kitchen remodel beautiful kitchen furniture the drawer in cabinet. Kitchen Renovation Dos.

    Here we will discuss the few things that you must do before undertaking kitchen remodeling. We have broken down this section into points to make it easier to understand. 

    1. Extensive Research

    Once you have planned a kitchen renovation, you will have to research well on how to go about it. It is best not to begin with the project immediately. Instead, spend some time going through the design available on the internet. Begin by considering how much space you have in your kitchen. 

    You can then look for specific designs meant for large, small, or medium-sized kitchens online. After you have a few designs that you like, visit the local design showrooms, home equipment, and décor stores. Check the tiles, marbles, wallpapers, colors, and furniture prices. Then look at kitchen sink designs and lighting fixtures that can be used while remodeling the space. 

    Next, you will have to check for project managers or professional kitchen designers who can help with the plan. Look at the different top websites that provide these services and ask your friends and neighbors as well. 

    Remember to read reviews left by previous customers to understand their work better. You can then call up the teams that you like for an interview. They can design a remodel plan, and you can try to understand if that will fit your space. 

    2. Decide On The Budget

    First of all, you will have to decide on the budget for the kitchen renovation. Remember that the costs can shoot up to a large amount if you do not keep them in check. Hence, always consider it beforehand and fix a budget. 

    Now, you may look at magazines, Pinterest, or other websites for design inspiration, and you will find many remodeling project pictures. There are hundreds of cabinet and appliance doors to choose from; then there is the lighting, upholstery, and other furniture. While a lot of these kitchen renovation pictures can be beautiful to look at, they may not be possible within your budget. 

    However, there is nothing to worry about as a lot of things can be done on a low budget. For example, you may like a certain type of backsplash with stones on it. While purchasing real stones can be expensive, you can always opt for a wallpaper with a similar look. If you have the idea and a good interior designer, you can make anything possible. 

    3. Hidden Costs Have To Be Considered

    Kitchen remodels extra costs can pop up any time while you are in the middle of remodeling. You may find problem areas on the walls after you have torn down the cabinets. So, keep a contingency fund in place, which can be used in case you have to go over your budget. 

    If the work takes longer, the labor costs may also increase as the laborers are paid daily. The taxes, material costs, delivery, and shipping costs that had not been considered previously can be add-ons as well. So, make a note of these and ask the kitchen design expert to help with the calculation. 

    4. Planning The Kitchen Layout

    Before you remove all the old kitchen cabinets, you need to have a proper layout of the new design. There are timeless ideas on the internet that you can refer to beforehand. Ensure there is enough space to move about for one to two people at least. 

    Also, the entire kitchen remodel has to be planned, keeping the space in mind. You can opt for L-shaped cabinets along the wall to save space in small kitchens. Some even opt for U-shaped kitchens in small houses. The kitchen’s busiest areas have to be left decluttered so that work can be done. 

    You can also ask professionals to help you with a sketch of the entire area. They can create 3D models for you to understand better. 

    5. Differentiate Between Needs And Wants

    You must be looking through inspirations for kitchen remodels, and we agree that there are hundreds of ideas online. However, be careful about choosing the things that you may not need in your kitchen. While the idea of adding new décor is exciting, too much of it can take over usable space. 

    The kitchen layout needs to be planned well so that there is enough space for people to move around as well as to keep essential electrical appliances. You might see a number of gadgets and decorative pieces that look great in the picture. But functionality is key, and you have to keep that in mind if you wish to save money. 

    In fact, ensure that natural light can come into the kitchen space to light it up and make it look bigger. So, keep ample window space and do not cover them up completely. 

    6. Consider A Work Triangle

    When you are working in a kitchen, you will have to constantly move from the cooking area to the prep station easily. Hence, you will have to ensure that the refrigerator, sink, and stovetop are in a triangle of sorts. Maintaining a work triangle is the easiest way to go around a kitchen without putting extra effort. 

    7. Do Pay Attention To Lighting

    Check the spaces which get natural lighting to understand where to put the new lights. You will have to consider the high-traffic areas in the kitchen and place strategic lighting there as well. Ensure that the main spaces are highlighted, as you will need bright lights to see what you are cooking and chopping. 

    Also, it is best if you have white, warm white, and neutral colored lighting available so that the true color of the food is visible. 

    8. Keep A Note Of Corners

    When planning a kitchen area, do not take over the corners completely. Leave enough space for the door’s clearance area and plan the space accordingly. 

    Kitchen Renovation Don'ts

    Learn about all the things that you should not do while your kitchen is remodeled. 

    1. Do Not Stick With One Viewpoint

    While working on kitchen cabinets, do not have a set of ideals in place from which you cannot deviate. With kitchen remodeled projects, a lot may not work out according to plan, even if you have a professional kitchen designer working for you. 

    A wall may be painted, and then you may notice damp spots. Or the wallpaper applied may not look good when compared to the space. This can happen because the images on the internet are often edited, and you may not be able to replicate them completely. Also, there may be more counter space in the image than what you have. 

    So, you may have to leave a few things off the list to stay within the budget. Or, you may have to increase the budget to fit all the designs in it. 

    Then there are light fixtures to take care of. Now a lot of houses do not have the right points for hanging lights. Also, if you do not have a false ceiling, then overhead lights cannot be placed. Now making a false ceiling may become very expensive. You can instead replace that with beautiful wall sconces and slightly deviate from the original plan. 

    While designing your pantry space and cabinet space, do not just follow what is trending at the moment. Firstly, the magazines may offer tips that are too expensive. Also, you will want the main focal points to be something you love. The kitchen is a very personal space, and incorporating your own ideas will not only create the perfect kitchen, but you may save money as well. 

    So, do not be pressurized by trending materials and color schemes for the house walls, which you may not like in the long run. Also, for a small kitchen remodel project, do not opt for dark colors even if they are trending. Dark colors can make a small space look even smaller, which is not wanted. 

    Instead, plan the cooking area in such a way that it looks bigger and can fit appliances easily. You can use the same tone for all the walls and just highlight the backsplash and the furniture. 

    3. Do Not Ignore Storage

    While undertaking kitchen remodels projects, remember to keep ample cabinet space for storage. You will need to keep all the kitchen equipment, appliances, and tools that are required while cooking. These important elements can make a space look clustered if left in a pile in the corner. 

    So, it is a good idea to add cabinets on top as well as the bottom of the cooking area. Also, you can use the space underneath the sink for storing cleaning supplies. Open shelving along with built-in pantries are used a lot nowadays, and you have ever-evolving possibilities to explore. 

    Further, remember that frequently required items should be kept towards the front, while other items can be stored inside upper or lower cabinets. A separate knife cabinet can also be installed as well, which should be hidden from the kids. 

    4. Do Not Cramp The Space

    Although you may want to fill the new kitchen space up with multiple features, do not end up cramping the space. Or else the kitchen will be rendered unusable, and you may not be able to get a lot of cooking done in it. There are several design features that look good in magazines but not in real life. For example, we do not believe putting a fur rug in a kitchen is a good idea. 

    The chef may easily drop something while cooking, and you may have to spend a lot of time removing stains. 

    5. Do Not Rush

    Your dream kitchen will take some time to be made the right way, and you should give it that time. Keep checking the electrical and plumbing system to see if they are working well and get them fixed before the kitchen is renovated. 

    If you are planning on installing new plumbing or lights, then proper lines have to be made before painting. All of this may take a few days or a week more to finish, and we recommend giving it the extra time because the result will be worth it! 

    6. Do Not Reduce Counter Space

    If you are going to use the kitchen frequently, then keep a lot of counter space. The countertop is used for chopping food and keeping dishes while cooking. Plus, you will want an extensive workspace with shelves on the side to keep all the essential utensils within easy reach. 

    Moreover, if you have a lot of space, make countertops of different heights. This way, you can get kids to participate in the cooking sessions without them disturbing your chopping and cooking process. 

    Remodel home improvement view installed in a new furniture in kitchen. Kitchen Renovation Frequently Asked Questions.

    Kitchen Renovation Frequently Asked Questions ?

    How to select the right contractor for the job?

    First of all, you will have to make a list of the contractors who have a good reputation in your area. Then speak to them or visit their current job locations to see how they are working. Ask them about the safety measures that they are taking while at their job. 

    Also, do not be afraid to ask them for samples of their work. A good contractor will always share their previous samples willingly. Once you have finalized a few, talk about the budget and the scope of work. If all of them fit right, you can hire the contractor. 

    Some offer a free consultation before the job is taken, which may help you better understand the contractor’s work. 

    What kind of walkways to opt for in the kitchen?

    When designing the layout, make sure that the kitchen pathways are at least 36 inches in breadth. It is best to keep it over 42 inches if the space allows. Also, in case two cooks are going to work at the same time, you will need a 48-inch pathway. 

    What color to opt for the backsplash?

    The backsplash is one of the major focal points in a kitchen, and it must be done well. While selecting materials, opt for a quirky or a different color as compared to the walls. Also, you can play with textures and add a stone-like or marble finish. 

    If you are not looking to spend a lot, opt for simple ivory tiles and then add designer stickers along the edges. Keep a few plants in front, and you have a beautiful place to flaunt. 

    Home improvement installed in a new cabinet kitchen countertops and sink. Kitchen Renovation Final Words.

    Kitchen Renovation Final Words

    Changing your kitchen can change your lifestyle as well as bring the family together for a hearty meal. 

    Now, before signing off, we will ask you to ensure that you read the reviews left behind on websites dedicated to kitchen remodeling. There are materials that look great but do not last long, and you do not want to be stuck with something like that. 

    Moreover, while choosing kitchen colors, select a few different shades. Even if you want to do your kitchen in neutrals, choose a variety of neutral shades for the room and then go forward. 

    Also, at the end of the day, have fun while you are at it. You will then end up with a space you and the entire family love to spend time in. 

    Hope you have a fun experience! 

    Related Articles

    Outstanding Black and Wood Kitchens That Will Add Style To Your Home

    12 Kitchen Hutch Ideas

    11 Ideas for Basement Kitchens and Kitchenettes

    Top Ways To Jazz Up Your Kitchen With Brass

    11 Best Microwave Shelves

    As people look for apartments with bigger homes, they realize how kitchen space has been compromised. 

    And, space in a house can be tricky; after all, it all comes down to what you own. These days, most of the homes have massive living rooms, dining rooms, and bedrooms but little kitchen space. Some people make do with smaller kitchens and lesser utensils, but what about people that have a ton of utensils but no place to keep them.

    We are here to talk about just that. After extensive research, we have put together some unique and attractive kitchen hutch ideas. If you are struggling to find space in a tiny kitchen or want an elaborate centerpiece in a large kitchen, these ideas are ideal for you.

    Now, time is of the essence, so let’s get straight to it. 

    Kitchen Hutch Ideas

    What Is A Kitchen Hutch?

    A kitchen hutch, in simpler terms, is essentially a shelf or cupboard for storage. These were quite popular back when there weren’t any cabinets or shelves integrated into the kitchen design. Since homes were simple back in the day, the hutches were just as simple. Moreover, they had to be traditional as a lot of people stored heirlooms in them too.

    But now, as interiors are becoming more modern, storage spaces are following suit. This means a traditional hutch is not entirely needed as all storage areas are being built in. That being said, kitchen hutch ideas have also evolved to fit any modern interior. You can still have a hutch that can transform the look without taking up too much space.

    1. Freestanding Hutch Ideas

    This is ideal for people that have space to add another big piece of furniture. A traditional one, back in the early days, had a few shelves and storage cabinets. Now, even a conventional freestanding hutch comes in various shapes and sizes that people immediately gravitate towards. Here are some of the popular freestanding hutch designs you could use in the kitchen.

    • Bakers Rack Hutch 

    If you are looking for a traditional and vintage look, we recommend getting a baker’s rack-style hutch. This type of hutch has a mix of both shelves and cabinets, which are usually made of wood and a wrought iron frame. 

    It is called a baker’s rack because it was most commonly found in the homes of bakers back in the 17th century. As the frame was made out of iron or steel, it was ideal for storing hot goods like pies and bread as it would cool them down quite fast. 

    Additionally, back then, the racks would help showcase all of the baked goods the baker’s had to offer. This was when it became quite popular and to this day remains an excellent piece of furniture to show anything off - be it baked goods or house plants. 

    In terms of cost, it can be a bit expensive since it does not have much storage space. However, it is pretty appealing to look at and adds a great charm to any room it is kept in.

    • Buffet Hutch 

    If storage is a big deal for you, you must look at this kind of hutch. The buffet hutch can be kept in the kitchen as well as in the living room. It has an ample amount of space for you to store just about anything. 

    A classic buffet hutch usually has a few cabinets on the bottom, a platform in the middle, and another set of cabinets on top. One of the reasons it became quite famous is because people use this kind of hutch to store crockery and silverware in the living room. In most cases, the top cabinet has wooden or glass doors that reveal what’s inside.

    These first started in Sweden, where the hutch was just a set of wooden cabinets with the top platform being used to serve food and drinks. With time, it became more appropriate to serve buffet-style meals on these platforms. This is why, despite the additional cabinets above the platform, there remains a ton of horizontal space to serve or store things.

    • Vintage Hutch 

    While on the subject of traditional hutches, how can we skip on the vintage ones? Hutches have been a part of people’s houses for many years, and in every decade, the design changes. What remains consistent is the simplicity of the design. If you are looking for something authentic to complement your traditional kitchen, we suggest a vintage one.

    Vintage hutches can have designs from any era like the ’50s, ’60s, or ’70s that will give the kitchen an edge. Additionally, you can remodel it a little bit and add some modern elements, but the charm lies in the simple designs. Frankly, it is bound to stand out in an otherwise new-age kitchen. 

    We recommend getting one of these from a local flea market, as that’s when you can genuinely look at the artistic simplicity of the piece. All vintage hutches are handcrafted carefully and have a lot of intricate designs. This is why most of these pieces are unique and one of a kind. 

    Seeing it in a market rather than a catalog, you will get a better idea of the storage space as well. However, it is common to see that most vintage cabinets can provide a lot more storage compared to the mass-produced modern ones. 

    The only downside to getting antique pieces is that they can be very expensive. Since most of these date back many years, they are as authentic as they can be. The cost of labor and maintenance of such a piece brings the total buying price to a lot. But, it is something worth having if you have the money to spare. 

    • Contemporary Hutch

    Just because a hutch is an old concept does not mean you have to get one that is traditional and vintage. These days tons of hutches are made for more than just storing fine china and crockery. Some of the modern variants can also store wine bottles, glasses, and microwaves. 

    Design-wise, the modern ones can be minimalistic, which allows them to blend effortlessly into any interior. There are also plenty of glass elements like cabinet doors, mirrors, and even shelves incorporated into the design to amp up the look. 

    Contemporary hutches can also be buffet-style making it easier to store larger appliances like coffee machines and microwaves. One of the most popular ones that have a modern style is a craftsman-style hutch. These are not handcrafted but are manufactured in a way that gives them a rugged, hand-made look. 

    Contemporary hutches are a great addition to homes where people want a modern variation of an otherwise old concept. Since there is not much detailed work like with antique pieces, the price may not be too high either. 

    The only downside to most contemporary pieces, especially craftsman-style hutches, is that they are quite large and need a ton of space. Make sure your kitchen can accommodate it without blocking the flow of the room.

    1. Built-In Hutch Ideas

    The next type we are going to talk about is the built-in hutches. As apartments become smaller, designers have successfully incorporated elements of a hutch into the kitchen or other parts of the house. This has allowed homeowners to enjoy ample storage space without compromising the overall space in the house. 

    The only issue is that if you’re building the interior from scratch, creating a built-in hutch can take a lot of time and planning. Plus, you can’t move it around once it is done, so it is essential to be sure of the location.  

    We’ve found some interesting built-in hutch ideas for you to look into the next time you remodel the kitchen.

    • By The Window 

    One of the most popular hutch ideas is building hutch shelves around kitchen windows. This is especially common in houses with big kitchen windows where there is a ton of space around them to incorporate shelves or cabinets in. 

    Another beneficial factor of having a built-in hutch near the kitchen window is that you can style it according to the kitchen. Whether you are trying to give it a modern look or a traditional one, the whole kitchen can be styled uniformly, which is not the case with a freestanding hutch. 

    • Built-In Cabinets

    Similar to built-in shelves, homeowners are not opting for built-in cabinets as opposed to cabinet freestanding ones. Designs like these are quite an asset in the kitchen since it allows the homeowners to store everything and keep the kitchen looking clean. 

    Moreover, having a freestanding cabinet in the kitchen can spoil the flow of the kitchen, especially if there is no space. Hence, a built-in one can ensure every bit of space is utilized without tampering with the natural flow of the room. 

    1. Shelf-Style Hutch Ideas 

    Apart from traditional cabinet hutches, incorporating shelves has become quite popular. Many homeowners are adding shelves to existing hutches or over platforms to create a hutch-like look. The idea is to add more storage space without adding more furniture that can minimize the space.

    The only downside to a shelf is that it may not be the safest or most practical option. If you need to store fine china or any type of expensive crockery, we recommend anything with glass cabinets. Shelves are open and do not have any kind of cover, so it is best to keep pots and pans on them for easy access. 

    Does this sound like something you would like to incorporate in your kitchen space? Take a look at some of our ideas on shelved hutches.

    • Side Shelves 

    If you already have shelves and are looking for more ways to optimize some leftover space, add some more shelves. This creates a beautiful modern hutch design in the kitchen and is ideal for storing things. Homeowners keep pretty much anything on shelves from bottles, mugs, and even plants to amp up the room.

    Side shelves are also ideal in situations where there is space between two cabinets over the platform. This creates a makeshift buffet hutch which is practical and also appealing to look at. 

    • Crate Shelves 

    If you are the kind of person who has a ton of crates and has no idea what to do with it, use it to make shelves. These can be attached to kitchen cabinets or installed independently on the kitchen wall. The idea is to take these crates and turn them into a DIY project for the kitchen.

    It goes without saying that creating a hutch-like design will have to be over a platform. Additionally, you can make it look even better by staining it with your favorite color. Not only does this look a lot better, but it adds a rustic element to the kitchen.

    • Rustic Shelves 

    Apart from using crates, you can also use regular wooden planks for a rustic shelf-style hutch. For these, you can either stain old wooden planks or purchase some to give the home a rustic and elegant look. This look is even better when the rest of the kitchen interior is lighter, and there are many other wooden elements.

    Another exciting thing about the rustic shelves is that we have seen them as a common design in more modern homes. This goes to show that rustic shelves are not only in old school homes, but new homeowners are also looking into and incorporating them.

    • Pegboard Shelves 

    Pegboard shelves are a somewhat new concept, but they are convenient and ideal for people who need more functional aspects in the kitchen. It is not always pleasing to look at, but it is an excellent addition for people who need quick access to cooking utensils. The idea here is to take a pegboard and add shelves or a hutch to it.

    These can be of multiple types like metal and even wooden. If you like DIY projects, a wooden pegboard with dowels is beneficial as you can add as many shelves of various sizes. Additionally, we find this type of hutch quite flexible in design. The base of the hutch remains the same while the shelves can be changed, making remodeling the kitchen relatively easy.

    • Brass Shelves 

    These types are simple yet elegant. Hutches can be challenging to decorate when you have different kinds of pots and pans that might not look good in a cabinet or all-white wooden shelf. This is where brass shelves come into the picture. Since these shelves are so simple in their make, it is easy to blend them into any interior. 

    The only thing to be wary about with this kind of hutch is that it can be easy to overcrowd the shelves as they are open with no cabinets. As long as you are mindful of the overcrowding, there is no reason it shouldn’t be a part of the kitchen. 

    • Corner Shelves 

    Finally, the best way to maximize space and use every nook and cranny of your kitchen is by adding a shelf in the corners. The space between two cabinets where the walls meet can often be too large and ideal if you need more storage space. Just get a couple of shelves and install them above the kitchen platform to make a makeshift hutch.

    Certain homeowners have titled walls that can make the room look sharp, especially the corners. Adding corner shelves to the kitchen can soften the room’s look and create a smooth, even look. 

    The Need For A Hutch

    One of the main reasons people still opt for hutches in the various spaces of the house is to maximize space. There are plenty of enormous hutches, but with the design industry flourishing, there are quite a few hutch designs that are ideal for small spaces. So the first and most important reason to get a hutch is to utilize small spaces.

    Secondly, a hutch can be used not just to display the expensive silverware that you get on your wedding day but many more things. This could range from plants to mugs to even old cookbooks. Additionally, a lot of homeowners like utilizing a hutch to display antique ornaments. 

    Accentuating Your Hutch 

    Back in the day, hutches were used for a particular purpose which is not the case anymore. As we previously mentioned, they can be used to store a lot of other things as well. Even when placed in the kitchen, it does not have to only showcase kitchen utensils and plates. 

    When it comes to adding a hutch to the kitchen or any part of the room, it is essential to remember that it becomes the highlight of the room. To modern interiors and bring it out, even more, you can accentuate the way the hutch looks. We have put together some exciting ideas to look into to highlight the hutch in the kitchen.

    1. Creating A Formal Look

    If you are planning to go down the formal and traditional route with your hutch, we suggest using it only to store your fine china and expensive cutlery. This can be quite attractive when you have a kitchen with light interiors and a minimal design, as it gives the whole room a delicate look. 

    Another way to create a minimal and elegant look to highlight your china would be to use a freestanding cabinet with glass cabinet doors. This type of hutch can efficiently display the china or anything you keep inside. 

    1. Throw It Back - Vintage Style 

    Irrespective of whether you have a traditional home or a modern one, adding a blast from the past always brings out the look of the room. Especially when it comes to kitchens, you can easily add a vintage hutch that will accentuate the room, making the hutch a focal point. 

    Additionally, it looks even better when you have wooden cabinets. We recommend a freestanding buffet hutch made out of wood to give that old-school look to your kitchen. These hutches are easily found in antique stores or flea markets and can help you recreate a Tudor-style home.

    1. Open Hutches For An Open Look

    It is no secret that an open design allows for more light to enter and makes the room look airy and spacious. Open shelves can have a similar effect in the kitchen and also allow easy access to anything stored. If you have an otherwise open kitchen with light-colored interiors, having open shelves can make it look more spacious. 

    Another way to utilize open shelves is by having them under the kitchen platform and hidden. This can be done when there is no space on the kitchen walls, but more storage space is needed. Many homeowners like to have some extra hidden storage that ensures the kitchen’s look is not affected. 

    1. Putting Mugs On Display 

    A lot of people store expensive crockery, pots, and pans in their hutch, but we have another interesting idea. Why not get a hutch that is designed explicitly for mugs? If you have an extensive collection of accent mugs, don’t let them sit in some cabinet hidden from the world. Instead, set them up on a hutch as storage and décor.

    The good thing about this is that it can be done in any type of hutch - built-in, freestanding, or shelves. You can even go down the rustic path and get a crate-type hutch to store the mugs in. Not only will this give you proper storage, but it gives you even more room since the rack of mugs will have a proper place. 

    Plus, as there is a decorative element to this, you have the freedom to get creative with how it looks.

    1. Adding Plants To The Hutch 

    Typically, hutches are used to store utility things, but new homeowners are using them for decorative purposes. While the bigger freestanding hutches are still mainly used for plates, glasses, and whatnot, the smaller ones are considered for decorative elements. 

    Be it in the kitchen or the living room, if you have a hutch near the window or corner shelves, adding some plants to that hutch adds a pop of color. Here, plants can be added as part of any shelf with other storage items, or you can have a separate frame for plants on the side. 

    1. Lighting Is Key 

    One more great way to accentuate the look of the kitchen is by adding proper lighting to the hutch. Since a hutch is usually the kitchen’s main attraction, you must add adequate lighting to bring more attention to it. Furthermore, the lights not only make it look good but will allow you to see better as well. 

    An interesting thing we have found homeowners do these days is remodeling old cabinets into hutches with proper lighting. Say you have an old cabinet that is not being used, and you do not wish to discard it; it can easily be used to create a modern hutch. All you need to do is use just the shelves in the kitchen or remove the shelves from the cabinet and fit a wine rack in.

    Once these elements have been added, install appropriate lighting, and you will have a brand new hutch on your hands. In terms of color options, we have found that light-colored hutches can be well illuminated with warm white lights. On the other hand, darker hutches look better with cool white lights. 

    However, this is not set in stone, and it comes down to preference as well. The idea is to make sure you find the perfect balance between décor and lighting. If you have a color preference for the lights, staining the wood to match the lighting is also a viable option. 

    Kitchen Hutch Buying Guide

    Now that we have covered the different types of hutches and how they can be accentuated, let’s move on to buying one. As you probably can tell, there are many different types of hutches, made with other materials and different styles. So, how do you even pick the ideal one? That is precisely what we are here to answer.

    Since hutches need to have a balance of functionality and style, it is essential to pick a well-balanced one. Read on below to know some of the important features you must look into when looking for the ideal kitchen hutch.

    1. Size 

    This is one of the most important things to look at when buying a hutch. The size of the hutch depends entirely on how much space you have in the kitchen. Since the kitchen is a room where there can be more than one person, there must be a lot of space to walk and move around.

    Additionally, every kitchen has a flow. There is a certain order to things when it comes to working in a kitchen. The last thing you need here is to have a massive freestanding hutch getting in the way of things. We recommend measuring out the dimensions of the kitchen before you select a piece.

    Furthermore, measure the space you intend to keep the hutch in. The reason you should have both sets of measurements is so that you can discuss what the ideal size should be with professionals. 

    1. Price 

    You might have noticed that we have mentioned price time and again in some of our hutch designs. This is because pricing is also a very crucial aspect to take into consideration. At the end of the day, there is no point in buying a hutch that will take away most of your life’s savings.

    This is why it is crucial to know the different types of hutch designs available as the price differs according to that. As a general rule of thumb, older hutches will automatically cost more because it is more likely to have been handcrafted. That being said, factory-made hutches can also be expensive but never as much as an antique. 

    If you want to have an authentic and traditional piece to give a vintage look to the kitchen, then we suggest heading to the flea market. However, a contemporary style hutch will be a much better option if you are working with a smaller budget.

    1. Design 

    We may have mentioned this repeatedly, but a hutch tends to become the center of attention in any room. This is why the design of the hutch is so essential. However, the design and style of the hutch must match the interior of the kitchen as well. 

    Usually, with a traditional-style kitchen, it can become hard to incorporate modern elements. This is why antique pieces are much better suited in such situations. Similarly, in a contemporary kitchen, an overly old-school hutch can look a bit odd. In such cases, it is much better to have a mission-style or craftsman-style hutch as it has a balance of modern and traditional. 

    Let’s go into a little more detail about this. 

    1. Built-in vs. Freestanding 

    One of the most significant design decisions would be to pick between a built-in hutch and a freestanding hutch. 

    When it comes to freestanding hutches, there is a lot of flexibility to move them around and place them. If you are the type to move around a lot, having a freestanding hutch is an excellent investment. It is something that can be taken along while shifting houses or even moved if the house is being renovated. 

    Moreover, they are easy to assemble and are usually delivered to the door when buying a new one. But, they can take up a lot of space and can be challenging to carry around without the proper means. And, if you are moving houses, there is no guarantee that it will fit in the new home. 

    A built-in hutch design takes a lot of time and planning. Some houses have a set area to create a hutch-like space, but if not, it has to be integrated into the kitchen. We recommend looking into this only if you have a small kitchen with no space for a freestanding model.

    It is challenging to get the same kind of flexibility you get with a freestanding model since these designs cannot move around. But, it is ideal to utilize small spaces and create more storage without disrupting the flow of the kitchen.

    1. Shelf Vs. Glass 

    This is the next design aspect that you need to look into when buying a hutch. Built-in hut designs are very shelf forwards so that you will notice a ton of shelves - on the side, between cabinets, and sometimes, under the platform. While, on the other hand, glass cabinets are very prominent in freestanding hutch designs. 

    Now, the main thing here is to ascertain what the hutch is being used for. We suggest opting for shelves if you need the stored items to be easily accessible. If you want a hutch to store pots, pans, or even decorative items, shelves are a much better option. However, be wary that these items are likely to collect dust, so don’t store anything that requires high maintenance.

    On the other hand, fine china, antiques, or anything expensive should be stored in glass cabinets. This is because it is much easier to have valuables in glass cabinets in terms of general maintenance. This prevents it from collecting dust and also reduces the chances of breakage. 

    1. Decor vs. Function 

    Ultimately, it all comes down to whether you want a practical hutch or one to show off a few collectibles. The type of hutch is mainly dependent on the functionality. That being said, practical hutches can be used for decor, but the more practical they are, the bigger they tend to be.

    If you are looking for a hutch to store many items, be it crockery, utensils, or decorative items, opt for one with ample storage options. Ideally, a hutch like that will have a ton of drawers, cabinets, and shelves. The purpose of the hutch will be to keep as many items on it as possible, and the design will ensure it is accessible to all. 

    Many homeowners like to store valuables in hutches for their guests to see, and if that idea appeals to you, then the design will be different. Most decor-based hutches are smaller and have glass mirrors, cabinet doors, and lighting to highlight the ornaments. On the other hand, a hutch that is solely for decor purposes will be smaller and more delicate.

    1. Additional Features 

    Since hutches are evolving, the design and display options are changing as well. No rule says practical hutches cannot have attractive features. That is why you will notice many hutch designs having similar elements - glass, hanging racks, side shelves for plants, etc. 

    We have found that having a mirrored back in a hutch gives the illusion of the hutch being more spacious. In addition, having little lights incorporated into the design also accentuates the look. 

    At the end of the day, it all comes down to how you would like to bring attention to the hutch in the kitchen. 

    Kitchen Hutch Ideas FAQs

    What can be displayed in a kitchen hutch?

    Back when hutches were necessary, people used to store pots, pans, and other cooking utensils in them. But now, since things have changed, modern homeowners can store all sorts of items. This is partially depending on where it is placed as well.

    If you keep the hutch in the kitchen, it can still be used to display pots and pans, etc. However, when it is in the living room, it can be used to display decorative items, valuable ornaments, and even used to keep plants. Additionally, a lot of people use it to display family photos over various generations.

    Should I use a glass cabinet for food storage?

    A pantry is not something everyone has in the house, so food storage can easily be done in a hutch. If you have a buffet with a glass cabinet and some shelves, dry food like rice, cereals, and so on can be put on display. A lot of people even use one shelf of a hutch as a spice rack.

    The only thing to remember here is that this is only ideal when the hutch has a glass cabinet. Storing these items in an opaque cabinet will only increase your work. This is because you will have to open and shut the cabinet every time to check if an item is there.

    That is why it is much easier to use a hutch as food storage when it has a glass cabinet.

    Can I store beverages in a hutch?

    Modern and antique ones are ideal if you want a new bar, especially when it is a buffet-style hutch. This is because it can not only store beverages but also the glasses needed for the same beverages.

    A lot of modern hutch designs have wine racks integrated into them, which makes them much more manageable. However, if you are looking to turn your hutch into a bar, we suggest adding a few extra shelves. This can specifically be done in the corners to extend the hutch if there isn’t enough space for bottles.

    Ideally, drinks that do not need to be served cold are best kept in the hutch, such as wine and spirits.

    What is the ideal place for a hutch?

    A hutch, although traditionally used in a kitchen, can now be placed anywhere. The main thing to remember is the purpose of the hutch and what you intend to store in it. Be it a freestanding, built-in, or shelf hutch, all of these can be incorporated in a room with ample space.

    If you want the hutch to store kitchen items you need every day, we suggest keeping it in the kitchen. Keeping it outside in the living room can be impractical and will break the flow as you cook. For décor and display-only purposes, the hutches are better off in the living or dining room, where they can be a focal point for the guests to see.

    Final Words

    And there you have it, a comprehensive guide on 12 kitchen hutch ideas. We hope this has been informative and can help you through the selection and buying process. 

    Before we go, we would like to order one last piece of advice. Buying a new hutch is an easy path, but it can end up costing a lot. We would recommend looking into purchasing a second-hand hutch and renovating it. This is ideal for people working on a budget who want an attractive display and storage cabinet.

    On that note, we shall now sign off. But we will be back with many more such guides. In the meantime, let us know which of these ideas stood out for you the most.

    See you next time!

    Related Articles

    11 Ideas for Basement Kitchens and Kitchenettes

    Top Ways To Jazz Up Your Kitchen With Brass

    11 Best Microwave Shelves

    Do you consider yourself a bookworm? You may be looking for ways to consume as many books as possible within a short timespan. Fortunately, e-readers have made this possible.

    A true bookworm understands the pleasure of sifting through hundreds of books in a library. The sensory pleasures of touching, smelling, and turning the pages of a book are often absent in e-readers. So, you may wonder why most avid bookworms are now turning to e-readers rather than physical books.

    Well, the reason is simple yet nuanced. We will tell you all about it in the sections below. However, this guide will elucidate the differences between the two most popular e-readers - the Kindle Paperwhite and the Nook Glowlight.

    If you have been thinking about purchasing one but are confused between these two products, don't worry. Read on to find out all you need to know about these two highly popular e-readers.

    Kindle Paperwhite vs. Nook Glowlight

    Student reading electronic book from portable digital tablet at the table

    In the year 2007, Amazon began developing its first-ever Kindle. It started as a user-friendly e-reading device that has massive battery life and provides an excellent reading experience for avid readers.

    However, it wasn't till late 2012 that the first-ever generation of Kindle Paperwhite came out. The Paperwhite was reasonably priced and had fantastic features, making it extremely popular amongst readers of all generations.

    Meanwhile, one of the largest book companies in the world - Barnes & Nobles, developed their first-ever e-reader called the Nook in 2009. Most people seem to believe that this move was an attempt to save the company from shutting down or experiencing immense losses. This may be true; however, the Nook soon became a trendy device amongst book lovers.

    Those who enjoy reading books may be wondering if it's the right time to go digital. The dilemma is understandable since most experiences are now digital, and you may want to preserve the sanctity of book reading by sticking to physical books.

    That said, there are several benefits of switching to e-readers which you cannot experience through physical books. Before we begin exploring the two most popular e-readers - the Kindle Paperwhite & the Nook, let us tell you why you should consider switching to an e-reader.

    Why Should You Consider Buying An E-Reader?

    1. Access To More Books

    This is a phrase that sounds like music to every book lover's ears. Although nothing is stopping you from buying as many physical books as you want, there is the issue of storage space and cost.

    With the advent of e-readers, the amount of space required to store one, a hundred, or even thousands of books has decreased exponentially. A single e-reading device can efficiently hold thousands of book titles without running out of space. Moreover, you can delete books to make room for newer ones.

    Although most e-reading devices have their own repository of books that you can access, you can also download books from the internet and read them. Essentially, the entire world (or rather, its books) is at your disposal.

    1. It Is Cost-Effective

    The pleasure of visiting a bookstore or library, spending hours finding the perfect titles, and finally exchanging money for your new book is incomparable. That said, you often end up spending more money than you would like on new books.

    If this sounds familiar and you are looking to curb the expenditure, buying an e-reader may be the best solution. With e-readers, you have access to thousands or even millions of free ebooks.

    Furthermore, the ebooks you purchase online typically come at a third of the original prices. You can also choose to 'borrow' ebooks from online libraries, which could either be free or cost very little.

    In this way, you end up saving significant amounts of money and have easy access to an enormous online repository for free books.

    1. A Single Charge Lasts For Days

    One of the most concerning issues with getting yet another device is frequent charging. Most devices like phones and tablets require daily charging, which, let's face it, can get slightly annoying.

    If you are worried about adding yet another device to the daily charging list - don't be. One of the best aspects of e-readers is their massive battery life. Both the Kindle Paperwhite and Nook Glowlight have 8-hour battery lives. And unless you spend 8 hours a day reading, you can expect to charge the device once every few days or weeks, depending on the usage.

    However, if you decide not to use the e-reader for a few days, you won't come back to find it dead. Typically, an e-reader has a long standby time, lasting for weeks with a single charge.

    1. Environment-Friendly

    You know how more books correlates to more cutting of trees? Well, with e-readers and ebooks, you can effectively do your part to stop the felling of trees for paper. Furthermore, it reduces wastage and pollution that may occur if people decide to throw away or burn books. All new books are released in e-format available over the internet, enabling you to make eco-friendly choices without giving up reading.

    1. It Fits Everywhere

    Avid book readers hardly go anywhere without a book in hand. Whether you're going to the bank or for a cup of coffee, or even to meet a friend at the park, it's unlikely that you will travel without a book in stow.

    However, this habit can get particularly challenging if you have too many things to carry and not enough space. The introduction of e-readers has eliminated this issue.

    Most e-readers are incredibly sleek and handy. Moreover, they fit easily into a purse, backpack, or even large pockets. The best part is, you can carry thousands of books within a single e-reading device.

    Furthermore, you don't need to worry about your 'books' getting wet in case of sudden rain or snow. This is especially true if you purchase a water-resistant e-reader or buy a cover that can protect it against water, UV rays, and dust.

    1. You Can Change Fonts And Text Size

    This isn't something you would think is crucial; however, imagine coming across a beautiful novel that you can't get into because of its text size. Unfortunately, with physical books, this is something most readers learn to make do with.

    With e-readers, however, you can change not only the text size but also the font. Furthermore, you can customize line spacing, space between letters, margins, how you want to scroll, the background and text color, etc.

    This feature is one of the most important and crucial features of e-readers. Being able to change text size and font can completely transform your reading experience, especially if you have trouble reading small text.

    1. Zero Distraction

    Many may argue that you can enjoy eBooks on phones and tablets, so why should you opt for a dedicated e-reader? Well, the answer to this is ridiculously simple.

    The biggest issue with using phones and tablets is that you are bound to get distracted by calls, text messages, and social media notifications. Try as you may, at some point in time, the annoying 'pings' from social media accounts are bound to break focus. Before you know it, you will have scrolled through pages and pages of Twitter, Instagram, and other social media platforms.

    Those looking for a distraction-free reading experience will appreciate the minimalism of e-readers like the Kindle Paperwhite and Nook Glowlight. Unlike phones and tablets, a dedicated e-reader does not allow you to lose focus from reading by bombarding you with social media notifications and phone calls.

    Kindle Paperwhite vs. Nook Glowlight

    Now that you understand the advantages of e-readers, it's time to help you choose the right one. There are dozens of e-readers in the market; however, the right one depends on an individual's preferences, likes, and budget.

    In this guide, we will compare the two most popular e-readers - Amazon's Kindle Paperwhite and Barnes & Nobles' Nook Glowlight. We have divided the guide amongst factors like design, display, resolution, features, ecosystem, and other essential features.

    1. Design

    Both e-readers offer a distinctly different design, and the choice is ultimately a personal preference. The Kindle Paperwhite is rectangular and has a sharp, sleek appearance. It features a solid black design with soft corners and a matte black body. Its matte finish is prone to attracting fingerprints, so if you plan on using it regularly, you may want to consider getting a case for it.

    On the other hand, the Nook Glowlight has a distinct square shape and features silicon-trimmed edges. This makes the device easier to grip. Moreover, unlike the matte black Kindle, the Nook features an off-white color which can take a while to get used to.

    Most users would agree that the Kindle's black color offers better contrast while reading. That said, the Nook's off-white shade has a classy appearance but can take some time to get used to. Of course, the white Nook requires you to be a little more careful while handling it regularly, or it may end up with unwanted stains and marks.

    1. How To Turn Pages

    The most significant, defining difference between the Kindle Paperwhite and the Nook Glowlight is how users interact with the device. For starters, the Nook has implemented buttons on the bezels of the device, which can be pressed to turn pages. These are called the page-turning buttons, and they are immensely popular amongst users.

    On the other hand, the Kindle Paperwhite uses haptic feedback to turn pages straight from the screen. This is called PagePress, and it relies on the touchscreen navigation on the Kindle screen.

    Moreover, the Nook features a capacitive home button that you can use to navigate back to the home screen. The Kindle, however, has no home button or page-turning buttons.

    Whether you like the touchscreen display or the button feature depends on personal preference. You can also flip through several pages at once by holding down the page-turning buttons, which might be an interesting way to turn pages.

    1. Size & Weight

    When it comes to the size and weight of both devices, they are eerily similar. The Nook, however, is slightly broader and bulkier than the Kindle Paperwhite, which is marginally longer.

    That said, although the Nook looks bulkier than the Paperwhite, it weighs nominally less. The Nook weighs 175 g, while the Paperwhite weighs 182 g - which is not much of a difference.

    However, the difference is felt primarily because of the design, grip, and comfort of both devices.

    Similarly, the Paperwhite measures 6.6″ in height, 4.6” in breadth and is 0.32″ thick. The Nook measures 6.5″ in height, 5″ in breadth and is 0.4″ thick. There isn't much difference between the two, making them very similar in their outer structure and design.

    1. Screen

    One of the most important factors to consider when purchasing an e-reader is its screen. In this section, we will compare the screens and displays of both devices to understand which one is right for you.

    Both devices come in a handy 6-inch display and on-built light features. However, the Kindle is known to innovate and develop its designs continually. With the most recent Kindle Paperwhite, you will find a display rate of 300 PPI. Again, this is just slightly ahead of Nook's 212 PPI; however, this marginal difference can make all the difference to a user looking to buy the right device for themselves.

    Another essential factor to consider is that the Paperwhite comes with an IPX8 waterproof rating. The Nook features both a waterproof and dust-proof design; however, it does not feature an IP rating.

    When it comes to choosing between the two, it is essential to consider your needs and requirements. Those who plan on taking their e-readers into the bathroom to read may prefer the waterproof design of the Kindle Paperwhite. However, if water-resistance isn't a factor to consider, the Nook may be an ideal option.

    Keep in mind that users have reported the touch responsiveness to be slightly better on the Kindle than the Nook. That said, the Nook is a tad brighter than the Kindle Paperwhite, on its highest brightness setting.

    As you can see, there is no right or wrong choice. Both devices offer similar features that are marginally different from each other. However, the one you like better depends on personal choice and budget.

    1. Battery Life

    Whether you opt for the Paperwhite or Nook, battery life is something you won't have to worry about. Both the devices boast an impressive 8-hour battery life. However, keep in mind that this refers primarily to the screen usage time. As such, you can leave both the devices uncharged for weeks at a time without worrying about them running out of charge.

    1. Ecosystem

    The next thing we want to talk about is the Kindle Paperwhite vs. Nook Glowlight ecosystem. The number of available books and genres may be the topmost deciding factor when considering the best e-reading device.

    Well, the Kindle Paperwhite seems to win in this category because of the vast number of book titles it hosts. Currently, Amazon's Kindle holds about 6 million book titles, vs. the Nook's 3 million.

    Another factor to consider is that the Kindle Paperwhite book costs are slightly cheaper than the Nook Glowlight. Now, it's not much of a difference. However, the number of bestsellers you will find on the Kindle is significantly more than the Nook.

    Coming to non-mainstream books, both the Kindle Paperwhite and Nook Glowlight have separate sections where writers can publish their own content. So, if this is something that you are interested in, both platforms are well worth exploring.

    Other Distinguishing Features

    Now that we have compared the top features of the Kindle Paperwhite and Nook Glowlight, we can talk about some of the distinguishing features between them. To begin with, we will talk about all the unique features offered by the Kindle Paperwhite and then go on to the Nook Glowlight.

    So, let's begin!

    Kindle Paperwhite Features

    1. Reading Technology

    One of the best aspects of the Kindle is its in-built Bookerly technology. This technology beautifully crafts the font on the screen of your Kindle device. You can choose from various fonts and text sizes to make your reading experience as comfortable as possible.

    Not just that, the Bookerly technology allows you to choose from various modern or traditional fonts which you can easily switch between, offering the optimal reading experience.

    1. In-Built Dictionary

    Don't you hate it when you are forced to type a new word into Google or whip out an old-fashioned dictionary to find the meaning of a word? Well, with Kindles built-in dictionary, you don't have to.

    Finding the meaning of a word you don't know is incredibly easy. All you need to do is to hold down the word on the screen, and it will instantly show you its meaning. Moreover, you don't need to be connected to the internet for this - allowing access to the dictionary no matter where you are.

    Moreover, you can highlight specific parts of the text and make notes on it, or save certain parts of the text like quotes if you wish.

    1. X-Ray Feature

    The next feature we want to tell you about is the unique X-ray feature of the Kindle Paperwhite. Similar to the in-built dictionary, this feature allows you to view information about a character, a topic, an event, a place, or any other item in the book.

    You can essentially learn more about the various aspects of the book and examine its foundation and nuances.

    1. Web Browsing Capability

    The Kindle Paperwhite has limited web browsing that allows you to find out what other readers think of the book you are reading. Moreover, you can sign-in through your Goodreads account to find out more about books and read reviews without hassle. The Nook, however, does not feature any form of web browsing.

    Furthermore, you can add parental lock and control features that limit the kind of books you want kids to read. On the other hand, the Nook simply features password protection that can be used to restrict purchases.

    1. Audiobooks

    Although many of the older generation Kindle Paperwhite models do not support audiobooks, the newer generation ones do. This is especially beneficial for those who want to pick up a book where they left off but don't necessarily want to read. The audiobook feature works excellently, and it syncs automatically, enabling you to begin reading where you last stopped the audiobook.

    1. Amazon Prime

    Having an Amazon Prime account can be a wonderful addition to your new Kindle Paperwhite. The account enables you to explore various book titles and genres and buy books at a lower price. Moreover, you even have the option to read book samples before purchasing them if you wish to.

    Another benefit of having an Amazon Prime account linked with your Kindle Paperwhite is that you can download books through the Prime account and have them synced automatically with the Kindle device.

    You don't need to go through a long process to download or sync books as everything is synced automatically with all the devices where you have Amazon Prime installed. Furthermore, you have the option of downloading several free ebooks with the Amazon Prime account, which will automatically end up on the Kindle Paperwhite.

    1. Export Notes To Email

    Have you ever come across a particularly intriguing part of a text or a quote on a book that you want to save for future reference? Well, with the 'export to email' feature, you can do this conveniently!

    This is an in-built feature that you can use straight from the Kindle Paperwhite. Highlight the portion of the text you wish to send, and then click on the 'export to email' option. You can choose between different formats like PDF or a simple format which you can open on a spreadsheet.

    1. Reading Speed Tracking Feature

    Another notable feature of the Kindle Paperwhite is the reading speed tracking. As the name suggests, this feature automatically processes your average reading time and tells you how much time remains to finish a chapter.

    You can easily customize the feature to show the amount of time you have left in a chapter or the entire book. Moreover, you can check the location of the page on the book. This tells you how much you have left to read.

    1. Explore

    Much like the synopsis of a book on its back cover, the explore option allows you to explore the book before you begin reading it. Here, you can find all the information you need to know about the author, a summary of the book, and whether there are any prequels or sequels to it.

    Nook Glowlight Features

    Now that you know everything you need to about the Kindle Paperwhite, it's time to move on to the Nook Glowlight. Much like the Kindle, this device has several unique built-in features that can make your reading experience better. Here are some of the top in-built features you can explore.

    1. Nook Reading App

    The Nook Reading App is a free feature that comes with your Nook device. Once you get this app, you can sync all the Nook books amongst various devices that have the Nook Reading app. Much like the Amazon Kindle app, it allows you to sync downloaded or deleted books, add bookmarks, notes, and pick up where you left off from any device.

    1. Download eBook In Various Formats

    With the Kindle Paperwhite, you are somewhat restricted to exploring the book options available within the Kindle app. However, the Nook Glowlight allows you to download EPUBs, which are ePublications of books found online.

    Many may argue that the addition of this feature immediately makes the availability of different books wider on the Nook than the Kindle Paperwhite.

    However, we can let you in on a little secret which Kindle doesn't want you to know. You can download ebooks in formats like PDF and Mobi on the computer, which can then be sent to your special Kindle email address. However, you may need to connect the Kindle to the PC for this feature.

    You can also use this feature by downloading ebooks on the computer or tablet in PDF or Mobi format and then sending this to your Kindle using a special software. That said, the process can be somewhat tedious and annoying, which dissuades most readers from indulging in it.

    1. Screen Temperature Settings

    A particularly vital feature that is missing from the Kindle Paperwhite is the screen temperature setting. Essentially, this setting on the Nook Glowlight allows you to reach warmer tones on the reading device, making the reading experience more enjoyable and softer for the eyes.

    Although the Kindle Paperwhite allows you to change the brightness, the overall look of the screen resembles paper. Moreover, the in-built light, which is directed towards the screen rather than your eyes, helps reduce eye strain but doesn't emit a soft, warm light.

    1. LendMe Feature

    Another excellent feature of the Nook is the LendMe feature. This allows you to borrow books for 14 days at a fraction of the original price, which is excellent if you want to read a short book but don't necessarily want to purchase it.

    That said, the Kindle Paperwhite allows you to borrow books from the public library. This process is relatively effortless and seamless, which is why many users prefer it to the LendMe feature of the Nook.

    Female students reading and discussing information on e-book reader at the table, education technology concept

    Final Words

    As you can see, both the Kindle Paperwhite and the Nook Glowlight have their strengths and weaknesses. However, the device you buy will ultimately depend on personal preference.

    That said, the Nook Glowlight is available at a slightly lower price than the Kindle Paperwhite. Many may argue that certain Kindle features make it slightly superior to the Nook, allowing Amazon to charge the extra cost for it.

    Let us know which e-reader you like better - the Kindle Paperwhite or the Nook Glowlight. Till next time, happy reading!

    Related Articles

    21 Best Manga Drawing Books

    16 Best Maya Books for Beginners & Professionals Alike

    22 Best Drawing Books for Beginners

    11 Best Adult Coloring Books That Will Color Your Mood

    13 Best Watercolor Sketchbooks for Creatives Everywhere

    11 Best Color Theory Books for Artists Everywhere

    25 Best Concept Art Books for Artists Everywhere

    8 Best Cartooning Books For Artists Today

    Best Watercolor Painting Books | Beginner to Expert Grade

    11 Best Perspective Books Right Now

    Turkish kilims were really popular in the past, history repeats itself. More and more homeowners are enjoying their unique beauty and design, and find a way to fit them in their contemporary and modern homes. Does the kilim makes an impression on you too? Are you thinking about getting one for you living room, bedroom or hallway? In this article you are going to see how well they fit in the modern furnishings, and you will definitely head to the store to get yours as soon as possible. Check out the Traditional Kilim Rugs That Are Making A Huge Comeback and add some texture and color in your home. Their bright colors will enliven the area and the geometric patterns will break the monotony of the plain and minimalist decor!

     

     

     

    These kilims are here to stay on the long run, so don't have second thoughts about getting yours as soon as possible. They become the focal point in the room and it's the first thing that you will notice when you enter the room.

    Source

    Source

     

    The kilims are a shortcut to adding a dose of the Mediterranean and Middle East style into your living area. They are made of wood and are very original and authentic. They may also cost you more money than the ordinary rug, but it's definitely worth it!

    Source

     

     

    The warm colors of the kilim give the room both harmony and contrast. We have to mention that the wool is dyed naturally with vegetables. The kilim offer a visual interest and makes the room an enjoyable space with a relaxed ambiance.

    Source

    Source

    Source

    Even if you have decorated your home in a modern style, the kilim will fit in effortlessly. Plus, it will make your living area stand from the rest of the crowd and everyone will be asking you where you have got it from, believe me!

    Source

     

     

    If you think the atmosphere in the room is so dull and it needs something to attract the attention, then you definitely need a kilim. Maybe it's not the first thing that comes to your mind, but once you add it into your interior you will be glad that you have.

    Source

    Source

    Source

    Aren't these kilims totally amazing and eye-catching? Would you like to have them in your homes? Let me know in the comments below!

     

    Source

    How do you see the exemplary Kilim Rugs above? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!

    Related Articles

    15 Different Types of Carpet for Your Future Home

    Light translates into life. It has utmost importance in our homes, it influences our state of mind and therefore it plays a huge role in design, ever since the first sun-ray entered a cave. Natural light shapes our interiors and an equally important manner so does artificial light, especially in cloudy days or small apartments that simply lack the comfort of immense windows.

    Contemporaneity brought forward smaller living spaces and while these often meant less natural light, infinite opportunities arrived with to artificial light, diy lighting fixtures of all kinds are surfacing around the internet, thousands of world class designers are launching products meant to enhance our living quality each day. In this permanent movement every possible item on the Mother Earth draws the attention of design enthusiasts and in the following article we will be cover a quite peculiar one, Jellyfish Pendant Lights, thus highlighting the immense array of options, opportunities. Jellies, or jellyfishes are soft-bodied free swimming aquatic creatures defined by an umbrella-like dome and trailing tentacles, they`re often transparent an extraordinary intriguing in shape and materiality, these creatures have roamed the seas for more than 500 millions and they are today the oldest multi-organ animal known to mankind.

    In design, their transparency and movement have been an inspiration for years, they are also highly popular in cartoons thus channeling the attention of the little ones. The water creatures have inspired the world for thousands of years and in the following article they will continue to do so through a series of jellyfish lighting fixtures, these are meant to entice little ones and anchor sea-themed designs, cast a glance.

     21 Intriguingly Captivating Jellyfish Pendant Light Ideas

    via bloglovin.com

     

    via contemporarychandeliercompany.co.uk

     21 Intriguingly Captivating Jellyfish Pendant Light Ideas

    via lbllighting.com

     

    via redferret.net

     21 Intriguingly Captivating Jellyfish Pendant Light Ideas

    via facebook

     21 Intriguingly Captivating Jellyfish Pendant Light Ideas

    via babasouk.ca

     

    via  Studio Qisdesign

     

    via inhabitat.com

    via plasticrunway.wordpress.com

     

    via hometone.com

    via contemporarychandeliercompany.co.uk
    21 Intriguingly Captivating Jellyfish Pendant Light Ideas
    via instructables.com

    via etsy

    via etsy

    21 Intriguingly Captivating Jellyfish Pendant Light Ideas

    via crystal-fox.com

    via etsy

    via wedding-philippines.com

    via DEA LUCE

    via studioten25.com

    Source Unknown

    via juxtapost.com

    It goes without saying that these will not fit any decor, they`re not going to surprise any individual nor be the subject of thousands of diy projects yet the exercise of researching a sculptural shape drawn from nature surely cannot be challenged. The soft-bodied creature is an extraordinary source of inspiration and in the right medium the right jellyfish pendant light will surely shine, children will definitely be fascinated by colorful LED jellyfish lights.

    What do you think? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!

    Related Articles

    9 Best DIY Pendant Lighting Kit to Consider

    Given Japan's unique position in the world, it's no surprise that foreigners are fascinated by the country, culture, and societies of the Japanese people. 

    Whether it's Japanese food, anime, or its cultural elements, it has continued to perplex people worldwide, and the finest styles have become a part of a trendy lifestyle. One such fast-emerging trend is Japanese décor, especially the bedroom designs, both traditional and modern. 

    Minimalistic Japanese themes have gained immense popularity with the proliferation of bedroom designs. Why? Probably because it’s all about sophistication and simplicity, making them aesthetically pleasing and appealing. 

    So are you planning to redecorate your bedroom with Japanese-style elements but are confused about what to choose? Don’t worry- we have prepared a list of some traditional and modern Japanese bedroom ideas for you. 

    Without further ado, let’s get in!

    Traditional Japanese Bedroom Ideas

    White bed room japanese design on tropical room interior and tatami mat floor. 3D rendering

    1. Zen Interior Design

    Zen Interior Design

     What Is Zen? 

    Zen is a Japanese interior design trend, but more than that, it’s a philosophy about a person living in harmony with the world. Japanese culture pays homage to its historical traditions, instilling a sense of Zen among people and establishing peace with nature. 

    In this design, there is greater incorporation of greenery and nature within structures, and you will notice an abundance of natural light and open spaces. A Zen bedroom is intended to be meditative, tranquil, aesthetically pleasing, and visually balanced. 

    To have an aesthetically pleasing room, it is important to stick with light colors. It ensures a serene and calm sentiment so that you can easily breathe without any distractions. Earthy tones are generally preferred over gaudy and vibrant colors to maintain peace. 

    Similarly, to amp up tranquility, which is an essential essence of these traditional Japanese bedrooms, you should ensure natural light is let in as much as possible. Also, these bedrooms are established in places that are quiet and closer to nature. In simple words, you should have a serene environment around your room. 

    In case you do not have access to floor-to-ceiling large windows, then installing rattan pendant lighting will help keep the room remain well-lit always. You’ll indeed feel a sense of serenity and peace. 

    The most important aspect of this Japanese-style bedroom design is to keep minimum clutter. Often easier said than done, having a distraction-free room will evoke calmness in your bedroom. Without any confusion or distraction, you can simply focus on the moment without shifting your attention to other things. This is what sets an average Japanese bedroom apart from the rest. 

    How to Design The Bedroom In Zen Style?

    In order to give your bedroom a full-fledged Zen style, you must clear everything and introduce the bare minimum. Just include main elements like a light, a low bed, and a nightstand. You can also hang some very neutral artwork and low tables. Known as Chabudai, these floor tables are most common in Japan and are generally used during summer. In winter, they are replaced by Kotatsu, which has a heater installed underneath. 

    Additionally, you will need to evaluate negative symbolisms or items in your room that don't suit the environment. For example, if you are looking for more headspace, make sure the surface is not cluttered. 

    Lastly, make sure to surround yourself with nature. You can keep small Japanese plants known as Bonsai trees. These are traditional Japanese art and science forms used to create miniature trees in small vessels or pots. Scaling whole trees into a miniature version makes it very aesthetically appealing. 

    2. Japanadi Interior Design

    Japanadi Interior Design
    If you are an appraiser of “Hygge” and minimalist principles, then chances are that you have already started experimenting with the Japanadi style. 

    In order to design your room in this style, focus on natural materials like bamboo or wood pieces, which bring in a feeling of simplistic and natural beauty. We also recommend bringing greenery and plants or using muted colors like pale green on your bedroom walls for giving your home a sense of outdoor living.

    Similar to the Zen style, reducing clutter is also crucial in achieving a Japanadi style for focusing on open interior spaces and clean lines. However, if you live in a busy household and struggle to achieve a minimalistic look, try “faux minimalism” with natural containers like baskets, boxes or folding screens. Try to hide your extra items and maintain a clutter-free space. 

    To get the best of both worlds, draw on the coziness of Scandinavian design with soft pieces and warm textures while maintaining the elegance of Japanese interior design. As both styles focus on utilitarianism, you can establish a calm and serene space in your bedroom. 

    Japanadi decor focuses on craftsmanship, you should look for low Japanese furniture made of solid and long-lasting wood that will adhere to your decor for years. At the same time, we’d urge you to choose materials that are sustainable and don’t harm the planet. 

    Although both Scandi and Japanese decor aren’t new, the combination of these two as a single concept is a trend that's becoming popular quickly

    3. Feng Shui Bedroom Design

    Feng Shui Bedroom Design

    What Is Feng Shui?

    If you are looking to have a Japanese-style bedroom, you should definitely consider Feng Shui design as an option. 

    The bedroom is the most crucial part of your home, as you spend most of the time there sleeping or doing other leisure activities. While sleeping, your body goes into a passive state and gets affected by all the energies. So, designing your bedroom in a feng shui style can have a significant impact on your body and mind. Here’s what you need to do to feng shui in your bedroom. 

    As you’d probably expect, your bed frame and headboard play a crucial role in optimizing feng shui. This is mainly because wood oozes supporting and positive energy when sleeping. Moreover, they help eliminate negative radio frequency signals emitted by wireless appliances like cell phones, computers, and televisions from your energy field. But it will be important to keep these appliances away from your bedroom altogether.  

    Designing The Bedroom in Feng Shui Style

    With respect to design, you should keep low furniture in your Japanese-style bedroom, like floor tables, low chairs, and beds. Make sure to place your bed against a solid wall as it will provide you with psychological protection and support. Aside from that, try to keep a clear vantage point of the doorway from the bed, thereby ensuring that the energy doesn’t flow quickly.   

    Avoiding clutters in your traditional Japanese bedrooms is always crucial, as it allows the energy to flow freely and rejuvenate you while sleeping. We recommend you to have some kind of storage for storing items and stick to soft items like blankets, linens, and pillows. 

    Feng Shui-style bedrooms generally opt for green and light blue colors. If you try to invoke passion in the bedroom, have splashes of red, while if you seek vitality and rejuvenation, neutral and earthy colors will best suit the purpose. 

    Like other elements in a traditional Japanese-style bedroom, the paintings need to be minimalist as well. They differ from the others owing to their emphasis on minimalism, as the focus of the artist lies primarily on core elements and significantly reducing or eliminating the background. Some examples of such paintings are the ones including bamboo, birds, Japanese symbols, or “Kanji”, and might recite Japanese poetry, known as “Haiku.” 

    Other than these, arranging your books on a bookshelf is vital. Books serve to be a great source of energy and stimulate our minds. So, for a night of sound sleep, try moving your books out of the way. 

    4. Family Countryside Japanese Design

    Family Countryside Japanese Design
    Do you live in a large family and share a bedroom with others? In Japan, most family members stay in a single room due to their tiny houses and limited space. 

    In order to design your bedroom in a traditional Japanese style, you’ll need futons and a tatami mat under the bed. The Japanese futon is a conventional mat laid straight on the floor. Also known as Shikubuton, it is the most common type of bedding found in most Japanese homes. 

    Tatami mat is a traditional Japanese mat used in most homes of Japanese people and is covered by laguna, which is a design weaved from soft rice straw. These mats are of standardized sizes, with their length being twice their breadth. In other words, the length-to-breadth ratio is 2:1. 

    Unlike Western bedrooms, local Japanese people sleep on traditional mattresses placed on the floor or a low bed. It is considered a standard norm in Japanese society. 

    Other than that, you can also have a platform bed or Japanese floor bed for your bedroom. Its unique design and minimalist design set it apart from other beds. These are only a few inches from the ground and occupy less floor space. 

    Traditional Japanese homes were lit by lamps and other light sources, mainly because electricity wasn’t invented yet. Even today, you will see many Japanese homes with similar lighting, powered by electricity. Appropriate lighting is always essential for a family countryside bedroom design. 

    You can have nightstands or paper lanterns that emit a warm light. Not only will they radiate positive energy but they will also help maintain a serene and peaceful environment. 

    Additionally, if you have decorative items in your house, make a wooden shelf to keep them arranged and avoid any kind of clutter in the bedroom. 

    5. Mid-Century Japanese Bedroom Design

    Mid Century Japanese Bedroom Design

    This is probably the most minimalistic and simplistic Japanese-style bedroom you will see on our list. The room has only four things: a table, a chair, a bed, and a bonsai tree! Although there are only a few items in this room, it still looks beautiful and amusing. 

    Huge wooden sliding doors, also known as screen dividers, are used in these rooms. Given that Japanese people emphasize privacy, finding these screens in every household is eminent. The most common Japanese screen dividers are byobu and shoji. It is not the case with Western designs, which prefer to divide their rooms by placing a solid wall.

    Byobu are folding screens found primarily in Japanese homes to create separations in rooms or create a sense of privacy. These are primarily decorated with Kanji or other forms of calligraphy found in Japan. Wood is primarily used for making the frame of Byobu, while the screens are made of paper, bamboo, etc. However, such materials make them sensitive to rough use, and slight pressure on the screen is enough to damage them. 

    Shoji, another type of sliding door, is also ubiquitous in Japanese households, including urban areas. However, the screens of Shoji are not as delicate and fragile as its counterpart and are made of solid traditional material to increase their toughness. Similar to Byobu, minimal calligraphy or art is used to decorate the screens. 

    Regardless of the materials used and increased durability, these screens need to be handled with care as they are essentially just flat layers of millimeters-thick materials. 

    These bedrooms are undoubtedly one of the most inherently relaxing rooms. Apart from partition screens, these Japanese bedrooms need to be clean and organized. Additionally, you need to ensure that the right amount of natural light enters the room, provided through skylight doors and windows. 

    Best Modern Japanese Bedroom Ideas

    1. Floral Japanese Style Bedroom

    Floral Japanese Style Bedroom
    This bedroom design is more on the traditional side with a modern twist. Beautiful arrangements and floral bedding give a stunning look to your bedroom. Similar to conventional design, these modern Japanese bedrooms boast floor or platform beds with lower height and adorn them with floral pattern bed sheets, placed near long and skylight Japanese-style windows. Also, an artificial sakura flower in vases on low tables brings Japanese-style vibes to your entire space. 

    As mentioned earlier, having a well-lighted room provides a wide array of benefits to your body. Primarily, it improves your sleep by helping your body regulate the circadian rhythm and serves as a natural cue to regulate melatonin production, which makes our body alert and active. As seen in the image, you can add Japanese-style lamps to make your room well-lit and brighter at night. 

    Tatami mats are ubiquitous in a contemporary Japanese bedroom style. These mats are made of rush grass and straw, bound with a plain border fabric. If you want to give your bedroom an authentic yet modern look, these mats are a must. Besides, if you live in cold regions, it is better to have a mat to avoid feeling cold at night. 

    Apart from delivering a classy look to your modern Japanese home, it presents several benefits, ranging from supporting your back while sleeping, regulating humidity to being eco-friendly and biodegradable. Also, its maintenance is effortless, and its long-lasting nature helps maintain the look for a longer time. 

    If you wish to paint the walls, go with subtle blue tones or any color that fits perfectly with your bed.     

    2. Tatami Room 

    Tatami Room with En Suite

    If you share your room with siblings or other family members, this modern Japanese-style bedroom will be an ideal design for the space. This tatami room features an en suite interior vogue. 

    As you have seen, a contemporary Japanese bedroom doesn’t have an attached bathroom, but you can include it if needed. Also, the room is filled with wooden furniture seen in most bedrooms. The primary reason for having wooden furniture lies in creating a unique ambiance of a room, and as compared to other materials, it is easy to clean, and maintain, and is long-lasting. 

    Similar to other designs, this one also features a low bed, complemented with a basic lacquered or bamboo dresser. You must ensure that only essential furniture catering to functional needs is introduced within the room such that there is no clutter and the theme remains constant. 

    The minimalist and simple mattress fits perfectly with this Asian interior design. Featured with three futon mattresses and Tatami flooring, this bedroom is essentially Japanese with a Western touch. Futon mattresses can be placed directly on the floor or with Tatami mats underneath.  

    Furthermore, the room features a cloth hanging rack, linen, heating, and other essential items required on a daily basis in an organized manner. As with Japanese bedrooms, the ambiance is also an essential principle of the particular design. Establishing a tranquil and serene environment around you will not only keep your mind at bay but also help concentrate on the impending task, in turn boosting the overall efficiency. 

    3. Mystical Anime Bedroom Design

    Mystical Anime Bedroom Design
    Anime is popular not only in Japan but people all over the world are crazy about it. Having an engaging story, spectacular visuals, and relatable characters is the reason behind its massive popularity. If you are one of them, you’d want to design the room with an anime theme and design as favorite Japanese anime characters. 

    Whether your room is large or small, posters are a great and easiest way to start decorating your space. Posters from the same major television series or different movies can be put on walls. This modern Japanese-style bedroom will readily inflict anime vibes without investing much or damaging the walls. Added to it, you can also add colored lighting effects for making your bedroom much more lively and animated. 

    To complement the traditional Japanese beds, you can add a unique anime bed headboard to make it more comfortable and cozy. For creating this, print out some anime posters or pictures in varied sizes and glue them on walls just behind the bed. 

    Want something calm and contemporary? Just select one of your favorite anime characters and use it as wallpaper for your Japanese-style bedroom. Keep everything else in a simple design for keeping the wallpaper stand out. The furniture in the room is to be made with wood and a small bonsai plant can be kept for enhancing the beauty of the room. 

    Lastly, place a nightstand or a lamp with changing colors or string lights to add a soft touch to your bedroom. It can make your space heaven for anime lovers. 

    4. Luxurious Japanese Style Bedroom

    Luxurious Japanese Style Bedroom
    A luxurious Japanese-style Bedroom is perfectly suitable for those who live in sky-high buildings. Laid with luxurious design and all facilities, it includes some Japanese elements for delivering its essence, such as skyline windows, traditional Japanese furniture, and screen doors. 

    This idea is for someone who wants Japanese style in their bedroom and doesn’t wish to change the ambiance and interior of their space. These rooms are very spacious and provide you with the liberty to customize and have the room of your dreams. 

    The advantage of planning a luxurious bedroom is a combination of exclusive sophistication, greater comfort, and relaxation in the desired way. You can paint the room the color you choose, black or gray. When selecting a black mansion bedroom, you can paint your bedroom wall black with a contrasting floor color. 

    Also, you can use gray color in combination with neutral hues for adding boldness and brightness to your room. Coordinating with it, you can add wooden and modular furniture to your Japanese-inspired bedroom to give it a futuristic and aesthetically pleasing vibe. The inclusion of wooden furniture also goes well with your Japanese theme. 

    Don’t be shy to play around with calligraphies or artwork in your empty space. If you want to keep on with the Japanese theme, make sure to keep it a simple and clean one. This helps to maintain serenity and tranquility in your space. 

    Tranquility and Quietness in Japanese Bedrooms

    The essence of traditional Japanese bedrooms is rooted in Zen philosophy, which emphasizes tranquility and simplicity. Quietness is a crucial element in this context, symbolizing peace and serenity. The design principles aim to create a calm environment free from loud, distracting noises, contributing to an atmosphere of relaxation and mindfulness.

    Soundproofing becomes an essential aspect of achieving this tranquility. By reducing the intrusion of exterior noises, homeowners can maintain a serene atmosphere in their Japanese-style bedrooms. Methods of soundproofing can range from structural alterations to the use of specific materials known to dampen sound, like tatami mats. Tatami, a traditional Japanese flooring material, not only adds to the authentic aesthetic but also offers a natural sound barrier due to its composition and density.

    Understanding the relationship between tranquility, quietness, and Japanese bedroom design allows homeowners to create a space that not only embodies visual Zen principles but also delivers an authentic, peaceful auditory experience. For those seeking to minimize the noise in their home, incorporating soundproofing techniques into the design can significantly contribute to maintaining the peaceful ambiance central to Japanese bedrooms.

    Modern Zen bed and decoartion plants in japanese bedroom. 3D rendering.

    Final Words

    With this, we have reached the end of the best Japanese Bedroom design (traditional or modern) that you can give. 

    As you can see, a wide range of elements is to consider when creating a Japanese-style bedroom. It’s imperative to remain familiar with Japanese culture and traditions in the form of Feng Shui and Zen. We recommend you start by decluttering your space and then design the bedroom with the ideas mentioned earlier. 

    Japanese furniture decorations, ambiance, & traditional style bedding are crucial aspects of every Japanese bedroom. When it comes to decorating in Japanese style, less is more concept is much more applicable to give you a more relaxing time to spend in. 

    You’ll discover that the fewer the belongings, the more the focus is on what’s essential, which in turn allows you to stay energetic throughout the day. We will now sign off to come back the next time. Till then, take care!

    Related Articles 

    19 Mid Century Modern Leather Sofa

    33 Epic Navy Blue Bedroom Design Ideas

    13 Best Loft Beds with Slide

    Salt lamps are all the rage now. And why shouldn't they be? They look extremely aesthetically pleasing and are said to provide a lot of different health benefits. So it is no wonder that people are going gaga over these little beauties, the best Himalayan salt lamps can make a huge difference.

    The trouble is since these lamps gained popularity, some places started selling cheap knock-offs in place of the real ones. This is quite a bit of a problem since a lot of people purchase these for the health benefits. The fake ones not only have no positive effect on your health but sometimes also cause health-related issues. A lot of them have lead in them, and that is highly toxic to your body.

    If you spent your hard-earned money on a lamp, you deserve a real one with the real benefits. So, in case you just bought a new Himalayan salt lamp and are not too sure about its authenticity, here are some ways you can confirm if it is a real one or a cheap knock-off.

    How to Tell If Your Salt Lamp is Real | Authentic Guide

    How to Tell If Your Salt Lamp is Real | Authentic Guide

    Bestseller No. 1
    7 Inch Himalayan Salt Lamp with Dimmer Cord - Night Light...
    • HIMALAYAN SALT LAMP NIGHT LIGHT : Spantik's Himalayan Salt...
    • DIMMABLE DIMMER SWITCH FOR LIVING ROOM : Spantik's Himalayan...
    Bestseller No. 2
    Himalayan Glow Salt Lamp with Dimmer Switch 5-7 lbs, Orange
    • Unique salt lamp is made from Natural Himalayan salt...
    • Once lit the lamp will emit a calming Amber color
    SaleBestseller No. 3
    The Body Source Himalayan Salt Lamp 10-12 Inches (11-15lb) |...
    • PURE & NATURAL: This rock salt lamp is hand-carved from...
    • ADJUSTABLE LIGHTING: The dimmer switch allows you to adjust...

    1. It has a lot of positive reviews 

    Several sellers sell their salt lamps and other wares on places like Amazon. So, the first thing you can do to confirm your lamp's authenticity is to check the reviews on Amazon and other websites. Since a lot of people already believe in its miraculous health benefits, almost every salt lamp available on these websites have been tried and tested by the believers.

    So, you could go the smarter way and read the reviews and check the ratings and see if the product has really positively affected the buyers' health and happiness before you order one for yourself. But in case you couldn't wait and have already bought out without the proper research, make sure you at least check the websites now to confirm what you have is the real deal.

    If a lot of people who have already bought the product from the seller claim that they are now reaping the benefits since they bought it, you are probably good to go.

    1. It can be traced back to the Himalayan ranges

    The salt on these lamps come directly from the Himalayas, at least the real ones do. So, one sure fire way to determine if your lamp is original would be to trace where it comes from. If your manufacturer provides you with certificates or access to such information, chances are that they are trying to trick their buyers.

    Here, you must remember that there is a big difference between where the product has been put together and where the salt has been mined. The salt on these lamps needs to come directly from the Himalayan mountain ranges. The Himalayan ranges are the one and only proven source of these salts.

    1. The light is not uniform or bright

    This is extremely natural because the salt crystals will cause the light to refract at different angles. This basically means that your Himalayan salt lamp will not provide the same uniform brightness as all the other normal lamps in your house. And it's not even meant to do that because these salt lamps are not supposed to look normal or feel normal. They are special, and they look the part.

    The light given off by the original Himalayan lamps is usually muted and slightly dull. These lamps are not supposed to light up entire rooms. If your one actually works like any other lamp in the house and lights up entire rooms, it is probably a knock off.

    So, in case you recently bought one of these lamps and they seem to provide uniform lighting and brightness. Unfortunately, it is probably a fake. Maybe you should demand your money back at this point.

    1. They are not very durable

    Again, this is extremely normal. Original Himalayan salt lamps are very fragile and have to be treated that way. They chip off or break easily during shipping, which means a lot of them are lost during the delivery process. But, in case the one you bought has rolled off the table at least once and has shown no signs of distress, it is pretty much a fake.

    Original Himalayan salt lamps break or chip off easily. Even a tiny amount of pressure might cause the salt crystals to fall off. So, in case the one you have shows no sign of wear or tear no matter what it faces, it is almost definitely a fake. Needless to say, though, do not just drop your lamp on the floor to check its authenticity. It might lead to unpleasant results.

    1. It is pretty expensive

    Yes, this one's pretty strange and will probably make you very unhappy. But it is true nonetheless. Since mining these salts in the Himalayan ranges and then making and transporting the lamps is not cheap. And that’s why the original Himalayan salt lamps are usually very expensive.

    There is also the fact that a lot of the shipment is broken or damaged during transportation. So manufacturers need to use more expensive methods of transport.

    If you recently came across a sale that offered you a lucrative deal on these salt lamps and you were able to get it very cheap, there are high chances that the one you so lovingly bought is a fake. This is especially true if you bought a white crystal lamp instead of the usual colored varieties. White crystal ones are rarer and, hence, more expensive.

    1. Moisture affects it badly

    It is made of salt and is supposed to react badly to moisture. The fake ones will hardly show any signs of wear even if you wash them. But if you have an original Himalayan salt lamp, the moment it gets in contact with water, it will start weeping.

    One good way to determine if you actually have the original product would be to dip a piece of cloth in water and touch the surface of the lamp with it. If you see minor discoloration and some of the salt gets on the piece of cloth, you can rest assured that you have an original salt lamp.

    If your lamp shows any signs of hygroscopy (or sweating), you should know that it is extremely normal for an original salt lamp to react that way when they come in contact with moisture in the air.

    How to Tell If Your Salt Lamp is Real

    1. You start experiencing the positive health benefits

    While there are many non-believers out there, every buyer of an original Himalayan salt lamp will tell you how the lamps have miraculous health benefits. One might choose not to believe it, but the science behind this lamp is real.

    The salt in the lamp purifies the air so much that people with asthma and other breathing issues face an immediate improvement. It also helps with people's dust and other allergy issues by cleaning the air and making it easier to breathe in.

    But, if even after buying the lamp, you are not literally breathing easy, there might actually be something wrong with your lamp. You should be reaping the astounding number of miraculous benefits of having this lamp around since the moment it first crosses your threshold, and if you indeed see no such difference, the chances are that your lamp is a fake one.

    How to Tell If Your Salt Lamp is Real

    1. The seller has great return policies

    Look, the manufacturers get it. These lamps are very fragile things that need to be always handled with care. So, there is a huge chance that it might get damaged while it is being shipped to you. And that’s why all the people who sell original Himalayan salt lamps have excellent return policies.

    You spend a lot of your hard earned money while buying these and the manufacturers have got your back.

    So, if the seller you are buying or bought the lamp from does not offer you any sort of coverage in case of damages during shipping and transport, you are probably dealing with a fake. The ones who sell fake Himalayan salt lamps have got to be extra careful when dealing with customers. If they are found out, they know that the customer will want to send the lamp back and they cannot have that.

    Any seller who sells original Himalayan salt lamps will have no such worries and will offer you extremely viable return policies. They know what they are giving you is the real deal so there will be no dissatisfied buyers. Also, even if the lamp is indeed not a counterfeit, you must always remember how fragile they are.

    They might get damaged during shipping, so it is very important you go to a seller who has a good replacement or returns policy in place.

    Salt Lamp Is Real Final words

    As you can very well see, it is very easy to get tricked into buying a counterfeit Himalayan salt lamp these days. So, one must be extremely careful when putting their money into buying one of these. Make sure you research the manufacturer well before you actually invest in buying a lamp.

    Read reviews on websites and check the ratings. Also, if you are skeptical about the health benefits offered by these lamps, you can read up more about it on the internet. Hopefully, you will soon be convinced of the fact that these are indeed worth buying.

    In the end, no matter what, do not get tempted into buying a lamp just because someone is selling them cheaply. You will only be left disgruntled and unhappy with the buy later.

    When you have spare paint cans or bottles lying around the house, it is important to know whether they are inflammable. 

    Some paints may seem completely harmless until the time you realize that they are not. That’s because they may contain elements that make them combustible, thereby posing a threat to your safety. But does that mean you stop using them? Not at all!

    What you need is the right kind of knowledge that helps you understand which paints are inflammable and which are not. With a good understanding, you will be able to use and store them safely. And once you take proper precautions, there’s nothing to worry about. 

    The enthusiasm to learn more about paints must have brought you here, and you are at the right place. In this guide, we discuss the major types of paints and their characteristics. This will help you understand them better and enable you to use them more efficiently. 

    So, without any more delay, let’s dive right in!

    What’s Flammable And What’s Not? 

    Is Paint Flammable?

    Truth be told, there is no one answer to this question. Almost all paints are different from each other and they exhibit different characteristics. Whether a paint is flammable or not is determined by the kind of solvent that is present in it. The solvent holds the various ingredients in the paint together and helps in delivering the color and texture. 

    Paints that are flammable contain a good amount of solvent that gets transferred to the walls after you are done painting. And once the painting is over, you can smell the solvent evaporating from the walls. This is when you need good ventilation to ensure that you do not breathe in any harmful chemicals. 

    If you end up in a windowless room for hours right after it has been painted, there’s a high chance that you will inhale toxic chemicals. And that can cause serious damage to your lungs. 

    In case you have any difficulty in understanding if a paint is flammable or not, there’s a small trick that can help. Always remember that water-based paints are not inflammable and are completely safe for use. 

    On the other hand, aerosol paints come with propellant pressurized cans that enable you to deliver an even layer of paint. However, it is this feature that makes them inflammable. So, you must take proper care when working with one. 

    Are Acrylic Paints Flammable? 

    Acrylic paints are completely water-based, so there’s no chance that they will be inflammable. They usually don’t contain any trace of flammable oils in it, and the water content acts as an emulsifier. 

    When you are using acrylic colors that are water-based, you can easily wash them with soap. This makes maintenance pretty easy and does not require you to come in contact with toxic elements. And when you are using acrylic paints, there is no need for a thinner, which can be quite inflammable. 

    However, this in no way means that it is safe to put acrylic colors on your body or put them in your mouth. In case you accidentally put some on yourself, try to remove it immediately. 

    Actually, acrylic colors are pretty non-toxic when used on regular surfaces. Each brand has a different drying time, and you would get all the details printed on the instruction manual. On average, it does not take more than a day’s time for acrylic paints to dry. 

    That said, we’d still suggest that you use acrylic paints in well-ventilated space. This is because the other chemicals present in it might make you feel suffocated. 

    Are Spray Paints Flammable? 

    Spray paint is highly flammable, and you must take proper care when handling it. Just like soda is pressurized in the can, so are spray paints. They are highly pressurized and contain a good amount of butane and propane gasses. These two elements work as propellants. 

    You might be wondering why to use a propellant in a spray can? Well, it is the gasses and the pressure that help the color come out of the can with much ease. The moment you press on the nozzle, the pressure gets released, and the paint gets pushed to the bottom of the spray can. 

    Once the pressure is put on the valve, it reaches the end of the can and enters the dip tube, and comes right out of it. This way, the paint comes out of the nozzle, and there’s some amount of propellant in it too. And this is what makes the spray color pretty flammable.

    At other times, the paint comes out of the can in the form of a uniform mist. Propellants contain particles that repel each other, which means that the longer they stay, the further the mist will be repelled. 

    Make sure that you apply the paint in a way that the repelling is uniform for the color to get used properly. The further the nozzle is placed from the canvas, the better will be the application and the spread. And ensure that you take proper care to not puncture the can, as that would release all the pressure at one go. This will make all the contents come out at once. 

    Are Oil-Based Paints Flammable? 

    Oils are flammable, and so are oil-based paints. They catch fire easily because of the solvents present in them. A lot of users choose to use latex paints instead. But, there are indeed many users who still prefer to use oil-based paints. However, more and more people are getting inclined towards using latex paints today. 

    People are looking for other alternatives because of the restrictions that many states place on the use of oil-based paints. Because of the limits, getting hold of these paints and their disposal both become pretty challenging. Other than that, most oil-based paints have chemical solvents that give rise to volatile gases. 

    As a result, some states do not allow users to dispose of oil-based paints in toilets and drainage. Without proper measures, they can create quite some trouble in the water treatment plants. Paint thinners also need to be carefully disposed of as they might give rise to a fire if not handled properly. 

    However, this is not the case in every country, and there are many places where painters choose to use oil-based colors. If you are planning to do the same, we only recommend that you handle it with care. When you do that, the risks become considerably less. 

    Are Latex Paints Flammable? 

    Latex paints, like acrylic, are composed of water-based components and acrylic polymer, which makes them entirely non-flammable. Apart from the polymer microparticles that are used as binders in both types, there’s hardly any difference between the two. 

    As we have mentioned in the previous section, a lot of people are selecting latex as a better alternative to oil-based paints. So, you will get to see many people opting for it to color their indoor and outdoor walls. The shift in preference seems justified as latex paints are not at all harmful to the skin because there are no toxic elements in them. 

    Latex paints that you use today are made of synthetic resins, which do not easily expand or contract as oil paint does. Even if you come in contact with them, they are not harmful and can be easily washed off. But make sure that you do not ingest them or purposely paint your body with one. 

    The other advantage is that latex paints are porous in nature and as a result, they don’t not trap moisture. However, ensure that you give the primer some time to dry off before putting in the latex paint. Otherwise, the final output will not be nice. 

    Paint Safety Recommendations 

    It is not like flammable paints cannot be worked with. However, you need to know the correct ways of handling them. Be it flammable or non-flammable color; you need to know how to use them well. 

    Efficient Storage 

    Make sure that you store the paints well to ensure that they do not cause any problem. And while storing them, remember to not put the flammable variants near a heat source. Even a tiny mistake can lead to big troubles in situations like this. 

    Apart from that, remember to not smoke near the paint and maintain the highest amount of safety. Consider keeping a fire extinguisher nearby. If you store the pigments well, their chances of catching fire are significantly less. So, try to keep them away from kids and pets and try disposing of them at a toxic dumping site if they are flammable.

    Effective Ventilation 

    To prevent fire or uneasiness caused by toxic chemicals in paints, it is essential that you work in areas that are well-ventilated. We understand that it is not always possible to set up an outdoor workshop. In that case, try to work near the windows and keep them open. If you still feel a little stuffy, it is best to install a fan in the room to improve air circulation. 

    Proper Cleaning 

    As we have mentioned before, there are many paints that contain toxic substances. So, it is best to clean the work area and yourself after you are done working for the day. Any uncleaned trace may cause a lot of damage. 

    Also, do not forget to clean the ladders, cleaning cloths, and tools in your workshop. 

    Is Paint Flammable?

    Final Words 

    With that, it’s a wrap for today.

    We hope that you had a great time learning about the different types of paints and understanding how to handle them best. One must pay good attention to paint quality, but that does not mean that there is no need to neglect your safety. 

    All paints are different and exhibit different characteristics. And before you start working with them, it is essential that you know whether they are inflammable or not. In case they are, you can take the necessary measures to stay safe. With good knowledge about paints, it will get easier for you to use them without any hassle. 

    If you have any further queries, feel free to reach out to us in the comments section below. And for more exciting reads, keep a watch on this space. 

    Until next time, fare thee well!

    Related Articles

    7 Best Gold Paint For Wood

    9 Best Paint Primer For Drywall Tested

    Epoxy Paint For Wood 101

    9 Best Paint Brush For Polyurethane

    5 of The Best Paint for Canvas Today

    How To Paint Trim Near Carpet

    7 Best Cold Galvanizing Paints

    How to Remove Spray Paint from Concrete

    7 Best Primers For Covering Red Paint

    11 Best Paint Roller To Hide Imperfections Tested

    9 Best Paints For Closets 

    6 Best Paint Primer For Rusted Metal

    Be it a pro or a beginner, every gardener seeks the best methods to improve plant growth.

    Now, there are a ton of products available in the market, promising desired results, but most don’t live up to our expectations. And the others instill in us the fear of chemicals seeping into the garden’s produce.

    Understanding your plight, we’re here to introduce you to a safer alternative to these products. Mushroom compost is one of the most widely used types of soil amendments that’s capable of fulfilling every gardener’s needs.

    But is it good for tomatoes? Here’s where you’ll find out.

    After spending hours on research, we’ve managed to create this informative guide, which provides relevant information about the use of mushroom compost in growing tomatoes. Furthermore, we’ve highlighted the common problems associated with tomato plants followed by the benefits of mushroom compost.

    So, without further ado, let’s begin!

    What Is Mushroom Compost?

    Mushroom Compost prepare in Mushroom farming plantation agriculture

    Before coming to the conclusion of whether or not mushroom compost is good for tomatoes, it makes sense to get to know its composition. Let’s start by tackling the common misconception that mushroom compost comprises real mushrooms as its primary ingredient.

    It’s rather a combination of organic materials, such as peat moss, hay, hulls, chicken manure, corn cobs, and others. However, the ingredients used to make mushroom compost may vary, depending on the source. And the desired output is obtained after each component is estimated and thoroughly combined.

    That said, making this compost is as simple as soaking finely cut straw in water. A mix of the organic materials is combined with the straw and then placed in the hot compost pile for around 30 days. The straw serves as structure and food to bacteria, while the chicken manure, urea, and peat moss provide the required nutrients.

    With bacteria thriving, the heat rises to more than 160 degrees, which, in turn, kills any pathogen or weed seed present in the straw. Consequently, after several weeks of moistening and turning, the pile darkens, indicating that the mushroom compost is ready to use.

    The compost can then be used as an amendment to enrich the soil, raise its pH value, and retain moisture. It’s also widely used in commercial mushroom facilities to grow crops and later sold to landscaping businesses, agricultural businesses, and farm co-ops for resale.

    Is Mushroom Compost Good For Growing Tomatoes?

    By now, you’re well aware of mushroom compost, its ingredients, and the chemical process involved in its formation. So, it’s time we answered the most crucial question forming the foundation of this guide - is mushroom compost good for tomatoes?

    Without beating around the bush, using this compost type to grow tomatoes can definitely prove to be beneficial. It’s rich in several minerals and nutrients that are crucial for the growth and development of the tricky fruit.

    On that note, let’s discuss the common problems associated with growing tomatoes before highlighting the benefits of using mushroom compost to eliminate the issues.

    Problems Associated With Growing Tomatoes

    It’s not easy to grow tomatoes since they’re prone to diseases. But interestingly, the common problems faced by tomato plants can be addressed by mushroom compost as well.

    This section will help you identify the plant disease and its cause so that it’s tackled no later than it appears.

    1. Blossom End Rot

    Lack of sufficient water or calcium leads to dark blotches at the end of your tomato plant, commonly known as blossom end rot. It may also be caused by a lack of calcium in the soil, contributing to soil dry-out.

    The use of mushroom compost helps retain enough water for the plant. Plus, it adds nutrients and minerals like calcium to the soil to overcome this problem.

    1. Tomato Blight

    Most varieties of tomatoes are resistant to tomato blight, but a few variants, commonly grown in regions with wet climates, are susceptible to this problem. So, if you notice the fruits and leaves of your plant rotting prematurely, try spraying liquid mushroom compost. It acts as an excellent aid for protecting the tomato plant.

    1. Mold

    Yellow patches on the leaves of the plant are an indicator of leaf mold. It contributes to the loss of tomatoes, so try growing a plant variant that’s naturally mold-resistant and make sure you keep the area ventilated.

    Of course, the use of mushroom compost as mulch is another excellent way of addressing this issue. It helps the plant resist mold and kills pathogens in the soil.

    Benefits Of Using Mushroom Compost For Growing Tomatoes

    As you already know, mushroom compost is a proven type of soil amendment used for mushroom cultivation. It’s rich in nutrients and helps tackle common problems like mold, blossom end rot, and tomato blight, allowing tomato plants to thrive well.

    Here we’ll be listing and discussing a few more reasons why using mushroom compost is beneficial for the growth of tomatoes.

    1. Early Growth-Stage Protection

    Mushroom compost is not only rich in minerals like calcium, but it also increases the soil’s alkaline content in the early growing stages of your plant. As such, it protects the crop from diseases from the get-go.

    1. Food For Plants

    When compost is laid as mulch or mixed with the garden soil, nutrients are slowly released to serve as food for your hungry tomato plants. That’s not all; the soil amendment stimulates beneficial microbes to promote growth.

    1. Natural Anti-Bacterial Protection

    If not addressed promptly, pests and pathogens can cause a nuisance by killing plants. But tomato growers can always use liquid compost, which is also referred to as mushroom compost tea, to protect their plants from various bacteria and diseases naturally.

    1. Superior Weed Control

    Let’s face it; no one likes having to deal with pesky weeds growing in their vegetable or fruit garden. Luckily, mushroom compost comes to our rescue.

    A thick layer of compost blocks weed growth, overcoming the constant struggles gardeners have to deal with during the tomato planting season.

    1. Generates Sufficient Drainage

    Often gardeners end up overwatering their tomato plants, which eventually leads to the rotting of roots. And if the soil isn’t compacted with proper drainage, water-logging and root drowning further add to problems.

    Remember, tomato plants grow well in moist but well-drained soil. So, give the soil what it needs to promote the growth and development of the fruit by adding mushroom compost. What’s more, the compost can help improve chalky, compact, and clay-based soil.

    1. Organic Soil Amendment

    We’ve already explained the process involved in making mushroom compost. As such, you must be aware that it’s organic, comprising all-natural ingredients, including peat moss, hay, and chicken manure.

    That said, mushroom compost is safe to use; you need not worry about chemicals seeping into your tomatoes at any point in time. It neutralizes the alkaline content of the soil and adds nutrients as per the tomato plants’ needs.

    1. No Foul Odor

    You might presume that since mushroom compost comprises domestic animal manure as one of its primary ingredients, it produces a foul odor. However, that’s not true; it does smell musty, but it doesn’t stink.

    Gardeners can use their bare hands to mix this compost in a container bag without throwing up. And once it’s added to the garden soil, the musty smell slowly disappears. So, you need not worry about your tomatoes smelling unpleasant when they’re ready for harvest.

    How To Use Mushroom Compost For Tomatoes?

    Now that we’ve already concluded that mushroom compost is highly beneficial to the growth of tomatoes, let’s talk about how it should be used.

    To answer the question, it can be used just like you’d use any other compost. All you have to do is mix it in with the soil in your tomato plant pots. You may even fill a grow bag with compost and plant tomatoes in that.

    Mushroom compost is known for its high water retention rate. So, there’s no need to worry about your plants drying out due to lack of sufficient water in the soil even if you fail to water the soil every day. It always manages to keep the water level constant.

    You can also grow tomatoes in your garden using mushroom compost. Create a mulch layer by spreading compost evenly on the top layer of the soil with the help of a rake or hoe. This will help trap moisture and protect your tomato plants.

    And for treating diseases like tomato blight and leaf mold, spray compost tea, a dark-colored fluid rich in nutrients and minerals used to fight fungus and bacteria seen in garden vegetables. It’s relatively easy to make from the compost pile; just dump a trowel of compost into a bucket of water and allow it to stay for a day or two.

    Does Mushroom Compost Burn Plants?

    There’s a common notion surrounding mushroom compost, stating that it can burn plants. Is it true? Well, it is, to a certain extent.

    Newly germinating seedlings and tomato plants that are sensitive to alkaline are at a higher risk of burning because of the high soluble salt level in mushroom compost. This is why professional gardeners always suggest mixing compost with garden soil to protect the plant from damage.

    However, you may also reduce the risk of burning by allowing the compost to sit for at least a few months before use. Another way to protect your plant is by allowing the freshly applied mushroom compost to stand uncovered during winter for curing.

    red tomatoes on a branch

    Final Words

    There’s no doubt that mushroom compost can benefit your tomato garden in different ways. And it serves as a smart and affordable choice when it comes to soil amendment.

    From retaining moisture in the soil to adding essential nutrients like calcium, this organic produce fulfills all the requirements for promoting the growth of tomatoes. However, it’s important to note that tomatoes grown in compost alone are susceptible to damage due to the high content of soluble salts.

    So, make sure you mix the right amount of mushroom compost in garden soil and remove unwanted weeds prior to application. On that note, we come to the end of this informative guide.

    Here’s hoping we were able to help you grow healthy tomatoes using mushroom compost. We’ll definitely be back with more useful guides related to gardening.

    Till then, you’re welcome to reach out to us in case of any queries related to the topic.

    Related Articles

    Epsom Salt In Gardening 101 | All You Need to Know

    How To Use A Greenhouse For Beginners

    What Is Mulch & How To Use It Today

    Learn How To Make A Soaker Hose From A Regular Hose

    Revive Organic Soil Treatment Granules Reviewed

    Branding dominates purchase, whether you like it or not!

    No matter how big or small your investment is, there's no good reason why you wouldn’t like a branded commodity. After all, who doesn’t like owning products that are from a popular brand? And let’s face it, when your neighbor says she has a particular brand’s bathtub, it only makes you more proud of your decision!

    But in doing so, there’s possibly no reason why you’d compromise utility and cost-efficiency. That’s why the actual value of a product will always depend on its utility and durability.

    That being said, there are a few brands that strike the right balance between quality and pomp. And one such brand that makes us keep coming back to its products is Kohler. We just can’t get enough of their plumbing fixtures!

    But in case you’re still wondering if buying a Kohler product will be worth your hard-earned bucks, read our factual reasons for speaking highly of this brand.

    Is Kohler A Good Brand?

    Where Did It All Begin?

    Before we walk you through the deets, allows us to shed some light on the brand’s inception. In 1873, John Micheal Kohler, an immigrant from Australia, along with his partner Charles Silberzahn, spent $5,000 to buy the Sheboygan Union Iron and Steel Foundry from its owner and Kohler’s father-in-law, Jacob Vollrath.

    Shortly afterwards, they began producing various items, including pieces of ornamental iron like cemetery crosses and settees, and castings for furniture factories and steel farms under the name “Kohler.” However, it was in 1883 when the brand got its big breakthrough.

    John applied enamel to a horse trough made of cast-iron and was able to build the brand’s first-ever bathtub. Since then, plumbing fixtures is what Kohler has been best known for. Although the brand has had its share of controversies over the years, their top-notch products have earned the trust of customers worldwide.

    Kohler’s Product Line

    Kohler has tried its hand in different specializations, but its bathroom and kitchen fixtures are the main products that run synonymous with the brand name. Almost all of the company’s plumbing fixtures are available in various hardware, DIY, and home improvement stores across the States. And its iconic bathtub remains one of the top-selling products to this day!

    But that’s not all; Destination Kohler, the company’s real estate and travel wing, owns several properties in the US and Scotland. In 2017, the brand acquired Clark Energy - a US-based company specializing in end-to-end production of engine-based power plants. Apart from that, Kohler is also the authorized GE global distributor for its reciprocating engines.

    Is Kohler A Good Brand?

    To answer it in a single word, we will say a big yes! There’s no doubt that Kohler demands all your attention when you think of buying a plumbing fixture. But what makes the brand worth all this praise? Let's’ find out!

    1. Tradition Of Quality

    For a brand that has been in the market for more than a century now, you can completely trust it to meet all your plumbing needs. Be it toilets, faucets, or bathtubs, Kohler has got it all. But what appeals to us the most is the quality of their products. The brand puts equal effort in maintaining and improving product quality in accordance with present and future requirements.

    For instance, Kohler toilets are a very popular choice in the US, which directly competes with other leading brands like American Standard, Woodbridge, and Toto, among others.

    1. User Reviews

    A simple online query about any Kohler product will fetch a lot of positive reviews, which is a testimony of the brand’s positive presence. And there are a couple of good reasons for that. In 2015, Kohler created a walk-in division, which put on display the engineering of bathtubs that are specifically designed for users with disability or mobility issues.

    This range became popular rather quickly and earned the brand a reputation for being considerate to all sections of the society. Its creations are sold via independent dealers throughout the country.

    In the same year, The Builder Magazine named Kohler as the ‘best quality’ and ‘most used’ brand in the bath accessories category. It also bestowed the brand with the top spot in the list of ‘most used’, ‘customer brand familiarity’, and ‘quality rating’ for the whirlpool bath fixtures range. Moreover, the brand creates customized artist works with hand-painted sinks and toilets.

    1. Raging International Success

    As we have mentioned multiple times, Kohler has successfully created a name for itself in the global market, thanks to its range of quality products.

    Visit any home improvement store in Asia or Europe, and you will likely find Kohler as one of the mainstay brands that they have on offer. In fact, many users say that it’s the ‘Apple equivalent’ of bathroom fixtures. Now that’s what we call reputation!

    Beyond that, Kohler created a joint venture called Kohler-YinXiang Ltd. in China in 2007 to manufacture small-scale gasoline engines. The brand intends to import these engines, rather than manufacturing them in the country. Likewise, Kohler’s UK subsidiary is the Gloucestershire-county-based Kohler Mira Ltd., which is best known for its Mira showers.

    Plus, Kohler has an active involvement in various development projects with other countries like Australia, India, France, and Singapore, among others. What else can possibly speak of its global popularity?

    1. Ever-Evolving Technology

    Modern life is incomplete with technology, and Kohler understands this like no other. Recently in 2022, the brand unveiled a line of ‘Kohler Connect’ products (at the year’s CES convection), consisting of smart connected products like mirrors, bathtubs, showerheads, shower valves, and toilets.

    These fixtures will be equipped with WiFi, voice assistance (compatible with Google Assistant, Apple HomeKit, or Amazon Alexa), and app control support, thanks to the brand’s own Kohler Konnect App. To that end, the company’s engineers are using the Microsoft Azure Cloud System, and Kohler has already spent millions for this purpose, with more investments to follow.

    It’s worth mentioning that the brand’s love affair with technology began in the early 20th century when it started making drinking fountains with a ‘bubbling valve’. These valves later came to be known as bubblers, which helped with the vertical motion of water.

    1. Corporate Social Responsibility

    Kohler’s activities are ably helmed by a group of socially conscious administrators, executives, and managers. Consequently, the company is continuously striving to give back to the community and the planet as a whole. In their 2017 Sustainability And Stewardship Report, the brand put forward their progress in creating more energy-efficient and eco-friendly products.

    Besides, the company puts continual efforts via its Habitat For Humanity Project that builds homes for the underprivileged. In addition, it holds regular drives for providing clean and safe water through the Kohler Run For Charity event. And it had also lent a helping hand for victims of the Mexico earthquake in 2017.

    Apart from that, it supports various charities and NGOs worldwide, which are involved in pushing for relevant advocacies.

    1. Warranty

    Unless stated otherwise, all Kohler products come with an automatic limited warranty of one-year. This also covers defects in design and material for one-year post-installation. Besides, there are several other additional warranties for different products, which are available on the warranty page of the brand’s official website.

    Controversies

    To give you a fair picture, it only makes sense for us to list down some of the infamous controversies that have troubled the brand.

    In 1998, the company planned to buy back all shares that didn’t belong to the family. For this, each family member was required to exchange their shares for unsalable limited rights share. However, the company was yet to become a public-traded firm, meaning the number of floating shares were less. 

    Going ahead with the plan, Kohler offered a sum of $54,000 per share, an evaluation which was challenged by several shareholders. Not only that, the IRS (Internal Revenue Service) filed a prosecution case, which was ultimately won by the company.

    The very next year, Kohler found itself in the midst of another controversy when the US Department of Labor alleged that the company practiced discriminatory hiring against females. Prior to this, the company did formally announce that women employees should have a minimum height of 5’4’’ (the average height of an adult female).

    Owing to its obligation to the government, Kohler was barred from implementing this hiring criterion. They settled the case and hired more than 100 from among the 2,000 women candidates who applied for a position between 1994 and 1995.

    In The Late 2000 

    A few years later in 2005, China’s Labor Watch accused Kohler China Co. of violating workers’ rights in its Foshan factory. The welfare organization accused Kohler of implementing excessive work hours, low wages, insufficient overtime compensation, and uncompensated work injuries, among other things.

    Perhaps the last controversy erupted at the beginning of this year when the company settled a multi-million dollar lawsuit. The US Department of Justice, the Environmental Protection Agency, and the state of California filed a complaint as the company’s small engine production violated the Clean Air Act and California law.

    Where Can You Buy Kohler Products?

    Popular e-commerce websites like Amazon, Wayfair, and Houzz can be surfed for almost all of the brand’s products. But if you prefer taking a detailed look, feel free to walk into any Kohler or major home improvement store in any part of the country.

    Final Words

    There you have it! We hope that this guide could tell you why we think Kohler is a good brand. Sure, it didn’t have a smooth evolution, but the brand has done a commendable job in maintaining and improving the quality of both its products and services.

    This is evident from the fact that Destination Kohler has been appointed as the official tourism agency for the Village of Kohler, Wisconsin.

    At the same time, we also agree that Kohler might not be as famous as some of its American competitors, but there are still plenty of reasons why you should choose it over others. Plus, it has always been a forerunner in engineering products for the future. So, try a Kohler product today and decide for yourself.

    That’s all the time we have today. So long!

    Related Articles

    9 Best American Standard Toilet Right Now

    8 Best Bidet Toilet Combos Right Now

    13 Best Soft Close Toilet Seats

    7 Best [Macerating] Upflush Toilets

    11 Best Composting Toilet

    7 Best Toto Toilets 

    13 Best Septic Tank Treatments

    7 Best Dual Flush Toilet [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    How to Use a Sauna Right

    Toto Neorest NX1, 550H & 700H [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    Kohler Santa Rosa Toilet Review [All You Need to Know]

    Convenient Height Toilet Review [All You Need to Know]

    11 Best Toilet Flappers [Buyer’s Guide]

    5 Best Gerber Toilets Reviewed [All You Need to Know]

    11 Best Toilet Clog Remover [Reviewed & Buyer’s Guide]

    One of the greatest things about technology is that it has resulted in all kinds of convenience for our lives. We have everything from the best means of communication through our smartphones to robotic vacuum cleaners that take away all the effort we never want to put into keeping our homes clean.

    In fact, it is not uncommon to find robots doing the work that we never wanted to do ourselves. Robots first came around when we created machines to take on more intricate tasks like shaping, cutting and welding in factories. The machines offer better precision and take away a lot of the physical labor we would otherwise invest in performing various tasks. This saves us a lot of time, money and effort, so we can focus on other important things.

    Nowadays, robots are becoming more commonplace. You can find them in homes carrying out household chores. One of the most dreaded chores is sweeping and vacuuming the floors and the iRobot Roomba models make life a lot simpler for us.

    We are going to take a look at and compare three of the best iRobot Roomba models: 675, 680, and 690. This will give you a better idea of the qualities these devices bring with them, so you can make the best buying decision for your home.

    At first glance, you might think that all three models have little to no difference between them. Each model looks similar and it would not be surprising to assume that they have minor improvements. Our detailed look into all the three models will tell you exactly how different they are from each other, so you know which one offers you the best value for your money, based on your needs.

    iRobot Roomba 675 Vs 680 Vs 690

    HEPA Filter

    675

    Sale
    iRobot Roomba Vac Robot Vacuum (Q0120) - Easy to use,...
    • Capacity volume - .6 liter. Works with Alexa for voice...
    • Clean and schedule from anywhere with the iRobot HOME App;...

    Roomba needs little introduction itself since it is one of the first robotic vacuums that came into existence. The iRobot Roomba 675 is a good example of the company’s engineering ingenuity.

    The first aspect we are going to look at in this comparison guide is the filtration system. There is a removable dirt bin in the 675, which is capable of holding 0.6 liters of debris, which is significantly large for robotic vacuum cleaners. The bin does not just contain dirt and debris, but it also houses the filter.

    The frosted and net-style filter is a standard filtration media. It can trap a decent range of small and large particles. Pretty much a standard filter, you need to replace it every couple of months. The filter is not an HEPA-filter, so it might not perform very well in a household where you have pets.

    680

    The filter on the iRobot Roomba 685 is a lot better at capturing and retaining super-fine dust particles as it sweeps and vacuums the flooring. This model features the same construction with a removable dirt and dust bin, which is capable of holding the dirt and debris collected. It also comes with a standard filtration system.

    The finest dust and debris like pollen, pet dander, and microscopic bugs require something super-fine like a HEPA filter and unfortunately, the 680 does not feature that.

    690

    iRobot Roomba 690 Robot Vacuum-Wi-Fi Connectivity, Works...
    • Clean and schedule from anywhere with the iRobot HOME App;...
    • Patented 3-Stage Cleaning System and Dual Multi-Surface...

    While both the 675 and 680 have substantial filters, the iRobot Roomba 690 beats them because of one vital factor: it boasts a HEPA filter. The filtration system on the 690 is far more efficient at capturing and eliminating up to 99% of the microscopic particles as small as 0.3µ.

    People who suffer from allergies or those with pets will really appreciate this cleaner because of the HEPA filter.

    When you have a HEPA filter in place, you can never go wrong. Of course, a premium feature like that entails premium pricing. If you are a homeowner who does not have pets or experience breathing problems due to allergies, you might be better off with the 675 or the 680. For those who really need to get something comprehensive in taking care of microscopic dirt and debris, the 690 is definitely the way to go.

    Wi-Fi Connectivity and Smartphone App

    675

    iRobot offers several ways to connect to the 675 and control it. For people who prefer straightforward controls, there are several buttons on the unit itself, along with indicator lights that tell you about the functions and battery life.

    Those who want their home appliances to be smart and compatible with Amazon Alexa and Google Home devices, you will really love the 675. You can pair the vacuum to any of these two AI assistants and you can control the device without even having to touch it.

    You can even enjoy Wi-Fi connectivity without the need of a virtual assistant by installing the iRobot App on your Android or Apple smartphone. Use the app to decide on an automated cleaning schedule. You can even set the device to send you push notifications on your phone about the status and minute-by-minute update on the device’s cleaning efforts.

    680

    The iRobot 680 should offer you the convenience of WiFi connectivity and the use of a smartphone app to allow you to control the device remotely. After all, having a robotic vacuum cleaner is only as good as the convenience it provides, right?

    It is unfortunate that the iRobot 680 does not offer WiFi connectivity or control through a smartphone app. You can still press the buttons on the device itself so that it has an automated schedule to work with, so the 680 is not entirely cumbersome.

    690

    The 690 does not just give you Wi-Fi connectivity options with the robotic vacuum cleaner. You can connect it with your Amazon Alexa or Google Home to make the appliance a much smarter device, which you can control through simple voice commands.

    You also have the option of using an app on your smartphone to set the schedule, based on your convenience.

    Having a smart vacuum cleaner that can automatically clean your home is the kind of convenience you expect when you get a robotic vacuum cleaner. In terms of maximum convenience, the 675 and the 690 definitely have an edge over the 680 that does not offer WiFi connectivity or smartphone connectivity.

    Recharge and Resume

    675

    With these portable robotic devices, it is really important that they are able to take on the function of cleaning the home comprehensively whether or not you are around. That is the whole point of getting an automated machine, right?

    Well, there will come a point when the battery will run low. The iRobot 675 has sensors, which allow it to navigate back to the charging port when the battery is low and the device stays there until the battery gets back to 100%. The device does not resume where it left off, if it had to recharge during a cleaning cycle.

    680

    The iRobot 680 is similar to the 675 when it comes to its low battery level and charging situation. When the appliance has a low battery level, it will head back to the charging dock on its own and stay there until the battery is fully recharged.

    Unfortunately, the device will not resume picking up where it left off, if the battery became low during a cleaning cycle. The device will sit and wait at the charging dock until you get back home and set it off on the cleaning cycle again.

    690

    Just like the 675 and the 680, the iRobot 690 will return to the charging dock when the battery becomes low. After the device recharges, it will stay there until you provide it the command to resume cleaning. Of course, that does not mean you need to be home in order to operate the device.

    When the battery is charged, the device will send you a push notification on your smartphone if you have an internet connection. You can decide to set it off to resume the cleaning cycle. You can send it a command and it will get right back to work.

    Carpet Cleaning Capability

    675

    If you have ever looked at robotic vacuum cleaners before, you might have heard about iRobot’s three-stage cleaning system. This is a simple configuration in which there is a powerful suction flow, two brush rolls below and one side brush.

    On a smooth surface, almost any robotic vacuum can do a good job. The real test is in cleaning carpets. The brush rolls, right next to the suction inlet, work together by spinning in the opposite direction to loosen up dirt and debris from carpets. The smaller brush is rubberized to help pick up dirt more efficiently. The 675 does not disappoint when it comes to the performance on a thin carpet.

    680

    The iRobot 680 delivers flawless results on hardwood floors and tiles. However, when it comes to cleaning carpets, it is a major disappointment. The brushes and suction power are pretty good, but they are incapable of providing a great job of cleaning carpets.

    690

    The 690 does not come with specialized features for cleaning carpets, but it is definitely a device that boasts the kind of power to clean at least thin carpets. It has more than enough suction flow to pick up debris and microscopic organisms that its brush rolls dislodge from between the fibers.

    If the floors in your home do not primarily consist of shaggy and thick carpets or rugs, any of these three will work out well for your needs. Of course, if your home has pets and you need a device that is able to pick up dust mites, pet dander and dirt particles from thin rugs, the iRobot 690 is definitely going to be your best bet.

    Remember that you can get other models, which are better equipped to deal with carpeted floors than these three.

    Virtual Wall

    675

    A virtual wall is essentially a barrier that you can set, which will prevent the robotic vacuum cleaner from passing through. Some people want to keep their robotic vacuum cleaners limited to a particular room, or keep it from wandering into areas of the house where they do not need it. Placing a virtual barrier near the locations will make sure that the robotic vacuum cleaner remains in the allocated area. The 675 does not feature that option.

    680

    The iRobot 680 also does not feature the virtual wall setting. This means you cannot expect it to avoid going to a particular area until and unless there is something physically blocking its path.

    690

    The iRobot 690, on the other hand, does have this incredibly convenient feature if you ever need it. You can set up the virtual wall to limit the areas where the vacuum cleaner will go to clean. If you have a particularly problematic area where you need spot cleaning, you can set up the virtual walls to limit the device to that particular area.

    While you might think the virtual wall is a pretty big feature, it really does not matter a lot unless your requirements are very specific. The 675 and 680 models still offer comprehensive cleaning and the only difference between them and the 690 is that they do not discriminate whose room they are cleaning.

    Roomba 675 Vs 680 Vs 690 Bottom Line

    We do feel that at the end of the day, the winner between these three models is quite clearly the iRobot Roomba 690. While we would not call the iRobot Roomba 675 or the iRobot Roomba 680 exactly obsolete, they are slightly outdated as compared to the 690.

    The 690 is far more convenient to operate. All you need to do is connect it with your virtual assistant or smartphone through an app to give it remote commands. You can set its cleaning schedules based on your convenience without having to even touch it and you get all the push notifications for the device status right on your phone.

    All three models are quite good, but based on the features of all three models, we would suggest going for the iRobot Roomba 690.

    Related Articles

    55 Best Robot Vacuum Names For Your Little One

    Bissell Crosswave 1785A vs. 2306A

    Bissell 1806 vs. Bissell 1940

    Bissell 3624 Vs. 2694 [SpotClean Portable Cleaners Compared]

    Hoover Power Scrub Deluxe Vs. Hoover Turbo Scrub

    Roborock H7 Vacuum Cleaner

    10 Best Shop Vacs For Dust Collection

    13 Best Vacuum for Stairs

    13 Best Non-Electric Vacuum Sweepers

    6 Best Vacuum Cleaners for Mattress That Promote Healthy Sleeping

    Bissell BigGreen 86T3 vs. BG10 | Carpet Cleaner Comparison

    6 Smallest Wet Dry Vacs For Home and Workshop

    9 Best Cyclone Dust Collector

    13 Best Central Vacuum Systems

    The Best Vintage Vacuum Cleaners To Collect

    Best Vacuums for Tile Floors

    8 Best Central Vacuum Hose

    McCulloch MC1385 or Vapamore MR100

    11 Best Central Vacuum Attachment Kits, Powerheads & Brushes

    Whether you're an avid gardener or have recently developed a green thumb, you must've dealt with annoying weeds. There is an effective way to fight them - landscape fabric.

    While some gardeners prefer using chemical products and sprays to eliminate weeds, others might use weed picking tools for the job. However, if you're looking for a convenient and effective option to help you fight weeds, landscape fabric is a good choice.

    The best thing about using this weed control method is that it is cost-effective and easy to install. Moreover, the fabric is breathable, allowing your beautiful garden to grow while effectively discouraging weed growth.

    With several options of landscape fabric in the market, gardeners can choose according to their requirements. Whether you want woven or non-woven fabric depends on how you wish to grow your garden.

    Now, let us tell you all about installing this effective weed barrier.

    How To Install Landscape Fabric For Weed Control

    Farmer transplanting young leek seedlings into mulching cloth during spring, close up of his hands and the plants

    What You Need

      • Landscape fabric
      • Garden hoe
      • Steel rake
      • Hammer
      • Utility knife
      • Landscape fabric staples
      • Plants (optional)
      • Mulch and other ground covers (also optional)

    Step 1 - Start By Removing All Vegetation

    The first thing you'll need to do is remove all forms of vegetation using a garden hoe or steel rake. Remove any plants, grass, and weeds along with their roots. Ensure that you dig deep enough to remove the roots - this is important, as you don't want to leave anything behind in the soil. Leaving any roots or small plants can cause them to grow over the landscape fabric.

    You may also choose to kill the vegetation instead by using a broad-spectrum herbicide. Make sure to follow the manufacturer's instructions carefully when doing this. Also, keep yourself safe by wearing any protective gear you might need.

    Step 2 - Clearing & Leveling The Soil

    The next step is to clear the soil of any remaining roots, dead leaves, and debris. Use the steel garden rake (bow rake) to remove twigs, leaves, roots, stones, debris, and sharp objects from the soil. Throw away the collected rubbish material and level the soil using the rake.

    Step 3 - Carefully Place The Landscape Fabric

    Now comes one of the most important steps - cutting the landscape fabric to size. Lay down the landscape fabric parallel to the leveled soil and measure it carefully. Try and be as accurate as possible when doing this. Ensure that you cut enough landscape fabric to cover the area you have just leveled.

    Use the utility knife to cut large pieces out, according to your measurements. It is practical to cut out slightly more fabric than your precise measurements, as you can always trim it later. However, cutting it too close to the measurements and then having less material to work with can be an issue.

    You might require more than one row of landscape fabric. In this case, we suggest that you overlap the fabric by at least 6 inches (although the recommended overlapping is 3 inches).

    Most landscape fabrics have two sides - one shiny and one dull. Ensure that you lay out the fabric on the soil with the right side up. Weigh down the fabric using stones or any other heavy object to get a precise measurement.

    Step 4 - Securing The Landscape Fabric With Staples

    Once you are satisfied with the measurements and layout, secure the landscape fabric using staples and a hammer. Drive each staple down into the ground about 10 feet apart, doing so along the edges and seams. Once this is complete, you can trim the fabric as needed for more accuracy.

    Step 5 - Use Plants Through The Landscape Fabric (Optional)

    Laying just the landscape fabric in your garden can look odd and out of place. This piece of fabric, though practical, can ruin the aesthetics of your garden.

    To avoid that, you can choose to pot beautiful plants along the surface of the fabric. It helps to have an idea about where you want to plant them, what kind of plants to use, and how many you want. However, keep in mind - the fewer holes you make in the fabric, the better.

    Taking the utility knife, make small, X-shaped incisions in the fabric. Ensure that the holes are not too large - just big enough to fit the root ball of the plant.

    Have a tub or bucket beside you when you dig the soil, dumping it into the tub rather than on the surrounding fabric. Carefully place the plant in the hole, pouring soil around the root ball. Tamp the soil, remove any excess air, and lay the flaps around the plant's base snugly.

    Step 6 - Add Mulch [Optional]

    Simply scattering potted plants around the landscape fabric might look out of place. To cover the fabric and bring together the aesthetics of the garden, add mulch (or any other ground cover).

    Make sure to add just about 2 inches of cover, and not more. You can also opt for natural mulch such as pine needles, wood chips, stone, rubble, etc. Spread it evenly, smoothing out the mulch with the rake. Do this carefully, so you don't puncture or tear the landscape fabric.

    Things To Consider Before Buying Landscape Fabric

    As with any product in the market, there are various types of landscape fabrics to choose from. Depending on your requirements, you can choose from woven and non-woven fabrics. Moreover, the appropriate material for an annual garden would be vastly different from what is appropriate for a desertscape or flower bed.

    There are a few essential things you must consider before purchasing the right landscape fabric. From material to thickness, durability, and even cost, here are some factors you need to consider:

    1. Woven Landscape Fabric

    Woven landscape fabric or perforated fabric is made from natural materials like paper, burlap, or linen. They can also be made of manmade materials like polyester. These fabrics are made while keeping the 'movement of water' in mind. They are poros and breathable, allowing water to penetrate easily through them.

    Woven fabrics are ideal for vegetable gardens or any soil which grows vegetation. The breathable material allows water to penetrate and soak the soil, thus encouraging plant growth.

    This fabric also locks in the moisture from the soil, discouraging it from evaporating. It keeps the soil rich and moist, allowing the healthy growth of plants, vegetables, and grass. This makes woven fabric ideal for flower and vegetable beds growing in dry, arid climates.

    1. Non-Woven Landscape Fabric

    As opposed to woven fabrics, these landscape fabrics are designed to suffocate all kinds of growth and vegetables. Although they allow little breathability, it is not enough to encourage any sort of growth.

    Non-woven landscape fabrics are typically made of polypropylene or polyester. It is mostly non-porous and doesn't allow the movement of water. It effectively eliminates the growth of weeds, but along with it, it also harms shrubs, plants, and the root system of trees.

    This fabric is ideally used for stabilizing the soil behind paver patios, crushed stone walkways, or retaining walls.

    1. UV Damage

    You will also find various types of landscape fabrics that offer UV protection. Of course, there is an added cost to this.

    Suppose you don't want to spend the extra money on 'UV protection,' good news! It is relatively straightforward to create your own DIY 'UV protection barrier.' Using 3 to 4 inches of mulch and other ground cover material will protect the landscape fabrics effectively.

    1. Thickness Of The Material

    Whether you opt for woven fabric or non-woven, there are varying levels of thickness offered by different manufacturers. Depending on how you plan on using the fabric, consider the thickness of the material before purchasing.

    Although thicker landscape materials might cost more initially, it is also more durable, stable, and long-lasting. The thinner landscape fabrics are more affordable but are prone to tearing.

    Consider the amount of foot traffic the fabric may eventually receive. If you plan on installing the fabric in an area where there will be constant walking, it is safer to opt for a thicker fabric.

    How To Maintain Landscape Fabric

    Landscape fabric is an effective and affordable method to control the growth of weed and stabilize the soil. Although it works perfectly fine on its own, most gardeners often opt for a ground covering, like using mulch, stones, or plants. This is done only for aesthetic and decorative purposes.

    The fabric is breathable; however, it discourages weed seeds from germinating in the soil. Moreover, it ensures that any weeds that do happen to germinate do not push their way out (from the fabric) and ruin your garden. Many of these fabrics also prevent ants, insects, and other pests from destroying vegetation.

    Here are a few tips that will help you maintain your landscape fabric.

    1. Remove and Reorganize Mulch

    If you decide to lay mulch over the fabric, you should be prepared to maintain it. The organic mulch will inevitably break down into the soil below. This supports the germination of grass and weed seeds. To prevent this from occurring, you need to replace and remove organic mulch periodically.

    It helps to keenly observe the organic mulch, looking for signs of choked debris and soil. When you notice this, remove the mulch immediately and replace it with new organic material.

    1. Clean & Maintain The Fabric

    Conversely, if you decide not to cover the fabric with any material, there is a different kind of maintenance in order.

    Soil, dust, dirt, and debris will inevitably fall onto the landscape fabric. Over time, it will get dirty. Moreover, if there is rain or snow, the fabric may face some damage. In these cases, it is imperative to clean the surface of the landscape fabric regularly.

    Any soil or dust that blows over the fabric can support the germination of weed seeds. To prevent this, you need to clean the surface by dusting or sweeping the debris away. It goes without saying that you need to be careful not to tear or damage the fabric material.

    1. Cleaning Stone Ground Covers

    You may also opt for stone or rubble ground covers. While these instantly improve the aesthetics of the garden area, they also require periodic cleaning and maintenance.

    When it comes to stone ground covers, raking them every once in a while is an excellent way to keep them clean. Hose them down with a garden hose every few weeks. You can always choose to replace the stone or rubble and lay completely new ones, adding a unique element to your garden.

    1. Maintaining The Plants

    Finally, if you decide to place plants intermittently (making holes in the landscape fabric and planting them), this is what you need to do.

    The plants require water, sunlight, and food to thrive. Generally, people plant beautiful flowers and plants in the soil under the fabric for aesthetics. In order to maintain the aesthetics, you need to tend to the plants as you normally would.

    It is important to keep a close eye on the plants, ensuring that they get enough water and food. Trimming and pruning will keep the plants looking beautiful, fresh, and vibrant.

    Benefits Of Using Landscape Fabric

    1. Weed Control

    The primary reason to use landscape fabric is for weed control. As you might already know, weed growth is detrimental to the health of your plants. Weeds are capable of stealing nutrients from other plants. This causes your beautiful vegetation to become stunted and hungry for nutrients.

    Installing landscape fabric ensures that small plants can thrive without weeds taking away their nutrition. Once these smaller plants grow large, their thick foliage does not allow sunlight to penetrate down to the soil, which the weeds require to grow.

    It also helps your plants to bear more fruits, flowers, and vegetables, as the weeds do not eat away at their nutrients.

    1. Erosion Control

    Landscape fabric can do much more than control weed. It also controls the erosion of soil due to rain, snow, overwatering, or wind. The soil remains protected under the covering of the fabric. However, since the fabric is breathable, the plants and soil do not suffer underneath, receiving adequate amounts of water, sunlight, and food.

    In places that receive large amounts of rainfall, soil erosion is extremely common. A lot of vital nutrients are also lost this way. Furthermore, soil erosion can damage your property. Laying landscape fabric under a layer of mulch can prevent this from occurring.

    1. Environment-Friendly

    If you want to maintain a beautiful garden, getting rid of weeds should be topping your priority list. Well, there are several ways to get rid of weeds. Applying chemical weed killers is one way. You can also manually pick out the weeds using various tools available in the market.

    The problem with applying chemical weed killers is that you not only effectively kill the weeds but also harm the plants and soil. Moreover, the stronger a chemical weed killer is, the more it will damage its surroundings. Most of these weed killers are potent, toxic, and not environmentally friendly.

    Opting for manual weed removers is an option; however, this can be laborious and time-consuming. Moreover, it does not eliminate weeds from growing back - only removes the ones which have already grown out.

    Landscape fabric is the ideal solution to this problem. It is cost-effective, environmentally friendly, and lasts for months or even years.

    1. Keeps Mulch In Place

    The landscape fabric is an effective way of keeping mulch and other organic covering material from sinking into the soil. If you want to decorate your flower garden with stones, pebbles, or rubble, laying them on landscape fabric will keep them in place.

    Furthermore, cleaning the mulch, stones, and rocks is much easier if the fabric is below it. It allows you to hose down the stones without allowing the dirt and dust to sink into the soil.

    1. Helps The Soil Retain Moisture

    If you live in a dry, arid climate, then dry soil can be a big problem. This kind of soil doesn't support the growth of various types of plants, flowers, and fruits. Extreme heat can also cause moisture from the soil to evaporate.

    Landscape fabric is an easy and effective way to prevent that. Although the fabric is breathable and porous, it does not allow moisture to evaporate from the soil. This retained moisture keeps the soil moist, fertile and encourages healthy plant growth.

    1. Easy To Install

    As you might have noticed in our guide above, installing landscape fabric is relatively straightforward. Once you get the measurements correctly, all you need to do is cut, trim, and install the fabric over the soil. Of course, you can always get professional help for the same.

    Close-up image of fresh spring green grass

    Final Words

    Now that you know how to install landscape fabric, do you think you will get it for your garden?

    Once you learn to install and maintain it (as we have illustrated in our guide above), landscape fabric can be a blessing in disguise. It is one of the most affordable, convenient, and long-term solutions you can opt for. Since it is environment-friendly, you don't need to worry about affecting the soil or plants around your garden.

    With that, we have finally reached the end of our guide. Wish you good luck for installing landscape fabric in your garden!

    Until next time!

    Related Articles

    The 5 Best Lawn Mowers for St Augustine Grass Right Now

    Where to Find Good St. Augustine Grass Seed & How to Grow It

    7 Best Shoes for Cutting Grass Comfortably | Buyer’s Guide

    11 Best Pine Straw Rakes

    11 Best Mosquito Fogger Insecticide

    9 Best Fertilizers for Petunias Right Now

    9 Best Fertilizers for Hydrangeas

    11 Best Fertilizers for Lilacs

    13 Best Moss Killer for Lawn

    13 Best Weed Eater String

    13 Best Potting Mix For Orchids

    13 Best Weed Torch

    How Long After Grass Starts Growing Can You Mow It?

    Does Grass Seed Go Bad | Expiration Dates Explained

    A proud garden owner knows how important is every piece of it; he knows how personal and extraordinary his garden is and how much time he invested in it. He knows that every piece of greenery contains life and every piece deserves attention. Following the same chain of thought he knows that absolutely every piece of wood wears significance and throwing away an old window or door that once protected the individual in its home would be an unforgettable act and as a result we are showcasing underneath beautiful diy upcycled gates that have previously been used in the owners home.

    DIY Upcycled Garden Gates

    It goes without saying that results are simply extraordinary, doors and windows to small heavens in all their green glory. Cast a glance at the ideas showcased below and think twice before throwing an old door or window from now on. We would love to hear your opinion on the matter in the comment section below.

    #1 Two Toned Green Doubled Door Protecting a Heaven With a Shabby Chic Design

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (1)

    #2 Old Wagon Wheel Adding Personality

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (2)

    #3 Up-cycled Bike Opening The Door to Heaven

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (3)

    #4 Small Old Window Protecting Greenery and Splendour

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (4)

    #5 Simple Old Window Opening "Le Jardin"

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (5)

    #6 Old Church Window Welcoming Curious Eyes

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (6)

    #7 Superb Garden Corner Welcoming Greenery

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (7)

    #8 Transparent Headboard Decor

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (8)

    #9 Colorful Old Doors Used as a Double Gate

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (9)

    #10 Old Tools Up-cycled Creatively Into a New Garden Door

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (10)

    #11 Creativity Unraveled in Sculptural Garden Door

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (11)

    #12 Pink Door Sheltering a Beautiful Flower Pot

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (12)

    #13 Small Red Door From Old Headboard

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (13)

    #14 Old Doors and Windows in New Setup

    Fence with doors & windows facing the patio.

    #15 White Window Presenting Inviting Scandinavian Decor

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (15)

    #16 Simple Metal and Wood Composition

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (16)

    #17 Old Metallic Headboard  Transformed Into a New Fence

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (17)

    #18 Wood Sheltering Metal in Perfect Equilibrium

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (18)

    #19 Wood and Metal Gates Can Work Extraordinary Well

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (19)

    #20 Fairy Tale Land Protected Beautifully

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (20)

    #21 You Shall Not Pass Into The Green Land

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (21)

    #22 Simple Small Old White Window Guarded by Small Twigs

    Insanely Beautiful DIY Upcycled Garden Gates That You Will Simply Adore homesthetics recycling windows and doors (22)

    What do you think? Metal and wood are working beautifully together, the perishable coziness and warmth of wood being boldly backed up by the rustic rust of metal in a mature and complete composition. Old windows, doors and headboards alike are excellent new garden gates and fences, welcome them properly in your greenery and keep the door open for new memories.

    Related Articles

    10 Best Electric Sliding Gate Openers

    There are plenty of us who have the tendency to save up on items every day, corks, plastic boxes, wine bottles, all of them cluttering up in our garage or closet with the hidden intent on our part to find someday a purpose for them. In most cases this will never happen but a creative imaginative DIY-er will find ingenious solutions for almost anything. Once in a while we enjoy a good glass of wine with friends and family and corks tend to be thrown away for having lost their primary purpose. Today we are proposing quite a fun idea: Ingenious Wine Cork Architectural Planters For Your Little Plants. You can actually nestle succulents and propagations in wine corks and even transform them into fridge magnets, bringing thus a little bit of greenery in a new unexplored territory. The cork itself, a knife, a magnet and a glue gun is all that is required for such a creative little craft. Cast a glance at our collection and next time you enjoy a bottle of wine think twice before throwing the cork away.

    Ingenious Wine Cork Planters

    Learn the step by step tutorial on how to make DIY WINE CORK PLANTERS

    You can use nail polish to paint the cork

    YOU CAN USE NAIL POLISH TO PAINT THE CORK

    Photo via: craft-e-corner.com

    The contrast between the deep green of the succulents and the cork is wonderful

    THE CONTRAST BETWEEN THE DEEP GREEN OF THE SUCCULENTS AND THE CORK IS WONDERFUL

    Photo via: greenthumbwhiteapron.com

    Use your stack of corks to compose a planter

    USE YOUR STACK OF CORKS TO COMPOSE A PLANTER

    Photo via: hubpages.com

    Nestle succulents in your cork planter creation

    NESTLE SUCCULENTS IN YOUR CORK PLANTER CREATION

    Photo via: beckmenvineyards.com

    Use corks to create plant vases

    USE CORKS TO CREATE PLANT VASES

    Photo via: designimprovised.com

    Dress up an ugly pot with cork

    DRESS UP AN UGLY POT WITH CORK

    Photo via: espacebuzz.com

    You can choose to use corks of the same type or to mix things up in creative compositions

    YOU CAN CHOOSE TO USE CORKS OF THE SAME TYPE OR TO MIX THINGS UP IN CREATIVE COMPOSITIONS

    Photo via: freshmom.com

    Allow your succulent PROPAGATIONs to take roots in corks

    ALLOW YOUR SUCCULENT PROPAGATIONS TO TAKE ROOTS IN CORKS

    Photo via: lonny.com

    Conceive an AESTHETICALLY PLEASANT COMPOSITION for your air plants

    CONCEIVE AN AESTHETICALLY PLEASANT COMPOSITION FOR YOUR AIR PLANTS

    Photo via: instructables.com

    Decorate the christmas dinner table with APPROPRIATE creations

    DECORATE THE CHRISTMAS DINNER TABLE WITH APPROPRIATE CREATIONS

    Photo via: curbly.com

    Remember to water rarely the succulents to prevent rotting of the roots and of the cork planter as well

    REMEMBER TO WATER RARELY THE SUCCULENTS TO PREVENT ROTTING OF THE ROOTS AND OF THE CORK PLANTER AS WELL

    Photo via: decoist.com

    Nestle several cork planters together

    NESTLE SEVERAL CORK PLANTERS TOGETHER

    Photo via: topateonyourplate.com

    Use beads to add a plus of color to your tiny cork planters

    USE BEADS TO ADD A PLUS OF COLOR TO YOUR TINY CORK PLANTERS

    Save up corks in different sizes and shapes

    SAVE UP CORKS IN DIFFERENT SIZES AND SHAPES

    Photo via: acharmingproject.com

    Plant one of a kind succulents in your tiny creations

    PLANT ONE OF A KIND SUCCULENTS IN YOUR TINY CREATIONS

    Photo via: vinepair.com

    What do you think about the creative idea of recycling corks into planters? Which one is your favorite? We invite you to share your ideas freely in the comment section below.

    Related Articles

    17 Best Self-Watering Planters

    40 Best Online Gardening Stores

    AeroGarden Bounty Reviewed

    13 Best Potting Mix For Orchids

    59 Best Vertical Gardening Ideas to Grow Right Now

    Inflatable pool volleyball nets, like the Intex Pool Volleyball Game, are generally made from top-quality materials that do not tear, ensuring you have a great time in the pool. They are available in various sizes, and will surely amplify your playing experience. 

    If you're looking for a fun, new way to exercise and rehabilitate the body, you can invest in the best pool volleyball nets for a fun workout in the pool. 

    It is a fast-paced game that's easy to set up and can keep you and your friends entertained for hours. Also, remember that the pricing for pool volleyball sets varies a lot. There are lots of options, from low-cost models to more expensive ones. 

    Let’s explore the best of them all. 

    5 Best Inflatable Pool Volleyball Net Reviews

    1. Intex Pool Volleyball Game - Editor’s Choice

    Sale
    Intex 56508EP Inflatable Floating Swimming Pool Toys...
    • Complete inflatable volleyball set for the swimming pool
    • Inflatable poles are easy to deflate and store

    Product Review

    If you are looking for an inflatable pool volleyball net that will make your kids want to enjoy more time in the pool, this option can be a great pick. 

    Because of its steady and durable build, you can keep it in the pool for long hours without having to worry that it will get damaged. It is made of 0.25 mm thick vinyl that enhances stability and provides better side support. 

    Not to mention, there are additional grommet bags and pole bases that add all the necessary weight. And to make maintenance easier for you, the manufacturer has included an inflatable volleyball and repair patch. That way, your kids can enjoy some fun swimming pool games without you having to spend a hefty amount. 

    And lastly, do not forget that it is best suited for use by children above six years of age. In case they are older, they might find the inflatable volleyball a bit too lightweight.  

    Material: Plastic/ PVC | Weight: 2.2 pounds | Size: 4 x 10 x 12 inches

    2. JOYIN Inflatable Pool Float Set - Best For Family Fun

    JOYIN Inflatable Pool Float Set Volleyball Net & Basketball...
    • SUPER VALUE. Inflatable Pool Float Set includes an...
    • REAL FUNCTION. The pool volleyball net needs to use the 2...

    Product Review

    Are you in search of the perfect inflatable pool float set? Then look no further, as we have the top suggestion for you. The package is filled with a number of pool toys that will help you successfully create an inflatable volleyball court. In the package, you will find basketball hoops, two weight bags, and an inflatable volleyball and basketball. 

    Moreover, what requires a special mention is that this pool float set covers quite a large area. We measured and gathered that the court covered around 105”x28”x35”. On the other hand, the inflatable basketball hoops measured around 27”x23”x27” approximately. 

    And when it comes to durability, this product is a great bet! The product is made of high-quality raft material and is safety test approved. The only problem that you might face when buying this item is that it does not come with a net.  

    Material: High-quality raft material | Weight: 4.77 pounds | Size: 12 x 11 x 4 inches

    3. Inflatable Pool Volleyball Game Set - Best Flexible Net Variant

    Product Review

    What makes this product stand out among its competitors is its stellar build. It is made of eco-friendly, non-toxic, sturdy PVC material. This is what makes it perfect for a summer-themed party where your kids can use it worry-free. Rest assured that even after heavy use, it will remain without scratches and easily last for a long time. 

    Furthermore, the pool floats will not give you a hard time when you set them up. There are two straps installed at two ends of the volleyball frame that let you adjust the net according to your convenience. Also, you will find two sandbag anchors in the package that helps keep the inflatable court in place. 

    Be it birthday parties or school pools - this product is ideal for all situations. It meets all necessary safety standards, and you can rest assured that your children are safe when playing with it. The only bummer is that it keeps deflating from time to time. 

    Material: Polyvinyl Chloride | Weight: 3.26 pounds | Size: 11.77 x 9.84 x 3.66 inches

    4. Sloosh Pool Floats - Best Non-Toxic Variant

    Inflatable Pool Floats Set American Flag Volleyball Net &...
    • Inflatable Pool Float Set includes an Inflatable Volleyball...
    • The Inflatable Volleyball Court measured Approximately...

    Product Review

    Sloosh Pool Floats are perfect for a day out in the pool, and both adults and kids can play with them. It comes with an inflatable volleyball court, two weight bags, and inflatable basketball hoops. That’s not all, you will find additional inflatable volleyball and basketball in the package. 

    If you are wondering about the size, let us tell you that the volleyball court measures 105 x 28 x 27 inches. Plus, the hoop stands 27 inches tall with a 23-inch diameter hoop, and it has a durable carry bag that is perfect for storage or carrying to the beach.

    That is not all; the product is made from top-quality raft material, which does not tear easily. So, you can expect the pool float to last for a long time. And it is perfect for kids and adults alike. The product meets the US child safety standards, and it is considered to be non-toxic. All kids above the age of three years can play with it. 

    The only drawback is that the packaging does not contain any instructions for setup and installation. 

    Material: High-quality raft material | Weight: 6.01 pounds | Size: 11.85 x 11.73 x 5.47 inches

    5. GoSports Splash Net Air - Best Pool Volleyball Net For Kids

    Sale
    GoSports Splash Net Air, Inflatable Pool Volleyball Game -...
    • SPLASH NET AIR: Splash into the ultimate pool day with...
    • MAKE A SPLASH: Splash Net Air is 9.5 ft wide and designed to...

    Product Review

    For enjoying a splash net sports game with the kids in the pool, there’s nothing better than this product. To ensure that kids of all ages can have fun with this, the package contains two volleyballs and not one. One is of standard size, and the other one is a large volleyball. 

    Moreover, to make it easy to inflate and deflate this item, the manufacturer has used rapid valve technology. Because of this feature, you can inflate or deflate the net ten times faster than traditional valves. So, if you are looking for a pool volleyball net that can be instantly set up, this is the one to go for!

    What requires special mention is the fact that this item is 9.5ft wide and is pretty stable. It is designed in a way that it floats in the pool without turning over. And because of its sturdy construction, you have lesser chances of tripping and falling. 

    There’s only one problem that you might encounter when using this. With heavy use, the net seems to deflate quite fast. 

    Material: Plastic | Weight: 5.9 pounds | Size: 12.83 x 11.1 x 5 inches

    Things To Look For When Purchasing Pool Volleyball Net

    1. Design

    Apart from purchasing a super value pack, it is always essential that you focus on getting an inflatable volleyball court of your choice. So, it is essential that you choose the color variant you like. Before making a pick, we suggest discussing with the kids what you should get for the house pool. 

    Most of the options that we have mentioned on our list come are available in a range of colors that you can pick from. 

    2. Pool Type

    Not every pool is the same, and you will have to select a pool net accordingly. Pool basketball or volleyball will be fun only when the volleyball net you choose is right for the kind of pool you have and if it meets the required safety standard. 

    Good news for in-ground pool owners! You have plenty of choices and can purchase any type of pool volleyball net that you want. All types of nets are compatible with these pools. 

    However, if you have an above-ground swimming pool, your options will be rather limited. For these types of pools, the only option that you have are the inflatable models. Wondering why the above-ground pools have a dearth of options when it comes to volleyball nets? Well, as the name suggests, these pools do not have a ground to which you can anchor the nets. 

    So, when you cannot fix the nets to the pool grounds, the only option that you are left with is inflatable variants. 

    3. Net Types

    Broadly water volleyball nets come in two variants- floating and fixed. While fixed nets are stuck to the pool edges permanently, floating nets are not. There’s no doubt that the advantages offered by fixed nets are noteworthy. Because the nets are fixed to the pool ground, there’s hardly any chance that the net will float away in the middle of a game. 

    However, they do have some disadvantages too. Unless you have prior experience, these nets are pretty heavy and take a bit of time to set up. So, when it comes to portability, these are not the best choices. 

    But, in this regard, floating nets are a great buy. They are lightweight and can be easily transferred from one place to another. Even for floating nets, you get two variants- inflatable and ones that are fitted-over floating devices. As mentioned earlier, the major challenge that you might face with floating nets is to keep them in place throughout the game. 

    Unless you use proper anchor sandbags, there is always a chance they will get displaced. But what makes up for this inconvenience is that you can easily carry this net around. You can carry it to your school classroom or take it on a weekend camping trip. 

    Simply put, portability, ease of installation, and pool type are some of the most important things to take into consideration when purchasing pool volleyball nets. 

    4. Pool Dimension

    Before deciding on what kind of inflatable pool volleyball net would be good for you and your kids, first measure the pool dimension. Not all the nets on the market are of the same dimensions, and you will need to read the package carefully to know the exact details. 

    Only when you know the exact pool size can you begin to hunt for the perfect volleyball net that will be compatible with the pool. 

    5. Type Of Set

    Your kid might be interested in trying a few types of water sports and not just stick with volleyball. If that is the case, you can opt for sets that offer a combination of basketball and volleyball. In case your kids enjoy both games, it is best to invest in a combination set like this. However, keep in mind that they are a bit pricey when compared to solo sets. 

    If you have a money crunch, or your kids prefer to stick to playing volleyball, simply purchase a solo swimming pool volleyball set

    Inflatable Pool Volleyball Net FAQs ?

  • How high should an average pool volleyball net be? 

    Pool volleyball nets need to be around 2.5-3 feet in height. However, if the pool has a depth of 3.5 to 4 feet, then the net needs to be at least six to seven feet high. 

  • How to play pool volleyball? 

    You will need an inflatable volleyball net to play this game. It is played in two teams, mostly comprising of one to four players. One of the teams is chosen to serve initially, and they serve for two consecutive rimes. After that, the other team that did not serve first, gets to serve twice. The game continues in this fashion. The first team that scores eleven points gets to win the match. 

  • For water volleyball, how deep should the pool be?

    There’s no direct answer to this question, as the right depth of pool for water volleyball is simply dependent on the height of the players. If your kids play this sport seriously, you should get them to the sports pool, which is mostly around 3.5-4 feet deep. 

    Some may argue that the pool is not too deep. But ideally, that should be the case. The depth should be moderate, and your kids must be able to jump up and down the water comfortably. When the water level is too deep, jumping and swimming while the game is on might get difficult for little ones. 

  • Top Inflatable Pool Volleyball Net Verdict

    When looking for the best volleyball net set for your pool, the main thing to remember is that it should be fun and durable! After all, if you're spending money on the kit, then you will want it to last at least a few years. 

    In our opinion, the Intex Pool Volleyball Game is the best on the market because it's durable and will stay in place throughout your games. Or if you want something for the entire family to enjoy, then JOYIN Inflatable Pool Float Set may be better. 

    Hope you have fun in the pool! 

    The kitchen is one of the essential rooms in the house! No home is complete without a kitchen, and no kitchen is complete without the necessary equipment.

    As times have progressed, people are looking for faster, cleaner and more efficient cooktops. Induction cookers have gained popularity in the last few years because of their efficiency and eco-friendly attributes. However, they can get a little complicated to use. So, understanding the different settings and what it takes to make it work is essential.

    That is why, we are here today with a short guide on induction cooktops that will talk about the power consumption, usage, voltage, and temperature settings. After reading this, we hope you find it easier to use and manage that new induction cooktop that’s waiting in the kitchen.

    Time is of the essence, so let’s get right to it!

    Induction Power Consumption, Usage, Voltage, Temperature Settings

    Black pan on Induction stove top panel in modern kitchen for cooking, closeup

    A lot of people prefer induction cooktops because of the variety of temperature settings they offer. Plus, shifting from one temperature to another is effortless. This is because the induction cooktop is faster and more responsive to any changes. It is also an excellent option for all those clumsy cooks that suffer a burn or two every time they cook a meal.

    Now, let’s go into a few specifics regarding these cooktops.

    Power Consumption

    In terms of power consumption, induction cooktops are known for being energy-efficient. These cooktops can also maintain the temperature that has been set more precisely than other cooktops. Additionally, a lot of high-end inductions cook food twice as fast as regular cooktops.

    When it comes to energy efficiency, nothing beats an induction cooktop. Not only are they eco-friendly, but induction cooktops also have a higher energy delivery rate of 84%, which is a lot more compared to gas and electric cooktops. A gas cooktop converts around 44% of energy and an electric cooktop can only deliver around 74%.

    Usage

    Induction cooktops really change the whole cooking experience. One of the best things about using one is that it is very responsive. So, if there is a need to change temperatures or any other setting quickly, it can be done without spoiling the food.

    Another great thing about induction cooktops is that they are safe to use around kids and pets, and are easy to clean. Since the cooktop uses electromagnetic heat and not actual fire, it will be relatively cooler than regular cooktops. Pots and pans still become hot and need to be handled with caution, but they cool down rather quickly once the cooktop is off.

    Induction cooktops usually have a very smooth surface that does not get too hot so anything that spills will not stick. This makes it easier to clean with just a wipe.

    Voltage

    Mostly all induction cooktops are compatible with a common standard voltage supply, making them easy to use in any country. Most countries have a voltage supply of 230V ± 10% and are classified as their standard supply. However, in certain countries like the US, Canada, Japan etc., the standard is 100-120 V.

    Since varying countries have varied common standard voltages, the induction cookers are rated 120V or between 200-240V, giving it more flexibility in usage.

    It will be beneficial to remember that the more burners an induction cooker has, the higher amps circuit will be required to plug it. Induction cooktops with single burners usually need a 15 amps circuit, while something a little bigger like four burners will require at least 40-50 amps.

    Temperature Settings

    The variety in temperature settings is what sets induction cooktops apart from the rest. The range of temperature is not fixed for every cooktop as it depends on the brand. However, it is vital to ensure that it meets your requirements; so, check the temperatures available before buying it.

    Usually, these cooktops offer cooking temperatures that are as high as 4,000 watts and as low as 500 watts, thereby making it easier to cater to everyone. Moreover, the fact that the temperatures can be changed at a rapid speed ensures precise cooking.

    Cookware For Induction

    This is a pressing concern for a lot of potential buyers. If someone has been using gas cooktops for a long time, they hesitate to shift to induction. After all, who wants to buy a whole new set of cookware, especially if they already have a ton of it?

    It is possible to use some of your old cookware with induction cooktops. If there are any pots and pans with magnetic bottoms, i.e., made up of steel or iron, those will work just fine. There is no need to buy new cookware unless of course, you want to!

    We recommend having a look at new cookware for the induction cooktop with an open mind. It may not be necessary to purchase, but it is quite beneficial to have. Induction cookware can also be used on gas cooktops, and in fact, will cook the food better and more evenly.

    Black pan on Induction stove top panel in modern kitchen for cooking, closeup

    Final Words

    And there you have it! That’s everything you need to know about induction cooktops to get started. We hope this short guide has made it a bit more clear and will allow you to take the first step towards using an induction cooktop.

    We shall be back soon with more such informative guides. Until then, keep cookin’!

    Related Articles

    13 Best Small & Compact Microwave 

    13 Best Gyro Cooker Machine

    Waring Pro ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop [Reviewed]

    Legendary Camp Chef Explorer 2 Stove Under the Microscope

    7 Best Two-Burner Gas Cooktop

    Laying a deck, building furniture, making a custom frame out of trim pieces, minor repairs - impact tools are perfect for all your DIY projects. 

    Whether you’re a weekend warrior or a professional woodworker, having the right tools in your toolbox will let you complete all DIY tasks quickly. While looking for the best impact tools, you must have stumbled upon impact drivers and impact wrenches. 

    So, how do you know which one to go for? Choosing the correct impact tools for your tasks is certainly a challenge. To be honest, even professionals need help at times when selecting impact tools for their workshops. 

    But, fret not! To help you decide between the two, we’ll discuss the two impact tools and their plus and minus points. Thus, you’ll be able to compare them and choose the best one for your DIY tasks and home renovations. 

    So, without further ado, let’s jump right into the deets.

    Impact Driver vs. Impact Wrench 

    Close-up of a cordless screwdriver lying on a wooden surface with a nozzle for roofing screws. Self-tapping screws painted in gray are lying nearby. Top view, flat lay

    Whether you are quick-fixing minor things in the garage or building a cabinet, impact tools are a must-have in your standard toolkit. With patience and practice, you can quickly become a pro at handling such tools.

    Once used solely by professionals and mechanics, impact drivers and wrenches have become the go-to tools for DIY enthusiasts and hobbyists. The two impact tools are highly powerful, and are identical to each other in terms of looks and functionality. Not only do they use similar rotating motions to generate force, but they also generate a lot of noise while operating. 

    However, both high-torque power tools are quite different in terms of power and the jobs they can perform. This is why you must make sure to invest in the right one for your jobs. 

    Impact Driver

    Whether you have to drill through wood, metals, or even bricks, impact drivers are perfect for all your drilling tasks. Unlike regular drills, they feature a high-torque power that allows you to drill through anything and everything. 

    Although an impact driver looks similar to a cordless drill, it is quite different in terms of functionality. The torque of impact drives generally ranges between 1500 - 1800 in. lbs. For those who don’t know yet, the torque power of the impact driver is measured in inches and pounds.

    One of the best things about the impact drivers is that they mitigate the risk of reactionary torque. This means despite the heavy torque, your wrist will not twist while drilling through surfaces. 

    Features Of Impact Driver 

    Impact drivers feature a 1/4-inch hex socket along with bits that are specifically designed to withstand the additional stress that an impact driver exerts upon it while drilling. Thus, you can use a variety of bits to drill through whatever you want. 

    Also, impact drivers feature variable speeds, making them the perfect addition to your toolkit or workshops. Whether you have to drill through tough materials or softer materials, impact drivers allow you to adjust speed according to the task at hand. 

    Impact drivers are highly versatile and can be used for a variety of projects. Have to drill long screws on wood? Impact drivers will drill them through smoothly and efficiently. So, if your next project involves building cabinets or dressing tables, use impact drivers to carry out your tasks with ease. 

    Not only for drilling screws, but you can also use them for removing screws stuck on wood, metals, or bricks. Also, if you want to remove corroded screws from outdoor fences or old cabinets, you must use impact drivers, as they are decent enough to remove rusty screws. 

    While looking for power tools for DIY tasks, most people look for compact tools because they are portable. Thus, impact drivers are compact tools that make them perfect for small garages or workshops. Also, because they are compact, you can tuck them anywhere in the garage after use. 

    What’s more, impact drivers are usually cordless, and they run on batteries. Therefore, impact drivers will be your savior for the day for workshops and sites with power shortages. 

    What Could’ve Been Better With An Impact Driver? 

    After using impact drivers for quite some time, we found that it works pretty well for hard-to-reach areas. However, we found out that they are rather noisy. Therefore make sure to use ear protection while using this tool. 

    Moreover, the impact drivers lack clutch, which is found in almost all power drills. For those who don’t know, a clutch prevents the tool from drilling after reaching a particular torque level. Therefore, the absence of a clutch means that the screw might drive deeper than you want it to. However, you can avoid this by working carefully. 



    Pros

    • Easy to fit in tight spaces
    • Significantly lighter than regular drills
    • Efficiently drills through both tough and soft surfaces
    • Flexible as you can change bits according to projects
    • Minimal kickback
    • Affordable




    Cons

    • Sometimes the screw drives deeper than you want
    • Pretty noisy
    • Isn’t compatible with the bits of regular bits



    Impact Wrench

    Impact wrenches are slightly different from impact drivers. Unlike impact drivers, they are designed for heavy-duty tasks. That’s why they are primarily found in garages and workshops. If you’re looking for a power tool that will help you in loosening and tightening lug nuts. 

    More powerful than impact drivers, the torque of impact wrenches is measured in ft. lbs. With its torque range of 150 - 1400 ft. lbs., the impact wrench definitely packs a powerful punch. That’s why you’ll find them more in the hands of a car mechanic than a DIY enthusiast. 

    Moreover, its pneumatic-powered variant is popularly used in garages, mainly because they are highly powerful and work incredibly quickly. Along with mechanics, they are used by construction workers in assembly lines. As such, they aren’t something that you can use for your average DIY renovations. 

    Features Of Impact Wrench 

    At times, lug nuts may be too tight, or a screw head might be worn away. In such situations, regular wrenches are of no use. Thus, impact wrenches are what will allow you to loosen such lug nuts with ease. 

    Featuring a square anvil, impact wrenches are compatible with sockets rather than bits. Moreover, they are available in every standard socket size. While its 1/2” drives are most common, the 3/4” and 1” drives provide the most power for industrial tasks. Its 3/4” drives work perfectly for tightening or loosening lug nuts in tight, cramped spaces. 

    Because it features a powerful motor, you can exert intense pressure to twist the lug nut in a short burst of about 5 seconds. 

    Moreover, you can loosen and tighten rusted fasteners, bolts, and lug nuts smoothly and quickly. Unlike regular drills, impact wrenches deliver high torque power that efficiently tightens and loosens nuts with minimal exertion by the user. 

    To be honest, there isn’t any lug or nut that impact wrenches cannot handle. Therefore, they aren’t suitable for your DIY home renovations but are perfect for your garage and workshops.

    The Four Variants Of Impact Wrench 

    Impact wrenches are powered in four ways. Let’s take a look at them. 

    1. Corded 

    The corded ones require an electrical outlet to function. You’ll have to plug it into an electrical outlet to carry out all your tasks. These are suitable for garages and workshops. 

    1. Cordless 

    Meanwhile, the cordless ones do not require any electrical outlet to operate. They run on batteries which require charging between the uses. Therefore, they are ideal for construction sites where electrical outlets aren’t available. 

    1. Air-Powered 

    Next, air-powered or pneumatic variants of impact wrenches remove lug nuts and bolts incredibly quickly. They are very popular among race mechanics.

    1. Hydraulic 

    Not as popular as the other three variants, the hydraulic-powered impact wrenches rely on low-pressure hydraulic power sources. In terms of performance, they are similar to the impact driver. You just have to press the trigger for the machine to begin functioning. Thus, it is user-friendly. 

    Because of their high torque power, the hydraulic-powered impact wrenches are pretty heavy. But, just like impact drivers, they are designed in a way to prevent strain on your hands. However, it features a 1/2” standard square drive rather than a hex collet. Also, don’t forget to wear ear protection to protect against any damage due to the noise.  

    What Could’ve Been Better With An Impact Wrench? 

    We have noticed that this power tool isn’t suitable for amateurs and novices because of its high torque output. Therefore, we recommend the newbies use this only under an expert’s supervision. 

    Another minor drawback is that it is pretty noisy like an impact driver. Therefore, don’t forget to put on ear protection while using this. Also, it isn’t suitable for DIY home renovations but perfect for all your garage and workshop chores. 



    Pros

    • Can loosen even the most stubborn lugs and nuts
    • Ergonomic design that doesn’t strain wrists
    • Works incredibly quickly
    • Available in 4 different varieties




    Cons

    • Unsuitable for amateurs, novices, and newbies
    • Not for DIY home renovations
    • Pretty noisy



    Impact Driver vs. Impact Wrench Differences 

    Of course, you cannot buy both impact tools. This is why we’ll be comparing the two power tools in detail. This will help you make an informed decision and choose the best one according to your projects and needs. So, let’s begin. 

    1. Driving Styles 

    The first difference that we noticed between the two tools is the driving style. Impact drivers are compatible with only 1/4-inch hex shank bits because they feature a ¼-inch hex shank. Meanwhile, impact wrenches feature square drives that are compatible only with sockets. However, some impact wrenches feature a 7/16-inch hex, which is commonly used by utility workers. 

    No matter how much the impact drivers differ in performance, shape, and styles, they all feature the same ¼-inch hex collet. Moreover, they are available in various designs. Whether a right-angle impact driver, a standard pistol grip design, or a pressure-driven palm design, you can choose anything you want. 

    On the other hand, the arena of impact wrench is broader than that of the impact driver. The impact wrench offers endless varieties of models. Whether you are looking for a 1/4-inch impact wrench or the one featuring a 3/8-inch, the impact wrench has it all. 

    However, the most popular impact wrench available on the market features a 1/2-inch drive size. You’ll come across this variant of an impact wrench in almost every woodworker’s workshop. 

    Alternatively, when you’re looking for high torque output impact wrenches, the one featuring 1 inch and ¾-inch drives is the one you must opt for. These are perfect for all your heavy-duty tasks. 

    Moreover, when looking for impact wrenches on the market, we recommend looking only for the mid-torque and the high-torque because they will be ideal for all your tasks. If you’re a professional constructor or a DIY warrior, we suggest going for a small, compact impact wrench featuring mid-torque power. It will let you complete all your tasks smoothly and efficiently. 

    From pistol-grip style, ratchet-style, to utility impact wrench featuring a 7/16-inch hex collet, the impact wrench is available in a variety of styles on the market. You can choose the best one based on the nature of your tasks. 

    1. Usage 

    After discussing the driving style, let’s move to the usage of both the impact tools. Now, before choosing any tool, you must know what they are designed for and whether they are suitable for your needs or not. That’s why keep in mind the nature of your task. 

    An impact driver is used to drive screws into the surface. Therefore, they’ll be perfect for use with fasteners that need driver bits. Moreover, just by changing the bits, you can use them for drilling. 

    On the other hand, the impact wrench is ideal for hex-head fasteners. As such, they are perfect for loosening and tightening lug nuts, bolts, and rusted fasteners. Moreover, they are compatible with sockets rather than bits.

    That’s not it! The driving styles are highly flexible, and you can customize them to meet your requirements. You can turn your impact driver into a mini impact wrench by simply adding nut driver bits along with socket adapters. Now, you can simply go about handling hex head fasteners. 

    Moreover, there are impact socket adapters that allow you to join 1/4-inch bits to impact wrenches. However, you must keep in mind that this will limit the versatility of your tools. Therefore, you should buy the appropriate tool, albeit you can use these hacks when in a hurry. 

    1. Power 

    When it comes to power, there isn’t much difference between the two impact tools. 

    Impact drivers are found in two variants: corded and cordless. These are most commonly used by professional constructors and woodworkers. The cordless models feature max batteries of 12v, 18v, and 20v. 

    As they run on batteries and don’t require electrical outlets for operation, you can easily use them on job sites that suffer from power shortages. Plus, they are portable, so you can carry them from your garage or workshop to anywhere and work conveniently. Thus, they are ideal for workshops and garages. 

    Moreover, the corded ones are rarely found on the market. They are also available in different volts. However, the main issue with corded variants is that it only operates on electrical outlets sites. 

    Unfortunately, not all job sites have electrical outlets. Thus, it is of no use on such sites. We recommend opting for cordless ones to carry out all your tasks smoothly and efficiently. 

    Similar to impact drivers, an impact wrench has both corded and cordless variants. Along with that, they are also available in air-powered (pneumatic) and hydraulic variants. Cordless variants of impact wrench are popular among DIYers and enthusiasts, while experts, professionals, and woodworkers use the pneumatic variants.

    Unlike impact drivers, the corded impact wrenches are the best because impact wrenches are known best for their tremendous torque. However, no cordless impact wrench can generate torque as high as a corded one. Corded impact wrenches are excellent for all your heavy-duty tasks, while cordless ones are perfect for light tasks.

    Compared to the standard impact wrench, pneumatic ones are slightly less expensive. However, if you don’t have an air compressor, you’ll have to invest in one. All in all, the pneumatic impact wrench is best suited for garage and workshop owners.

    1. Torque 

    In terms of torque, the impact wrench edges over the impact driver. With its torque range of 150 - 1400 ft. lbs., you can fasten and loosen bolts, lug nuts, or rusted fasteners in a breeze. Meanwhile, some impact drivers have proven to be more powerful than impact wrenches. 

    As already stated, the torque of an impact driver is measured in inch-pounds as against the feet-pounds of impact wrenches. We found some impact drivers delivered more than 2000 in-lbs (165 ft-lbs), which is excellent. As such, this makes it perfect for your garage and workshops. 

    On the other hand, the impact wrenches are packed with high torque of around 200 ft-lbs. It is because of this aspect that you can change car tires easily. Moreover, impact wrenches with a torque output of about 400 ft-lbs are perfect for all your garage activities. 

    1. Speed Range 

    When it comes to speed, impact driver edges over impact wrenches. We tested a few impact drivers and found that their maximum speed exceeded 3600 RPM, which is pretty great. In contrast, the speed of some outstanding impact wrenches was just 2000 RPM. 

    But, the narrative changes when you throw in the pneumatic variant. The pneumatic impact wrench beats the impact driver with speed over 8000 RPM. Put simply, the impact drivers are faster than the impact wrenches but definitely slower when the pneumatic impact wrenches walk in. 

    1. Size 

    Mostly, impact drivers and impact wrenches are similar in size. This is because both the impact tools are built on similar foundations. However, to be precise, impact drivers are much more compact and lightweight than impact wrenches. Of course, the pneumatic variants are an exception.

    When it comes to impact wrenches, their weight and size depend upon their power levels. You can also estimate the weight of the impact wrenches by the size of the drive. 

    Having said that, the compact models feature 1/4-inch drivers while the high-torque and mid-torque impact wrenches feature 1/2-inch drivers. On the contrary, 3/4-inch and 1-inch drives are featured on the larger models. 

    Safety Measures Using Impact Driver And Impact Wrench 

    Using power tools is no child’s play. Hands down, both the impact tools are handy tools designed to ease complex tasks of drilling and fastening or loosening lug nuts. 

    No doubt, power tools save a lot of your time and effort. However, you must always take safety measures while using them. Otherwise, you can fall into a dungeon of mishaps that can lead to life-long sorrow. Also, if you’re a novice or a newbie, make sure you use power tools under guidance. 

    In this section, we’ve laid down a few safety measures that you must follow while using the impact tools. So, let’s dive in to see the safety measures.

    1. Go Through The Instruction Manual Carefully 

    All power tools come with a detailed instruction booklet. And the impact drivers and impact wrenches are no exception. The instruction booklet is specifically included to provide the users with all the necessary information on the device, its safety, and maintenance. 

    Before starting with your tasks, go through the user’s guide. You’ll get all the necessary information such as installing the device, turning on/off your device, on the user’s guide. 

    1. Declutter Your Workspace 

    Remember, you’re dealing with power tools, and honestly, they are pretty unforgiving. This is why you must clean and declutter your workspace to avoid any trips, slips, or falls while using the impact tools. 

    1. Wear Protective Gear 

    Protective gears are a must while handling power tools. Therefore, you will have to wear safety glasses, nitrile gloves, a protective shield, and headgear. However, you may skip this if you’re doing some quick-fix repairing and renovations, but make sure to wear them for all other heavy-duty tasks. 

    Moreover, protecting your eyes is always a priority. Therefore, we recommend wearing them every time you work with the impact tools.

    1. Maintain Your Impact Tools Properly 

    Although it might seem to be tedious, maintaining your impact tools is necessary. Not only will it make your tools more efficient, but maintenance will also enhance their longevity. Here are some things you can do weekly to maintain your tools.

      • Regular performance checkup
      • Ensure all the nuts and screws of the tools are securely attached
      • Grease the bits and sockets
      • Replace all the broken and worn out parts
      • Clean all dust and debris from the tool
    1. Unplug The Tools When Not In Use 

    No matter which impact tool you’re using, make sure you always unplug it after use. Also, you should never change the bits of sockets while the plug is on because if accidentally turned on, it might lead to dangerous accidents.

    man assembling white table furniture at home using cordless screwdriver

    Impact Driver vs. Impact Wrench Buying Guide 

    While knowing the two impact tools helps a lot, choosing the correct one still remains a challenge. There are certain factors that you must look out for before picking one for your projects. 

    To make things easy-peasy, we’ve discussed all the important factors in this section. Take a look. 

    1. Brand 

    Impact tools are a one-time investment. You buy them once and enjoy their life-long services. Therefore, we suggest you only go for a well-known brand because they manufacture top-notch quality tools. Moreover, they also offer excellent customer services along with years of warranty. 

    Although buying from a well-known brand might cost you a few bucks more, it will be worth the investment. Hence, it is better not to compromise on the quality when it comes to buying impact tools. 

    1. Accessories

    While buying either the impact wrench or impact driver, you must always consider what accessories the package contains. This is because accessories are very important when it comes to impact tools. 

    If you don’t get complete accessories while purchasing, you’ll have to spend a little more later. Thus, you can avoid this by buying a complete kit. Batteries, bags, extra bits, sockets - make sure you get a complete kit to avoid spending any money in the future.

    1. Battery

    Those going for corded models might skip this, but it is of utmost importance if you’re going for a cordless model. Check how much time the batteries will take to charge completely because you wouldn’t want to go for an impact tool that will take a whole day to charge but drain only in a few hours. 

    Moreover, make sure you check the batteries included in the package. Ideally, an impact tools package consists of two batteries. So, make sure they are there. 

    1. Weight

    Not to forget, weight is of utmost importance. Before buying any impact tool, make sure you consider the weight of the tool, especially if you’ll be using it frequently. For DIYers, enthusiasts, and hobbyists, a lightweight impact tool would be perfect. Therefore, go for only the one that’s significantly lighter in weight to avoid straining your hands. 

    Meanwhile, heavy-duty tasks call for powerful motors. Those featuring a sturdy and powerful motor will be significantly heavy. Therefore, heavy machines would be ideal for workshops and garages. 

    1. Technology

    There are quite a number of brands out there that use modern technology to design their tools. Therefore, you can go for them to make your tasks easy. If you’re going for an impact driver, we suggest you go for the one with an LED lighting system. This will allow you to drill through materials even in the darkest room or job site, without any difficulty, 

    However, there are also tools featuring Bluetooth connectivity or built-in apps to track the performance of your tool. You can get an impact tool loaded with such features by paying a few bucks more. It will ensure your tasks are all the more fun and enjoyable. 

    1. Safety Features

    While choosing an impact tool, you must remember that dealing with them is not child’s play. Therefore, safety is very important. There are tools out there that offer more safety than others. Hence, you must only go for the ones that offer more safety features to ensure your safety. 

    We recommend you go for tools offering automatic cut-off or shut-off options in case the tools get hot or once the battery is fully charged. Also, tools that prevent dust from getting into the mechanisms would be a great option. This will ensure your tools last for years to come. 

    Impact Driver vs. Impact Wrench FAQ

        Q1. Are Regular Drill Bits Compatible With Impact Drivers?

    No, the regular drill bits do not go along well with impact drivers. You’ll have to buy bits specifically designed for use with impact drivers.

        Q2. Can Impact Drivers Remove Lug Nuts?

    Although you can use impact drivers to remove lug nuts, we recommend you avoid using them. It’s better you use impact wrenches for removing and fastening lug nuts.

         Q3. Are Electric Wrenches Better Than Air-Powered Impact Wrenches?

    If you’re looking for impact wrenches for your garage or workshops, air-powered impact wrenches are any day the best bet. They are highly powerful and last longer than other impact wrenches. But, they come with an expensive price tag.

    Meanwhile, if you don’t deal with cars and are looking for an impact wrench for other tasks, the electric impact wrench is sufficient for all your needs. Therefore, it depends on the nature of your task and use.

         Q4. How Long Do Impact Wrenches Last?

    To be honest, impact wrenches last for quite a long time. However, maintaining them frequently, taking good care of them, and handling them properly will enhance the longevity of the impact wrenches. Thus, it all depends on how you take care of them.

         Q5. Do Impact Drivers Wear Out?

    Not only impact drivers, but all power tools will wear out if you overuse them and do not take care of them. However, impact drivers are pretty tough, and so they won’t wear quickly. We recommend you read the instruction booklet carefully and follow the maintenance tips to ensure you don’t run into any problems.

    Screwing a self-tapping screw into a metal fastening hole on a wood strip using a screwdriver, the work of a carpenter.

    Summing It Up 

    In a nutshell, impact driver and impact wrench are perfect power tools for all your DIY tasks and home renovation projects. Whether you are a garage owner or a hobbyist who loves to build furniture, impact tools are a must-have in your toolkit. 

    Overall, if you’re building a wooden cabinet or completing your DIY project, an impact driver will be an excellent choice for all DIY and renovation projects. 

    Meanwhile, if you frequently tinker with cars in your garage or work on construction sites, the impact wrench is perfect for all heavy-duty tasks. Hopefully, after reading this guide, you’ll be able to pick the correct impact tool for your tasks.

    But if you ask us our opinion, an impact driver is a much wiser choice for all your DIY tasks, compared to the impact wrench. With that, we shall take your leave. 

    That’s all for today, folks. Take care!

    Related Articles

    Black Oxide Vs. Titanium Drill Bits | A Clear Winner?

    DEWALT DCD777C2 Review | How Good Is It Really?

    13 Best Brushless Impact Drivers 

    11 Best Magnetic Bit Holder

    Cobalt vs. Titanium Drill Bits

    Tekton Tools Review | Craftsman vs Husky vs Tekton vs Gearwrench

    10 Best Torque Wrench Brands

    10 Best Air Compressors For Impact Wrenches

    11 Best Torque Wrenches on the Market Today

    11 Best Impact Socket Sets

    Kobalt vs. Husky vs. Craftsman | Husky Tools Reviews

    Nobody likes soggy food and meltwater greeting them every time they open an ice-cooled box. It is time for a solution. 

    With the all-new Igloo Iceless Thermoelectric Cooler, you do not have to worry about ice or meltwater anymore. It uses electricity to cool drinks and snacks, so you need not use ice or cooling gel at all. This makes the product light and provides more space for you to keep drinks inside. 

    Although this product has a few faults, it will ensure that you have a smooth experience wherever you go in a car or an RV. Without further delay, let us get into the details so that you can understand why we like it. 

    Read our Igloo Iceless Thermoelectric Cooler review today, and get ready to hit the road with your favorite drinks! 

    Igloo Iceless Thermoelectric Cooler Review

    Sale
    Igloo Thermoelectric Iceless 28-40 Qt Electric Plug-in 12V...
    • Swing-up bale handle with comfort grip for easy carrying
    • Molded-in side handles for two handed carrying or lifting....

    Why Buy This Product?

    We have listed the top features of this product in the section below. Read on to know all about them. 

    1. Storage Space

    The best part about this cooler is that there is a lot of storage space even though the body is compact. This is because no space is taken up by ice, and the entire space can be used to store drinks.

    Plus, the body is light, and you can keep a number of cans at once. The 26-quart product can hold 32 cans of 12 ounces each. You can keep 26 - 28 quarts of fluids and snacks inside without worrying about space. That will be sufficient for 2-3 people on a hot day. 

    1. Weight

    The cooler weighs 9-10 lbs. in general, and that is pretty light, according to us. Now, this is the weight when it is empty; you can expect it to be a lot heavier when you fill it up with drinks and snacks. 

    To help you carry it around, there is a swing-up handle. This, along with a curved design, makes it easier to carry single handedly. 

    In case there are a lot of snacks inside, the handle is long enough for 2 people to hold it at one time. 

    Plus, the body is compact, and you can keep it in between both the front seats in a car. Portability is not an issue at all, and you can enjoy your chilled drinks on a hot spring afternoon in the wild. 

    1. Cooling

    This product will help you keep your drinks at 36 degrees Fahrenheit lower than the outside ambient temperature. This means that you can use it easily in a place with temperature less than 90 degrees Fahrenheit, and the drinks will stay perfectly chilled. 

    Now there could be a few problems in case the area is very hot. This is because the drinks will only be cool and not completely chilled. For example, if the temperature is 100 degrees Fahrenheit, then your drinks will be kept at 64 degrees Fahrenheit. 

    So, yes the drinks will be a lot cooler but may not be chilled. This should not be an issue for anything other than ice creams. 

    1. Power

    This product comes with an 8-foot long power cord that can be attached to a portable generator or a car. If you are using a portable generator, connect it to the DC outlet, and it will keep your drinks cool. 

    But remember that if you are attaching it to your car with the engine turned off, turn on the engine after 2 hours. This will ensure that the battery is not drained completely. 

    On the other hand, it is possible to power it in a hotel room or your home via an AC outlet. In this case, you will have to purchase an AC power convertor from the company. This is not very expensive but purchase it depending on your needs. 

    1. Purpose

    If you plan to buy a cooler for a family of 3-4 people who will be accompanying you on road trips, then this is the perfect option. It will meet the needs of everyone and can hold a number of juice and beer bottles at the same time. 

    We took it as a personal cooling device on long trips, and it ensured that we had a chilled drink at all points in time. 

    1. Price

    Although this is not a cheap product that is priced very less, it provides value for money. It does not need any ice in the long-run, and you save a lot of money buying packets of ice every time. If you go on long trips often, this will indeed be a cost-effective option for the years to come. 

    Plus, you can always keep this product plugged in without needing to stop for purchasing ice. We were very happy with this factor as it saved us time while on the trip. 

    1. Size

    There are 2 sizes of this same product available, and you can make a choice based on the number of people in your family. If you have 1-2 people, then the 26-quart option is perfect, and it will provide ample space to keep all your drinks and snacks.

    On the other hand, for a larger family or a group of friends, the 28-quart one would be a great option. It is a bit larger and will hold your drinks well. 

    1. Efficiency

    One of the major reasons why we prefer this over standard ice coolers is the absence of melted water. Ice keeps melting over time, and the water often gets into food packaging. This might not only destroy the food but may also make the ice chamber smell. 

    But the Igloo iceless thermoelectric cooler will provide you with a safe space to store your food without any ice. Just plug it in, and your drinks will stay cool even at high temperatures. 

    What Could’ve Been Better?

    Iceboxes have often been used as a seat for kids when on a picnic. However, this product cannot be used as a seat at all. Be very careful as the entire mechanism can be destroyed even if some amount of weight is placed on the lid. 

    But remember that the structure is pretty sturdy in general. It is just that the cooling mechanism is placed right inside the lid, and there are perforated vents on top and below. If you sit on this box, then the plastic of the vents will touch its fan, and that will immediately make it malfunction. 

    So, if you have pets or kids, keep them away from this cooler. Place it at a height, and that should ensure that your toddlers will not reach it at all. 



    Pros

    • Compact and portable body
    • Easy to maintain
    • Consumes less power
    • Plenty of storage space




    Cons

    • Cannot be used as a seat



    Igloo Iceless Cooler Buyer’s Guide

    When purchasing a cooler, you need to keep certain points in mind. This will help you make the right choice without regretting later. In this section, we have listed them down in detail. 

    1. Size

    We believe that size is a major factor while selecting a cooler. You would not want to be stuck with a bulky option when you just need it for a few drinks for the ride. 

    The cooler should be sufficient enough for you to keep your drinks but should not offer extra space as that will add to the weight and size. Since these are generally made for traveling purposes, you would not want to carry extra weight.

    So, first, decide on the number of people and snacks that you need to carry and then decide upon the size. 

    1. Weight

    Check how much the cooler weighs without anything in it. It should be light and easy to carry by itself. If you opt for a bulky product, then it might become very difficult to lift with drinks in it. We will always recommend getting a light item and then filling it up. 

    Also, check if there is a handle on top. The handle should be able to take the weight, and you should be able to carry it around easily. We would suggest looking for long handles which can be held by 2 people in case the box becomes very heavy. 

    1. Cord Size

    We will recommend purchasing a product that comes with a long cord. This will help you while charging as the power outlet could be far from the ground. You do not want to be carrying an extension cord on trips, and hence this is necessary. 

    Also, coolers will mostly connect to a DC outlet, but you can connect them to an AC outlet, too, with a convertor. So, purchase a converter along with the product if you are going to charge it through an AC outlet.

    Igloo Iceless Verdict

    Although the cooler works very well, it may not be suitable for very hot places. The drinks will then be cool and not chilled. But despite these minor drawbacks, this is a very cost-effective option that offers value. 

    Plus, it is compact and easy to take around. It will fit into any car, and you can have it plugged in to ensure chilled drinks throughout the ride. This is the best personal cooler option in our opinion, and it has indeed touched the adventure spirits in us. 

    Having said that, we will now take your leave, while you get ready for the next outdoor adventure!

    Related Articles

    11 Best Outdoor Patio Coolers

    When it comes to design, the feminine side is usually the one that tackles the issue, adding soft delicate touches to a home. Creating a masculine bathroom or adding bold touches to one to make it more male gender friendly is quite easy though. Colors and tones play a crucial role, alongside materials and accessories. Bold darker tones are often used, all complemented and toned down with accents of warm wood to soften the rough edges. Geometric furniture designs will take the place of organic, baroque pieces whilst neutral shower curtains will replace floral choices.Add industrial decorations such as a rusty old lighting fixture and choose dark faucets for a strong contrast. Dark blues, grays, bold green, concrete, metal, all come together and merge into elegant yet edgy designs. Get inspired from our choices below and learn how to create a masculine bathroom.

    How To Create A Masculine Bathroom

    1. industrial insertions will add an edgy touch to your bathroom design

    Use a bold unusual color of sink and a color neutral tone for the walls, all complemented and toned with the warm hues of the wood counter.

    1. industrial insertions will add an edgy touch to your bathroom design

     Marika Jarv Creative. Photography by Matt Russell.

    2. black and white bathroom accessories used in a blank white background

    Notice how the recycled wood door balances the color scheme.

    2. black and white bathroom accessories used in a blank white background

    Aamodt/Plumb. Photography by Casey Dunn.

    3. navy blue hues and dark wooden tones are a masculine approach

    A light floor will add the needed contrast. Add a dark faucet for an unusual twist.

    3. navy blue hues and dark wooden tones are a masculine approach

    CB2

    4. opt for a blue-grey shower curtain with a manly design

    It can be used as the focus colorful piece in a neutral toned bathroom.

    4. opt for a blue-grey shower curtain with a manly design

    CB2

    5. dark toned bathroom accessories should be present

    5. dark toned bathroom accessories should be present

    1120 Ceramics Studio.

    6. Find a shower head that has storage incorporated

    6. Find a shower head that has storage incorporated

    Anthony Keeler for Umbra.

    7. use a neutral colored shower curtain that can make the entire bathroom neutral

    7. use a neutral colored shower curtain that can make the entire bathroom neutral

    Bed Bath & Beyond

    8. allow a sculptural item to breathe and flow

    8. allow a sculptural item to breathe and flow

    IKEA

    9. add an entire range of bathroom accessories with a manly bold design

    9. add an entire range of bathroom accessories with a manly bold design

    CB2

    10. an unique controversial design piece to hold the towels

    10. an unique controversial design piece to hold the towels

    Thelermont Hupton. Available at made in design.

    11. the simplest most geometric metallic ladder can serve as a towel holder

    11. the simplest most geometric metallic ladder can serve as a towel holder

    Sonadora In Love.

    12. plants can be present in a masculine bathroom but in a certain context

    12. plants can be present in a masculine bathroom but in a certain context

    Sarah Sherman Samuel.

    13. find a spot for his products

    13. find a spot for his products

     Elisabeth Heier

    14. you could add inspirational messages and geometrical art

    14. you could add inspirational messages and geometrical art

    Live Love Studio.

    Tips On How To Create A Masculine Bathroom-homesthetics (16)

    Splendiday.

    Tips On How To Create A Masculine Bathroom-homesthetics (1)

    Digital Art Printables.

    How would you add masculine touches to a bathroom? Feel free to share your thoughts in the comment section below.

    Related Articles

    13 Best Paints for Bathroom Ceilings

    99 Super Cool Shower Curtains to Transform Your Bathroom  

    111 World's Best Bathroom Color Schemes For Your Home